100% found this document useful (1 vote)

1K views360 pages

Mathematics: Foundation & Olympiad

Uploaded by

vidhi ardeshna

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

1K views360 pages

Mathematics: Foundation & Olympiad

Uploaded by

vidhi ardeshna

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 360

FOUNDATION & OLYMPIAD

CLASS - VIII

MATHEMATICS
Published by :

Resonance Eduventures Limited

Address : Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52,

IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
E-mail : pccp@resonance.ac.in
Website : www.pccp.resonance.ac.in

© Resonance Eduventures Limited

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
All right reserved. Any photocopying, publishing or
reproduction of full or any part of this study material
is strictly prohibited. This material belongs to only
the enrolled student of RESONANCE. Any sale/resale
of this material is punishable under law.

Disclaimer

Every care has been taken by the compilers and publishers to give correct, complete and updated
information. In case there is any omission, printing mistake or any other error which might have
crept in inadvertently, neither the compiler / publisher nor any of the distributors take any legal
responsibility.
PREFACE
Dear Student,

Nothing glitters like success.In today's highly competitive world, a student has to withstand immense
pressure in order to succeed. Students aspire to get through various competitive exam to get the
exposure at National and International platforms. Also to prepare for your career goals, you will be
appearing for various prestigious exams and compete with the country's brilliant minds for limited
coveted seats. Students with thorough understanding of the fundamental concepts and logical
problem solving skills are able to succeed in that. Now to select an appropriate career path for your
future endeavor, a conceptual & systematically designed study material is required to be in the
competitive race.

The material we have prepared is not the effort of a single person. It is in fact, written and designed
by a well-qualified faculty team of Resonance Pre-foundation Division. I am sure that this material is
best in its segment as our faculty team cover all important realms of the related topic followed by a
set of extremely good questions of different level. It will not only cater the need of students in school
exams but also prepare you to appear in any of the competitive exam at any level. In next page, you
will find a note 'How to use this book'. Kindly go through that content as it will help you to optimize
the results. With a quote mentioned below, I wish all the students a great journey ahead.

"You have to dream before your dreams come true"

How to use this book?
An Important Note to Parents and Students

Dear Student,

If you are reading this, it means you are serious about performing in your class. To help you achieve
your potential, this book is designed in a way which is highly beneficial to students. Let's see how to
use different components of the book:

 Theory Part : The theory part has been redesigned with perfect blend of pictures, text and
important notes. At relevant checkpoints, in theory exercises have been inserted to enhance the
reading experience of a student. At the end of each chapter, a concept map has been inserted
which acts as a one page pictorial summary of the whole chapter.

 Exercise 1 : This exercise serves a dual purpose. It is both Concept Building Exercise (CBE) and
School Examination Preparatory(SEP) Exercise. The questions in this exercise are simple and
direct application of the theory which is being covered in the chapter. This helps student in
absorbing the concepts included in the chapter (hence the name). The question patterns which are
covered in this exercise are according to the patterns being asked in school examinations which
give student an edge in the practice of school examinations. The important point is that the
homework of this exercise should be neatly maintained in a separate copy.

 Exercise 2 : This exercise is Competitive Level Exercise (CLE). After attempting exercise 1 and
thus absorbing the important concepts, students are ready to implement their learning in slightly
higher level questions. These questions are in accordance to the level being asked in the National
Level Competitive Examinations. These questions are must for all the students to strengthen their
concepts.

 Exercise 3 : This exercise consists of questions from previous year papers of competitive
examinations. This exercise is included for students to determine their current proficiency level of
that chapter with respect to the competitive examination.
After reading the theory and completing the exercises, a student should be able to have a
conceptual framework and problem solving aptitude in that particular chapter. For best results, all
exercises should be solved in a fair notebook and all the solutions should be maintained so that
when time of revision comes, this notebook proves to be a handy one.
I would like to request parents to regularly check the homework of student. You don't have to check
the full copy. Just check that the solutions of all questions are maintained or not. This simple
monitoring serves the dual purpose. First, your child thinks that his/ her education is important for
you which is why you are taking time to check his homework. Second, he/ she regularly completes
the homework.
In the end, I hope you like this book and sincerely believe that by collective efforts of student, parent
and teacher, we can produce maximum results from this book.
CONTENTS
TOPIC PAGE NO.

1. RATIONAL NUMBERS 1-27

1.1 Rational numbers 01
1.2 Operations on rational numbers 07
Exercise -1 18
Exercise -2 22
Exercise -3 23
Answer key 26
2. SQUARES AND SQUARE ROOTS 28-53
2.1 Squares 28
2.2 Square roots 35
Exercise -1 45
Exercise -2 49
Exercise -3 50
Answer key 52
3. CUBES AND CUBES ROOTS 54-73
3.1 Cubes 54
3.2 Cube roots 57
Exercise -1 66
Exercise -2 70
Exercise -3 71
Answer key 72
4. LINEAR EQUATION IN ONE VARIABLE 74-89
4.1 Linear equation in one variable 74
4.2 Word problems 77
Exercise -1 82
Exercise -2 85
Exercise -3 86
Answer key 89
5. QUADRILATERALS 90-116
5.1 Quadrilateral 90
5.2 Properties of various special types of quadrilaterals 92
Exercise -1 107
Exercise -2 110
Exercise -3 112
Answer key 115
6. CONSTRUCTION 117-129
6.1 Construction of quadrilaterals 117
Exercise -1 126
Exercise -2 127
Exercise -3 128
Answer key 129
7. PLAYING WITH NUMBERS 130-144
7.1 Playing with numbers 130
Exercise -1 137
Exercise -2 140
Exercise -3 141
Answer key 143
8. ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS 145-160
8.1 Various definitions & concepts 145
8.2 Operations 147
Exercise -1 154
Exercise -2 156
Exercise -3 157
Answer key 159
9. ALGEBRAIC IDENTITIES 161-176
9.1 Algebraic identities 161
9.2 Factorisation 164
Exercise -1 170
Exercise -2 173
Exercise -3 174
Answer key 175
10. EXPONENTS AND POWERS 177-191
10.1 Exponents and powers 177
Exercise -1 184
Exercise -2 187
Exercise -3 188
Answer key 190
11. PERCENTAGE AND ITS APPLICATIONS 192-214
11.1 Percentage 192
11.2 Profit, loss and discount 195
Exercise -1 206
Exercise -2 209
Exercise -3 210
Answer key 213
12. COMPOUND INTEREST 215-233
12.1 Compound interest 215
Exercise -1 225
Exercise -2 228
Exercise -3 229
Answer key 232
13. DIRECT AND INVERSE VARIATIONS 234-251
13.1 Direct variation & inverse variation 234
Exercise -1 244
Exercise -2 247
Exercise -3 248
Answer key 251
14. VISUALISING SOLID SHAPES 252-268
14.1 Visualising solid shapes 252
Exercise -1 261
Exercise -2 263
Exercise -3 265
Answer key 267
15. MENSURATION 269-299
15.1 Plane figures 269
15.2 Solid figures 276
Exercise -1 287
Exercise -2 292
Exercise -3 293
Answer key 298
16. INTRODUCTION TO GRAPH 300-316
16.1 Introduction to graphs 300
Exercise -1 309
Exercise -2 312
Exercise -3 313
Answer key 315
17. DATA HANDLING 316-341
17.1 Tabular and graphical representation of data 316
Exercise -1 329
Exercise -2 334
Exercise -3 336
Answer key 340
18. PROBABILITY 342-353
18.1 Probability 342
Exercise -1 347
Exercise -2 350
Exercise -3 351
Answer key 353
RATIONAL NUMBERS

01
CHAPTER

RATIONAL NUMBERS
TERMINOLOGIES

Real Numbers, Composite Numbers, Natural Numbers, Whole Numbers, Integers,

Prime numbers, Rational numbers, terminating, non–terminating and repeating,
recurrring decimal, decimal represenetation, lowest form, number line, absolute
value, HCF, LCM, ascending, descending, closure, commutative, associative,
additive identity, additive inverse, multiplicative identity, multiplicative inverse,
distributive law, division algorithm, dividend, divisor, quotient, remainder.

INTRODUCTION
We will discuss rational numbers, their representation on the number line, various
operations on rational numbers and insertion of rational numbers between given rational
numbers.

1.1 RATIONAL NUMBERS

Numbers are basically of 2 types : Real numbers & Imaginary numbers.
Numbers

Real numbers Imaginary numbers

Rational numbers Irrational numbers

(a) Real Numbers
These are the numbers which can represent actual physical quantities in a meaningful way.
These can be represented on the number line. Number line is geometrical straight line with
arbitrarily defined zero (origin).
(b) Natural numbers
Counting numbers are known as natural numbers. N = { 1, 2, 3, 4, ... }.
(c) Whole numbers
All natural numbers together with 0 form the collection of all whole numbers.
W = { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, ... }.
(d) Prime Numbers
All natural numbers that have one & itself as their only two distinct factors are prime
numbers i.e. prime numbers are exactly divisible by 1 and themselves. For example : 2,
3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23, etc...
(e) Composite number
All natural numbers except 1, which are not prime are composite numbers.
For example :. 4, 6, 9, 10 etc
 REMARK : 1 is neither prime nor composite number.

(f) Integers
All natural numbers, 0 and negative of natural numbers form the collection of all integers.
I or Z = { ..., –3, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2, 3, ... }.
Identification of Prime Number
Step (i) : Find approximate square root of given number.
Step (ii) : Divide the given number by prime numbers less than approximate square root of
number. If given number is not divisible by any of these prime numbers then the number is
prime otherwise not.
Illustration 1.1
571 a prime number ?
Sol. Approximate square root = 24.
Prime number < 24 are 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19 & 23.
But 571 is not divisible by any of these prime numbers. So, 571 is a prime number.
(g) Rational Numbers
p
Numbers that can be expressed in the form , where q is a non–zero integer and p is any
q
integer are called rational numbers.
2 5 11 7
Each of the numbers , , , is a rational number.
3 7 5 9
p
(i) Definition : Numbers that can be expressed in the form , where q is a non–zero
q
integer and p is any integer are called rational numbers.
2 5 11 7
Each of the numbers , , , is a rational number.
3 7 5 9
p
(ii) Positive Rational Number : A rational numbers is positive, if p and q are either
q
2 5 7 3
both positive or both negative. Each of the rational numbers , , , is a
3 9 12 11
positive rational number.

p
(iii) Negative Rational Number : A rational number is negative, if p and q are of
q
opposite signs.
3 5 15
, ,
7 9 26

(iv) Decimal representation of rational numbers

• Terminating decimals : Let x be a rational number whose decimal expansion
p
terminates. Then x can be expressed in the form of and prime factorization of q is of the
q
form 2m × 5n, where m, n are non negative integers.

1 3
For example : = 0.5, = 0.15 etc.
2 20
p
• Non terminating and Repeating ( recurring decimal ) :– Let x = be a rational
q
number, such that the prime factorization of q is not of the form 2m × 5n, where m, n are
2 5
non negative integers. For example = 0.6666..... = 0.6 , = 0.4545.... = 0.45
3 11
(v) Lowest Form of a Rational number

p
Definition : A rational number is said to be in the lowest form or simplest form if p and q
q
have no common factor other than 1.

Every rational number can be put in the lowest form using the following steps :
p
Step I : Obtain the rational number .
q
Step II : Find the HCF of p and q say m.

p
Step III : If m = 1, then is in lowest form.
q

pm p
Step IV : If m 1, then is the lowest form of
qm q
Illustration 1.2
Express each of the following rational numbers to the lowest form.
12 60
(i) (ii)
16 72
Sol. (i) We have,
12 = 2 × 2 × 3 and 16 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2
  HCF of 12 and 16 is 2 × 2 = 4.
12
So, is not in lowest form.
16
Dividing numerator and denominator by 4, we have
12 12  4 3
= =
16 16  4 4
  is the lowest form.
(ii) We have
60 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 5 and 72 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 3
  HCF of 60 and 72 is 2 × 2 × 3 = 12.
Dividing numerator and denominator by 12.
60 5
  = .
72 6

NOTE:
(i) Two rational numbers are equal, if they have the same standard form.
x x xm
(ii) If is a rational number and m is any non–zero integer, then = .
y y y m
3 3  4 12
For example : = = .
8 8  4 32
x xm
(iii) If is a rational number and m is a common divisor of x and y, then =
y y m
27 ( 27)  3 9 ( 9)  3 3
For example : = = = = .
45 45  3 15 15  3 5

(vi) Representation of a rational number on a real number line : Draw any line. Take a
point 0 on it. Call it 0 (zero). Set off equal distances on the right as well as on the left of 0.
Such a distance is known as a unit length. Clearly, the points A, B, C, D, E represent the
integers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 respectively and the points A', B', C', D', E', represent the integers – 1,
– 2, – 3, – 4, – 5 respectively.
E' D' C' B' A' O A B C D E
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
Thus, we may represent any integer by a point on the number line. Clearly, every positive
integer lies to the right of 0 and every negative integer lies to the left of 0. Similarly, we can
represent rational numbers.

Illustration 1.3

Represent
2 –7
(a) (b) on the number line.
5 3
Sol. (a) Draw a number line. Mark a point O to represent 0 and another point A to represent the
2
distance 2 units. Divide, OA into 5 equal parts (equal to the denominator of ), at
5
P, Q, R and S.
2
The point P represents the rational number .
5
O P Q R S A

0 2 2
5
(b) Draw a number line Mark a point O to represent 0 and a point A' at a distance of 7 units
on the left of O to represent – 7. Divide OA' into 3 equal parts at P' and Q'.
–7
The point P' represents
3
A' Q' P' O

–7 –7 0
3

(vii) Absolute value : We have learned in earlier class that the absolute value of a rational
number is its numerical value (value without signs).
3 3 7 7
For example : – = and = .
5 5 9 9
Illustration 1.4
7 –4
Verify that |x + y|  |x| + |y| by taking x = ,y=
9 15
3 –4
Sol. If x = ,y= , then
5 15
3  –4  9–4 5 |5| 5
|x + y| =   = = = =
5  15  15 15 |15 | 15
3 –4 | 3 | | –4 | 3 4 9  4 13
|x| + |y| = + = + = + = =
5 15 | 5 | | 15 | 5 15 15 15
5 13
But <
15 15
Hence |x + y|  |x| + |y| is true in this case.
Illustration 1.5
–5 7
Verify that |x × y| = |x| × |y| by taking x = ,y=
3 9
 –5 7  –35 35  –5  7 5 7 35
Sol. |x × y| =    = =  |x| × |y| =   × = × =
 3 9 27 27  3 9 3 9 27
 |x × y| = |x| × |y|

(viii) Comparing two rational numbers : In order to compare any two rational numbers,
we can use the following steps :
Step I : Obtain the given rational numbers.
Step II : Write the given rational numbers so that their denominators are positive.
Step III : Find the LCM of the positive denominators of the rational numbers obtained in
step II
Step IV : Express each rational number (obtained in step II) with the LCM (obtained in
step III) as common denominator.
Step V : Compare the numerators of rational numbers obtained in step IV. The number
having greater numerator is the greater rational number.
Illustration 1.6
3 2
Which of the two rational numbers and is greater ?
5 3
3 2
Sol. Clearly, is a positive rational number and is a negative rational number. We know
5 3
that every positive rational number is greater than every negative rational number.
3 2
 >
5 3
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -5
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
RATIONAL NUMBERS

Illustration 1.7
5 3
Which of the two rational numbers and is greater ?
7 5
Sol. Clearly, denominators of the given rational numbers are positive. The denominators are 7
and 5. The LCM of 7 and 5 is 35. So, we first express each rational number with 35 as
common denominator.
5 55 25 3 37 21
 = = and = =
7 75 35 5 57 35
Now, we compare the numerators of these rational numbers.
25 21 5 3
 25 > 21  >  >
35 35 7 5

Illustration 1.8
7 5 2
Arrange the rational numbers , , in ascending order.
10 8 3
Sol. First write the given rational numbers so that their denominators are positive.
We have,
5 5  (1) 5 2 2  (1) 2
= = and = =
8 8  ( 1) 8 3 3  ( 1) 3
7 5 2
Thus, the given rational numbers with positive denominators are , , .
10 8 3
Now, LCM of the denominators 10, 8 and 3 is : 2 × 2 × 5 × 2 × 3 = 120
Write the numbers so that they have a common denominator 120 as follows :
7 7  12 84 5 5  15 75 2 2  40 80
= = , = = and = =
10 10  12 120 8 8  15 120 3 3  40 120
Comparing the numerators of these numbers, we get
– 84 < – 80 < – 75
84 80 75 7 2 5 7 2 5
 < <  < <  < <
120 120 120 10 3 8 10 3 8

A sk yourself

1. Check 972 a prime number ?

p
2. Express 0.88 into form ?
q
8 24
3. Show that = ?
12 36

4. 138  243 = ?

5. Find the greater number in the following pairs of rational numbers :–

9 10 5 12
(a) and (b) and
11 12 8 16
2 5 7 10
6. Write the following rational numbers in descending order , , ,
9 12 15 14
Answers
22
1. No 2. 4. –105
25
10 9 12 5 10 7 5 2
5. (a) > (b) > 6. > > >
12 11 16 8 14 15 12 9

1.2 OPERATIONS ON RATIONAL NUMBERS

(a) Addtion
If two rational numbers are to be added we should convert each of them into a rational number
with positive denominator.
Case I : When given number have same denominator.
a c ac
In this case we define + = .
b b b
Illustration 1.9
7 9
Add and
5 5
7 9 7  9 16
Sol. + = = .
5 5 5 5
Case II : When denominator of given number are unequal.
In this case we take the LCM of their denominators and express each of the given numbers
with this LCM as the common denominator. Now we add these numbers as shown above.
Illustration 1.10
3 5
Add and .
8 6
Sol. The denominators of the given rational numbers are 8 and 6 respectively.
LCM of 8 and 6 is 24
3 33 9 5 5  4 20
Now, = = ; = =
8 8  3 24 6 6  4 24
3 5 9 20 9  20 29
       
8 6 24 24 24 24
Illustration 1.11
7 2
Find the sum : + .
5 3
Sol. LCM of 5 and 3 = (5 × 3) = 15.
7 2 3  ( 7)  5  2 21  10 11
  + = = = .
5 3 15 15 5
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -7
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
RATIONAL NUMBERS

(b) Properties of addition

Property 1. Closure Property :

The sum of two rational numbers is always a rational number.
a c a c
If and are any two rational numbers, then    is also a rational number.
b d b d
1 3  1 3  (4  9) 13
For example : Consider the rational numbers and . Then,    =  ,
3 4  3 4 12 12
which is a rational number.
Property 2. Commutative Law :
Two rational numbers can be added in any order.
a c  a c   c a
Thus for any two rational numbers and ,we have        .
b d  b d   d b
For example :
 1 3 (2  3) 5  3 1  (3  2) 5
(i)    = = and    = = .
 2 4 4 4  4 2 4 4
 1 3   3 1
So,   =  .
 2 4   4 2 
Property 3. Associative Law :
While adding three rational numbers, they can be grouped in any order.
a c e  a c  e a  c e
Thus, for any three rational numbers , and , we have  b  d   f  b   d  f  .
b d f
For example, consider three rationals and . Then,
 2 5  1   ( 14  15) 1   1 1  (2  7) 9 3
   =    =   = = 
 3 7  6  21 6   21 6  42 42 14
 2  5 1    2 (30  7)   2 37  ( 28  37) 9 3
and      =   =    = = = .
 3  7 6   3 42   3 42  42 42 14
 2 5  1   2  5 1  
      =       .
 3 6  6   3  7 6  
Property 4. Existence of Additive identity :
0 is a rational number such that the sum of any rational number and 0 is the rational
number itself.
a   a a a
Thus,   0   0   = , for every rational number .
 b   b b b
0 is called the additive identity for rationals.
3   3 0 (3  0) 3  3 3
For example, (i)   0 =     = and similarly,  0  5  = 5 .
 5   5 5 5 5
3   3 3
  0 =  0  5  = 5 .
5 

Property 5. Existence of Additive Inverse :

a a
For every rational number , there exists a rational number such that
b b
 a a   a  ( a) 0  a a 
 b  b  = b
=
b
= 0 and similarly,  b  b  = 0.

 a  a   a a 
Thus,     = 0.
 b b   b b 
a a
is called the additive inverse of .
b b
 4 4   4  (4) 0  4 4 
For example :    = = = 0 and Similarly,   = 0.
7 7  7 7  7 7 
 4 4   4 4 
   =  = 0.
 7 7   7 7 
4 4
Thus, and are additive inverse of each other.
7 7

(c) Subtraction
a c
For rational numbers and ,
b d
a c a  c  a  c
we define: 

  =
b d
+
b  d 
 = +
b
 additive inverse of
d 

Illustration 1.12
Find the additive inverse of :
5 9
(i) (ii)
9 11
5 5
Sol. (i) Additive inverse of is .
9 9
9 9 9
(ii) In standard form, we write as . Hence, its additive inverse is .
11 11 11

Illustration 1.13
Subtract :
5 2 9 7
(i) from (ii) from
7 5 16 24
 2  5    2 5  ( 14  25) 11
Sol. (i)    =    = = .
 5  7    5 7 35 35
7 9 14  27 13
(ii) – = = .
24 16 48 48

Illustration 1.14
7 4
What number should be added to to get ?
8 9
Sol. Let the required number to be added be x.
7 4
Then, +x=
8 9
 4 7  (32  63) 95
x=    = = .
 9 8 72 72
95
Hence, the required number is .
72
(d) Multiplication
a c a c (a  c )
For any two rationals and , we define :    = .
b d  b d  (b  d )

Illustration 1.15
Find each of the following products :
15 3 3 5
(i)  (ii) ×
4 8 7 8
Sol. We have
15 3 ( 15)  ( 3) 45
(i)  =  .
4 8 48 32
3 5 3 x ( 5) 15
(ii) × = = .
7 8 7x 8 56

Properties of Multiplication
Property 1. Closure Property :
The product of two rational numbers is always a rational number.
a c a c
If and are any two rational numbers then    is also a rational number.
b d b d
For example : Consider the rational numbers and .
 1 5 (1  5) 5
Then,    = = , which is a rational number.
 2 7  (2  7) 14

Property 2. Commutative Law :

Two rational numbers can be multiplied in any order.
a c
Thus, for any rational numbers and , we have :
b d
 a c   c a
 b  d  =  d  b  .

3 5
For example : let us consider the rational numbers and . Then,
4 7
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -10
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
RATIONAL NUMBERS

 3 5 (3  5) 15  5 3  (5  3) 15
 4  7  = (4  7)  28 and  7  4  = (7  4) = 28 .

 3 5  5 3
 4  7  =  7  4 

Property 3. Associative Law :

While multiplying three or more rational numbers, they can be grouped in any order.
a c e
Thus, for any rationals , and , we have
b d f
a c e a  c e
 b  d  × f = b ×  d  f  .

5 7 1
For example : Consider the rationals , and . We have
2 4 3
 5 7  1  ( 5)  ( 7) 1   35 1  (35  1) 35
 2  4   3 =  2  4  3  =  8  3  = (8  3)
=
24
 
5  7 1  5 ( 7)  1  5 7  ( 5)  ( 7) 35
and ×   = × =  = = .
2  4 3 2 43  2 12  (2  12) 24
 5 7  1 5  7 1 
   × =   .
 2 4 3 2  4 3 
Property 4. Existence of Multiplicative Identity :
a
For any rational number , we have
b
 a   a a
 b  1 =  1  b  = b .
1 is called the multiplicative identity for rationals.
3
For example : Consider the rational number . Then, we have
4
 3   3 1 (3  1) 3  3   1 3  (1  3) 3
 4  1 =  4  1 = (4  1) = 4 and  1  4  =  1  4  = (1  4) = 4 .

Property 5. Existence of Multiplicative Inverse :

a b
Every nonzero rational number has its multiplicative inverse .
b a
 a b  b a
Thus,   =  = 1.
 b a   a b 
b a
is called the reciprocal of . Clearly, zero has no reciprocal. Reciprocal of 1 is 1 and
a b
the reciprocal of (–1) is (–1).
5 7  5 7  7 5
For example : Reciprocal of is , since    =    = 1.
7 5  7 5  5 7

Property 6. Distributive Law of Multiplication Over Addition :

a c e
For any three rational numbers
, and ,
b d f
a  c e  a c   a e
We have : ×    =   +    .
b d f  b d b f 
3 2 5
For example : Consider the rational numbers , and . We have
4 3 6
 3   2 5   3   4  ( 5)   3   1 ( 3)  ( 1) 3 1
 4  ×  3  6  =  4  ×  6  =  4  ×  6  = 46
=
24
=
8
.
   
 3  2 ( 3)  2 6 1  3   5  ( 3)  ( 5) 15 5
Again,   × = = = and   ×  = = =.
 4 3 43 12 2  4  6 46 24 8
 3  2   3   5    1 5  ( 4  5) 1
    +       =    = = .
 4  3   4   6    2 8  8 8
Hence,
 3   2 5   3  2   3   5  
 4    3  6  =     +       .
   4  3   4   6  
Property 7. Multiplicative Property of 0 :
Every rational number multiplied with 0 gives 0.
a a   a
Thus, for any rational number
b
, we have :  b  0 =  0  b  = 0.

 5   5 0 (5  0) 0
For example,   0 =    = = = 0.
 18   18 1  (18  1) 18
 5
Similarly,  0  = 0.
 18 
Illustration 1.16
Find the reciprocal of each of the following :
5
(i) –8 (ii)
16
1 1 5 16
Sol. (i) Reciprocal of – 8 is , i.e., . (ii) Reciprocal of is .
8 8 16 5
(d) Division
a c a c
When is divided by , then is called dividend; is called the divisor and the result
b d b d
is known as quotient.
Properties of division
Property 1. Closure Property :
a c c a c
If
b
and
d
are any two rational numbers such that
d
 0, then  b  d  is also a rational
number.

Property 2.
a a  a
For every rational number , we have:   1 
b b  b
Property 3.
a  a a
For every non–zero rational number
b
, we have  b  b  =1
Illustration 1.17
4 3
Divide by .
7 8
4 3 4 8 32
Sol.  = × = .
7 8 7 3 21

(e) Insertion of Rational number between two given Rational Numbers:

1
If a and b be two rational number such that a < b, then (a + b) is a rational number
2
between a and b.
Illustration 1.18
1 1
Find 3 Rational numbers between & .
3 2
1 1
Sol. A rational number between & .
3 2
1 1 23

5  1 5 1
= 3 2 = 6 =  3 , 12 , 2 
2 2 12
1 5
A rational number between and
3 12
1 5 45

9
= 3 12 = 12 = .
2 2 24
5 1
A rational number between and
12 2
5 1 5 6
  11 1 9 5 11 1

= 12 2 = 12 12 = ;  ,
, , ,
2 2 24 3 24 12 24 2 

1 1 5 9 11
  Three rational number between & are , , .
3 2 12 24 24
Illustration 1.19
3 1
Find 5 rational number between and .
5 4
Sol. Convert to equivalent rational numbers having same denominators
3 3  4 12 1 1 5 5
= = and = =
5 54 20 4 4  5 20

The integers between –12 and 5 are – 11, –10, – 9,..., 3, 4.

11 10 9 2 3 4
The corresponding rational number are . , , ,......., , ,
20 20 20 20 20 20
Selecting any five of them, we get
11 10 9 8 7 3 1
, , , , are five rational numbers between and
20 20 20 20 20 5 4

A sk yourself

8 5
1. The sum of two rational numbers is . If one of the numbers is , find the other.
9 7
4 5
2. What should be subtracted from so as to get ?
9 12
25 5
3. The product of two rational numbers is . If one of the numbers is , find the other?
49 8
7 4
4. Divide the sum of and by their product.
6 5
5 7
5. Write any 5 rational numbers between and .
6 8

1
6. Find two rational numbers whose absolute value is .
5

Answers
11 31 40
1.  2.  3. 
63 36 49
11 19 18 17 16 15 1 1
4. 5. , , , , 6. and
28 24 24 24 24 24 5 5

A dd t o Your K nowledge

1. DIVISION ALGORITHM
Division Algorithm : General representation of result is,
Dividend Re mainder
 Quotient 
Divisor Divisor
Dividend = (Divisor × Quotient ) + Remainder
Example. On dividing 4150 by certain number, the quotient is 55 and the remainder is 25. Find the
divisor.
4125
Sol. 4150 = 55 × x + 25  55x = 4125  x= = 75.
55
2. In order to convert a non terminating and repeating decimal number into fraction, follow the
following steps :
Step 1 – To obtain the numerator subtract the number formed by non–repeating digits from
the complete number without decimal.
Step 2 – To obtain the denominator take the number of nines = Number of repeating digits
and after that put the number zeros = number of non repeating digits.
737  7 730 73
For example : 0.737 = = 
990 990 99

Concept Map

Summary

1. Zero is neither positive nor negative rational number.

2. There can be infinte rational numbers between two given rational number.

3. 1.066666..... can also be written as 1.06 , to represent a recurring decimal.

4. By repeated use of commutative and associative properties, the sum (multiplication) of

three or more rational numbers can be found and this sum (product) remians the same,
whatever be the order of numbers before addition (multiplication). This is also called the
re–arrangement property of addition (multiplication) of rational numbers.

5. The reciprocal or multiplicative inverse of 0 does not exist. Hence, zero has no
multiplicative inverse.

6. Division by zero is meaningless (not defined).

7. Each rational number can be represented by a point on the number line but vice versa is
not always true.

8. Dividend = Divisor x quotient + remainder.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION –A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Which of the following is prime

(A) 141 (B) 241 (C) 341 (D) 441

2. Which of the following natural numbers is neither prime nor composite.

(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) None

3. The reciprocal of a negative rational number

(A) is a positive rational number
(B) is a negative rational number
(C) can be either a positive or a negative rational number
(D) does not exist

219
4. Lowest form of .
365
73 3 3
(A)  (B)  (C) (D) None of these
125 5 5

5. 138  243 = ?
(A) 105 (B) 381 (C) –381 (D) – 105

9
6. Which of the following is (are) greater than x when x = ?
11
1 x 1 x 1
(i) (ii) (iii)
x x x 1
(A) (i) only (B) (i) and (ii) only (C) (i) and (iii) only (D) (ii) and (iii) only

3 4 7 1
7. Arrange the following fractions in ascending order , , , .
7 5 9 2
4 7 3 1 3 1 7 4 4 7 1 3 1 3 7 4
(A) , , , (B) , , , (C) , , , (D) , , ,
5 9 7 2 7 2 9 5 5 9 2 7 2 7 9 5

3
8. Multiplicative inverse of is :
5
3 5
(A) 1 (B) 0 (C) (D)
5 3
8
9. What number should be subtracted from – 5 to get .
9
53 37 9 9
(A) (B) (C) (D)
9 9 37 37

x2  y 2
10. If x/y = 6/5 then is :
x2  y 2
36 25 11 61
(A) (B) (C) (D)
25 36 61 11

11. The product of a non – zero rational number with an irrational number is :
(A) Irrational number (B) Rational number (C) Whole number (D) Natural number

3 6
12. If of a number is 22, what is of that number ?
11 11
(A) 6 (B) 11 (C) 12 (D) 44

13. How many rational numbers exist between any two distinct rational numbers ?
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 11 (D) Infinite

14. Rational number between 1 and 2

5 6 3 7
(A) (B) (C) (D)
6 5 7 3

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. All natural numbers that have one and itself as their only 2 distinct factors are ________.

5
2. is __________ decimal
11
3. Lowest form of 8/12 is ________ .

3 5 3
4.  =  ______.
7 8 7

3  5 4 3 5 3
5.     =    ______
7  8 7 7 8 7

37
6.  ______ = 1.
58

4 4
7.  ______ = .
9 9

5
8.  ______ = 0.
9

9. Additive inverse of 5 is _______.

10. Product of 2/3 and –3/2 is ________.

TRUE / FALSE

1. 91 is a prime number.

2. Prime number can also be negative integers.

3. 2 is the only even prime number.

4. 0 is a rational number.

5. Rational number cannot be represented on real number line.

3 2
6.  .
5 3

7. The sum of 2 rational number is always a rational number.

8. Reciprocal of a positive rational number can either be negative or positive.

9. There are only 4 integers between –3 and 2.

10. There exist infinite rational number between any 2 integers.

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Match the value of column–I with the value in column–II

Column–I Column–II
(A) 2/3  1/2 (p) 1/2
(B) 6/7 – 1/2 (q) 4/3
(C) 2/3 + 4/5 (r) 6/5
(D) 4 2 (s) 22/15
(E) 7/2  1/7 (t) 5/14
(F) 4/5  3/2 (u) 2

2. Column–I Column–II
4 3   4 3
(A)    7 =     7 (p) commutativity under addition
7 5   7 5
1 1 1
(B)  1 = 1  = (q) associativity under multiplication
9 9 9
4 7
(C)  = 1 (r) existence of multiplicative identity
7 4
5 5
(D) 6 + = +6 (s) existence of additive identity
9 9
3  3  3
(E) – +0=0+   = (t) existence of multiplicative inverse
8  8 8

SECTION –B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Write the smallest natural number .

2. Write the smallest composite number.

3. Write the smallest prime number.

4. Write the only even prime number.

13 13
5. Represent and on the number line.
5 5

6. Represent –17.5 on the number line.

7. Find the additive inverse of the following :

1 5
(a) (b) 0 (c) 5 (d)
3 7

8. Find the multiplicative inverse of the following :

7 –2
(a) (b) 0 (c) –8 (d)
5 5

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1 5 23 5
9. Arrange the following rational number in ascending order : , , , .
3 8 24 6
205
10. Standard form of .
82
5 2
11. The product of two rational numbers is , if one of the number is , find the other.
7 9
8
12. Find the number which when divided by gives 1.
21

13. Give three rational numbers between – 2 and – 1.

14. Give three rational numbers between 3 and 4.

5 9
15. Find three different rational numbers between and .
7 11
LONG ANSWER TYPE
–5 –7
16. (i) Verify that | x + y |  | x | + | y | by taking x = ,y=
12 18
–2 –9
(ii) Verify that | x × y | = | x | × | y | by taking x = ,y= .
3 8
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -21
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
RATIONAL NUMBERS

17. (i) Which rational number is its own additive inverse ?

(ii) Is the difference of two rational numbers a rational number ?
(iii) Is addition commutative on rational numbers ?
(iv) Is addition associative on rational numbers ?
(v) Is subtraction commutative on rational numbers ?
(vi) Is subtraction associative on rational numbers ?
(vii) What is the negative of negative rational number ?

7 4 2
18. The cost of 3 m cloth is Rs 212 .. Find the cost of 7 m cloth.
9 5 3

19. Simplify :
3 2 11 5 3  1  1 1 
(i) 2 ×1 +9 –1 . (ii) 5–   2   0.5     .
4 3 12 6  4  2  6 7  

EXERCISE 02
SECTION –A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. There are four prime numbers written in ascending order. The product of the first three is
385 and that of the last three is 1001. The last number is :
(A) 11 (B) 13 (C) 17 (D) 19

2. Let x, y and z be distinct integers where x and y are odd and positive, and z is even and
positive. Which one of the following statements cannot be true ?
(A) (x – z)2y is even (B) (x – z)y2 is odd (C) (x – z)y is odd (D) (x – y)2z is even

3. Choose the rational number which does not lie between rational numbers 3/5 and 2/3
(A) 46/75 (B) 47/ 75 (C) 49/75 (D) 50/75

8  [5  ( 3  2)]  2
4. Evaluate : .
53  58 3
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5

3 3
5. A student was asked to multiply a number by . Instead he divided the number by and
2 2
2
obtained a number smaller by , the number is :
3
4 3 2 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 5 3 2

6. Which one of the following is Rational number in simplest form ?

–8 –13 14 16
(A) (B) (C) (D)
28 38 –49 56

7. If a and b are positive integers, then which of the following is correct?

(A) a + b is rational (B) a – b is a positive integer
a
(C) is irrational (D) None of these
b

 9 3 12 7 5 3 
8.  4  5  5  8  4  5  is equal to
69 41 2 7
(A) 1 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 20
80 80 9 9

 1  3  5  97 
9. The product  2 –   2 –   2 –  ......  2 – is equal to :
 3  5  7  99 
5 101 101 97
(A) (B) (C) (D)
99 99 3 99
10. The product of the following fractions
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
   -
2 3 × 4 5 × 6 7 ×......× 98 99 , is :
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
   -
3 4 5 6 7 8 99 100
(A) 2 (B) 50 (C) 100 (D) 25

SECTION –B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. 0.018 can be expressed in the rational form as :

18 18 18 18
(A) (B) (C) (D)
1000 990 9900 999
12. On dividing a number by 999, the quotient is 366 and the remainder is 103. The number is :
(A) 364724 (B) 365387 (C) 365737 (D) 366757
13. The number 2.525252........ can be written as a fraction, when reduced to the lowest term,
the sum of the numerator and denominator is:–
(A) 7 (B) 29 (C) 141 (D) 349

EXERCISE 03
SECTION –A (PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

1. 0.2  0.3  0.4  0.5 is equiralent to [Aryabhatta 2005]

14 15 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) 1
9 9 3
2. If a number is divided by 45, then the remainder is 32. if the same number is divided by 15,
then the remainder is [Aryabhatta 2008]
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 16 (D) 4

3. A rational number can be expressed as a terminating decimal if the denominator has

factors [NSTSE 2010]
(A) 2 or 5 (B) 3 or 5 (C) 2, 3 or 5 (D) None of these

 x
4. The product of x2y and   is equal to the quotient obtained when x2 is divided by
 y
[NSTSE 2010]
1
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) X (D)
x
1 x 1
5. If 1   , which does ‘x’ equal to ? [NSTSE – 2011]
x x
(A) 1 or 2 only (B) 1 and 0 only
(C) + 1 or – 2 only (D) any number except ‘0’
1 4
6. Identify a rational number between and [NSTSE 2012]
3 5
1 9 17
(A) (B) (C) (D) 1
4 10 30
7. Which of the statements is true about consecutive natural numbers ? [NSTSE 2012]
(A) There are 2n + 1 numbers between squares of consecutive numbers.
(B) There are 2n non–perfect square numbers between the squares of consecutive
numbers.
(C) The sum of the squares of two consecutive numbers is not a perfect square
(D) n2 – 1 is the standard form of the difference between two consecutive numbers

9
8. Identify the ones that is/are greater than ‘m’ if m = [NSTSE 2014]
11
1 m 1 m 1
(i) (ii) (iii)
m m m 1
(A) (i) only (B) (ii) and (iii) only (C) (i) and (iii) only (D) (i) and (ii) only

1 4 6 2 3
9. Which number is in the middle if , , , and are arranged in descending
6 9 7 5 4
order [NSTSE 2014]
2 4 1 6
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 9 6 7

10. If the division N  5 leaves a remainder of 3, what might be the ones digit of N ?
[NSTSE 2014]
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 6

11. Which of the following numbers does NOT have a multiplicative inverse? [NSTSE 2014]
1
(A) – (B) 0 (C) 1 (D) 3
3

12. Nalini and three of her friends worked together to make a quilt. The given table lists the
fractional part of the quilt that each of the girls made. Which list shows the girls in order
from the one who sewed the most to the one who sewed the least? [NSTSE 2014]

(A) Reena, Nalini, Shalini, Kamini (B) Shalini, Nalini, Kamini, Reena
(C) Reena, Karnini, Nalini, Shalini (D) Kamini, Shalini, Nalini, Reena

13. The difference between the place value and the face value of 6 in the numeral 856973
is_________. [NSTSE 2014]
(A) 973 (B) 6973 (C) 5994 (D) None of these

14. Which of the following expressions is true? [NSTSE 2014]

7 7
(A) 0.09 > (B) 6% < 0.09 (C)  8.0  103 (D) 8.0  103  6%
8 8

15. lf x:y = 5:2, then (8x + 9y) : (8x + 2y) is [NSTSE 2014]
(A) 22 : 29 (B) 26 : 61 (C) 29 : 22 (D) 61: 26

16. Closure property for rational numbers is satisfied in case of _______ [NSTSE 2014]
(A) Addition (B) Subtraction (C) Multiplication (D) All of these

17. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT for rational numbers? [NSTSE 2014]
(A) The rational number 0 is the additive identity for rational numbers.
(B) The rational number 1 is the multiplicative identity for rational numbers
(C) Subtraction is associative for rational numbers.
(D) There are infinite rational numbers between any two given rational numbers.

18. Identify the composite number : [IOM 2019]

(A) 1 (B) 199 (C) 2 (D) 793
1 3
19. The LCM of and is _______ [IOM 2019]
8 5

3 1
(A) 3 (B) (C) (D) 1
40 40
20. Let N = 1011 × 1013 × 1015, what is the remainder when N is divided by 11 ?
[IOM 2019]
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 5 (D) 8

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Ans. B B B B D B B D A D A D D B

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. Prime 2. non terminating repeating 3. (2/3)

4. 5/8 5. (4/7) 6. (58/37) 7. 1

8. (5/9) 9. (– 5) 10. (–1)

TRUE / FALSE
1. False 2. False 3. True 4. True

5. False 6. False 7. True 8. False

9. True 10. True

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. (A) q, (B) t, (C) s, (D) u, (E) p, (F) r

2. (A) q, (B) r, (C) t, (D) p, (E) s
SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)
SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. 1 2. 4 3. 2 4. 2
1
7. (a) – (b) 0 (c) –5 (d) 5/7
3

8. (a) 5/7 (b) Does not exist (c) – 1/8 (d) – 5/2

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1 5 5 23 5  45  8
9. ( < < < ) 10. 11.  14  12.
3 8 6 24 2   21

7 3 5 31 33 37  56 57 58 
13. ( , , ) 14. ( , , ) 15.  77 , 77 , 77 
4 2 4 10 10 10  

LONG ANSWER TYPE

17. (i) 0 (ii) yes (iii) yes (iv) yes

(v) no (vi) no (vii) positive rational number

73 2 23
18. Rs. 431 19. (i) 12 (ii) 2
85 3 84

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Ans. B A D D A B A A C B D C D

EXERCISE 03
SECTION –A (PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans A A A D D C B D C B B B C B C
Ques. 16 17 18 19 20
Ans D C D A D

CHAPTER

02 SQUARES AND SQUARE ROOTS

TERMINOLOGIES
Perfect square, Pythogorean Triplets, Square roots, Repeated Subtraction,
Rationalization, Factors, Column Method, Diagonal Method.

INTRODUCTION
In previous class, we have learnt 4 × 4 can be written as 42 and read as square of 4, where
4 is called base, 2 is called exponent. The square of a number is obtained by multiplying it
by self. So, a natural number is called a square number or perfect square, if it is the square
of some natural number.
In this class we will study methods to find square of numbers and square roots by prime
factorization method and long division method.

2.1 SQUARES
We are familiar with exponential notation.
For example : 2 × 2 = 22 = 4
3 × 3 = 32 = 9
4 × 4 = 42 = 16
6 × 6 = 62 = 36
9 × 9 = 92 = 81
Hence, when a number is multiplied with itself, the product is called the square of that
number.
(a) Perfect Squares

A natural number is called a perfect square if it is the square of some natural number.
For example : 4 = 2 × 2 or square of 2
9 = 3 × 3 or square of 3
36 = 6 × 6 or square of 6
we see that 4, 9 and 36 are squares of 2, 3 and 6 respectively, so they are perfect squares.
However, in case of 30, we are not able to write this as a square of some natural number
so, 30 is not a perfect square.
(b) To Test a Given Number is a Perfect Square or Not

For testing a given number is a perfect square or not we write the given number as the
product of prime factors then we make pairs of same factors. If there are factors all of
which have pair, then given number is a perfect square otherwise not.

Illustration 2.1
Is 336 a perfect square ?
Sol. Given number is 336
First we factorise it

2 336
2 168
2 84
2 42
3 21
7 7
1
336 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 7
Clearly 3 and 7 have no pair therefore it is not a perfect square.
Illustration 2.2
Find the smallest number by which 180 must be multiplied so that the product is a perfect
square.
Sol. Given number is 180, first we resolve it into prime factors.
2 180
2 90
3 45

3 15
5 5
1
 180 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 × 5
Clearly 5 has no pair. Thus if we multiply it by 5 then product will be a perfect square.
 Required smallest number is 5.
Illustration 2.3
Find the smallest number by which 28812 must be divided so that the quotient becomes a
perfect square.
Sol. Given number is 28812, first we write it as the product of prime factors.
2 28812
2 14406
3 7203
7 2401

7 343
7 49
7 7
1
 28812 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 7 × 7 × 7 × 7
Clearly, 3 has no pair, so if we divide it by 3 then quotient become a perfect square.
Illustration 2.4
Is 1575 a perfect square.
Sol. Given number is 1575, resolve it into prime factors.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -29
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
SQUARES AND SQUARE ROOTS

3 1575
3 525
5 175
5 35
7 7
1
 1575 = 3 × 3 × 5 × 5 × 7
7 has no pair, therefore 1575 is not a perfect square.
(c) Table of Squares of Natural Numbers
The following table contains the squares of first thirty natural numbers. Students are
advised to keep these to memory.
Number Square
1 1 =1x1=1
2

2 22 = 2 × 2 = 4
3 32 = 3 × 3 = 9
4 42 = 4 × 4 = 16
5 52 = 5 × 5 = 25
6 62 = 6 × 6 = 36
7 72 = 7 × 7 = 49
8 82 = 8 × 8 = 64
9 92 = 9 × 9 = 81
10 102 = 10 × 10 = 100
11 112 = 11 × 11 = 121
12 122 = 12 × 12 = 144
13 132 = 13 × 13 = 169
14 142 = 14 × 14 = 196
15 152 = 15 × 15 = 225
16 162 = 16 × 16 = 256
17 172 = 17 × 17 = 289
18 182 = 18 × 18 = 324
19 192 = 19 × 19 = 361
20 202 = 20 × 20 = 400
21 212 = 21 × 21 = 441
22 222 = 22 × 22 = 484
23 232 = 23 × 23 = 529
24 242 = 24 × 24 = 576
25 252 = 25 × 25 = 625
26 262 = 26 × 26 = 676
27 272 = 27 × 27 = 729
28 282 = 28 × 28 = 784
29 292 = 29 × 29 = 841
30 302 = 30 × 30 = 900
It is evident from the above table that the numbers 1, 4, 9, 16, ........841, 900 are squares of
the numbers 1, 2, 3, .....30. Such numbers are called perfect squares or square numbers.

(d) Properties of Perfect Squares

(i) A number ending with 2, 3, 7 or 8 can never be a perfect square.

(ii) The number of zeros at the end of a perfect square is always even.
For example : 10000 = 1002, 2500 = 502, 490000 = 7002
(iii) Squares of even numbers is always even and square of odd numbers is always odd.
For example : 22 = 4, 82 = 64, 402 = 1600
5 = 25, 92 = 81, 172 = 289
2

(iv) For any two consecutive natural numbers n and (n + 1), we have
(n + 1)2 – n2 = (n + 1 + n) (n + 1 – n) = (n + 1) + n
For example : 112 – 102 = 11 + 10 = 21
15 – 142 = 15 + 14 = 29
2

192 – 182 = 19 + 18 = 37 etc.

(v) A triplet (x, y, z) of three natural numbers x, y, and z is called a Pythagorean triplet,
if x2 + y2 = z2.
For example : (6, 8, 10) is a Pythagorean triplet. Since 62 + 82 = 36 + 64 = 100 and
102 = 100.
For any number n greater than 1, the Pythagorean triplet is given by (2n, n2 – 1, n2 + 1)
(vi) The square of a natural number m is equal to the sum of the first m odd numbers.
Thus,
12 = 1 = sum of the first 1 odd number.
22 = 4 = 1 + 3 = sum of the first 2 odd numbers.
32 = 9 = 1 + 3 + 5 = sum of the first 3 odd numbers. 52 = 25 = 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9 = sum of the
first 5 odd numbers and so on.
(vii) Study the following patterns :
22 = 4 = 3 × 1 + 1 or 22 = 4 = 4 × 1
3 =9=3×3
2
32 = 9 = 4 × 2 + 1
42 = 16 = 3 × 5 + 1 42 = 16 = 4 × 4
5 = 25 = 3 × 8 + 1
2
52 = 25 = 4 × 6 + 1
62 = 36 = 3 × 12 62 = 36 = 4 × 9
From the above we can conclude that :
(A) Squares of numbers (greater than 1) can be written as multiples of 3 or multiples of 3
plus 1.
(B) Squares of numbers (greater than 1) can also be written as multiples of 4 or multiples
of 4 plus 1.
(viii) Square of any real number is always positive.

(e) Patterns

(i) The squares of numbers like 1, 11, 111 etc. which are composed of digit 1 alone have a
nice pattern as shown below
12 = 1
112 = 1 2 1
1112 = 1 2 3 2 1
11112 = 1 2 3 4 3 2 1
1111111112 = 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

(ii) We have another interesting pattern related to squares of numbers.

12 = 1
112 = 1 2 1 and 1 + 2 + 1 = 22
1112 = 1 2 3 2 1 and 1 + 2 + 3 + 2 + 1 = 32
(iii) One more pattern given below :
1 2 1 × (1 + 2 + 1) = 4 8 4 = 222
1 2 3 2 1 × ( 1 + 2 + 3 + 2 + 1) = 110889 = 3332
i.e., 112 × (sum of digits in 112) = 222
1112 × ( sum of digits in 1112 ) = 3332
1111111112 x (sum of digit in 1111111112) = 9999999992
Illustration 2.5
Using suitable patterns, complete the following :
(333)2 (666666)2
(i) = ..... (ii) = ......
12321 12345654321
Sol. We have the following pattern :
(11)2 = 121
(111)2 = 12321
(1111)2 = 1234321
(11111)2 = 123454321
(111111) 2
= 12345654321
(333)2 (3 111)2
(i) = [ (111)2 = 12321]
12321 (111)2
32  (111)2
= = 32 = 9.
(111)2
(666666)2 (6 111111)2
(ii) = [ (111111)2 = 12345654321]
12345654321 (111111)2
62  (111111)2
= = 62 = 36.
(111111)2

(f) Methods For Finding The Squares Of a Numbers

(a) Column Method

This method uses the identity a2 + 2ab + b2 for finding the square of a two digit number
(where a is the ten’s digit and b is the unit’s digit). We follow the following steps :
STEP (i) : Make three columns and write the values of a2, 2 × a × b and b2 respectively in
these column as follows : Let us take ab = 57
a = 5 and b = 7

Column-I Column-II Column-III

2 2
a (2 x a x b) b
25 70 49

STEP (ii) : Underline the unit digit of b2 and add its ten’s digit if any, to 2×a×b (in column II)

Column-I Column-II Column-III

2 2
a (2 x a x b) b
25 70 49
+4
74

STEP (iii) Underline the unit digit in column II and add the number formed by tens and
other digit, if any, to a2 in Column I.

Column-I Column-II Column-III

2 2
a (2 x a x b) b
25 70 49
+7 +4
32 74

Step (iv) : Underline the number in column -I

Column-I Column-II Column-III

2 2
a (2 x a x b) b
25 70 49
+7 +4
32 74
32 4 9

STEP (v) : Write the underlined digit at the bottom of each column to obtain the square of
the given number. In this case, we have 572 = 3249
Illustration 2.6
Find the square of (i) 47 (ii) 86
Sol. (i) Given number = 47
a = 4 and b = 7
I II III
2 2
a (2 x a x b) b
16 56 49
+6 +4
22 60
 (47)2 = 2209
(ii) Given number = 86.
a = 8 and b = 6
a2 (2 x a x b) b2
64 96 36
+9 +3
73 99
(86)2 = 7396
(b) Diagonal Method
This method is applicable to find the square of any number irrespective of the number of
digits in the number. We follow the following steps to find the square of a number by this
method.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -33
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
SQUARES AND SQUARE ROOTS

STEP (i) : Obtain the number and count the number of digits in it. Let there be n digits in
the number to be squared.
STEP (ii) : Draw square and divide it into n2 sub-squares of the same size by drawing
(n – 1) horizontal and (n – 1) vertical lines.
STEP (iii) : Draw the diagonal of each sub-square. As an illustration, let the number to be
squared be 479.
STEP (iv) : Write the digits of the number to be squared along the left vertical side and top
horizontal side of the square as shown below.
4 7 9

STEP (v) : Multiply each digit on the left of the square with each digit on top of the column
one - by - one. Write the units digit of the product below the diagonal and tens digit above
the diagonal of the corresponding sub square as shown below.
4 7 9
1 2 3
4
6 8 6
2 4 6
7
8 9 3
3 6 8
9
6 3 1

STEP (vi) : Starting below the lowest diagonal sum the digits along the diagonals so
obtained. Write the unit’s digit of the sum and carry the ten’s digit (if any) to the diagonal
above as shown below.
4 7 9
1 2 3
4
6 8 6

7 2 4 6
8 9 3
9 3 6 8
2
1=

6 3 1
1

2 2
1+

8+ r y = 1
6+ rr y

9
4+ a r +2

9+ rr y =2

4
2+ a

8+ 1 =3
C
8+ C 2

6+ Ca 3+3
3
3+ ar ry +1

14
C +6

3=
6
3+

2 2 9 4 4 1

STEP (vii) : Obtain the required square by writing the digits from the left-most side.
 4792 = 229441.
(c) Some Particular Methods
(i) The square of a number of the form a5 (where a is ten’s digit and 5 is unit’s digit) is the
number which ends in 25 and has the number a (a + 1) before 25.
For example :
852 = 8 × (8 + 1) 25 ( a = 8)
= 7225
105 = 10 × (10 + 1) 25 ( a = 10)
= 11025
(ii) The square of a number of the form 5a where a is unit’s digit and 5 is ten’s digit is equal
to (25 + a) × 100 + a2.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -34
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
SQUARES AND SQUARE ROOTS

For example :
582 = (25 + 8) × 100 + 82 = 3300 + 64 = 3364

(iii) The square of a three digit number 5ab where b is unit’s digit, a is ten’s digit and 5 is
hundred’s digit, given by (250 + ab) × 1000 + (ab)2
For example : (514)2 = (250 + 14) × 1000 + (14)2
= 264000 + 196
= 264196

A sk yourself

1. Find the value of the following

2 2
 2  4
(i)  1  (ii)  2  (iii) (3.05)2
  5 5
2. Find the perfect square obtained by multiplying each of the following numbers by the
smallest possible number.
(i) 882 (ii) 1690

3. Divide the following numbers by the smallest possible number to make each one a perfect
square.
(i) 2187 (ii) 3267
4. Write a pythogorean triplet whose smallest member is 3
5. Without Actual squaring, find the value of
(i) 422 – 412 (ii) 1082 – 1072
6. How many numbers lie between
(i) 72 and 82 (ii) 152 and 162
Answers

49 196
1. (i) (ii) (iii) 9.3025 2. (i) 2 (ii) 10
25 25

3. (i) 3 (ii) 3 4. 3, 4 , 5

5. (i) 83 (ii) 215 6. (i) 14 (ii) 30

2.2 SQUARE ROOTS

As we say square of 2 is 4, then we can also say that square root of 4 is 2
If, 6 × 6 = 36 = 62 and 8 × 8 = 64 = 82
Then, square root of 36 is 6 and square root of 64 is 8.
The square root of a number x is that number which when multiplied by itself gives x as the
product.
Remarks :
(i) We use the sign to indicate square root of a number.
i.e. 81 = 9, 225 = 15, etc.
(ii) We can calculate the square root of positive numbers only.

(a) Properties of Square Roots

(i) If the unit digit of a number is 2, 3, 7 or 8, then it does not have a square root in N.
Where N is the set of Natural number.
(ii) If a number ends in an odd number of zeros, then it does not have a square root in N.
(iii) The square root of an even number is even and square root of an odd number is odd.
For example : 64 = 8, 256 = 16, 324 = 18 etc.
81 = 9, 169 = 13, 289 = 17 etc.
(iv) Negative numbers have no square root in set of real numbers.

(b) Methods for finding square roots

(i) Prime Factorisation Method :

To find the square root of a perfect square, first we find the prime factors of the given
perfect square. Since the number is a perfect square, therefore, we get pairs of similar
prime factors. Choose one factor from each pair and multiply together. The result will be
the square root of the given number.
Ilustration 2.7
Find the square root of 784.
Sol. Given number is 784, first we factorize it.
2 784
2 392
2 196
2 98
7 49
7 7
1
784 = 2 × 2 x 2 × 2 ×7 × 7
784 = 2 x 2 x 7 = 28
(ii) Division Method :
Square root of a perfect square by the long division method. When numbers are very large,
the method of finding their square roots by factorization becomes lengthy and difficult. So,
we use long division method which is explained in the following steps :
(a) Group the digits in pairs, starting with the digit in the unit place. Each pair and the
remaining digit (if any) is called a period.
(b) Think of the largest number whose square is equal to or just less than the first period.
(c) Subtract the product of the divisor and the quotient from the first period and bring down
the next period to the right of the remainder. This becomes the next dividend.

(d) Now, the new divisor is obtained by taking two times the quotient and annexing with it a
suitable digit which is also taken as the next digit of the quotient, chosen in such a way that
the product of the new divisor and the digit is equal to or just less than the new dividend.
Repeat steps (b), (c) and (d) till all the period have been taken up. Now, the quotient so
obtained is the required square root of the given number.
Illustration 2.8
Find the square root of 390625.
Sol. By the long-division method, we have
625
6
39 06 25
-36
122 306
-244
6225
1245 -6225
X

 390625 = 625
(i) Mark periods by placing bars on every pair, starting with the digit in the unit’s place.
(ii) 6 × 6 = 36 < 39. So, take 6 as the divisor and 6 as the quotient.
(iii) Subtracting 36 from 39, we get 3 as the remainder. Bring down the next period 06 to
the right of 3, to obtain 306 as the new dividend.
(iv) For the next divisor, take 2 times of 6. i.e. 12 as the left two digits of the new divisor.
(v) Now, 2 is the largest digit such that 122 × 2 = 244 is just less than 306.
Thus, take 122 as the new divisor and 2 as the second digit of the quotient.
(vi) Now, subtract 244 from 306 to get 62 as the remainder. Bring down the next period 25
to the right of 62 to get 6225 as the new dividend.
(vii) For the next divisor, take 2 times of 62, i.e., 124 as the left three digits of the new
divisor.
(viii) Now, 5 is the largest digit such that 1245 × 5 = 6225.
Thus, take 1245 as the new divisor and 5 as the new digit of the quotient.
(ix) Thus, = 625.
Illustration 2.9
Find the cost of erecting a fence around a square field whose area is 9 hectares. If fencing
costs Rs. 3.50 per metre.
Sol. The area of the square field = (9 x 10000) m2 [ 1 hectare = 10000 m2]
= 90000 m2
Side of the field = 90000 = 300 m. Now, the perimeter = (300 × 4) m = 1200 m
Cost of fencing = Rs (1200 × 3.50) = Rs 4200.
Illustration 2.10
What least number must be subtracted from 16160 to get a perfect square ? Also find the
square root of this perfect square.
Sol. Let us try to find the square root of 16160.

This shows that (127)2 is less than 16160 by 31. So in order to get a perfect square, 31
must be subtracted from the given number.
Required perfect square number = (16160 – 31) = 16129
Also, 16129 = 127.
Illustration 2.11
What least number must be added to 5607 to make the sum a perfect square ? Find this
perfect square and its square root.
Sol. We try to find out the square root of 5607.
74
7
56 07
49
707
144 576
131
We observe here that (74)2 < 5607 < (75)2.
The required number to be added
= (75)2 – 5607 = (5625 – 5607) = 18
The required perfect square = (5607 + 18) = 5625
Clearly, 5625 = 75.
Illustration 2.12
Find the greatest number of six digits, which is a perfect square. Find the square root of
this number.
Sol. The greatest number of six digits = 999999
Now, we must find the least number which when subtracted from 999999, give a perfect
square. Now, we find out the square root of 999999.
999
9 99 99 99
81
1899
189
1701
19899
1989 17901
1998

Thus, (999)2 < 999999 by 1998.

So, the least number to be subtracted is 1998.
The required number = (999999 – 1998) = 998001.
Also, it is clear that = 999.

(iii) Square Root by Successive Subtractions :

We know that 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + ........... + (2n – 1) = n2
i.e. The sum of first n odd natural numbers is n2. This property of natural numbers can be
used to find the square roots of small natural number. For this we subtract 1, 3, 5, 7, 9,
...............successively from the given number till we get zero, then number of times the
subtraction is performed to arrive at zero is the square root of given number.
Illustration 2.13
Find the square root of 64 by successive subtraction method.
Sol. Here 64 – 1 = 63
63 – 3 = 60
60 – 5 = 55
55 – 7 = 48
48 – 9 = 39
39 – 11= 28
28 – 13= 15
15 – 15= 0
Clearly, we have performed subtraction eight times 64 = 8
(iv) Square Roots of Fractions :
For any positive numbers a and b, we have
a a
(a) ab = a × b (b) =
b b
Illustration 2.14
529
Find the square root of .
841
529 529
Sol. We have =
841 841
Now, we find the square roots of 529 and 841 separately, as shown below :
23 29
2 5 29 2 8 41
4 4
129 441
43 129 49 441
X X

Thus, 529 = 23 and 841 = 29.

529 529 23
 = = .
841 841 29
Illustration 2.15
583
Find the square root of 42 .
1369
583 58081 58081
Sol. 42 = =
1369 1369 1369

Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -39
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
SQUARES AND SQUARE ROOTS
241 37
2 5 80 81
4 3 13 69
44
180 9
176
481 67 469
481 481 469
X X
 58081 = 241, and 1369 = 37
583 58081 241 19
So, 42 = = = 6 .
1369 1369 37 37
Illustration 2.16
3
Find the value of up to four decimal places.
7
3 3 7 21 21
Sol. = = = .
7 77 77 7
Now, we evaluate 21 up to four places of decimal as given below.
4.5825
4 21.00 00 00 00
16
85 500
425
908 7500
7264
9162 23600
18324
91645 527600
458225
69375
3 21 4.5825
Thus, = = = 0.6546
7 7 7
Illustration 2.17

Find the value of 15625 and from this value, evaluate 156.25 + 1.5625 .
Sol. We find the value of 15625 as shown below :
125
1 1 56 25
1
22 56
44
1225
245 1225
X
 15625 = 125.
15625 15625 15625 15625
So, 156.25 + 1.5625 = + = 
100 10000 100 10000
125 125
= + = 12.5 + 1.25 = 13.75
10 100

Illustration 2.18
Find the value of 99 × 396 .
Sol. 99 × 396 = 99  396
= 3  3  11  3  3  2  2  11
= 3 × 3 × 2 × 11 = 198.
(v) Square Root of Numbers in Decimal Form :
Make the number of decimal places even by affixing a zero, if necessary. Now, mark period
and find out the square root by the long-division method. Put the decimal point in the
square root as soon as the integral part is exhausted.
Illusration 2.19
Find the square root of 176.252176
Sol. Here, the number of decimal places is already even. So, mark the periods and proceed as
follows :
13.276
11 76.25 21 76
1
23 76
69
262 725
524
2647 20121
18529
26546 159276
159276
X

 176.252176 = 13.276.
Illustration 2.20
Find the square root of 0.00059049.
Sol. Here, the number of decimal places is even. So, we mark the periods and find the square
roots as shown below.
.0243
2 0.00 05 90 49
4
190
44 176
1449
483 1449
X
 0.00059049 = 0.0243.
Illustration 2.21

Find the value of 2 correct up to three places of decimal.

Sol. Since we have to find the value of 2 correct up to three decimal places. We shall find its
value up to four decimal places. We may write 2 = 2.00000000.
Now, mark the period and proceed as follows.

2 = 1.4142 up to four places of decimal.

= 1.414 correct up to three places of decimal. Hence, 2 = 1.414

A sk yourself

1. Find the square roots of the following natural numbers by the prime factorisation method.
(i) 2401 (ii) 7225

2. Find the square roots of the following fractions by the prime factorisation method
49 484
(i) (ii)
64 625
3. Find the square roots of the following decimal fractions by the division method.
(i) 44.89 (ii) 4.5796

4. Find the square roots of the following numbers, correct up to 3 decimal places
(i) 13 (ii) 1458

5. Find the smallest and greatest 5-digit numbers that are perfect squares.

6. The area of square is 729 sqm. find the dimension of the square?

7. Find the smallest square number that is divisible by each of the numbers 2, 3, 6, 10 ?
Answres.
7 22
1. (i) 49 (ii) 85 2. (i) (ii) 3. (i) 6.7 (ii) 2.14
8 25
4. (i) 3.606 (ii) 38.184 5. 10000, 99856 6. 27 7. 900

A dd t o Your K nowledge

(1) Rationalisation of denominator :- When the denominator of an expression contains a

term with a square root the process of converting to an equivalent expression whose
denominator is a rational number
For example :-
1
Rationalize the denominator of
75 3
1 75 3 75 3 75 3
= × = 2 2
= .
75 3 75 3 (7)  (5 3 ) 26

Concept Map
Square and Square Roots
Squre Root
When a number is multiplied with it self
Square of 7 is 7× 7 = 49. Squre root of no x, in that no whose square is x
Ex. Sq. root of 64 is 8 because 82 = 64. 64 = 8
Perfect Square
A natural no. is perfect sq. Prime factorization
if it is sq. of some natural no.
36 is perfect sq because Q. Find sq. root of 36
it is the me sq. of 6 Sol. 36 = 2 × 2 ×3 × 3 2 36
=2×3=6 2 18
Properties of perfect square
3 9
No. ending with 2,3,7,8 never be a perfect square 3 3
No. ending with odd no of zero never be a perfect sq. 1

diff of square of two consecutive natural no. is equal

2 2
to their sum. (n+1) – n = (n+1) + (n)
2 2 2
Pythogorean triplet (x,y,z) if z = x + y Long Division method.
Q. find sq. root 58081
241
Square by diagonal method. 2 58081
2
25 2 4
2 5 44 180
0 1 +4 176
2
4 0 481 481
481
5 1 2 ×
0 5 58081 = 241

0 6 2 5 252 = 625
Successive subtraction
We successive subtract odd no from the given no.
till we get zero. The number of time we subtract is
Squre root of fraction the square root of the no.
Square by column method
2
to find 25 , take a = 2, b = 5 Ex. 16
a× b= a × b 16 – 1 = 15
2
a2 2ab b a a 15 – 3 = 2
= 12 – 5 = 7
2
2
2 5 52 b b
7 – 7 = 0 so 16 = 4
4 20 25 Ex. 529 529 23
= =
+2 +2 841 841 29
6 22
Ex. 36 × 49 = 36 × 49 = 6 × 7 = 42
2
25 = 625

Summary

1. A perfect square number is never negative.

2. A square number never ends in 2, 3, 7 or 8.

3. A perfect square number leaves a remainder 0 or 1 on division by 3.

4. A number m is a square root of n, if n = m × m = m2. Positive square root of n is written

as n .

5. If p and q are perfect squares (q  0), then

p p
(i) pq = p × q (ii) = .
q q

6. The pairing of numbers in the division method starts from the decimal point. For the integral
part, it goes from right to left and for the decmial part, it goes from left to right.

7. If a positive number is not a perfect square, then an approximate value of its square root
may be obtained by the division method.

p p
8. If p and q are not perfect squares, then to find , we may express as a decimal
q q
number and then use the division method.

9. If n is not a perfect square, then n is not a rational number.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Which one is perfect square :
(A) 356 (B) 225 (C) 146 (D) 1064

2. The square of 64 is :
(A) 4026 (B) 4096 (C) 4076 (D) 4086

3. The value of (501)2 – (500)2 is :

(A) 1 (B) 101 (C) 1001 (D) None of these

4. The value of 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9 + .............+ 25 is :

(A) 196 (B) 625 (C) 225 (D) 169

5. If a square number ends in 6, the preceding number is :

(A) An even number (B) An odd number (C) A prime number (D) A composite number

6. The least number which must be subtracted from 2509 to make it a perfect square is :
(A) 6 (B) 9 (C) 12 (D) 14

7. The least perfect square which is divisible by 2, 4, and 6 is :

(A) 36 (B) 64 (C) 16 (D) 144

8. The value of 0.25 is :

(A) 0.5 (B) 0.6 (C) 0.9 (D) 0.4

9. Evaluate : 41  21  19  9 .
(A) 3 (B) 6 (C) 5 (D) 6.4

16 n
10. If = , then n =
49 49
(A) 4 (B) 7 (C) 16 (D) 28

27 x
11. If 1 =1+ , then x =
169 13
(A) 1 (B) 14
(C) Cannot be determined (D) None

12. A four digit square number whose first two digits and last two digits taken respectively are
also perfect square numbers is :
(A) 1681 (B) 1636 (C) 3664 (D) 6481

 225 25  16
13. Simplify :    .
 729 144  81
1 5 5
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these
48 48 16
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -45
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
SQUARES AND SQUARE ROOTS

14. If m is a perfect square number, then the next immediate square number is :
(A) m + 5 (B) m + 2 m + 1 (C) m2 + 2m (D) None of these
15. There are 540 students in a school. For a P.T drill, they have to stand in such a manner
that the number of rows is equal to number of Columns. How many minimum number of
students would be left out in this arrangements.
(A) 22 Students (B) 11 Students (C) 40 Students (D) 29 Students
16. The suare root of a perfect square containing n digits has ............ digits.
n 1
(A) (B) n/2 (C) A or B (D) None
2
FILL IN THE BLANKS
1. _____ is the least number which should be subtracted from 1029 to make it a perfect
square.

2. 6, 8 and ______ are pythagorean triplet.

3. ______ is the least perfect square number.

4. ______is the sum of first 10 perfect squares.

5. The number of zeroes at end of a perfect square is always __________.

6. Square root of 14641 is ______.

7. Squar root of 390625 is ______.

25 x
8. If is , then x is ______.
81 10

9. The square root of an even number is _______ and square root of an odd number is _____

TRUE / FALSE
1. 3, 4, 5 are pythagorean triplet

2. 9 is a perfect square.

3. 80 is a perfect square.

4. A perfect square is always a even number.

5. Square root of 21 is 4.5825.

6. A perfect square number can also be a prime number.

7. ab = a × b

8. Square root of 1.5625 is 1.25.

9. Square root of negative number is real number.

10. Square root of any positive number is always integer.

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Match the squares in column –I with their square roots in column–II.
Column – I Column – II
(A) 841 (p) 19
(B) 361 (q) 17
(C) 64 (r) 18
(D) 289 (s) 29
(E) 324 (t) 8

2. Match the least value, that should be subtracted from the values of column–I, to make
them a perfect square, with the values in column–II.
Column – I Column – II
(A) 229 (p) 5
(B) 103 (q) 6
(C) 448 (r) 4
(D) 329 (s) 3
(E) 87 (t) 7
(F) 129 (u) 8

3. Column – I Column – II

(A) Units digit of 362 (p) 1

(B) Number of first consecutive (q) 3

odd natural numbers whose
sum is 64

(C) Unit digit of the square 89 (r) 6

(D) Non-perfect square

numbers between 52 and 62 (s) 8

(E) Number of digits in the square (t) 10

root of a 5-digit square number

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Is 53361 a perfect square ?

2. Find the square of 121 by diagonal method.

3. Find the square of 37 using column method.

4. Without actual adding find the sum of

(a) 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9 + 11 + 13 (b) 15 + 17 + 19 + 21 + 23 + 25

5. Find the smallest number by which 252 must be multiplied to get a perfect square. Also find
the square root of the perfect square so obtained.

6. Find the smallest number by which 108 must be divided to get a perfect square. Also find
the square root of the perfect square so obtained.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

7. Find Pythagorean triplet one of whose numbers is :

(a) 10 (b) 14

x
8. Find x. If = 2 1 .
5
1 1
9. If x + = 2, then find x2 + 2 .
x x

10. Find the square root of 0.00088804.

11. A general, wishing to arrange his 120419 men in the form of a square, found that he had
10 extra men, find the number of men in the front row.

12. The products of two numbers is 1296. If one number is 16 times the other, find the
numbers.

13. There are 1521 students in a school. P.T teacher wants them to stand in rows and columns
such that the number of rows is equal to the number of columns. Find the number of rows.

14. Find the least number that must be subtracted from 5607 so as to get a perfect square.
Also find the square root of the perfect square.

LONG ANSWER TYPE

15. Write each of the following as the difference of the squares of consecutive natural
numbers:
(a) 23 (b) 15

2
16. Find the square root of up to 3 decimal places.
3

a
17. If 0.04  0.4  a  0.004  4  b , then find the value of .
b

18. Find the least four digit number which is a perfect square.

19. The area of a square field is 60025 m2. A man cycles along its boundary at 18 km/h. In how
much time will he return to the starting point.

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Given 5 = 2.236 the value of 45 + 605 – 245 correct to 3 decimal places is :

(A) 15.652 (B) 11.180 (C) 18.652 (D) 16.652

2. If x  y = x 2  y 2 , the value of (1 2 2) (1 2 2) is :

(A) –7 (B) 0 (C) 2 (D) 9

3. If A and B are real numbers and A2 + B2 = 0, then :

(A) A > 0, B < 0 (B) A < 0, B > 0 (C) A = 0 = B (D) A = – B

1  2  3  .......  12  11  10  ....  2  1
4. .=
1  2  ....  6  5  ....  2  1
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 6

5. The value of 214  130  88  44  25 :

(A) 14 (B) 15 (C) 16 (D) 17

1 1 1 1 1 1
6. The value of 1  [1  1  (1  1  1 )] is :
2 2 2 2 2 4
1 1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) 1
2 4 16 5

7. The sum of the squares of two number is 3341 and the difference of their squares is 891.
The two numbers are :
(A) 46, 35 (B) 45, 36 (C) 36, 15 (D) 46, 36

1
8. If (12 +22 +32 +42 +52)2 = , then P is :
P
1 1
(A) (B) 3125 (C) (D) 3025
3125 3025

9. Physical Instructor wants to arrange boys in rows to form a perfect square. He finds that in
doing so, 25 boys are left out. If the total number of boys is 1250 then find the number of
boys in each row is :
(A) 25 (B) 125 (C) 45 (D) 35

10. The number of value of n for which 10n +8 is a perfect square where n is any natural
number
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 4 (D) infinite values

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. The rationalising factor of 5  2 6 is

(A) 2 6  5 (B) 6  10 (C) 6  2 5 (D) 5  2 6

3 2
12. If 5 = 2.236 and 2 = 1.414, then find + =?
5 2 5 2
(A) 2.2653 (B) 2.2553 (C) 3.2653 (D) 3.2553

3 3
13. The number is
3 3
(A) rational (B) irrational (C) both (D) can’t say

EXERCISE 03
SECTION -A (PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

1 x
1. If x  = 3 then 2 is [Aryabhatta – 2002
x x 1
1 1
(A) 9 (B) (C) 13 (D)
3 13

2. 5  10  x = 3, then the value of x is [Aryabhatta - 2006]

(A) 49 (B) 36 (C) 16 (D) 25

x2  1 1 4
3. If = , then 4x2 + 2 is [Aryabhatta - 2007]
x 2 x
(A) – 7 (B) 7 (C) 9 (D) – 9

4. 7 7 7 7 7 7 is equal to [Aryabhatta - 2007]

(A) 0 (B) 7 (C) 763/64 (D) 731/32

5. Between which two consecutive whole number 1,000 lies? (IMO 2010)
(A) 29 and 30 (B) 30 and 31 (C) 31 and 32 (D) 32 and 33

6. The Wright brothers had their first successful flight near Kitty Hawk, North Carolina Mr.
Satish finds it easy to remember the year in which the flight occurred because the number
3,621,502 , the square root of his telephone number is nearest to a whole number. In
which year did the flight occur? (IMO 2010)
(A) 1902 (B) 1903 (C) 1904 (D) 1905

7. Which of the following is a pythagorean triplet ? [NSTSE 2011]

(A) 16, 18, 20 (B) 1, 2, 3 (C) 30, 40, 50 (D) 50, 51, 52

8. Mehul plants 15376 apple trees in his garden and arranges them so that there are as many
rows as there are apple trees in each row. The number of rows is. (IMO 2011)
(A) 124 (B) 126 (C) 134 (D) 144

9. The square of which number below will contain the first nine natural numbers
[NSTSE 2012]
(A) 1111111 (B) 11111111 (C) 111111111 (D) 1111111111

10. Which of the following describes a square root of 41? (IMO 2012)
(A) Between 5 and 6 (B) Between 6 and 7
(C) Between 20 and 21 (D) Between 40 and 42

11. Garima wants to plant 50625 roses and arranges them in such a way that there are as
many rows as there are roses in a row. The number of roses in a row are ________.
(IMO 2012)
(A) 365 (B) 165 (C) 625 (D) 225

    3  2 2 8  5 
12. Identify the value of the given expression         [NSTSE - 2013]
    4  5  9  16 
1 1
(A) (B) 10 (C) 4 (D)
2 2 5

13. If k = 49 – 12 5 , then find the value of k + 2. [IOM 2017]

(A) 2  3 3 (B) 3 5 (C) 5 2 (D) 2 7

14. Which one among the following is a perfect square ? [IOM 2017]
(A) 343396 (B) 300302 (C) 407043 (D) 427718

15. Find the square root of a five digit number 49abc where a, b and c are non-zero digits such
that b = a3 = 2c [IOM 2019]
(A) 202 (B) 122 (C) 222 (D) 242

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ans. B B C D B B A A B D A A C B B C

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 5 2. 10 3. 1 4. 385 5. Even
50
6. 121 7. 625 8. 9. Even, Odd
9
TRUE / FALSE
1. True 2. True 3. False 4. False 5. True
6. False 7. True 8. True 9. False 10. False

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. (A) – s, (B) – p, (C) – t, (D) – q, (E) – r
2. (A) – r, (B) – s, (C) – t, (D) – p, (E) – q, (F)–u
3. (A) – r, (B) – s, (C) – p, (D) – t, (E) – q

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. Yes 2. 14641 3. 1369
4. (a) 49 (b) 120 5. 7, 42 6. 3,6
SHORT ANSWER TYPE
7. (a) (6, 8, 10) (10, 24, 26) (b) (14, 48, 50) 8. 15 + 10 3 9. 2

10. 0.0298 11. 347 12. 144, 9 13. 39

14. 131, 74

LONG ANSWER TYPE

15. (a) 122 – 112 (b) 8 2– 7 2 16. 0.816 17. 16  10–3

18. 1024 19. 3 min. 16 sec.

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Ans. A D C C B A B C D A D D B

EXERCISE 03
SECTION -A (PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. B B C C C B C A C B D C B A C

03
CHAPTER

CUBES & CUBE ROOTS

TERMINOLOGIES

Perfect cube, Cube root, Prime factorization, Column method.

INTRODUCTION
In the last class, we have discussed square and square roots of a number. In this class we
will study methods to find cubes of a number and cube roots of a number by prime
factorisation, Unit digit and successive subtraction.

3.1 CUBES
The cube of a number is that number raised to the power 3. Thus, 23 = (2 × 2 × 2) = 8 and
we say that the cube of 2 is 8, 33 = (3 × 3 × 3) = 27 and we say that the cube of 3 is 27,
and so on.
(a) Perfect Cube
A natural number is said to be a perfect cube if it is the cube of some natural number.
We have, 13 = 1, 23 = 8, 33 = 27, 43 = 64, 53 = 125, 63 = 216, 73 = 343, 83 = 512, 93 = 729,
103 = 1000, etc. So, it follows that each of the numbers 1, 8, 27, 64, 125, 216, 343, 512,
729 and 1000 is a perfect cube.
(b) Testing for Perfect Cubes
In order to test whether a given natural number is a perfect cube or not, we follow the
following steps :
(i) Obtain the natural number.
(ii) Express the given natural number as a product of prime factors.
(iii) Group the factors in triplets in such a way that all the three factors in each triplet are
equal.
(iv) If no factor is left over in grouping in step III, then the number is a perfect cube,
otherwise not. To find the natural number whose cube is the given number, take
one factor from each triplet and multiply them. The cube of the number so obtained
will be the given number.
Illustration 3.1
Is 27000 a perfect cube ? What is the number whose cube is 27000 ?
Sol. Resolving 27000 into prime factor. We get
2 27000
2 13500
2 6750
3 3375
3 1125
3 375
5 125
5 25
5 5
1

27000 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 5 × 5 × 5
Grouping the factors in triplets of equal factor, we get
27000 = { 2 × 2 × 2} × {3 × 3 × 3} × {5 × 5 × 5}
We find that the prime factor of 27000 can be grouped into triplets of equal factor and no
factor is left over. Therefore, 27000 is perfect cube.To determine the number whose cube
is 27000, we collect one factor from each group. Taking one factor from each triplet, we
obtain 2 × 3 × 5 = 30.
Thus, 27000 is the cube of 30.
Illustration 3.2
What is the smallest number by which 392 must be multiplied so that the product is a
perfect cube.
Sol. Resolving 392 into prime factor, we get
2 392
2 196
2 98
7 49
7 7
1
392 = {2 × 2 × 2} × 7 × 7
Grouping the factor in triplets of equal factors, we get
392 = {2 × 2 × 2} × 7 × 7
We find that 2 occurs as a prime factor of 392 thrice but 7 occurs as a prime factor only
twice. Thus, if we multiply 392 by 7,7 will also occur as a prime factor thrice and the
product will be 2 × 2 × 2 × 7 × 7 × 7, which is a perfect cube.Hence, we must multiply 392
by 7 so that the product becomes a perfect cube.
Illustration 3.3
What is the smallest number by which 3087 must be divided so that the quotient is a
perfect cube ?
Sol. Resolving 3087 into prime factors, we get
3 3087
3 1029
7 343
7 49
7 7
1
3087 = 3 × 3 × 7 × 7 × 7
Grouping the factors in triplets of equal factors, we get 3087 = 3 × 3 × {7 × 7 × 7}
Clearly, if we divide 3087 by 3 × 3 = 9, the quotient would be 7 × 7 × 7 which is a perfect
cube. Therefore, we must divide 3087 by 9 so that the quotient is a perfect cube.
(c) Properties of Cubes of Numbers
The cubes of numbers have some interesting properties, given below :
(i) Cubes of all even natural numbers are even. i.e. 23 = 8, 63 = 216, 83 = 512 etc.
(ii) Cubes of all odd natural numbers are odd. i.e. 33 = 27, 53 = 125, 93 = 729 etc.
(iii) Cubes of negative integers are negative.
(–1)3 = (–1) × (–1) × (–1) = –1, (–2)3 = (–2) × (–2) x (–2) = – 8
Similarly, (– 3)3 = – 27, (– 4)3 = – 64, (– 5)3 = –125, and so on.

3
a  a a3
(iv) For any rational number , we have   = 3
b  b b
3
 3 3 3 3 3  3 3 27
For example :   = × × = = .
 5 5 5 5 5  5 5 125
3
 2  ( 2)  ( 2)  ( 2) 8
And   = =
 3 333 27
(v) The sum of the cubes of first n natural numbers is equal to the square of their sum.
i.e. 13 + 23 + 33 + .............. + n3 = (1 + 2 + 3 + .............. n)2
(vi) Cubes of the numbers ending in digits 1, 4, 5, 6 and 9 are the number ending in the
same digit. Cubes of numbers ending in digit 2 ends in 8, and cube of numbers
ending in digit 8 ends in 2. The cubes of the numbers ending in digits 3 and 7 ends
in 7 and 3 respectively.
(d) Methods For Determining The Cubes Of Number
(a) Column Method : We have (a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3
Method for finding the cube of a two digit number with the ten’s digit a and the unit’s digit b,
we make four columns. a3, (3a2b) , (3ab2) and b3
The rest of the procedure is the same as followed in squaring a number by the column
method.
Illustration 3.4
Find the value of (29)3 by the column method.
Sol. Here, a = 2 and b = 9
4 4 81 81
a2 a2 b2 b2 x2 x 27 x6 x9
___ ___ ___ ___
8 108 486 729
×a ×3b ×3a b +16 +55 +72
___ ___ ___
a3 3a2b 3ab2 b3 24 163 558

 (29)3 = 24389
Illustration 3.5
Using column method find the cube of 99.
Sol. Here a = 9, b = 9
81 81 81 81
2 2 2 2 ×9 ×27 ×27 ×9
a a b b
×a ×3b ×3a ×b
729 2187 2187 729
3 2 2 3
+241 +225 +72
a 3a b 3ab b
970 2412 2259

 (99)3 = 970299.
Illustration 3.6
Show that : 1331 is a perfect cube.
Sol. First we resolve 1331 into prime factors.
11 1331
11 121 
11 11
1
 1331 = 11 × 11 × 11
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -56
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
CUBES & CUBE ROOTS

Illustration 3.7
343
Is a cube of a rational number.
512
343
Sol. Here, given number is .
512
Resolve both numerator & denominator into prime factors i.e.
2 512
2 256
2 128
7 343 2 64
7 49 2 32
7 7 2 16
1 2 8
2 4
2 2
1
 343 = 7 × 7 × 7 and 512 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2
Grouping the factors in triplets of equal factors :
We get 343 = 7 × 7 × 7 and 512 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2
343
 343 & 512 both are perfect cubes, therefore is a cube of a rational number.
512

A sk yourself

1. (i) Find the cube of ( – 9).

(ii) Find the cube root of 1331000

2. Is 1188 a perfect cube ? If not, by which smallest natural number should 1188 be divided
so that the quotient is a perfect cube ?

3. Is 243 a pefect cube ? If not find the smallest natural number by which 243 must be
multiplied so that the product is a perfect cube.

4. Check whether 106480 is a perfect cube or not. If not, find the smallest number by which
106480 be divided so that quotient is a perfect cube?

5. Is 40500 a perfect cube?

Answers.
1. (i) – 729 (ii) 110 2. No, 44 3. No, 3 4. No, 10 5. No

3.2 CUBE ROOTS

The cube root of a number x is that number whose cube gives x.
3
The cube root of x is denoted by the symbol x.
3 3 3 3
Thus, 8 = 2, 27 = 3, 64 = 4, 125 = 5 and so on.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -57
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
CUBES & CUBE ROOTS

(a) Cube Roots Through Pattern

Like squares of natural numbers, cubes too have some interesting patterns:
13 = 1
23 = 8
 23 – 13 = 7 = 1 + 2  1  3
33 = 27
 33 – 23 = 19 = 1 + 3  2  3
43 = 64
 43 – 33 = 37 = 1 + 4  3  3
: - :
: - :
93 = 729
93 – 83 = 217 = 1 + 9  8  3
Also, 1= 13
1 + 7 = 23
1+ 7 + 19 = 33
1 + 7 + 19 + 37 = 43
-
-
1 + 7 + 19 + . . . + 217 = 93
Note, that 23 is the sum of first 2 numbers of 1, 7, 19, 37, 61, 91, . . . . . .
The number of times the subtraction is carried out, gives the cube root.
For example :
216 – 1 = 215, 215 – 7 = 208, 208 – 19 = 189, 189 – 37 = 152, 152 – 61 = 91, 91 – 91 = 0.
3
Since we have subtracted six times to get 0, therefore 216 = 6.
Illustration 3.8
Find the cube root of 343.
Sol.
343
–1
342
–7
335
–19
316
–37
279
–61
218
–91
127
–127
0
3
Since the subtraction is performed seven times. Therefore, 343 = 7.
(b) Cubes roots using unit digit
m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3
m 1 8 27 64 125 216 343 512 729 1000

We shall now describe a method that can be used to find cube roots of perfect cubes
having at the most six digits. By looking at table, we observe that the cube of a number
ending in 0, 1, 4, 5, 6 and 9 ends in 0, 1, 4, 5, 6 and 9 respectively. However, the cube of
number ending in 2 ends in 8 and vice versa. Similarly, the cube of a number ending in 3 or
7 ends in 7 or 3 respectively. Thus, by looking the unit digit of a perfect cube number, we
can determine the unit digit of its cube root.
Now consider a number which is a perfect cube and has at the most six digits. The cube
root of such a number has at the most two digits, because the least seven digit number is
1000000 (= 1003) and its cube root 100 is a three digit number. We determine the two digits
of the cube root as follows
Step (i) : Look at the digit at the unit place of the perfect cube and determine the digit at
the unit place in the cube root as discussed above.
Step (ii) : Strike out from the right, last three (i.e., units, tens and hundreds) digits of the
number. If nothing is left, we stop. The digit in Step 1 is the cube root.
Step (iii) : Consider the number left from Step 2. Find the largest single digit number
whose cube is less than or equal to this left over number. This is the ten’s digit of the cube
root.
Illustration 3.9
Find the cube roots of the following numbers :
(i) 512 (ii) 2197 (iii) 117649 (iv) 636056
Sol. (i) 512 The unit digit of 512 is 2. Therefore, the digit at the unit place in the cube root is
8. Since no number is left after striking out the units, tens and hundreds digits of the
number, the required cube root is 8.
(ii) 2197 Here, unit digit is 7. Therefore, unit digit of the cube root is 3. After striking out
the last three digits from the right, we are left with the number 2. Now 1 is the
largest number whose cube is less than 2. Therefore, the ten’s digit is 1.
Thus, the required cube root is 13.
(iii) 117649 : Here, unit digit is 9. Therefore, the unit digit of the cube root is 9. Striking
out the last three digit from the right, the number left is 117. Now 43 = 64 < 117 and
53 = 125 > 117.
Hence, the tens digit of the cube root is 4.
3
 117649 = 49
(iv) 636056 : Here, unit digit of the cube root is 6.
Also, 83 < 636 and 93 > 636.
Hence, ten’s digit of the cube root is 8
3
 636056 = 86
(c) To find the cube roots of a perfect cube by prime factorisation
(i) Find the prime factors of the given perfect cube.
(ii) Make triplets (groups of three) of similar factors.
(iii) Take one factor from each triplet and multiply.
(iv) The product will be the cube root of the given number.

Illustration 3.10
Find the cube root of 4096.
Sol. Resolving 4096 into prime factors, we get
2 4096
2 2048
2 1024
2 512
2 256
2 128
2 64
2 32
2 16
2 8
2 4
2 2
1
Thus, 4096 = 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 
3
  4096 2 2 2 2 = 16.
Illustration 3.11
Find the cube root of : 531441.
Sol. Resolving 531441 into prime factors, we get
3 531441
3 177147
3 59049
3 19683
3 6561
3 2187
3 729
3 243
3 81
3 27
3 9
3
531441= 3 3 3  3 3 3  3 3 3  3 3 3
3
 531441 = 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 = 81
(d) Cube roots of rational number and negative number
(i) Cube Root of a Negative Perfect Cube :
If a is positive integer then – a is a negative integer.
We know that (–a)3 = – a3.

3
So, a 3 = – a
3
In general, we have x = 3 x .
(ii) Cube Root of Product of Integers
For any two integers a and b, we have
3
ab  3 a  3 b
(iii) Cube Roots of Rational Numbers
3
 a a3
We know that   = 3
 b b
3
a a
Similarly, 3 = 3
.
b b
Illustration 3.12
Find the cube root of – 2744.
3 3
Sol. We have 2744   2744
Now, we resolve 2744 into prime factors and find that
2 2744
2 1372
2 686
7 343
7 49
7 7
1
2744 = 2 2 2 7 7 7
 3
2744 =  2  7  14 .
3
Hence, 2744 =  3 2744 = – 14.
Illustration 3.13
3
Show that 125  64 = 3 125  3 64 .
Sol. 125 × 64 = 5 5 5 4 4 4.
 3
125  64   5  4  20
3 3 3 3
Now, 125 = 555 5 and, 64 = 444  4
 3
125  3 64 =  5  4  20
3
Hence, 125  64 = 3 125  3 64
Illustration 3.14
Show that 3 216   343 = 3
216  3 343 .
Sol. We have :
216   343 =   216  343 =   6  6  6  7  7  7 .
 3 216   343 = – (6 × 7) = – 42.

Again, 3
216 = 3
6  6  6 = 6 and 3
343 = – 3 343 = – 3 7  7  7 = –7
3 3
 216 × 343 = 6 × (–7) = –42.
3 3
Hence, 3
216  ( 343) = 216 × 343
Illustration 3.15
Show that
3 3
216 216 125 125
(i) 3 = 3
(ii) 3 = 3
2197 2197 512 512
3
216 666 6 6 6  6
Sol. (i) = = × × =  
2197 13  13  13 13 13 13  13 
216 6
 3 = ,
2197 13
3 3 3
Again, 216 = 6  6  6 = 6 and 2197 = 3 13  13  13 = 13.
3
216 6
 3
= .
2197 13
3
216 216
Hence, 3 = 3
.
2197 2197
3
125 ( 5)  ( 5)  (5)  5   5   5   5 
(ii) = = × × = .
512 888  8   8   8   8 
125 5
 3 =
512 8
3 3 3
Again, 125 = 3
( 5)  ( 5)  ( 5) = (– 5) and 512 = 888 = 8
3
125 5
 3
= .
512 8
3
125 125
Hence, 3 = 3
.
512 512
Illustration 3.16
Find the cube root of 4.096.
3
3 4096 4096
Sol. 4.096 = 3 = 3
1000 1000
Resolving 4096 into prime factors,
we get
4096 = 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2.
3
 4096 = (2 x 2 x 2 x 2) = 16.
3
Also, 1000 = 3 10  10  10 = 10.
3
4096 16
So, 3
= = 1.6
1000 10
3
Hence, 4.096 = 1.6

A sk yourself

1. Find the cube root of the following :

(i) 0.000343 (ii) 412 × 615 × 721

2. What is an edge of a cube whose volume is 91125 m3 ?

3. Find the cube root of – 8 / 3375.

3
729  3 343 3
4. Evaluate 3
. 5. Evaluate 512  2197
512

3
512  3 216 3
6. Find 3
7. Find 0.027  2.744
343
Answres.
–2
1. (i) 0.07 (ii) 213 × 35 × 77 2. 45 3. 4. 2
15
5. 104 6. 2 7. 0.42

A dd t o Your K nowledge

1. Sum and difference of the cubes of 2 numbers is divisible by the sum and difference of the
numbers itself.

2. Product of 3 consecutive natural numbers is always divisible by ‘6’.

Concept Map

The cube of no. is obtained when no. is multiplied

by itself 3 times. Cube of x is x  x  x

Per fect cube

Cube r oot s
A natural no. is said to be a perfect cube if it is the
cube of same natural no. The cube root of a no. is x that no
whose cube gives x.
Ex. Cube root of 8 is 2 because
23 = 8
3
Pr oper t ies of per fect cube 8 =2

(i) Cube of even no is even.

(ii) Cube of odd no. is odd
(iii) Cube of negative no is negative. Cube r oot by pr ime fact or izat ion
(iv) The sum of the cube of first n natural
3 216 Ex.
no. is equal to the squre of their sum. 3
13 + 23 + 33 + .... + n3 = (1 + 2 + 3 + .... n)2 –512 –512
2 216 3 =
2 108 125 3 125
(v) Cubes of the numbers ending in digits 2 54 3
1, 4, 5, 6 and 9 are the number ending in the –8  –8  –8
3 27 3
same digit. Cubes of numbers ending in digit 3 3 5 5 5
2 ends in 8, and cube of numbers ending in 3 3 8
digit 8 ends in 2. The cubes of the numbers =–
5
ending in digits 3 and 7 ends in 7 and 3 3 216 = 3 2  2  2  3  3 3 = 2  3 = 6
respectively.

Cube by column met hod

to find 253 , take a = 2, b = 5 Cube r oot by pat t er n
2
a3 3a b 3ab2 b3 We have to successively subtract 1,7,19,37,61,91
2 2
2
3
3 2 5 3 2 5 53 ............... from number till we get zero. The no of
time we subtract give the cube root.
8 60 150 125 Ex. 3
+7 +16 +12 64 64 – 1 = 63
63 – 7 = 56
15 76 162
56 – 19 = 37
3 37 – 37 = 0
25 = 15625
So 3 64 = 4

Summary

1. A number n is a perfect cube, if there is an integer m such that n = m3.

2. If n is a perfect cube and n = m3, then m is a cube root of n. A cube root of n is written as
3
n .

3. The units digit of the cube root of a perfect cube can be determined with the help of the
units digit of the perfect cube.

4. The cube root of a perfect cube can be obtained by prime factorisation of the number.

5. The cube root of a product of two perfect cubes is the product of the cube roots of the
3 3 3
perfect cubes, i.e., ab = a · b .

6. The cube root of a quotient of two perfect cubes is the quotient of their cube roots, i.e.,
3
a a
3 = 3
, b  0, where a and b are perfect cubes.
b b

7. The cube root of a negative perfect cube is negative.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Total number of perfect cubes from 1 to 100 are :

(A) 2 (B) 5 (C) 6 (D) 4

2. The length of each side of the cubical box is 2.4 m. Its volume is :
(A) 13.824 m3 (B) 14.824 m3 (C) 16.934 m3 (D) 18.824 m3

3. How many such numbers are there which are equal to their cube but not equal to their
square ?
(A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 0 (D) 3

4. If 72 × k is a perfect cube, then the value of k is :

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

5. The smallest number by which 32 must be multiplied to get a perfect cube is :

(A) 16 (B) 4 (C) 2 (D) 8

6. The smallest number by which 32 must be divided to get a perfect cube is :

(A) 16 (B) 4 (C) 2 (D) 8

7. Choose the correct statement ?

(A) Cubes of odd natural numbers are odd
(B) Cubes of even natural numbers are even
(C) Cubes of negative integers are negative
(D) All of the above

8. The largest four digit number which is perfect cube, is:

(A) 8000 (B) 9261 (C) 9999 (D) None of these

9. The cube root of 1.331 is :

(A) 0.11 (B) 0.011 (C) 11 (D) 1.1

10. Find the cube root of – (8000).

(A) – 20 (B) – 40 (C) – 60 (D) – 15

11. The value of (33  43  53 )1/ 3 is equal to :

(A) 6 (B) 12 (C) 36 (D) 216

12. The value of 125 3 a6 – 3 125 a6 is :

(A) 120 a2 (B) 100 a2 (C) 100 a (D) – 125 a

0.027 0.09
13. Evaluate : 3  – 1.
0.008 0.04
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 9 (D) 4

16 4 3
14. 3 16 = × x , then x is :
27 3
(A) 7 (B) 16 (C) 10 (D) None

15. The cube of a number is 8 times the cube of another number. If the sum of the cubes of
numbers is 243, the difference of the numbers is :
(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) None of these

16. Three numbers are in ratio 2 : 3 : 4. The sum of their cubes is 33957, then greatest number
is :
(A) 14 (B) 21 (C) 28 (D) 35

17. If 3 18  2.621, then 3 0.018 is :

(A) 0.2621 (B) 0.02621 (C) 262.1 (D) 26.21

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. _______ is the least number which is a perfect square as well as a perfect cube.

2. Number of digits in the cube of a two-digit number may be ________.

3. If a number ends in two 9’s, then its cube ends in ________ number of 9’s.

4. Cube root of a odd number is always a _______ number.

5. The cube of a number is 27 times the cube of other number and sum of both the number is
16, then the difference of both the number is _______.

6. Cube root of 0.729 is _______.

7. Cube root of a perfect even cube is ________ and the perfect odd cube is________.

3
8. a 6 .b 9 = ________.

3
9. 26  53  39 is ________

 3 729  3 216  3 27 
 3 
 
10. is _______.
3

TRUE / FALSE

1. A perfect cube can end with even number of zeroes.

2. A perfect cube does not end with two zeros.

3. The cube of a 2 digit number may be a 3 digit number.

4. The cube of a 2 digit number may have seven or more digits.

5. If n is a multiple of 2, then n3 is also a multiple of 2.

6. The cubes of the digits 1,4,5,6 and 9 are the numbers ending in the same digits 1,4,5,6 and
9 respectively.

7. If n ends in 3, then n3 ends in 7.

8. There is no perfect cube which ends in 8.

9. The cube root of a perfect cube can be obtained by prime factorisation of a number.

10. The cube root of 8 is 3.

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Match the cubes in column–I with their cube roots in column–II

Column – I Column – II
(A) 1331 (p) 4
(B) 64 (q) 8
(C) 343 (r) 10
(D) 216 (s) 11
(E) 1000 (t) 6
(F) 512 (u) 7

2. What should be subtracted from column–I to make them a perfect cube

Column – I Column – II
(A) 65 (p) 5
(B) 31 (q) 0
(C) 343 (r) 2
(D) 130 (s) 1
(E) 11 (t) 4
(F) 3 (u) 3

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Find the smallest number which is a perfect cube and also multiple of 9.

2. What number should 1512 be divided to make it a perfect cube.

3 3 3
3. Evaluate : 27 + 0.008 + 0.064 .

3
4. Evaluate : 125  64

3
5. Evaluate : 4 3  63 .

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. Find the smallest number by which 2560 must be multiplied, so that the product is perfect
cube.

7. Find the smallest number by which 10368 must be divided, so that the quotent is perfect
cube.

3 3 3
8. Show that : 125  216 = 125 × 216 .

9. Find the cube root of 0.001728.

10. Find the cube root of 233,744.896

LONG ANSWER TYPE

11. By what smallest natural number should – 6125 be multiplied so that the product becomes
a perfect cube ?

12. What is the smallest number by which 1600 must be divided, so that the quotient is perfect
cube.

13. If 3p is a perfect cube then prove that p is a multiple of 9.

14. Prove that if a number is tripled then its cubes will be 27 times the cube of the given
number.

15. Find the cube roots of number 941192.

33 729  53 – 0.008
16. Evaluate :
3 3
512 – 3 64

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
0.125
1. Cube root of is
64
5 0.5 0.05 0.005
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 4 4 4
343
2. The value of 3 × 64 is
125
(A) 11.2 (B) 1.12 (C) 112 (D) None of these

3. The perfect cube nearest to 2750 is

(A) 2249 (B) 2747 (C) 2744 (D) 2754

4. If 3 50 = 3.684 the cube of 0.3684 is

(A) 5 (B) 50 (C) 0.5 (D) 0.05

5. Total surface area of a cube is 294 cm2 then its volume is

(A) 7 (B) 49 (C) 343 (D) None of these

6. The volume of a cube is numerically equal to its surface area then the side of the cube is
(A) 1 cm (B) 6 cm (C) 9 cm (D) None of these

n(n  1)
7. We know that 13  23  33  ........  n 3 = for all natural numbers. Using the
2
above result the value of 13  23  33  13  23 is
3 3
(A) 2 (B) 33 + 43 (C) 3 2  4 2 (D) None of these

8. Two times the square of a number is three times of its cube. The number is
3 2 9 4
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 4 9

9. 13 + 23 + 33 + .............. + 103=
(A) 3025 (B) 5050 (C) 1225 (D) 1625

10. 213 + 223 + 233 + .............. + 303 =

(A) 44100 (B) 216225 (C) 172125 (D) none of these

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. 83 – 53 is divisible by
(A) 3 (B) 7 (C) 8 (D) 5

12. 1.2.3+2.3.4+3.4.5+4.5.6+........+2015.2016.2017 is divided by 6 then remainder is

(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 5

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

10  3 8
1. is equal to [Aryabhatta - 2006]
98.4  2.56
(A) 0.12 (B) 0.012 (C) 1.2 (D) 11.2

0.216
2. Cube root of is [Aryabhatta - 2006]
27
(A) 0.2 (B) 0.02 (C) 0.002 (D) 0.06

3. 63 – 53 is always divisible by [Aryabhatta - 2008]

(A) 9 (B) 8 (C) 1 (D) 5

4. 10 + 103 equals [NSTSE - 2009]

(A) 2.0 × 103 (B) 8.0 × 10 3
(C) 4.0 × 10 3
(D) 1.01 × 103

5. By what least number by which 3600 be divided to make it a perfect cube ?

[NSTSE - 2010]
(A) 9 (B) 50 (C) 300 (D) 450

3
6. Find the value of 0.000064 (IMO 2011)
(A) 002 (B) 0.2 (C) 2 (D) None of these

7. The largest four-digit number which is a perfect cube, is__________. (IMO 2012)
(A) 8000 (B) 9261 (C) 9999 (D) None of these

8. The cube of a number is 8 times the cube of another number. If the sum of the cubes of
numbers is 243, then what is the difference of the numbers ? [NSTSE - 2013]
(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) – 6

9. The product 864 × n is a perfect cube. What is the smallest value of ‘n’ ? [NSTSE - 2014]
(A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 4 (D) 3

10. Find the sum of 53 + 63 + 73 +….. + 123 [IOM 2017]

(A) 5984 (B) 5944 (C) 5994 (D) 5934

11. Number of digits in the cube of a three digit number cannot be ______ . [IOM 2019]
(A) 7 (B) 8 (C) 9 (D) 10

2
3
 0.027 2   3
0.000512  –  0.3 4
12. Simplify : 4
[IOM 2019]
 0.2 
(A) 1 (B) 2. (C) 3 (D) 4

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Ans. D A B C C B D B D A A A A A A

Ques. 16 17

Ans. C A

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 1 2. 4 or 5 or 6 3. two 4. odd

5. 8 6. 0.9 7. even, odd 8. a2 b3

9. 22  5  33 10. 2

TRUE / FALSE

1. True 2. True 3. True 4. False 5. True 6. True

7. True 8. False 9. True 10. False

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. (A) – s, (B) – p, (C) – u, (D) – t ,(E) – r, (F) – q

2. (A) – s, (B) – t, (C) – q, (D) – p, (E) – u, (F) – r

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. 27 2. 7 3. 3.6 4. 20 5. 24

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. 25 7. 6 9. 0.12 10. 61.6

LONG ANSWER TYPE

11. 7 12. 25 15. 98 16. – 13

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. B A C D C B A B A C A A

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. A A C D D B B A A A D D

04
CHAPTER

LINEAR EQUATION IN ONE VARIABLE

TERMINOLOGIES
Algebraic expression, Constant, Variables, Linear equation, Degree, Solution, root, term,
Right hand Side, Left hand side, Equation, Standard Form, Statement, Coefficient,
Substitution.

INTRODUCTION
In previous classes, we have learnt about statements of equality called equations involving
only one literal number denoted by x, y, z ect. so the equations in which the highest power
of a variable is one called linear equations. Such an equation is of the form ax + b = c,
where a, b, c are numbers a  0 and x = variable.

4.1 LINEAR EQUATION IN ONE VARIABLE

(a) Equation
An equation is a statement of equality of two algebraic expressions involving constant and
variables. For example : 5x – 7 = 3x + 2.
(b) Linear equation
An equation, in which the maximum degree of a term is one, is called a linear equation.
For example : 2x + 3y = 7.
(c) Linear equation in one variable
A linear equation which has only one variable is called linear equation in one variable. For
example : x + 3 = 5.
General form of the equation is ax + b = 0, where x is variable, a  0 and a, b  R.
(d) Solution
The value of the variable which satisfies the equation is called a solution or a root of the
equation.
(e) The rules used in solving an equation are
1. We can add the same number on both sides of the equation.
2. We can subtract the same number on both sides of the equation.
3. We can multiply both sides of the equation by same non zero number.
4. We can divide both sides of the equation by same non zero number.
5. We can transpose any term of the equation from one side to other with its sign
changed.
Illustration 4.1
Solve : 2x + 1 = 5.
Sol. 2x + 1 = 5 [Subtract 1 from both the sides]
 2x + 1 – 1 = 5 – 1  2x = 4  x = 2.

Illustration 4.2
x 5
Solve : – =6
3 2
x 5 x 5 5 5 5
Sol. – =6   –   = 6 + [Adding to both sides]
3 2 3 2 2 2 2
x 5 x 17 51
  = 6   = x 
3 2 3 2 2
51
Thus, x = is the solution of the given equation.
2
Illustration 4.3
x 1
Solve : +1= .
3 12
Sol. Given equation is :
x 1
 +1=
3 12
x 1
 = –1 [Carrying 1 on other side and changing its sign]
3 12
x –11
 
3 12
x 11
 3  – 3 [Multiplying both sides by 3]
3 12
11
 x–
4
11
So, x = – is the solution of the given equation.
4
Illustration 4.4
Solve : (5x – 1) (x + 3) = (x – 5) (5x + 1) + 40
Sol. Given equation :
 (5x – 1) (x + 3) = (x – 5) (5x + 1) + 40
 5x2 + 15x – x – 3 = 5x2 + x – 25x – 5 + 40 [Removing the brackets]
 5x2 + 14 x – 3 = 5x2 – 24x + 35
 5x2 + 14x – 5x2 + 24x = 35 + 3
38
 38 x = 38  x=  x = 1.
38
Illustration 4.5
Solve : [(2x + 3) + (x + 5)]2 + [(2x + 3) – (x + 5)]2 = 10x2 + 92
Sol. Given equation : [(2x + 3) + (x + 5)]2 + [(2x + 3) – (x + 5)]2 = 10x2 + 92
 (2x + 3 + x + 5)2 + (2x + 3 – x – 5)2 = 10x2 + 92
 (3x + 8)2 + (x – 2)2 = 10x2 + 92
 9x2 + 48x + 64 + x2 – 4x + 4 = 10x2 + 92
[(a + b)2 = (a2 + 2ab + b2), (a – b)2 = (a2 – 2ab + b2)]
 10x2 + 44x + 68 = 10x2 + 92
 10x2 + 44x – 10x2 = 92 – 68
24 6
 44x = 24   x=  x= .
44 11

Illustration 4.6
2x  1 9
Solve : 
3 x  2 10
2x  1 9
Sol. 
3 x  2 10
 10 (2x + 1) = 9 (3x – 2)
 20x + 10 = 27x – 18 [By Cross multiplication]
 20x – 27x = – 18 – 10 [By Transposition]
 – 7x = – 28
 x=4
Hence, x = 4 is the solution of the given equation.
Illustration 4.7
xb xb
Solve : = .
ab ab
xb xb
Sol. =
ab ab
 (x + b) (a + b) = (x – b) (a – b) [By cross -multiplication]
 x (a + b) + b (a + b) = x (a – b) – b (a – b)
 ax + bx + ba + b2 = ax – bx – ba + b2
 ax + bx – ax + bx = – ba + b2 – ba – b2
2ba
 2bx = – 2ba  x=  x=–a
2b
Hence, x = – a is the solution of the given equation.
Illustration 4.8
4 x  17 13 x  2 x 7x x  16
Solve : – + = – .
18 17 x  32 3 12 36
4 x  17 13 x  2 x 7x x  16
Sol. – + = –
18 17 x  32 3 12 36
4 x  17 7 x x  16 x 13 x  2
 – + + =
18 12 36 3 17 x  32
Multiplying both sides by 36 i.e. the L.C.M of 18, 12, 36 and 3
 4 x  17   7x   x  16   x  13 x  2 
 36   – 36   + 36   + 36   = 36 
 18   12   36   3  17 x  32 
 13 x  2 
 2 (4x + 17) – 3 (7x) + x + 16 + 12x = 36 
 17 x  32 
 13 x  2 
 8x + 34 – 21x + x + 16 + 12x = 36 
 17 x  32 
 13 x  2 
 50 = 36 
 17 x  32 
 50 (17x – 32) = 36 (13x – 2) [By cross-multiplication]
 850 x – 1600 = 468x – 72

1528
 850 x – 468x = 1600 – 72  382x = 1528  x= =4
382
Hence, x = 4 is the solution of the given equation.

A sk yourself

1. Solve the following equation : 4x – 9 = x + 2.

9 5x
2. Solve the following equation : 7 x    21 .
2 2
3. Solve the following equation : 6x – 7 = 3x + 10.

4. Solve : 4(3m + 1) – 2 (2m + 3) = 3 (m + 4) + 2m + 7.

7x 5x
5. Solve : 3  5
5 2
6. Solve 2(1·5 x + 2·5) = 0·5 x + 3.
Answers
11 – 51 17 80
1. 2. 3. 4. 7 5.
3 9 3 11
–4
6.
5

4.2 WORD PROBLEMS

To solve a word problem, denote the unknown by some variable and translate the
statements of the problem into a mathematical statement. Then form an equation and find
the solution of the equation.

Illustration 4.9
The present age of Jacob’s father is three times that of Jacob. After five years, sum of their
ages would be 70 years. Find their present ages.
Sol. Let Jacob’s present age = x years.
Therefore, his father’s present age = 3x years.
Now after 5 years, their ages will be :
Jacob : (x + 5) years.
Jacob Father : (3x + 5) years.
Sum of their ages after 5 years is :
(x + 5) years + (3x + 5) years = (4x + 10) years
As per our problem, it is given to be 70 years.
Therefore,
4x + 10 = 70  4x = 70 – 10
60
 4x = 60  x= = 15
4
Jacob’s present age = 15 years and his father’s present age = 3 × 15 years = 45 years.

Illustration 4.10
The sum of three consecutive natural numbers is 45. Find the numbers.
Sol. Let the three consecutive natural numbers be x – 1, x and x + 1, where xN.
(x – 1) + x + (x + 1) = 45
 x – 1 + x + x + 1 = 45
 3x = 45
45
 x=
3
 x = 15
First number x – 1 = 15 – 1 = 14
Second number x = 15
Third number x + 1 = 15 + 1 = 16
So, the numbers are 14, 15 and 16.
Illustration 4.11
The ratio of number of boys and girls in a class is 4 : 1. If total number of students in class
is 60, find the number of boys and girls in the class.
Sol. Let number of boys = 4x
Number of girls = x
Total number = 60
4x + x = 60  5x = 60  x = 12
Number of girls = x = 12
Number of boys = 4x = 4 × 12 = 48
Boys : Girls = 48 : 12 = 4 : 1
Total number = 48 + 12 = 60.
Illustration 4.12
The digit at the ten’s place of a two digit number is three times the digit at one’s place. If
the sum of this numbers and the number formed by reversing its digits is 88. Find the
number.
Sol. Let the digit at one’s place be x.
Then, the digit at ten’s place = 3x.
Number = 10 × 3x + x = 30x + x = 31x
If the digits are reversed, the digit at the one’s place will be 3x and that at ten’s place will
be x.
New number = 10 × x + 3x = 10x + 3x = 13x
It is given that the sum of original number and new number is 88.
Therefore,
88
31x + 13x = 88  44x = 88  x= =2
44
Hence, the number = 31x = 31 × 2 = 62
We have, one’s digit = 2 and ten’s digit = 6.
Clearly, ten’s digit is three times the digits at one’s place, which is the same as given in the
problem.
On reversing the digits, we have
New number = 13x = 13 × 2 = 26
Original number + New number = 62 + 26 = 88, which is the same as given in the problem.
Hence, our answer is correct.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -78
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
LINEAR EQUATION IN ONE VARIABLE

Illustration 4.13
The sum of two numbers is 2490. If 6.5 % of one number is equal to 8.5 % of the other, find
the numbers.
Sol. Let the first number be x.
Then, second number = 2490 – x
6.5 65 x
Now, 6.5% of the first number = ×x=
100 1000
8.5 85
8.5% of the second number = × (2490 – x) = (2490 – x)
100 1000
It is given that 6.5 % of the first number is equal to 8.5 % of the other.
65 x 85
 = (2490 – x)
1000 1000
 65x = 85 (2490 – x) [Multiplying both sides by 1000]
 65x = 2490 × 85 – 85x  65x + 85x = 249085
2490  85
 x=  x = 1411
150
First number = 1411.
Second number = 2490 – 1411 = 1079.
6.5 91715
We have, 6.5 % of first number = × 1411 =
100 1000
8.5 91715
8.5% of the second number = × 1079 =
100 1000
Clearly, 6.5% of the first number is equal to 8.5% of the second number, which is the same
as given in the problem.

A sk yourself

3 4
1. A rational number is such that when you multiple it by and subtract from the product,
7 7
4
you get . What is the number ?
11
2. The width of a rectangle is three-fourths its length. If the perimeter is 210 m, find the
dimensions of the rectangle.
3. Rama has only 10 paise and 25 paise coins in her purse. If in all she has 60 coins worth
Rs. 8.25, how many coins of each denomination does she have ?

4. The ratio of 2 numbers is 8 : 1. If their difference is 623, find the numbers.

8
5. Find two consecutive even number such that smaller of the 2 number is times the larger
9
number.
6. Rohit is now one- third of his fathers age. After twelve year, age of rohit father will be twice
the age of rohit. Find their present ages.

Answers
16
1. 2. L = 60 m, B = 45 m 3. 45, 15 4. 89, 712
33

5. 16, 18 6. 12 yrs, 36 yrs

A dd t o Your K nowledge

Linear Equations in Two Variables

An equation of the form Ax + By + C = 0 is called a linear equation.
Where A is called coefficient of x, B is called coefficient of y and C is the constant term
(free from x & y)
A, B, C, R [  belongs to, R  Real No.]
But A and B can not be simultaneously zero.
 Since it involves two variables therefore a single equation will have infinite set of solution
i.e. indeterminate solution. So we require a pair of equation i.e. simultaneous equations.
Standard form of pair of linear equation :
(Standard form refers to all positive coefficients)
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 ....(i)
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 ....(ii)
Solution by Elimination By Substitution :
Example. Solve : x + 4y = 14 & 7x – 3y = 5.
Sol. x + 4y = 14 .......(i)
7x – 3y = 5 .......(ii)
From equation (i) x = 14 – 4y .......(iii)
Substitute the value of x in equation (ii)
 7 (14 – 4y) – 3y = 5  98 – 28y – 3y = 5
 98 – 31y = 5  93 = 31y
93
 y=  y = 3.
31
Now substitute value of y in equation (ii) 
  7x – 3 (3) = 5  7x – 3 (3) = 5
14
 7x = 14  x= =2
7
So, solution is x = 2 and y = 3.

Concept Map

LINEAR EQUATION IN ONE VARIABLE

Word Problems
Standard Form Solution
ax + b = 0 , a , b R , a  0 x =  is solution
of ax + b = 0 Transposition
If a  + b = 0 Change of sign while change sides
+ –
– +
× 
 ×
Ex : ax + b = c
ax = c – b
c–b
x= a

Summary

ax  b
1. In order to solve equations of the type = k, cx + d  0 where a, b, c, d and k are
cx  d
numbers, we write them as ax + b = k (cx + d). This is called method of cross multiplication.

2. To solve a word problem, denote the unknown by some variable and translate the
statements given in the problem step by step into a mathematical statement. From relevant
equalities and solve the corresponding equations.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

3
1. If 4 x   5 , then x =
5
11 13 16 12
(A) (B) (C) (D)
10 14 17 11
x 5
2. If –  6 , then x = ?
3 2
51 52 53 54
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 4 5
3. If 0.6x + 0.8 = 0.28x + 1.16, then x = ?
6 9 11 13
(A) (B) (C) (D)
7 8 2 5
2
x 1 5
4. If 3  , then x = ?
1 3
x
4
7 5 6 7
(A) (B) (C) (D)
12 13 13 14
x2  1 5
5. A positive value of x which satisfies the equation 2  is :
x –1 4
(A) 4 (B) 9 (C) 5 (D) 3

2x  7 2 x  6
6. If  , then x = ?
5x  8 5x  4
2 1 1 6
(A) –6 (B) –3 (C) –2 (D) –3
3 2 2 7
5 x 6 – x 6( x  3) 1
7. If   – , then x = ?
4 8 3 6
121 121 212 122
(A) – (B) (C) (D) –
22 12 21 21
8. Length of a rectangle is 8 m less than twice its breadth. If the perimeter of the rectangle is
56 m. Find its length and breadth.
(A) Length = 16 m and breadth = 12 m (B) Length = 13 m, breadth = 15 m
(C) Length = 14 m, breadth = 17 m (D) Length = 18 m, breadth = 21 m

9. The age of father is 3 times the age of the son. If sum of their ages is 48 years, then the
age of father and son are (in years) :
(A) Father = 36, Son = 12 (B) Father = 45, Son = 15
(C) Father = 39, Son = 13 (D) Father = 42, Son = 14
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -82
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
LINEAR EQUATION IN ONE VARIABLE

10. One number is 3 times another number. If 15 is added to both the numbers, then one of the
new numbers becomes twice that of the other new number. The numbers are :
(A) 15, 45 (B) 12, 36 (C) 13, 39 (D) 14, 42

11. Sum of the digits of a two digit number is 12. The given number exceeds the number
obtained by interchanging the digits by 36. The given number is :
(A) 81 (B) 82 (C) 83 (D) 84

12. The denominator of a rational number is 4 more than the numerator. If 2 is added to the
3
numerator and 3 is added to denominator then the new number becomes . Find the
4
original number.
13 12 11 10
(A) (B) (C) (D)
17 16 15 14

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. The solution of the equation 3x – 4 = 1 – 2x is _______.

18
2. The solution of the question 2y – 5y = _______.
5
x
3.  30 = 18 has the solution is __________.
5

4. If two-third of a number is equal to one-fifth of the same number, then the number
is_______.

5. If twice of a number is 5 less than thrice of that number, then the number is ________.

6. If one-third of a number when added to one-half of the same number results in 5, then the
number is _______.

7. If x% of a number is equal to 6% of one-third of that number, then the value of x is______.

8. A two-digit number is equal to the number obtained by interchanging the digits. If the ten’s
place digit is 5, then unit’s place digit is _____

TRUE / FALSE
1. An equation, in which the maximum degree of a term is one, is called a linear equation.

2. We cannot subtract the same number on both sides of the equation.

3. We can multiply both sides of the equation by same non zero number.

4. We can divide both sides of the equation by same number.

5. If we transpose any term of the equation from one side to other with its sign gets changed.

6. 8x – 3 = 25 + 174 then x is a rational number.

7. A linear equation in one variable has two solution.

8. In a linear equation the highest power of the variable appearing

in the equation is one.
x 11
9. If = 15 then x = .
11 15

10. If 6x = 18 then 18x = 54.

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Column–I Column–II
(A) 4x = 36 (p) x = 33
x 6
(B) = 11 (q) x=
3 5
(C) 5x + 3 = 9 (r) x=9

(D) 3(x – 1) = 4(x – 5) (s) x=1

(E) 9x – 1 = 8 (t) x=–3

3
(F) x= (x – 1) (u) x = 17
4
SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)
SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Solve the following equation and check your solutions :

2y  5 1  9y 5
(i) =1 (ii) =
y 7 19  3 y 8
y  (7  8 y ) 2
2. Solve : = .
9 y  (3  4 y ) 3
3. The sum of two numbers is 45 and their ratio is 7 : 8. Find the numbers.

4. A is 20 years older than B. He is also six times as old as B. Find their ages.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

0.4z  3 5
5. Solve : =– .
1.5z  9 7
2 x  (2 x  3)
6. Solve : = – 1.
3 x  (4 x  3)
7. If sum of two numbers is 30 and 2 times one number is 3 times the other then find the
numbers.

8. If p is 2 years younger than q and 2 years older than r and the sum of their ages is 90 then
find the age of p

LONG ANSWER TYPE

9. One fourth of a number exceeds one fifth of its succeeding number by 3. Find the number.

10. The numerator of a rational number is less than its denominator by 3. If the numerator
becomes three times and the denominator is increased by 20, the new number becomes
1
. Find the original number.
8

11. The cost price of a desk and a chair is Rs. 371. If the desk costs 12 % more than the chair.
Find the cost price of each.

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. One fifth of a number diminishes one fourth of its successor by one. The number is
(A) 12 (B) 9 (C) 15 (D) 20

5 3x  1
2. If we represent the fraction by then x =
26 2x  5
3 4 3 7
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 3 7 3

3. If half of the one third of a number is 15 less then the number, then number is ............
(A) 18 (B) 17 (C) 16 (D) 15

2x  a
4. Solve for x : =1
x b
(A) a – b (B) b – a (C) a + b (D) –a – b

5. A number has two digits. The unit digit is four times than tens digits. If the difference
between the number obtained by reversing the digits and the original number is 54, find the
original number.
(A) 28 (B) 82 (C) 14 (D) 41

6. If I drive at a speed of 24 km/hr., I reach school 5 minutes late and if I drive at a 30 kmph, I
reach 4 minutes too soon. Find the distance of the school from my residence (in kilometer).
(A) 18 km (B) 30 km (C) 15 km (D) 36 km

7. The sum of two numbers, which are in the ratio 5 : 7, is 120. Find the numbers.
(A) 30, 40 (B) 50, 70 (C) 70, 90 (D) 150, 170

8. When 4 is subtracted from three times a number and the result is divided by 3 more than
2
the number, we get . Find the number.
5
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 5 (D) 4

9. A streamer goes down stream from one port to another in 5 hours while it covers the same
distance upstream in 6 hours. If the speed of the stream is 3 kmph, find the speed of the
steamer in still water.
(A) 18 km/hr (B) 30 km/hr (C) 20 km/hr (D) 33 km/hr

10. The denominator of a fraction exceeds numerator by 3. If numerator is doubled and the
2
denominator is increased by 14, then fraction becomes rd of the original fraction. Find
3
the fraction.
(A) 4/7 (B) 5/7 (C) 6/7 (D) 3/7

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. f 29x + 37y = 103, 37x + 29y = 95, then :

(A) x = 1, y = 2 (B) x = 2, y = 1 (C) x = 2, y = 3 (D) x = 3, y = 2

12. If Rs. 50 is distributed among 150 children giving 50 p to each boy and 25 p to each girl.
Then the number of boys is :
(A) 25 (B) 40 (C) 36 (D) 50

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

2
1. The sum of three numbers is 98. The ratio of the first to the second is and the ratio of
3
5
the second to the third is . The second number is [NSTSE - 2010]
8
(A) 15 (B) 20 (C) 30 (D) 32
2. What is the value of x in the given equation? (IMO 2010)
 3 x  1   2x  3   x  3   3 x  1
16 7 8 14
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 3 (D) 5

3. Which expression is equivalent 5[4 + 3(x - 6)]? (IMO 2010)

(A) 15x - 10 (B) 15x - 70 (C) 15x - 14 (D) 15x - 110
4. Jasmine is a much better tennis player than Reshma. They decide to have a contest. Every
time Jasmine wins a game, she will earn 3 points and every time Reshma wins a game,
she will earn 5 points. If they play 48 games and the final score is tiled, how many games
did Jasmine win? (IMO 2010)
(A) 50 (B) 40 (C) 30 (D) 18

5. Madhuri is on the fourth floor of a building. Her car is in the parking garage three levels
below the ground floor. She gets in the elevator and travels from the fourth floor above
ground level to the third floor below ground level. How many floors did she travel?
(IMO 2010)
(A) 3 (B) 1 (C) 4 (D) 7

6. Mrs. Ravina needs to take a taxi to the doctor's clinic. The taxi ride costs Rs.13.00 for the
First km and 6 for each km thereafter. How much does Mrs. Ravina pay for a 2.3 km taxi
ride? (IMO 2010)
(A) Rs. 25 (B) Rs.28 (C) Rs.32 (D) Rs.30

7. Of the three numbers, the first is twice the second and is half the third. If the average of
three numbers is 56, the three numbers in order are [Aryabhatta-2011]
(A) 48, 24, 96 (B) 48, 36, 96 (C) 48, 12, 14 (D) 24, 12, 48

8. The sum of a two digit number and the number obtained by interchanging the digits of the
number is 121. If the digits differ by 5, then find the number [Aryabhatta-2011]
(A) 38, 83 (B) 27, 72 (C) 39, 93 (D) 61, 16

9. The ages of Mira, Tina and Sania are in the ratio 6 : 4 : 7 respectively, if the sum of their
ages is 34 years, what is Sania's age? (IMO 2011)
(A) 12 years (B) 10 years (C) 18 years (D) 14 years

th
 3
10.   of a number is 20 more than half of the same number. The required number
4
is______.
(IMO 2011)
(A) 50 (B) 180 (C) 90 (D) 80

11. The ratio of ages of Kunal and Deepesh is 3 : 5. After 10 years this ratio becomes 5 : 7.
What is the present age of Deepesh? (IMO 2011)
(A) 20 years (B) 25 years (C) 50 years (D) 15 years

12. Mohan gets 3 marks for each correct answer and loses 2 marks for each wrong answer.
He attempts 30 problems and obtains 40 marks. The number of problems solved correctly
is. (IMO 2011)
(A) 10 (B) 15 (C) 20 (D) 25

13. Neeta’s volvo bus takes 50 boys to a field trip. Some of them take Rs. 20 tickets while the
rest take Rs. 45 tickets. It the total cost of tickets purchased is Rs. 2000, how many boys
took the tickets of Rs. 20 each ? [NSTSE - 2012]
(A) 7 (B) 10 (C) 12 (D) 15

 5 x  1 x  1 1
14. Solve for x : x   2 x    (IMO 2012)
 3  3 2
3 1
(A) (B) – 31 (C) – 20 (D)
2 2

15. For a journey the cost of a child ticket is 1/3"' of the cost of an adult ticket. If the cost of the
tickets for 4 adults and 5 children is Rs. 85, the cost of a child ticket is (IMO 2012)
(A) Rs.5 (B) Rs.6 (C) Rs.10 (D) Rs.15

16. The ratio of present ages of Rahul and Deepesh is 3 : 5. 10 years later this ratio becomes
5:7. What is the present age of Deepesh? (IMO 2012)
(A) 20 years (B) 50 years (C) 25 years (D) 40 years

3x  4 x 1
17. Solve for x :  (IMO 2012)
6x  7 2x  3
1 5
(A) (B)  (C) 1 (D) 3
2 4

x x
18. + = 2 find x [NSTSE - 2013]
xa xb
a 2ab
(A) (B) ab (C) (D) 2ab
b ab

19. If x + y = 6 and 3x – y = 4, find the value of x – y. [NSTSE – 2014]

(A) – 1 (B) 0 (C) 2 (D) 4

20. In a class of 100 students, 55 students have passed in Mathematics and 67 students have
passed in Physics. Then, the number of students who have passed in Physics only is .
[IOM 2017]
(A) 22 (B) 33 (C) 10 (D) 45

21. The difference of squares of two consecutive numbers is 61. What will be the sum of these
numbers ? [IOM 2017]
(A) 81 (B) 41 (C) 61 (D) 51

6m  7 4m  5
22. Find the solution of the given linear equation  . [IOM 2019]
3m  2 2m  3
11 11 9 9
(A) m = – (B) m = (C) (D) –
9 9 11 11

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. A A B A D A D A A A D A

FILL IN THE BLANKS

6
1. x=1 2. y=– 3. x = – 60. 4. zero
5
5. 5 6. 6 7. 2 8. 5
TRUE / FALSE
1. True 2. False 3. True 4. False
5. True 6. True 7. False 8. True
9. False 10. True.
MATCH THE COLUMN
1. (A) – r, (B) – p, (C) – q, (D) – u, (E) – s, (F) – t
SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)
SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. (i) y=2 (ii) y = – 29/19 2. y = 15/17 3. 21, 24
4. 24, 4
SHORT ANSWER TYPE
5. – 2.33 6. 0 7. 12, 18 8. 30
LONG ANSWER TYPE
9. 64 10. 1/4 11. C.P. of Desk = Rs. 196 & Chair = Rs. 175

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. C A A A A A B A B A A D

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans C D B C D A A A D D B C B A A
Ques. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Ans C B C A D C A

05
CHAPTER

QUADRILATERALS

TERMINOLOGIES
Polygon, Parallel Lines, Transversal, Collinear, Vertices, Line Segments, Sides,
Angles, Convex and concave quadrilateral, diagonals, parallelogram, Rhombus,
Rectangle, Square, Trapezium, Kite, Isosceles trapezium, congruent.

INTRODUCTION
‘Poly’ means many and ‘gon’ means sides. So a polygon is a closed figure of many sides.
A polygon of ‘n’ sides is also called n-gon. Polygon can be classified according to the
number of sides like triangle (3 sides), Quadrilateral (4 sides). Pentagon (5 sides).

5.1 QUADRILATERAL
A quadrilateral is four sided closed figure.
D

A C

B
Let A, B, C and D be four points in a plane such that :
(i) No three of them are collinear.
(ii) The line segments AB, BC, CD and DA do not intersect except at their end points,
then figure obtained by joining A, B, C & D is called a quadrilateral.
(a) Definitions
(i) Vertices : The point A, B, C and D are called vertices.
(ii) Opposite vertices : The vertices A and C; B and D are called the opposite vertices.
(iii) Sides : The line segment AB, BC, CD and AD are called sides.
(iv) Opposite sides : AB and DC; AD and BC are called opposite sides.
(v) Adjacent sides : AD and AB; AB and BC, BC and CD, CD and AD are called the
adjacent sides.
(vi) Angles :  A, B, C and D are the angles of the quadrilateral ABCD.
(vii) Opposite angles : A and C; B and D are opposite angles.
(viii) Adjacent angles : A and B; B and C;C and D; D and A are the
adjacent angles.
(ix) Diagonals : Line segment joining the opposite vertices of a quadrilateral ABCD are
called its diagonal. In the above figure AC and BD are two diagonals of the quadrilateral
ABCD.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -90
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
QUADRILATERALS

(b) Convex and Concave Quadrilaterals

(i) A quadrilateral in which the measure of each interior angle is less than 180° is
called a convex quadrilateral. In figure, PQRS is convex quadrilateral.
R

P Q

(ii) A quadrilateral in which the measure of one of the interior angle is more than 180°
is called a concave quadrilateral. In figure, ABCD is concave quadrilateral.
D B

(c) Special Quadrilaterals

(i) Parallelogram : A parallelogram is a quadrilateral in which both pairs of opposite sides
are parallel. In figure, AB || DC, AD || BC therefore, ABCD is a parallelogram.
D C

A B
(ii) Rectangle : A rectangle is parallelogram, but each of its angle is right angle. If ABCD is
a rectangle then A = B = C = D = 90°.
D C

0
90
A B

(iii) Rhombus : A rhombus is a parallelogram but all its sides are equal in length. If ABCD
is a rhombus then AB = BC = CD = DA.
D C

A B
(iv) Square : A square is a parallelogram having all sides equal and each angle equal to
right angle. If ABCD is a square then AB = BC = CD = DA and A = B = C = D = 90°.
D C

0
90
A B
(v) Trapezium : A trapezium is a quadrilateral with only one pair of opposite sides parallel.
In figure, ABCD is a trapezium with AB || DC.
D C

A B

(vi) Kite : A kite is a quadrilateral in which two pairs of adjacent sides are equal. If ABCD is
a kite then AB = AD and BC = CD.
C

B D

A
(vii) Isosceles trapezium : A trapezium is said to be an isosceles trapezium, if its non-
parallel sides are equal. Thus a quadrilateral ABCD is an isosceles trapezium, if AB || DC
and AD = BC and A = B and D = C.
D C

A B

A sk yourself

1. It is possible to have a quadrilateral whose angles are of measures 105°, 165°, 55° and
45° ? Give reason.
2. The angles of a quadrilateral are respectively 20°, 100°, 80°. Find the fourth angle.
3. What will be the sum of all angles of a convex polygon which has
(i) 6 sides (ii) 8 sides
4. How many sides has a regular polygon, each angle of which is of measure 108° ?
5. What is the sum of all the angles of
(a) A hexagon (b) An octagon (c) A regular decagon
6. It is possible to have a regular polygon whose interior angle measures 124º? Justify
Answers
1. No 2. 160° 3. (i) 720° (ii) 1080°
4. 5 5. (i) 720° (ii) 1080° (iii) 1440°
6. No

5.2 PROPERTIES OF VARIOUS SPECIAL TYPES OF QUADRILATERALS

(a) Parallelogram
Properties in the form of theorems have been given.
Theorem-1 : The sum of the four angles of a quadrilateral is 360°.
Given : Quadrilateral ABCD.
To Prove : A +B + C + D = 360°.
Construction : Join AC.
Proof : In ABC, we have
1 + 4 + 6 = 180° ...(i)
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -92
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
QUADRILATERALS
D
C
5 3
4

2
A 1 6
B

In ACD, we have
2 + 3 + 5 = 180° ...(ii)
Adding (i) and (ii) we get
(1 +2) + (3 + 4) +5 + 6 = 180° + 180°
A + C +D + B = 360°.
A +B +C +D = 360°.
Theorem-2 : A diagonal of a parallelogram divides it into two congruent triangles.
Given : A parallelogram ABCD.
To Prove : A diagonal, say, AC of parallelogram ABCD divides it into congruent triangles
ABC and CDA i.e. ABC  CDA.
Construction : Join AC.
Proof : Since ABCD is a parallelogram. Therefore, AB || DC and AD || BC
Now, AD || BC and transversal AC intersects them at A and C respectively.
DAC = BCA ...(i) [Alternate interior angles]
A D

B C
Again, AB || DC and transversal AC intersects them at A and C respectively.
Therefore,
BAC = DCA ...(ii) [Alternate interior angles]
Now, in ABC and CDA, we have
BCA = DAC [From (i)]
AC = AC [Common side]
BAC = DCA [From (ii)]
So, by ASA congruence criterion, we have
ABC  CDA
Theorem-3 : In a parallelogram, opposite sides are equal.
Given : A parallelogram ABCD.
To Prove : AB = CD and DA = BC.
Construction : Join AC.
Proof : Since ABCD is a parallelogram. Therefore
AB || DC and AD || BC
Now, AD || BC and transversal AC intersects them at A and C respectively.
DAC = BCA ...(i) [Alternate interior angles]
D C

A B

Again, AB || DC and transversal AC intersects them at A and C respectively.

BAC = DCA ...(ii) [Alternate interior angles]

Now, in ADC and CBA, we have
DCA = BAC [From (ii)]
AC = AC [Common side]
And DAC = BCA [From (i)]
So, by ASA criterion congruence
ADC  CBA
AD = CB and DC = BA [Corresponding parts of congruent triangles are equal]
Theorem - 4 : The opposite angles of a parallelogram are equal.
Given : A parallelogram ABCD
To Prove : A = C and B = D
Proof : Since ABCD is a parallelogram. Therefore,
AB || DC and AD || BC
Now, AB || DC and transversal AD intersects them at A and D respectively.
D C

A B

A +D = 180° ...(i)   Sum of consecutive 

interior angles is 180 
 
Again, AD || BC and DC intersects them at D and C respectively.
D +C = 180° ...(ii)   Sum of consecutive 
interior angles is 180 
 
From (i) and (ii) we get
A +D = D +C  A = C.
Similarly, B = D
Hence, A = C and B = D.
Theorem - 5 : The diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.
Given : A parallelogram ABCD such that its diagonals AC and BD intersect at O.
To Prove : OA = OC and OB = OD.
Proof : Since ABCD is a parallelogram. Therefore,
AB || DC and AD || BC
Now, AB || DC and transversal AC intersects them at A and C respectively.
BAC =DCA [Alternate interior angles are equal]
BAO =DCO ...(i)
D C

A B

Again, AB || DC and BD intersects them at B and D respectively.

ABD =CDB [Alternate interior angles are equal]
ABO =CDO ...(ii)
Now, in AOB and COD, we have
BAO = DCO [From (i)]
AB = CD [Opposite sides of a paralleloogram are equal]

And, ABO = CDO [From (ii)]

So, by ASA congruence criterion
AOB  COD
OA = OC and OB = OD [By CPCT]
Hence, OA = OC and OB = OD
Illustration 5.1
In a quadrilateral ABCD, the angles A, B, C and D are in the ratio 1 : 2 : 3 : 4. Find the
measure of each angles of the quadrilateral.
Sol. We have A : B : C : D = 1 : 2 : 3 : 4.
So, let A = x0, B = 2x0, C = 3x0, D = 4x0
A + B + C + D = 360°
x + 2x + 3x + 4x = 360
10x = 360
x = 36
Thus, the angles are :
A = 36°, B = (2 × 36)° = 72°, C = (3 × 36)° = 108°
And, D = (4x)° = (4 x 36)° = 144.
Illustration 5.2
The sides BA and DC of a quadrilateral ABCD are produced as shown in figure, prove that
a + b = x + y.
D
y
C
a

b x
A B
Sol. Join BD. In ABD, we have
ABD +ADB = b° ...(i) [Exterior angle theorem]
In CBD, we have
CBD +CDB = a° ...(ii) [Exterior angle theorem]
Adding (i) and (ii) we, get
(ABD + CBD) + (ADB + CDB) = a° + b°
 x° + y° = a° + b°
Hence, x + y = a + b.
Illustration 5.3
In a parallelogram ABCD diagonals AC and BD intersect at O and AC = 6.8 cm and
BD = 5.6 cm. Find the measures of OC and OD.
Sol. Since, the diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other. Therefore, O is the mid-point of
AC and BD.
1 1
 OC = AC = x 6.8 cm = 3.4 cm
2 2
1 1
And, OD = BD = x 5.6 cm = 2.8 cm
2 2

Illustration 5.4
Given ABC, lines are drawn through A, B and C parallel respectively to the sides BC, CA
1
and AB, forming PQR show that BC = QR.
2
Sol. We have, AQ || CB and AC || QB
 AQBC is parallelogram
BC = AQ ...(i) [Opposite sides of a ||gm are equal]
Again AR || BC and AB || RC
 ARCB is a parallelogram.

 BC = AR ....(ii) [Opposite sides of || gm are equal] From (i) and (ii), we get
AQ = AR R C P
1
 AQ = AR = QR
2 A B
1
 BC = QR.
2
Q
Illustration 5.5
If ABCD is a quadrilateral in which AB || CD and AD = BC, prove that A = B.
Sol. Extend AB and draw a line CE parallel to AD as shown in figure, since AD || CE and
transversal AE cuts them at A and E respectively.
 A + E = 180° ...... (i)
Since AE || CD and AD || CE. Therefore,
AECD is parallelogram.
 AD = CE
 BC = CE [ AD = BC (given)]
Thus, in BCE, we have
A B E

D C
BC = CE
 CBE = CEB ( BCE is isosceles triangle)
 180 – B = E .......(ii)
 180 – E = B
From (i) and (ii), we get
A = B
Illustration 5.6
In a parallelogram ABCD, D = 115°, determine the measure of A and B.
Sol. Since the sum of any two consecutive angles of a parallelogram is 180°.
Therefore,
A + D = 180° and A + B = 180°
Now, A + D = 180°
A + 115° = 180° [D = 115° (Given)]
A = 65°
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -96
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
QUADRILATERALS

And, A + B = 180°
65° + B = 180° B. = 115°
Thus, A = 65° and B = 115°

Illustration 5.7
In fig., ABCD is a parallelogram in which DAO = 40°, BAO = 35° and COD = 65°.
Find:
(i) ABO (ii) ODC (iii) ACB (iv) CBD
Sol. Since AOB and COD are vertically opposite angles.
D C

65°
O

40°
35°
A B

AOB = COD
AOB = 65°
(i) In AOB, we have
OAB + AOB + ABO = 180°
35° + 65° + ABO = 180°
100° + ABO = 180°
ABO = 180° – 100° = 80°
(ii) Since ABO and ODC are alternate interior angles and alternate interior angles
are always equal.
 ODC = ABO
ODC = 80°
(iii) Since ACB and DAC are alternate interior angles.
 ACB = DAC
ACB = 40°
(iv) Since A and B are adjacent interior angles of parallelogram ABCD and adjacent
interior angles are supplementary.
 A + B = 180°
B = 180° – A
 B = 180° – (40° + 35°) = 105°
 ABD + CBD = 105°
 ABO + CBD = 105°
 80° + CBD = 105°
 CBD = 105° – 80° = 25°
Illustration 5.8
The ratio of two sides of a parallelogram is as 3 : 5, and its perimeter is 48 m. Find sides of
a parallelogram.
Sol. Let the two sides of the parallelogram be 3x metres and 5x metres in length.
Then,
Perimeter = 2 (length + breadth)
Perimeter = 2 (3x + 5x) metres
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -97
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
QUADRILATERALS

= 2 × 8x metres
= 16x metres.
But, the perimeter is given as 48 metres.
16 x 48
 16x = 48  =  x=3
16 16
Hence, the sides of the parallelogram are 3 x 3 m = 9 m and 5 × 3 m = 15 m.
Illustration 5.9
In a parallelogram ABCD, the bisectors of A and B meet at O. Find AOB.
Sol. Since OA and OB are the bisectors of A and B respectively.
D C

A B

 OAB + AOB + OBA = 180°

1 1
 A + AOB + B = 180°
2 2
1
 AOB = 180° – (A + B)
2
1  A and B are adjacent angles of 
 AOB = 180° – (180°) parallelogram ABCD  A  B  180 
2  
 AOB = 180° – 90° = 90°.
 ABO + CBD = 105°
 80° + CBD = 105°
 CBD = 105° – 80° = 25°
1  A and B are adjacent angles of 
 AOB = 180° – (180°) parallelogram ABCD  A  B  180 
2  
 AOB = 180° – 90° = 90°.
(b) Rectangle
Some properties of rectangles, rhombus and squares have been given in the form of
theorems:
Theorem - 6 : Each of the four angles of a rectangle is a right angle.
D C

A B
Given : A rectangle ABCD such that A = 90°.
To Prove : A =B =C =D = 90°.
Proof : ABCD is a rectangle
ABCD is a parallelogram
AD || BC
Now, AD || BC and line AB intersects them at A and B.

 A +B =180°  Sum of the interior angles on the 

 same side of a transversal is 180 
 
 90° + B = 180° [A = 90° (Given)]
 B = 90°
Similarly, we can show that C = 90° and D = 90°
Hence, A = B =C = D = 90°
Theorem - 7 : The diagonals of a rectangle are of equal length.
Given : A rectangle ABCD with AC and BD as its diagonals.
To Prove : AC = BD.
Proof : ABCD is a rectangle.
 ABCD is a parallelogram such that one of its angles, say, A is a right angle.
 AD = BC and A = 90° ...(i)
D C

A B
Now, AD || BC and AB intersects them at A and B respectively.
 A + B = 180°
 90° + B = 180°
 B = 90° [  A = 90°]
Now, in s ABD and BAC, we have
AB = BA [Common side]
A = B [Each equal to 90°]
AD = BC [From (i)]
So, by SAS criterion of congruence
ABD  BAC
  Corresponding parts of 
BD = AC congruent triangles are equal
Hence, AC = BD.
(c) Rhombus
Theorem - 8 : Each of the four sides of a rhombus is of the same length.
D C

A B
Given : A rhombus ABCD such that AB = BC
To Prove : AB = BC = CD = DA
Proof : ABCD is a rhombus
 ABCD is a parallelogram
 AB = CD and BC = AD
But AB = BC (Given)
 AB = BC = CD = AD
Hence, all the four sides of a rhombus are equal.

Theorem -9 : The diagonals of a rhombus are perpendicular to each other.

D C

A B

Given : A rhombus ABCD whose diagonals AC and BD intersect at O.

To Prove : BOC = DOC = AOD = AOB = 90°
Proof : We know that a parallelogram is rhombus, if all of its sides are equal. So, ABCD is
a rhombus
 ABCD is a ||gm such that AB = BC = CD = DA ...(i)
Since the diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.
 OB = OD and OA = OC ...(ii)
Now, in s BOC and DOC, we have
BO = OD [From (ii)]
BC = DC [From (i)]
OC = OC [Common]
So, by SSS criterion of congruence
  Corresponding parts of 
BOC  DOC congruent triangles are equal
 BOC = DOC
But, BOC + DOC = 180° [Linear pair axiom]
 BOC = DOC = 90° [BOC = DOC]
Similarly, AOB = AOD = 90°
Hence, AOB = BOC = COD = DOA = 90°.

(d) Square

Theorem - 10 : Each of the angles of a square is a right angle and each of the four sides is
of the same length.
Given : A square ABCD such that AB = BC
To Prove : AB = BC = CD = DA and A = B = C = D = 90°
Proof : ABCD is a square
 ABCD is a rectangle
 A = B =C =D = 90°
Again, ABCD is a square
 ABCD is a parallelogram such that AB = BC
 AB = BC = CD = AD.
Theorem - 11 : The diagonals of a square are equal and perpendicular to each other.
D C

A B
Given : A square ABCD

To Prove : AC = BD and ACBD.

Proof : In ADB and BCA, we have
AD = BC [Sides of a square are equal]
 BAD = ABC [Each equal to 90°]
And, AB = BA [Common]
So, by SAS criterion of congruence
  Corresponding parts of 
ADB  BCA congruent triangles are equal
 AC = BD

Now, in AOB and AOD, we have

OB = OD [Diagonals of ||gm bisect each other]
AB = AD [Sides of a square are equal]
And, AO = AO [Common]
So, by SSS criterion of congruence
AOB  AOD   Corresponding parts of 
 congruent triangles are equal
 
 AOB = AOD
But, AOB + AOD = 180°
 AOB = AOD = 90°
AO  BD  AC  BD
Hence, AC = BD and AC BD.
Illustration 5.10
AB,CD are two parallel lines and a transversal  intersects AB at X and CD at Y. Prove that
the bisectors of the interior angles form a parallelogram, with all its angles right angles.
Sol. Given : AB, CD are two parallel lines which are cut by a transversal l in points X and Y
respectively. The bisectors of interior angles intersect in P and Q.
To Prove : XPYQ is a rectangle.
Proof : Since AB || CD and transversal l intersects them.
 AXY = DYX [Alternate angles are equal]
1 1  XP and YQ are the bisectors of 
AXY = DYX  1 = 2
2 2  AXY and DYX respectively 
 
Thus, XY intersects PX and QY at X and Y respectively such that 1 = 2 i.e. alternate
interior angles are equal.
PX || QY
Similarly, YP || QX
Hence, PYQX is a parallelogram.

Now, we shall show that each angle of the ||gm PYQX is right angle.
Since, the sum of the interior angle on the same side of a transversal is 180°.
Therefore,
 BXY + DYX = 180°
 23 + 22 = 180°
 3 + 2 = 90°.

A X B

1 3
Q
P 2

C Y D

Now, in XQY, we have

2 + 3 + XQY = 180°
 90° + XQY = 180°
 XQY = 90° [Using (i)]
Since XPYQ is a parallelogram.
 XQY = XPY
 XPY = 90° [XQY = 90°]
 Adjacent angles in a 
Now, PXQ + XQY = 180°  ||gm are supplementary 
 
 PXQ + 90° = 180°
 PXQ = 90°
 PYQ = 90° [PXQ = PYQ]
Hence, all the interior angles are right angles.
Illustration 5.11
The diagonals of a rectangle ABCD meet at O. If BOC = 44°, find OAD.
Sol. We have,
BOC + BOA = 180° [Linear pairs]
 44° + BOA = 180°
 BOA = 136°
Since diagonals of a rectangles are equal and they bisect each other. Therefore, in, we
have
OA = OB [ Angles opp. to equal sides are equal]
 1 = 2
D C

O
44°

3
1 2
A B
Now, in OAB, we have
 1 + 2 + BOA = 180°
 21 + 136 = 180°
 21 = 44°
 1 = 22°
Since each angle of a rectangle is a right angle. Therefore,
BAD = 90°
 1 + 3 = 90°
 22° + 3 = 90°
 3 = 68°  OAD = 68°

Illustration 5.12
The diagonals of a rhombus are 6 cm and 8 cm. Find the length of a side of the rhombus.
Sol. Let ABCD be the rhombus whose diagonals AC and BD are of lengths 8 cm and 6 cm
respectively. Let AC and BD intersect at O. Since the diagonals of a rhombus bisect each
other at right angles.
D C

A B
1 1 1 1
 AO = AC = × 8 cm = 4cm and BO = BD = × 6cm = 3 cm.
2 2 2 2
Since AOB is a right triangle, right angled at O. Therefore, by pythagoras theorem
AB2 = OA2 + OB2
 AB2 = 42 + 32
 AB2 = 16 + 9
 AB = 5
Hence, the length of each side of the rhombus is 5 cm.

Illustration 5.13
In figure ABCD is a rectangle. BM and DN are perpendiculars from B and D respectively on
AC. Prove that

(i) BMC  DNA (ii) BM = DN

Sol. (i) Since BM and DN are perpendiculars from B and D respectively on AC.
 BM || DN
Also, AD || BC.
ADN = CBM.
Now in s ADN and BCM, we have
D C

A B

ADN = CBM
AD = BC
DAN = BCM [Alternate angles as AD || BC]
So, by ASA congruence condition, we have
 BMC  DNA ....(ii)
 BMC  DNA

 BM = DN   Corresponding parts of 
congruent triangles are equal
 

A sk yourself

1. Adjacent angles of a parallelogram are in 7 : 2. Find all the angles.

2. Can the following figures be parallelogram ? Justify your answer.

7cm
D C S R T Z
105° 5
6
7 O 4
75° 7cm
A B P Q X Y
(i) (ii) (iii)

3. The following figures HOPE and TOPE are parallelogram. Find ‘a’ and ‘b’.
4b + 1
H E
T a+ E
3 10
4a 16
a +b 9
O P
25 O P
(i) (ii)

4. In the figure below, HOPE is a parallelogram. Find the measures of angles a, b and c.
E P
a
c
30°
b 70°
H
O
5. In the given parallelogram, find missing values?
L M
x 45º

Z
y
O N
6. The permeter of a square is 40 cm. Find the length of its diagonal?

7. ABCD is a rectangle with diagonals AC and BD meeting at point O. Find x if OA = 5x – 7

and OD = 4x – 5.
Answers

1. 140°, 40°, 140°, 40° 2. (i) No (ii) Yes (iii) No

3. (i) a = 4, b = 6 (ii) a = 6, b = 4

4. a = 110°, b = 40°, c = 30°

5. x = 45°, y = 45°, z = 90° 6. 10 2 cm 7. 2

A dd t o Your K nowledge

1. In the given figure, E and F are respectively, the mid-points of non-parallel sides of a
trapezium ABCD.
A B
= =
E F
= =
P D C
Then :
1
(i) EF || AB (ii) EF = (AB + DC).
2

2. The figure formed by joining the midpoints of the pairs of consecutive sides of a
quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
3. ABCD is a rhombus and P, Q, R and S are the mid-points of the sides AB, BC, CD and DA
respectively. Then the quadrilateral PQRS is a rectangle.

Concept Map

gm gm
Q. ABCD is || find all angle of ||
A quadrilateral is four sided
Sol. C = A = 50° closed figure.
D C
 C = 50°
as AB||CD
 A + D = 180° 50° Angle sum pr oper t y
50°+ D = 180° A B
sum of all interior angle of quadrilateral
Pr oper t y of par allelogr am D=130° is 360°
Opposite angle are equal B = D = 130° Q. Angle of Quadrilateral are in the ratio
Opposite sides are equal  B = 130° 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 find angle
Diagonal bisect each other Sol. Let angle are x, 2x, 3x, 4x
Diagonal divide parallelogram in to two x + 2x + 3x + 4x = 360
congruent triangle. 10x = 360
x = 36
So, angle are 36, 2´ 36
3´ 36, 4´ 36
Q. If ABCD is ||gm find x,y i.e. 36°, 72°, 108°, 144°
Sol. In ||gm diagonal bisect each other
 OA = OC D C
x+ Polygon
x–5=7 y 7
x =12 Sum of interior angle = (n –2)180
1
and OB = OD x –5 O 5 Sum of exterior angle = 360°
15 = x + y Types of Quadr ilat er al For Regular polygon
B (n–2)180
15 = 12 + y A Each Interior angle =
n
y=3
360
Each Interior angle = n

D C
Tr apezium Par allelogr am A Kit e
B
Quadrilateral with one pair Quadrilateral in which both pair Quadrilateral in which adjacent
of opposite side is parallel. of opposite side is parallel. sides equal but unequal opp. side
D C

A B
Rect angle Rhombus Squar e
If AD = BC, it is known
as isosceles trapezium

||gmwith ||gmwith
||
gm
with
all angle 90° all side equal and
all side equal
*Length of diagonal all angle 90°
*diagonal bisect
are equal *Length of diagonal are equal
each other at 90°
*Diagonal bisect at 90°

Summary

1. A quadrilateral two of whose opposite sides are parallel is called a trapezium.

2. A quadrilateral in which opposite sides are parallel is called a parallelogram.

3. A parallelogram with a pair of adjacent sides equal is called a rhombus. In fact, all the sides
of a rhombus are equal.

4. A parallelogram with one angle a right angle is called a rectangle. In fact, all the angles of a
rectangle are right angles.

5. A parallelogram with a pair of adjacent sides equal and one angle a right angle is called a
square. In fact, all the sides of a square are equal and all its angles are right angles.

6. In a parallelogram,
(i) opposite sides are equal,
(ii) opposite angles are equal, and
(iii) diagonals bisect each other.

7. Diagonals of a rhombus bisect each other at right angles.

8. Diagonals of a rectangle are equal and bisect each other.

9. Diagonals of a square are equal and bisect each other at right angles

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. If all the angles of a quadrilateral are less than 180º, then the quadrilateral is a :
(A) Convex quadrilateral (B) Parallelogram
(C) Concave quadrilateral (D) Trapezium

2. If one angle of a quadrilateral is greater than 180º, then the quadrilateral is a :

(A) Concave quadrilateral (B) Trapezium
(C) Rectangle (D) Convex quadrilateral

3. If the opposite sides and the opposite angles of a quadrilateral are equal, then the
quadrilateral is a :
(A) Trapezium (B) Concave quadrilateral
(C) Convex quadrilateral (D) parallelogram

4. A quadrilateral whose opposite sides and all the angles are equal is a :
(A) Square (B) Rectangle (C) Rhombus (D) Parallelogram

5. A quadrilateral whose all the sides, diagonals and angles are equal is a :
(A) Square (B) Rhombus (C) Trapezium (D) Rectangle

6. If the adjacent angles of a parallelogram are equal, then the parallelogram is a :

(A) Trapezium (B) Rectangle (C) Rhombus (D) All of these

7. If the diagonals of a quadrilateral are equal and bisect each other (not at right angles), then
the quadrilateral is a :
(A) Square (B) Rhombus (C) Parallelogram (D) Rectangle

8. If the diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other at right angles, then it is a :

(A) Trapezium (B) Parallelogram (C) Rectangle (D) Rhombus

9. A quadrilateral whose all the sides and opposite angles are equal and the diagonals bisect
each other at right angles is a :
(A) Square (B) Rhombus (C) Rectangle (D) Parallelogram

10. The quadrilateral having only one pair of opposite sides parallel is called a :
(A) Kite (B) Rhombus (C) Trapezium (D) Parallelogram

11. The measure of BCA (in figure) :

50º
O B P

(A) 180º (B) 130º (C) 110º (D) 108º

12. The sum of adjacent angles of a parallelogram is :

(A) 180º (B) 120º (C) 360º (D) 90º

13. In a quadrilateral ABCD, A = 35º, B = 65º, C = 65º the D is :

(A) 100º (B) 120º (C) 195º (D) 180º

14. Adjacent angles of a parallelogram are in the ratio of 2 : 7, their values will be :
(A) 20, 160º (B) 30, 150º (C) 40, 140º (D) 60, 120º

15. The angles of a quadrilateral are in the ratio 1 : 2 : 3 : 4, the angles are :
(A) 36º, 72º, 108º, 144º (B) 15º, 130º, 45º, 150º
(C) 45º, 110º, 55º, 150º (D) None of these

16. ABCD is a parallelogram and E is the mid point of BC. DE and AB when produced meet at
F. Then,
3
(A) AF =AB (B) AF = 2AB (C) AF = 3AB (D) AF2 = 2AB2
2
FILL IN THE BLANKS
1. A quadrilateral in which the measure of each interior angles is less than 180° is called a
_____quadrilateral.

2. A _________is a quadrilateral with only one pair of opposite sides parallel.

3. A _________is a quadrilateral in which two pairs of adjacent sides are equal and pairs of
adjacent unequal sides.

4. A diagonal of a parallelogram divides it two ________ triangles.

5. The diagonal of a rhombus are ___________ to each other.

6. A ________ is a parallelogram having all sides equal and each angle equal to right angle.

7. A quadrilateral in which the measure at one of integerior angle is greater than 180° is
called a ____________quadrilateral.

8. A line segment joining the opposite verties of a quadrilateral are called its __________.

9. A trapezium is said to be an __________trapezium, if its non-parallel sides are equal.

10. A __________is a parallelogram but all its sides are equal in length.

TRUE / FALSE
1. If all the angles of a quadrilateral are equal, it is a rectangle.

2. The adjacent angles of a parallelogram are equal.

3. The diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.

4. In a parallelogram, the diagonals are equal.

5. The diagonals of a rectangle are of equal length.

6. The diagonals of a square are equal and perpendicular to each other.

7. The diagonals of a rhombus are perpendicular bisectors.

8. In a convex quadrilateral all the angle is greater than 180°.

9. A kite is a quadrilateral in which two pair of adjacent sides are equal.

10. In a quadrilateral sum of all interior angle is 360.

11. In a concave quadrilateral all the angle is greater than 180°.

12. In any quadrilateral, if a pair of opposite sides is equal, it is a parallelogram.

13. If three sides of a quadrilateral are equal, it is a parallelogram.

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Column – I Column – II

(A) A quadrilateral in which (p) kite

both pairs of opposite
side are parallel
(B) A quadrilateral whose (q) two right
all the sides are equal
and each angle is 90°
(C) Sum of all angles of (r) parallelogram
quadrilateral
(D) Sum of the angles on (s) square
a straight line
(E) A quadrilateral in which two (t) four right angles
pairs of adjacent side are equal.

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. If an angle of a parallelogram is two third of its adjacent angle, find the angles of the
parallelogram.

2. Three angles of a quadrilateral are equal and the fourth angle is equal to 144°. Find each
of the equal angle of the quadrilateral.

3. Two opposite angles of a parallelogram are (3x – 2)° and (50 – x)°. Find the measure of
each angle.

4. The sides of a rectangle are in the ratio 4 : 5. Find its sides if the perimeter is 90 cm.

5. Find the length of the diagonal of a rectangle whose sides are 12 cm and 5 cm.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. In quadrilateral PQRS if P = 60° and Q : R : S = 2 : 3 : 7, then find the measure
of S.

7. PQRS is a trapezium in which PQ || RS. IfP =Q = 50°, what are the measures of the
other two angles?
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -109
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
QUADRILATERALS

8. The perimeter of a parallelogram is 150 cm. One of its sides is greater than the other by
25 cm. Find the length of the sides of the parallelogram.

9. In figure, ABCD and AEFG are each a parallelogram. If C = 55°, what is the measure of
F ?
D C

G F

A E B

10. EFGH is a square. E = x + 60 and EF = x + 1 cm. Find the perimeter of EFGH.

11. Diagonal AC of a rhombus ABCD is equal to one of its side BC. Find all the angles of the
rhombus.

LONG ANSWER TYPE

12. In figure, ABCD is a kite whose diagonals intersect at O. If DAB = 44º and BCD = 86º
Find : (i) ODA (ii) OBC
D
C
0
86

O
0
44
A
B

13. The diagonals of a quadrilateral are of lengths 6 cm and 8 cm. If the diagonals bisect each
other at right angles, what is the length of each side of the quadrilateral ?

14. In figure, ABCD is a parallelogram in which A = 60°. If the bisectors of A and B meet
at P, prove that AD = DP, PC = BC and DC = 2AD.
D P C

60°
A B

15. The diagonals of a ||gm PQRS intersect at O. A line through O intersects PQ at M and RS
at N. Prove that OM = ON.

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. The ratio of two sides of a parallelogram is as 3 : 5, and its perimeter is 48 m, then the
sides of the parallelogram is :
(A) 9 m, 15 m (B) 3 m, 5 m (C) 33 m, 25 m (D) None of these

2. In the figure, parallelogram ABCD is composed of four congruent triangles. If BE = 3 cm

and CE = 4 cm then the perimeter of the entire figure is :
D

A C
E

(A) 20 cm (B) 25 cm (C) 22 cm (D) None of these

3. The diagonals of a square with area 9 m2 divide the square into four non-overlapping
triangles. What is the sum of the perimeter of the four triangles ?
(A) 12 m (B) 12 2 m (C) 12 + 12 2 m (D) none of these
4. In given figure, area of isosceles trapezium DEFG is :
E 3 F

12 12

D G
6 3 M N 6 3

(A) 18 (1 + 3 ) (B)18 3 (C) 3 +1 (D) 18 (1 + 2 3 )

5. In fig. ABCD is a parallelogram. P and Q are mid points of the sides AB and CD,
respectively. Then PRQS is :
D Q C

S R

A P B

(A) Parallelogram (B) Trapezium (C) Rectangle (D) None of these

6. In the given figure ABCD is parallelogram. Then, find the value of x if A = 3x + 10 and
C = x + 80º.
D C
x + 80º

3x + 10º
A B

(A) 40º (B) 35º (C) 60º (D) 115º

7. The diagonals of a parallelogram ABCD intersect each other at the point O. If DAC = 32º
and AOB = 70º, then DBC is :
(A) 24º (B) 32º (C) 38º (D) 86º
8. A square board side 10 centimeters, standing vertically, is tilted to the left so that the
bottom-right corner is raised 6 centimeters from the ground.
6 cm

By what distance is the top-left corner lowered from its original position ?
(A) 1 cm (B) 2 cm (C) 3 cm (D) 0.5 cm
5x º 7x º
9. A quadrilateral ABCD has four angles xº, 2xº, and respectively. What is the
2 2
difference between the value of biggest and the smallest angles.
(A) 40º (B) 100º (C) 80º (D) 20º

10. Diagonal DB of a rhombus ABCD is equal to one of its sides.

D C

A B
The values of A is :
(A) 30º (B) 60º (C) 120º (D) 90º

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. LMNO is a trapezium with LM || NO. If P and Q are the mid-points of LO and MN
respectively and LM = 5 cm and ON = 10 cm, then PQ =
(A) 2.5 cm (B) 5 cm (C) 7.5 cm (D) 15 cm

12. The figure formed by joining the midpoints of the pairs of consecutive sides of a rectangle
is a
(A) kite (B) rectangle (C) rhombus (D) trapezium

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

1. In the figure PQRS is a square and SRT is an equilateral traingle. Then find TQR
[Aryabhatta 2002]
T

S R

P Q
(A) 60° (B) 90° (C) 30° (D) 15°

2. In figure AB || EF, DE || BC & ABC = 60°, find DEF [Aryabhatta 2002]

A
D
E

60°
B C
F
(A) 60° (B) 120° (C) 30° (D) 80°

3. In the given figure, points P, Q, R and S are respectively the mid points of side AB, side
CD, diagonal BD and diagonal AC of quadrilateral ABCD. The quadrilateral PRQS is a
Q C
D

A
P B [Aryabhatta-2004]
(A) rectangle (B) rhombus (C) square (D) parallogram

4. In the diagram DA = CB what is the measure of DAC ? [NSTSE - 2009]

D A

40° 55°
70° B
C
(A) 70° (B) 100° (C) 95° (D) 125°

5. Each angle of a rectangle is bisected. Let P, Q, R and S be the points of intersection of the
pairs of bisectors adjacent to the same side of the rectangle. Then PQRS is a
[NSTSE - 2009]
(A) rectangle
(B) rhombus
(C) parallelogram with unequal adjacent sides
(D) quadrilateral with no special property

6. X, Y are the mid points of opposite sides AB and DC of a parallelogram ABCD. AY and DX
are joined intersecting in P, CX and BY are joined intersecting in Q. The PXQY is
[NSTSE - 2010]
Y
D C

P Q

A B
X
(A) rectangle (B) rhombus (C) parallelogram (D) square

7. Of all quadrilaterals of a given perimeter, which has the largest area ? [Aryabhatta 2010]
(A) square (B) rectangle (C) parallelogram (D) rhombus

8. ABCD is a parallelogram. The angle bisectors of A and D meet at O. The measure of

AOD is ____. (IMO 2010)
(A) 45º (B) 90º
(C) Depends on the angles A and D (D) Not able to determine from given data

9. The diagonal of a rectangle is thrice its smaller side. The ratio of its sides is
(A) 2 :1 (B) 2 2 : 1 (C) 3 : 2 (D) 3 :1

10. In a quadrilateral ABCD, AB || CD and AD = BC = 7 cm. If A = 70° then the measure of

C is [Aryabhatta-2011]
(A) 70° (B) 100° (C) 80° (D) 110°

11. Smallest angle of a triangle ¡s equal to two-third the smallest angle of a quadrilateral. The
ratio of the angles of the quadrilateral is 3 : 4 : 5 : 6. Largest angle of the triangle is twice its
smallest angle. What is the sum of second largest angle of the triangle and largest angle of
the quadrilateral ? (IMO 2011)
(A) 160º (B) 180º (C) 190º (D) 170º

12. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT? (IMO 2011)

(A) All rhombuses are parallelograms. (B) All squares are parallelograms.
(C) All rectangles are not squares. (D) All squares are trapeziums.

13. A quadrilateral that is not a parallelelogram but has exactly two equal opposite angles is
[NSTSE - 2012]
(A) a rhombus (B) a trapezium (C) a square (D) a kite

14. Find the measure of largest angle of a quadrilateral if the measures of its interior angles
are in the ratio of 3 : 4: 5 : 6. (IMO 2012)
(A) 60º (B) 120º (C) 90º (D) Can't be determined

15. In the given diagram, equilateral triangle EDC surmounts square ABCD. Find BED
represented by x, where EBC = º. (IMO 2012)

(A) 45° (B) 60° (C) 30° (D) None of these

16. In the kite ABCD, AD = CD = 8 cm, ADC = 60°, DCB = 130° and AB = CB. Find ABC.

(IMO 2012)
(A) 50º (B) 40º (C) 60º (D) 25°

17. In a parallelogram, (IMO 2012)

Statement 1 : Diagonals bisect each other.
Statement 2 : Diagonals divide the parallelogram into two triangles.
(A) Only statement 1 ¡s true. (B) Only statement 2 is true.
(C) Both statement 1 and 2 are true. (D) Both statement 1 and 2 are false.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ans. A A D B A B D D B C B A C C A B

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. convex 2. trapezium 3. kite 4. Congruent

5. perpendicular 6. square 7. Concave 8. Diagonal

9. isosceles 10. rhombus

TRUE / FALSE
1. True 2. False 3. True 4. False

5. True 6. True 7. True 8. False

9. True 10. True 11. False 12. False

13. False

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. (A) – r, (B) – s, (C) – t, (D) – q, (E) – p

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. 108°, 72°, 108°, 72° 2. 72° 3. 37°, 143°, 37°, 143°

4. 20 cm, 25 cm 5. 13 cm

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. S = 175°. 7. 130°, 130° 8. 50 cm, 25 cm

9. 550 10. 124 cm 11. 120°, 60°, 120°, 60°

LONG ANSWER TYPE

12. (i) 68° (ii) 47° 13. 5 cm.

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. A A D D A B C B B B C C

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Ans. D A D A A C A B B D B D D B A B A

06
CHAPTER

CONSTRUCTION OF QUADRILATERAL
TERMINOLOGIES
Concave Quadrilateral, Convex Quadrilateral.

INTRODUCTION
In the previous chapter, we have learnt about some special types of quadrilaterals and their
properties. In this chapter, we shall learn to construct some quadrilaterals with given
measurements.

6.1 CONSTRUCTION OF QUADRILATERALS

We know that a quadrilateral have total ten parts i.e. four sides, four angles and two
diagonals. If out of these ten parts any five independent parts are given then we can
construct easily a convex quadrilateral. If we have to construct a non-convex quadrilateral
then we are required six element out of these ten elements. In this section, we shall learn
to construct a convex quadrilateral by using ruler and compass in the following simple
cases.
(i) When the lengths of four sides and one diagonal are given.
(ii) When the lengths of three sides and two diagonal are given.
(iii) When the lengths of four sides and one angle is given.
(iv) When the lengths of three sides and two included angles are given.
(v) When three angles and two included sides are given.
Now we will illustrate one by one these cases by following examples.
(a) One Diagonal & Four Sides are Given
In this case, since the four sides and a diagonal are given, so we consider the quadrilateral
ABCD as a figure made of two triangles,
(i) ABC and ADC when diagonal AC as the common side is given.
(ii) ABD and BCD when diagonal BD as the common side is given.
The following examples illustrate the process.
Illustration 6.1
Construct a quadrilateral ABCD in which AB = 4.4 cm, BC = 4 cm, CD = 6.4 cm, DA = 2.8
and BD = 6.6 cm.
Sol. First, we draw a rough sketch of the quadrilateral ABCD and write down its dimensions
along the sides.
We may divide the quadrilateral ABCD into two constructible triangles ABD and BCD.
C

6 .4
4cm

6.6cm D
B
4.4 m
cm 8c
2.
A

Steps of Construction :
(i) Draw BD = 6.6 cm.
(ii) With B as centre and radius BC = 4cm, draw an arc.
(iii) With D as centre and radius CD = 6.4 cm, drawn an arc, to intersect the arc drawn
in step 2 at C.
C

6.4

4cm
cm

6.6cm D
B
4.4 m
cm 8c
2.
A
(iv) With B as centre and radius BA = 4.4 cm, draw an arc on the side of BD opposite to
that of C.
(v) With D as centre and radius AD = 2.8 cm, draw another arc to intersect the arc
drawn in step (iv) at A.
(vi) Join BA, DA, BC and CD.
The quadrilateral ABCD so obtained is the required quadrilateral.
Illustration 6.2
Construct a parallelogram ABCD where AB = 3.6 cm, BC = 4.2 cm and AC = 6.5 cm.
Sol. In a parallelogram opposite sides are equal. Thus, we have to construct a quadrilateral
ABCD in which AB = 3.6 cm, BC= 4.2 cm, CD = 3.6 cm, AD = 4.2 cm and AC = 6.5cm.
B
4.2
m cm
6c
3.
6.5cm C
A
4.2 cm
cm 3.6

D
Steps of Construction :
(i) Draw AC = 6.5 cm as shown in figure.
(ii) With A as centre and radius AB = 3.6 cm, draw an arc.
(iii) With C as centre and radius BC = 4.2 cm, draw an arc, intersecting the arc drawn in
step (ii) at B.
(iv) With A as centre and radius AD = 4.2 cm, draw an arc on the side of AC opposite to
that of B.
(v) With C as centre and radius CD = 3.6 cm, draw another arc to intersect the arc
drawn in step (iv) at D.
(vi) Join AB, BC, AD and CD to obtain the required parallelogram ABCD.

(b) When Three Sides and Both Diagonals are given

In this case also, we divide the quadrilateral into two conveniently constructible triangles as
illustrated in the following examples :
Illustration 6.3
Construct a quadrilateral ABCD in which AB = 5.5 cm, AD = 4.4 cm, CD = 6.5 cm, AC = 6.5
cm and BD = 7.1 cm.
Sol. First we draw a rough sketch of quadrilateral ABCD. It is evident from the rough sketch that
we have sufficient data to draw triangles ADC and ABD.

Now, we follow the following steps to construct the required quadrilateral.

Steps of construction :
(i) Draw AC = 6.5 cm.
(ii) With A as centre and radius AD = 4.4 cm, draw an arc.
(iii) With C as centre and radius CD = 6.5 cm, draw an arc to intersect the arc drawn in
step (ii) at D.
(iv) With A as centre and radius AB = 5.5 cm, draw an arc on the side of AC opposite to
that of D.
(v) With D as centre and radius BD = 7.1 cm, draw an arc intersecting the arc drawn in
step (iv) at B.
(vi) Join AD, CD, AB and CB to obtain the required quadrilateral.

A C

(c) Four Sides and one Angle is Given

Constructing a quadrilateral when its four sides and one angle are given :
The following examples illustrate the procedure.

Illustration 6.4

Construct a quadrilateral ABCD, where AB = 2.7 cm, BC = 3.5 cm, CD = 4 cm, AD = 6 cm

andB = 90°.
Sol. Here, four sides and one angle are given. We first draw the rough sketch as shown in
figure. It is evident from the rough sketch that in ABC, two sides and the included angle
are given. So, we first construct ABC. Now, AC is known from ABC and AD and CD are
given. So, ACD can also be drawn. Thus, to draw the quadrilateral ABCD, we follow the
following steps.
D
4c
m
C

6 cm

3.5 cm
900
A B
2.7 cm
Steps of Construction :
(i) Draw AB = 2.7 cm.
(ii) Construct ABX = 90°
(iii) With B as centre and radius BC = 3.5, cut off BC = 3.5 cm along BX.
(iv) Join AC.
(v) With A as centre and radius AD = 6 cm draw an arc.
(vi) With C as centre and radius CD = 4 cm draw an arc to cut the arc drawn in step (v)
at D.
(vii) Join CD and AD.
D
4c X
m
C
6 cm

3.5 cm

0
90
A B
2.7 cm

The quadrilateral ABCD so obtained is the required quadrilateral.

Illustration 6.5
Construct a quadrilateral ABCD given AB = 5.6 cm, BC = 4.1 cm, CD = 4.4 cm, AD = 3.3
cm and A = 75°.
Sol. We first draw a rough sketch of the required quadrilateral and write down its dimensions
along the sides. We can divide the construction of required quadrilateral into two parts
(i) construction of ABD
(ii) Construction BCD.

The following steps are used to construct the required quadrilateral.

C X
D 4.4 cm
C
D

4.1 cm
3.3 c

75° 75°
A 5.6 cm B A B
Steps of Construction :
(i) Draw AB = 5.6cm.
(ii) Construct BAX = 75°
(iii) With A as centre and radius AD = 3.3 cm, cut off AD = 3.3 cm along AX.
(iv) Join BD.
(v) With D as centre and radius DC = 4.4 cm, draw an arc.
(vi) With B as centre and radius BC = 4.1 cm, draw an arc to cut the arc drawn in step
(v) at C.
(vii) Join BC & CD to obtain the required quadrilateral ABCD

(d) Three Sides and Two Included Angles are Given

Illustration 6.6
Construct a quadrilateral ABCD, where AB = 3.6 cm, BC = 5.5 cm, CD = 5 cm, B = 125°
and C = 80°.
Sol. We first draw the rough sketch of the quadrilateral and indicate on it the data as shown in
figure.
D
5cm

80° C
cm
5.5

125°
A B
3.6cm
We observe that the data is sufficient to draw triangles BCA and BCD. Because in each
case two sides and the included angle are given. The side BC is common to both. This
suggests us the following steps of construction.
Steps of Construction :
(i) Draw BC = 5.5 cm
(ii) At B construct XBC = 1250
(iii) At C construct YCB = 800, such that X and Y are on the same side of BC
(iv) With B as centre and radius AB = 3.6 cm, draw an arc to intersect BX at A.
(v) With C as centre and radius CD = 5 cm, draw an arc to intersect CY at D.

(vi) Join AD.

The quadrilateral ABCD so obtained is the required quadrilateral.

(e) Three Angles and Two Included Sides are Given

Illustration 6.7
Construct a quadrilateral ABCD where AB = 3.5 cm, BC = 6.5 cm, A = 75°, B = 105°
and C = 120°.
Sol. Let us draw a rough sketch of the required quadrilateral and write down the given data as
shown in figure.
D

A 3.5cm B

We now follow the following steps to construct the required quadrilateral.

Step of Construction :
(i) Draw AB = 3.5 cm
(ii) Draw XAB = 75° at A and ABY = 105°.
(iii) With B as centre and radius BC = 6.5 cm, draw an arc to intersect BY at C.
(iv) At C draw BCZ = 120° such that CZ meets AX at D.
The quadrilateral ABCD so obtained is the required quadrilateral.

Illustration 6.8
Construct a parallelogram one of whose sides is 5.2 cm and whose diagonals are 6 cm and
6.4 cm.
D C

3c
cm O m
3.2
A B
Sol. 5.2 cm
(i) Draw AB = 5.2 cm
(ii) With A as centre and radius 3.2 cm draw an arc.
(iii) With B as centre and radius 3 cm draw another arc cutting the previous arc at O.
(iv) Join OA and OB
(v) Produce AO to C such that AO = OC and produce BO to D such that BO = OD.
(vi) Join AD, BC and CD.
ABCD is the required parallelogram.
Illustration 6.9
Construct a parallelogram whose diagonals are 5.4 cm and 6.2 cm and an angle between
them is 70º.
Sol.
X

A 70º
C
O
m
1c
3.

Y
(i) Draw AC = 5.4 cm
(ii) Bisect AC at O.
(iii) Make COX = 70º and produce XO to Y.
1 1
(iv) Cut off OB = (6.2) = 3.1 cm and OD = (6.2) = 3.1 cm
2 2
(v) Join AB, BC, CD and DA
ABCD is the required parallelogram
Illustration 6.10
Construct a rectangle ABCD in which side BC = 5 cm and diagonal BD =6.2 cm.
Sol.
X

A 5 cm D

cm
6.2

B 5 cm
C

(i) Draw BC = 5 cm
(ii) Draw CX  BC.
(iii) With B as centre and radius 6.2 cm draw an arc to cut CX at D.
(iv) Join BD.
(v) With D as centre and radius 5 cm draw an arc.
(vi) With B as centre and radius equal to CD draw another arc, cutting the previous arc
at A.
(vii) Join AB and AD.
ABCD is the required rectangle
Illustration 6.11
Construct a square with diagonal of 5.2 cm
Sol.
X

2.6 cm
A C
O
5.2 cm
2.6 cm

B
Y
(i) Draw AC = 5.2 cm
(ii) Draw the perpendicular bisector XY of AC meeting AC at O
1
(iii) From O cut off OB = (5.2) = 2.6 cm along OY and OD = 2.6 cm along OX.
2
(iv) Join AB, BC, CD and DA. ABCD is the required square.

Ask yourself

1. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD in which AB = 4.2 cm, BC = 6 cm, CD = 5.2 cm, DA = 5 cm

and AC = 8 cm.

2. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD, given that AB = 4.2 cm, BC = 5 cm, CD = 4.3 cm,
B = 60° andC = 120°.

3. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD, given that AD = 5 cm, CD = 7 cm, A = 125°, B = 105°, 

C = 100°.

4. Construct a square whose each side is 5 cm.

5. Construct a rhombus PQRS where each side measures 5 cm and P = 60º

6. Contruct a square each of whose sides measures 6·3 cm.

Concept Map

Summary

1. To construct a quadrilateral uniquely, it is necessary to know at least five of its parts.

2. Measurements of five parts of a quadrilateral are sufficient to construct it in the following
cases :
(i) Four sides and one diagonal.
(ii) Three sides and both diagonals.
(iii) Two adjacent sides and three angles.
(iv) Three sides and two included angles.
(v) Four sides and one angle.
3. Measurements of five parts of a quadrilateral, are sufficient for its construction, must also
satisfy, wherever relevant,
(i) triangle inequality property, i.e., sum of two sides is greater than the third side.
(ii) angle sum property of a quadrilateral.
4. It is always convenient and helpful to draw a rough sketch of the quadrilateral and indicate
the given measurements.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)
SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD in which AB = 4.5 cm, BC = 4 cm, CD = 6.5 cm, DA = 3 cm
and BD = 6.5 cm.

2. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD in which AB = 4 cm, BC = 3 cm, AD = 2.5 cm, AC = 4.5 cm

and BD = 4cm.

3. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD in which AB = 3.5 cm, BC = 5 cm, CD = 4.6 cm, B = 125°
and C = 60°.

4. Construct a quadrilateral PQRS in which PQ = 4 cm, QR = 5 cm, P = 50° Q = 110° and

R = 70°.

5. Construct a parallelogram ABCD in which AB = 5.2 cm, BC = 4.7 cm and AC = 7.6 cm

6. Construct a rhombus whose diagonals are 6 cm and 8 cm.

7. Construct a rhombus ABCD in which AB = 4 cm and diagonal AC is 6.5 cm.

8. Construct a rhombus with side 4.2 cm and one of its angles 65º

9. Construct a rectangle ABCD whose adjacent sides are 5 cm and 4.5 cm

10. Construct a square each of whose side measure 4.6 cm

11. Construct a square each of whose diagonals measure 5.8 cm

12. Construct a quadrilateral PQRS in which PQ = 3 cm, QR = 5 cm, QS = 5 cm, PS = 4 cm

and SR = 4 cm.

13. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD in which AB = 7.7 cm, BC = 6.8 cm, CD = 5.1 cm,
AD = 3.6 cm, C = 120°.

14. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD when BC = 5.5 cm, CD = 4.1 cm, A = 70°, B = 110° and
D = 85°

15. Construct a quadrilateral PQRS in which QR = 7.5 cm, PR = PS = 6 cm, RS = 5 cm and

QS = 10 cm. Measure the fourth side.

16. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD in which AB = BC = 3.5 cm, AD = CD = 5.2 cm and

ABC = 120°.

17. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD in which AB = 2.9 cm, BC = 3.2 cm, CD = 2.7 cm,
DA = 3.4 cm and A = 70°.

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Given below are the steps of construction to construct a quadrilateral ABCD where
AB = 5.6 cm, BC = 4.1 cm, CD = 4.4 cm, AD = 3.3 cm and A = 75°. Which of the
following is Incorrect step ?
(P) Step I : Draw AB = 5.6 cm and construct BAX = 75°.
(Q) Step II : With A as centre and radius = 3.3 cm, cut off AD = 3.3 cm along AX.
(R) Step III : Join BD. With D as centre and radius = 4.1 cm, draw an arc.
(S) Step IV : With B as centre and radius = 4.1 cm, draw an arc to cut the arc drawn in
above step at C. Join BC, CD to obtain the required quadrilateral ABCD.
(A) P (B) Q (C) R (D) S

2. If a quadrilateral has exactly two pairs of equal adjacent sides and the unequal opposite
sides, then it is called _________.
(A) Parallelogram (B) Square (C) Rectangle (D) Kite

3. To construct a convex quadrilateral, which of the following cases is not correct ?

(A) When the lengths of four sides and one diagonal are given.
(B) When the lengths of three sides and the two diagonals are given.
(C) When the lengths of four sides and one angle are given.
(D) When the lengths of two sides and two included angles are given.

4. To construct a quadrilateral uniquely, it is necessary to have the knowledge of at least

________ independent elements.
(A) Four (B) Five (C) Three (D) Six
5. Given below are the steps of construction of a quadrailateral ABCD, where AB = 3.5 cm,
BC = 6.5 cm, A = 75°, B = 105° and C = 120°. Which of the following is a wrong
step ?
(P) Step I : Draw AB = 3.5 cm
(Q) Step II : Draw XAB = 75° at A and ABY = 105° at B.
(R) Step III : With B as centre and radius BC = 6.5 cm, draw an arc to intersect BY at C.
(S) Step IV : At C draw ADC = 120° such that CZ meets AX at D.
(A) P (B) Q (C) R (D) S

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

1. The construction of which figure is shown in the diagram ? [NSTSE - 2013]

A C

(A) A trapezium (B) A rhombus (C) A rectangle (D) A kite

2. The diagram shows the construction of a paralellogram KLMN. The width of the
compasses for step-I and step-II are the same. How much does the angle KLM measure ?
[NSTSE - 2014]
L M

K N

(A) 45° (B) 60° (C) 120° (D) 135°

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5

Ans. C D D B D

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

Ques. 1 2

Ans. B C

07
CHAPTER

PLAYING WITH NUMBERS

TERMINOLOGIES
Divisibility test, alphanumeric puzzles, generalized form, ten’s digit, unit digit.

INTRODUCTION
In previous classes, we have learnt about various types of numbers for example natural
number, whole number, integers, rational numbers. Earlier, Mathematics was known as the
difficult and boring subject. But different activities, puzzles and games have made it easier
and and interesting, different concepts and ideas helped the students to observe pattern,
explore then and try to define them in their own way.

7.1 PLAYING WITH NUMBERS

(a) Number in general form

Any number is said to be in a generalized form if it is expressed as the sum of the product
of its digits with their respective place values.
Thus, a two-digit number having a and b as its digits at the tens and the ones places
respectively is written in the generalized form as 10a + b, i.e., in general, a two-digit
number can be written as 10 a + b, where 'a' can be any of the digits from 1 to 9 and 'b' can
be any of the digits from 0 to 9.
Similarly, a three-digit number can be written in the generalized form as 100 a + 10 b + c,
where 'a' can be anyone of the digits from 1 to 9 while 'b' and 'c' can be any of the digits
from 0 to 9.
The generalized forms of a few numbers are given below:
56 =10 × 5 + 6 ;
90 = 10 × 9 + 0 ;
129 = 100 × 1 + 2 x 10 + 9 ;
206 = 100 x 2 + 10 x 0 + 6 ;
Illustration 7.1
If the number obtained by interchanging the digits of a two-digit number is 18 more than the
original number and the sum of the digits is 8 then what is the original number?
Sol. Let the original number be 10a + b. Then, 'a' is the tens digit and 'b' is the units digit. Since
the sum of the digits is 8, therefore a + b = 8, i.e., b = 8 – a .
So, the original number is 10a + (8 – a).
 the number obtained by interchanging the digits is 10(8 – a) + a, and so we have
{10(8 – a) + a} – {10a + (8 – a)} = 18.
Solving this equation, we get
a = 3.
And so, b = 8 – a = 8 – 3 = 5.
Hence, the original number is 10a + b = 30 + 5 = 35.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -130
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
PLAYING WITH NUMBERS

Illustration 7.2
In a two-digit number, the digit in the units place is four times the digit in the tens place and
sum of the digits is equal to 10. What is the number?
Sol. Let the original number be 10a + b.
Then, b = 4a and a + b = 10.
We put b = 4a in a + b = 10 so that a + 4a = 10, i.e., 5a = 10, i.e., a = 2.
 a = 2 and b = 4a = 8.
Hence, the number is 10a + b = 20 + 8 = 28.

(b) Divisibility test

Number Divisiblity Test

2 Unit digit should be 0 or even
3 The sum of digits of no. should be divisible by 3

4 The no. formed by last 2 digits of given no. should be divisible by 4.

5 Unit digit should be 0 or 5.

6 No. should be divisible by 2 & 3 both

8 The number formed by last 3 digits of given no. should be divisible by 8.

9 Sum of digits of given no. should be divisible by 9

The difference between sums of the digits at even & at odd places should be zero
11
or multiple of 11.
25 Last 2 digits of the number should be 00, 25, 50 or 75.

Illustration 7.3
Replace * by the smallest digit, so that 1*4 is divisible by (i) 3, (ii) 9. Find the number also.
Sol. (i) Sum of the digits of 1*4=1+4=5
The number next to 5 which is divisible by 3 is 6, so * is to be replaced by 1
  The number becomes 114
(ii) Sum of the digits of 1*4=1+4=5
The number next to 5 which is divisible by 9 is 9, so * is to be replaced by 4
  The number becomes 144
Illustration 7.4
Replace ‘a’ by the smallest digit, so that 41a624 is divisible by 11. Find the number also.
Sol. Sum of the digits at odd places =4+6+1=11
Sum of the digits at even places =2+a+4=6+a
So, the difference of sum of digits at odd places and even places=0 or multiple of 11
 11– (6+a) = 0
 11– 6 –a = 0
 5–a=0
 a = 5.

(c) Alpha Numeric Puzzles

In general, we have digits in any mathematical operations. But in these puzzles letters are
given in place of digits and we have to code these letters to find out the corresponding digit
for the letter. Some addition & multiplication puzzles are as follows :

Illustration 7.5
Find Q in the addition.
3 1 Q
 1 Q 3
5 0 1
Sol. As the addition in the ones column : From Q + 3, we get ‘1’, that is, a number whose ones
digit is 1.
For this to happen, the digit Q should be 8. So the puzzle can be solved as shown below :
3 1 8
 1 8 3
5 0 1
So, Q = 8.
Illustration 7.6
Find A and B in the addition.
A
 A
 A
B A

Sol. As the addition in the ones column : The sum of three A’ s is a number whose one digit is
A. Therefore, the sum of two A’s must be a number whose ones digit is 0.
This happens only for A = 0 and A = 5.
If A = 0, then the sum is 0 + 0 + 0 = 0, which makes B = 0 too. We do not want this (as it
makes A = B, and then the tens digit of BA too becomes 0), so we reject this possibility.
So, A = 5.
Therefore, the puzzle is solved as shown below.
5
 5
 5
1 5
That is, A = 5 and B = 1.
Illustration 7.7
Find the digits A and B.
B A
 B 3
5 7 A
Sol. This also has two letters A and B whose values are to be found.
Since the ones digit of 3 × A is A, it must be that A = 0 or A = 5.
Now look at B. If B = 1, then BA × B3 would at most be equal to 19 × 19; that is, it would at
most be equal to 361. But the product here is 57A, which is more is more than 500. So we
cannot have B = 1.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -132
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
PLAYING WITH NUMBERS

If B = 3, then BA × B3 would be more than 30 × 30; that is, more than 900. But 57A is less
these two facts together, we see that B = 2 only. So the multiplication is either 20 × 23,
or 25 × 23.
The first possibility fails, since 20 × 23 = 460. But, the second one works out correctly,
since 25 × 23 = 575.
2 5
 2 3
5 7 5
So the answer is A = 5, B = 2.
Illustration 7.8

In the following problem, replace the letters of the English alphabet by digits [two or more
letters may have the same value] to complete the procedure of division.
5C
9 4AB
–DE
3F
–GH
0

Sol. In the quotient, the first number is 5 and we know that 9 × 5 = 45.
:. D = 4 and E = 5.
Now, 48 – 45 = 3. Therefore, A = 8.
Also, to make the number 3F to be divisible by 9 we must have F = 6. And so, C = 4
and B = 6. Also, G = 3, H = 6.
Thus, the division works out as shown below :
54
9 486
–4 5
36
–3 6
0

MORE PUZZLES

Illustration 7.9
What number comes next :
1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, _,
Sol. We add the first two numbers, 1 + 1 and get the third number 2. To get 3, we add the two
numbers that comes before it 1+ 2 = 3
Similarly, we go on doing that. So, 13 + 21 = 34.
Illustration 7.10
Using digits 1, 2, 3........9 (each exactly once). Can you find 3-digit numbers so that the
second number is twice the first number and the third number is thrice the first number ?
Sol. 192, 384, 576 (192 × 2 = 384, 192 × 3 = 576)
219, 438, 657 (219 × 2 = 438, 219 × 3 = 657)
327, 654, 981 (327 × 2 = 654, 327 × 3 = 981)

Illustration 7.11
Put the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 in the bubbles so that each edge adds to the same
things ?

Sol.

Make another one with different propositions of numbers.

Illustration 7.12
Insert '+' and ‘–' symbols between the numbers so that the equations become correct.
(i) 591723=9 (ii) 123458=7 (iii) 875442=8.
Sol. (i) 5–9+1+7+2+3=9 (ii) 1+2–3+4–5+8=7
(iii) 8–7+5–4+4+2=8
Illustration 7.13
Find two numbers whose product is a one-digit number and the sum is a two-digit number.
Sol. The two natural number are 1 and 9.
Their sum is 1 + 9 = 10 (i.e. a two digit number)
Their product is 1 × 9 = 9 (i.e. a single digit number).
Illustration 7.14
Find three whole numbers whose product and the sum are equal.
Sol. The three whole number are 1, 2 and 3.
Their sum is 1 + 2 + 3 = 6
Their product is 1 × 2 × 3 = 6.

Ask yourself

1. The sum of the digits of a 2-digit number is 7. If the number obtained by interchanging the
digits is 27 more than the original number. Find the original number.

2. Replace * by the smallest digit so that 21 * 7 is divisible by

(a) 3 (b) 9

3. If a number is divisible by 3, need it be tested for 9? Justify your answer by stating any
2 numbers which are divisble by 3 but not by 9?
Answers
1. 25 2. (a) 2 (b) 8

Add your knowledge

1. Divisiblility rule of ‘3’

Proof: Consider a 3 digit number ‘abc’
So, ‘abc’ = 100a + 10b + c
Which can be written as = 99a + 9b + a + b + c
‘abc’ = 3(33a + 3b) + (a + b + c)
The first part is always divisible by ‘3’.
For ‘abc’ to be divisible by ‘3’, the second part i.e., (a + b + c) must be divisible by 3.
2. Divisibility rule of ‘11’.
Proof : Consider a four digit number ‘abcd’
‘abcd’ = 1000 a + 100 b + 10 c + d
On regrouping
‘abcd’ = (1001a – a) + (99b + b) + (11c – c) + d
‘abcd’ = (1001 a + 99b + 11 c) + (– a + b – c + d)
First part is always divisible by ‘11’
For the number ‘abcd’ to be divisible by ‘11’, second part i.e., (b + d) – (a + c) must be zero
or divisible by ‘11’.

Concept Map

PLAYING WITH NUMBERS

Number in General Form Divisibility Test Alphanumeric Puzzles

Two Digit Number ab = 10a + b Ex. A
A
+A
BA Then A,B = 1 , 5

Summary

1. In general, any two digit number xy made of digits x and y can be written as
xy = 10 × x + y.

2. The sum of a two digit number and its reversing number is always a multiple of 11.

3. The difference of a two digit number and its reversing number is always a multiple of 9.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. If a 3-digit number ‘abc’ is divisible by 11, then ___________.

(A) a + b + c is a multiple of 11 (B) a + b – c is a multiple of 11
(C) a – b + c is a multiple of 11 (D) a – b – c is a multiple of 11

2. The number (10n–1) is divisible by 11 for

(A) n  N (B) Odd values of n
(C) Even values of n (D) n is the multiple of 11

3. If the eight digit number 2575d568 is divisible by 54, the value of the digit ‘d’ is
(A) 4 (B) 7 (C) 0 (D) 8

4. 237 * 5 is divisible by 15. Then * = ?

(A) 1 (B) 4 (C) 7 (D) all of these

5. 635 * 2 is divisible by 6. Then the value of * = ?

(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 6 (D) 1

1 A B
6. If  C C A and there is no carry on addition, then the value of B is ______.
6 9 7
(A) 5 (B) 4 (C) 3 (D) 2
1 A
 A
7. If , where A and B are single digit number such that B – A = 3, then the values of A
B6
and B are
(A) 4, 5 (B) 9, 6 (C) 5, 4 (D) 6, 9

8. What is the value of A if each letter represents a different digit ?

A3B
×B
217B
(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 5 (D) 7

Directions : (9 to 10) In the following questions some/letters stands for arithmetic sign as
indicated below. The remaining letters have their serial numbers in the Alphabets. Decode
the letters into number and sign to decide correct alternative-
A = ×, E = –, O = , U = +

9. TEF
(A) 14 (B) 12 (C) 16 (D) 18

10. SETUH
(A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 7 (D) 8

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 1234567?7654321 is divisible by 11, then ?
2. 5, 8, 13, 21, 34,______
3. 7, 21, 84, 420, ______

Use +, –,  to fill the blanks

4. 18  6 __ 5 + 2 __ 4 = 6
5. 8 __ 7 __ 3 =12

6. 8  4 __ 2 __ 3 = 7

TRUE / FALSE
1. 13650275 is divisible by 25
2. 1289739 is divisible by 11.
3. 1004001 is divisible by 3 but not by 9
4. Every number divisible by 2 is also divisible by 4.
5. Every number divisible by 9 is also divisible by 3

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Column–I Column–II
(A) abc – cba (p) divisible by 2
(B) ab5 (q) divisible by 111
(C) ab8 (r) divisible by 99
(D) abc + bca + cab (s) divisible by 5
2. Column –I Column–II
(A) The sum of a number (p) 5
and the number obtained
by reversing its digits is
always divisible by
(B) If the sum of the digits of (q) 2
a two- digit number is
subtracted from the number
then the resultant number is
divisible by
(C) If a is divisible by 5 and b is (r) 9
divisible by 5 then a+b is
divisible by
(D) If a is divisible by 4 and b is (s) 11
divisible by 4 then a–b is
divisible by
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -138
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
PLAYING WITH NUMBERS

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. What least value must be assigned to * so that the number 197 * 5462 is divisible by 9 ?
2. Find the number of pairs of x, y for which the number 357y25x is divisible by both 3 and 5.
3. Solve : (x – a) (x – b) (x – c)........................(x – z) = ?
4. What numbers goes in the blank spaces ?

5. Shifting only 3 circles, make this shape upside down ?

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. A boy was asked to multiply a certain number by 25. He multiplied it by 52 and got his
answer more than the correct one by 324. Find the number to be multiplied.
1
7. A number of two digits has 3 for its units digit and the sum of digits is of the number
7
itself. What is the number ?

 1  1  1  1  1  1  1
8. Find the value of  1   1    1    1    1    1    1  
 2  3  4  5  6  7  8
 1  1  1  1
9. Find the value of :  1–   1–   1–  ..............  1– 
 3  4  5  n

10. You just bought twelve articles (small trees). You want to put them in six lines with four
trees in each lines. How are you going to do it ?

LONG ANSWER TYPE

11. A two-digit number becomes five-sixth of itself when its digits are reversed. The two digits,
differ by one. What is the number ?
12. The digit in the ten’s place of a two-digit number is three times that in the one’s place. If the
digits are reversed the new number will be 36 less than the original number. Find the
number. .
A B
13.  3 , find the value of A + B + C.
C A B

14. Every minute, each amoeba splits into two amoebas. At 5 P.M., you put one amoeba in a
box. At 6 P. M., the box is full of amoebas. When was the box half full ?

15. Put the numbers (1 to 9) in the bubbles so that each row, column & diagonal adds up to the
same thing

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)

1. The number which is exactly divisible by 99 is __________.

(A) 3572404 (B) 135792 (C) 913464 (D) 114345

2. The least value must be given to x so that the number 91876 × 2 is divisible by 8 is
________.
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

3. The largest natural number by which the product of three consecutive even natural
numbers is always divisible, is ______.
(A) 16 (B) 24 (C) 48 (D) 96

4. If N divided by 5 leaves a remainder of 3, then one’s digit of N must be ________ .

(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 9 (D) 7

5. 15287 is divisible by __________ .

(A) 3 (B) 7 (C) 9 (D) None of thes

6. a + b + c + d = d + e + f + g = g + h + i = 17. Each of the alphabets denotes distinct natural

numbers from 1 to 9. Find value of d + g.
(A) 8 (B) 6 (C) 11 (D) 10
Directions : (7 to 9) In the following questions find out the digits corresponding to the letters
representing those digits in the multiplication give below.

3a4e
4a35
2961
34a39e

7. b stands for :
(A) 6 (B) 7 (C) 8 (D) 9

8. c stands for :
(A) 7 (B) 6 (C) 5 (D) 4

9. d stands for :
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5

10. A number divided by 323 leaves 125 as remainder. What would be the remainder, if this
number is divided by 19 ?
(A) 10 (B) 11 (C) 12 (D) 13

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. The least value of x so that 97215 × 6 is divisible by 11 is _________.

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 5
12. If 6 x y 5 is a four digit number divisible by 55, then (y – x) is equal to :
(A) – 2 (B) – 1 (C) 1 (D) 2

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS
1. How many triangles are there in this figure 4 ? [Aryabhatta-2004]
C

K J
F E

I
L M
A B
G H

D
(A) 12 (B) 9 (C) 11 (D) 10
2. If ‘’ means ‘–’, ‘–’ means ‘x’, ‘x’ means ‘+’ and ‘+’ means ‘’ , then 20 × 60  40 – 20 + 10 =
[Aryabhatta-2010]
(A) 40 (B) 80 (C) 0 (D) 60

3. Which of the following numbers is exactly divisible by 99 ? (IMO 2010)

(A) 114345 (B) 135792 (C) 3572404 (D) 913464

4. Observe the pattern and find the number to fill the blank [Aryabhatta-2011]
216 2
27 5

? 3
8 6

(A) 25 (B) 125 (C) 215 (D) 625

5. The sum of a two digit number and the number obtained by interchanging the digits of the
number is 121. If the digits of the number differ by 5, then find the number
[Aryabhatta-2011]
6. A merchant has 140 litres, 260 litres and 320 litres of three kinds of oil. He wants to sell the
oil by filling the three kinds of oil separately in tins of equal volumes. The volume of such a
tin is_______. (IMO 2011)
(A) 20 litres (B) 13 litres (C) 16 litres (D) 70 litres

7. Find the next number in the series : [Aryabhatta-2012]

14, 28, 20, 40, 32, 64,.........
(A) 52 (B) 56 (C) 96 (D) 128
8. How many numbers are there between 200 and 800 which are divisible by both 5 and 7?
(IMO 2012)
(A) 35 (B) 16 (C) 17 (D) Can't be determined

9. In the morning batch at 'a school' we have observed that when five students took seat on
each bench, 4 students remained unseated. But when eleven students took seat per
bench, 4 benches remained vacant. The number of students in the morning batch were?
(IMO 2012)
(A) 55 (B) 48 (C) 26 (D) 44
10. Aisha needs to buy 300 sheets of construction paper. The office supply store sells
construction paper in the following packages. Which of the following is the least expensive
way for Aisha to buy 300 sheets of construction paper ? (IMO 2012)

(A) 6 packages of paper W (B) 4 packages of paper X

(C) 3 packages of paper Y (D) 2 packages of paper Z
11. Pratik had Rs.425.82 in his account. How much does he have in his account after he
makes a deposit of Rs.120.75 and a withdrawal of Rs.185.90 ? (IMO 2012)
(A) Rs.12682 (B) Rs.538.82 (C) Rs.630.76 (D) Rs.360.67
12. Which of the following numbers is divisible by 11 ?
(A) 1011011 (B) 1111111 (C) 22222222 (D) 3333333
13. Three different containers contain different qualities of mixtures of milk and water, whose
measurements are 403 kg, 434 kg and 465 kg. What biggest measure must be there to
measure all the different quantities exactly ? (IMO 2013)
(A) 1 kg (B) 7 kg (C) 31 kg (D) 41 kg
14. If P and Q represents the prime digits, then find the value of P and Q respectively.
[Aryabhatta-2014]
P P 5
× Q Q
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2 Q 2 5
+ 2 Q 2 5 0
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
2 5 5 7 5
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
(A) 3, 3 (B) 7, 5 (C) 1, 5 (D) 7, 3

15. If the eight digit number 5671a118 is exactly divisible by 222, then find the least possible
value of a. [IOM 2017]
(A) 0 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

16. The sum of the digits of a two digit number is 13. If 45 is subtracted from the number, the
resultant number becomes the number obtained on reversing the digits of the original
number. Find the number which is nine times the original number. [IOM 2017]
(A) 765 (B) 846 (C) 684 (D) 603

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. C C B D A C D B A C

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 8 2. 55 3. 2520 4. –,  5. +,–
6. , +
TRUE / FALSE
1. True 2. True 3. True 4. False 5. True
MATCH THE COLUMN
1. (A) – (r) ; (B) – (s); (C) – (p); (D) – (q)
2. (A) – (s) ; (B) – (r); (C) – (p); (D) – (q)
SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)
SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1
1 1
1 2 1
1. 2 2. 7 3. 0 4. 1 3 3 1
1 4 6 4 1
1 5 10 10 5 1

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

2
6. 12 7. 63 8. 4.5 9.
n

10.

LONG ANSWER TYPE

11. 54 12. 62 13. 6 14. 5 : 59 P. M.
2 9 4

15. 7 5 3

6 1 8

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. D A C A D B C A C B C B

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ans. A C A B 83/38 A B C D B D C C D D B

CHAPTER
ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSION

TERMINOLOGIES

Literals, constant, variables, terms, binomial, trinomial, algebraic expression,

factors, coeffiicients, multinomial, polynomial, like terms, unlike terms, degree,
exponent, factor method, monomial.

INTRODUCTION
In this class, we will study various definitions of literals, constant and variable, factors,
degree of an algebraic expressions various operations like addition, Subtraction,
multiplication and division of algebraic expression.

8.1 VARIOUS DEFINITIONS & CONCEPTS

(a) Literals
The letters which are used to represent numbers are called literal numbers or literals. In
2xy, x & y are the literals.
Literal numbers obey all the rules (and signs) of addition, subtraction, multiplication and
division of numbers along with the properties of these operations. a × b = ab, 2 × a = 2a, 1
× a = a, x × 3 = 3x and a × a × a × ......× a (15 times) = a15.
In a5, 5 is called the index or exponent and ‘a’ is called the base.
(b) Constant
A term of the expression having no literal factor is called a constant term.
(i) In the binomial expression 5x + 7, the constant term is 7. In short, a symbol having
a fixed numerical value is called a constant.
3 3
(ii) In the trinomial expression x2 – y2 – , the constant term is – .
2 2
(c) Variable
A symbol which takes various numerical values is called a variable.
(d) Algebraic expression
A combination of constants and variables connected by the signs of fundamental
operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication and division is called an algebraic
expression.
(e) Terms, factors and coefficients
Take the expression 3x – 5y + 8. This expression is made up of three terms, 3x, – 5y and
8. Terms are added to form expressions. Terms themselves can be formed as the product
of factors. The 3x is the product of its factors 3 and x. The numerical factor of term is called
its numerical coefficients or simply coefficients. The coefficients in the term 3x is 3 and the
coefficient in the term – 5y is – 5.

(f) Types of algebraic expressions

(i) Monomial : An expression is said to be a monomial if it has only one term.
For example : x, 9x2, – 5x2 are all monomials.
(ii) Binomial : An expression is said to be a binomial if it contains two terms.
For example : 2x2 + 3x, 3 x + 5x4, – 8x3 + 3 etc. are all binomials.
(iii) Trinomial : An expression is said to be a trinomial if it contains three terms.
5
For example : 3x3 – 8x + , 7 x10 + 8x4 – 3x2 etc. are all trinomials.
2
(iv) Multinomial : An expression is said to be a multinomial if it contains more than
three terms. All these monomial, binomial, trinomial, multinomial are called polynomial.
(g) Like and unlike terms
Terms having same combination of literal numbers are called like terms otherwise unlike
terms. For example,
(i) In the algebraic expression : 12a2 – 15b2 + b2 –17a2 + 8ab + 9, we have, 12a2 and –
17a2 as like terms. Also, – 15b2 and b2 are like terms.
(ii) In the algebraic expression : 3p2q + 5pq2 – 7pq – 9qp2, 5pq2 and –7pq are unlike
terms.
(h) Degree of an algebraic expression
If an algebraic expression contain only one variable say x, then it is called an algebraic
expression in one variable and its degree is the highest exponent (degree) of that variable
in the expression.
For example : 2x3 + 3x2 – 6x + 4. The highest power of x in all terms of polynomial is 3.
Hence, the degree of the polynomial is 3.
If an algebraic expression contains two variables say x and y, then it is called an algebraic
expression in two variables and its degree is the highest exponent (power) of the term
obtained by adding the exponents of the variables.
For example : 8xy – 7y3 + 9y2x2 is an algebraic expression in x and y. Its degree is 4 which
is the highest of all the terms.
An algebraic expression in x is said to be in standard form when the terms are written
either in increasing order or decreasing order of the powers of x in various terms.

Ask yourself

5 2
1. Identify the like terms of the expression 3x2y – 10xy2 – x y + 2x2y – 7y
6

2. What is the coefficient of xyz in 13 xy2z2 ?

3. Give an example of a binomial?
4. The expression 5y + 3y2 + 12y2 – 7y is a
(a) Monomial (b) Binomial (c) Trinomial (d) Polynomial
5. What is an expression containing 3 terms called ?
Answers
5 2
1. 3x2y, – x y, 2x2y 2. 13 yz 3. 2x + 3
6
4 Binomial 5. Trinomial

8.2 OPERATIONS
(a) Addition and Subtraction of algebraic expressions

For addition of two algebraic expression, first we arrange both the algebraic expression in
standard form and then we add the coefficients of like powers of variable. For example
suppose we have to find the sum of two algebraic expression f(x) = x + x2 + 1 and
g(x) = 2x2 – 4x + 3, for addition first we arrange both the algebraic expression in standard
form as follows f(x) = x2 + x + 1, g(x) = 2x2 – 4x + 3.
Now f(x) + g(x) = (x2 + x + 1) + (2x2 – 4x + 3) after arranging both the algebraic expression
as above we find the sum of coefficients of like power of x as follows :
f(x) + g(x) = (1 + 2)x2 + (1 – 4)x + (1 + 3) = 3x2 – 3x + 4.
Thus we get the required sum.
NOTE:
The process of subtraction is same as addition. In subtraction after arrangement, we find
the difference of coefficients of like powers of variable.
For example :
f(x) – g(x) = (x2 + x + 1) – (2x2 – 4x + 3) = (1 – 2)x2 + (1 + 4)x + (1 – 3) = – x2 + 5x – 2.

Illustration 8.1
Find the sum of f(x) & g(x) where,
f(x) = 4x5 + 3x3 + 4x2 + x + 1 & g(x) = 5x4 + x5 + x3 + 3.
Sol. Arrange in standard form
f(x) = 4x5 + 3x3 + 4x2 + x + 1 or f(x) = 4x5 + 0.x4 + 3x3 + 4x2 + x + 1
and g(x) = x + 5x + x + 3
5 4 3
or g(x) = x5 + 5x4 + x3 + 0.x2 + 0.x + 3
f(x) + g(x) = (4x5 + 0.x4 + 3x3 + 4x2 + x + 1) + (x5 + 5x4 + x3 + 0.x2 + 0.x + 3)
f(x) + g(x) = (4 + 1)x5 + (0 + 5)x4 + (3 + 1)x3 + (4 + 0)x2 + (1 + 0)x + (1 + 3)
= (5x5 + 5x4 + 4x3 + 4x2 + x + 4).
Illustration 8.2
Subtract g(x) from f(x) where f(x) = 2 + x2 + 4x3, g(x) = x4 + x2 + 3x + 5.
Sol. f(x) = 4x3 + x2 + 0.x + 2 = 0.x4 + 4x3 + x2 + 0.x + 2
g(x) = x4 + 0.x3 + x2 + 3x + 5
f(x) – g(x) = (0.x4 + 4x3 + x2 + 0.x + 2) – (x4 + 0x3 + x2 + 3x + 5)
f(x) – g(x) = ( 0 – 1)x4 + (4 – 0) x3 + (1 – 1) x2 + (0 – 3) x + (2 – 5)
= – x4 + 4x3 + 0. x2 – 3x – 3 = – x4 + 4x3 – 3x – 3.
Illustration 8.3
Subtract h(x) from the sum of f(x) & g(x)
where f(x) = x3+ x2 + x + 1, g(x) = 2x3 – 3x2 + 1, h(x) = 3x2 – 4x3 + 5x + 7.
Sol. f(x) = x3 + x2 + x + 1 ; g(x) = 2x3 – 3x2 + 0.x + 1
h(x) = – 4x3 + 3x2 + 5x + 7
f(x) + g(x) –h(x) = (x3 + x2 + x + 1) + (2x3 – 3x2 + 0.x + 1) – (– 4x3 + 3x2 + 5x + 7)
f(x) + g(x) – h(x) = (1 + 2 + 4) x3 + (1 – 3 – 3) x2 + (1 + 0 – 5) x + (1 + 1 – 7)
= 7x3 – 5x2 – 4x – 5

(b) Multiplication of Algebraic Expression

To get the product of two algebraic expression, carry out the following steps :
Step (i) Multiply each term of the first algebraic expression with each term of the second
algebraic expression.
Step (ii) Add all the products obtained is step I.
Illustration 8.4
Find the product of (x + y) & (x2 + xy + y2)
Sol. Step (i) (x + y) (x2 + xy + y2) = x (x2 + xy + y2) + y(x2 + xy + y2)
= x3 + x2y + xy2 + yx2 + xy2 + y3
Step (ii) Product = x3 + 2x2y + 2xy2 + y3 (Grouping like terms)
Thus, the product = x3 + 2x2y + 2xy2 + y3.

Illustration 8.5
Find the product of f(x) & g(x) where f(x) = (x2 + 2x + 2), g(x) = 3x2 – x – 1.
Sol. Step (i)
f(x) . g(x) = (x2 + 2x + 2) (3x2 – x –1)
= x2(3x2 – x –1) + 2x (3x2 – x –1) + 2 (3x2 –x –1)
= 3x4– x3 – x2 + 6x3– 2x2 – 2x + 6x2 – 2x – 2
Step (ii)
f(x).g(x) = 3x4 + (–1 + 6)x3 + (–1 –2 + 6)x2 + (– 2 –2)x – 2 = 3x4+ 5x3 + 3x2 – 4x – 2

(c) Division of Algebraic Expression

Division algorithm :
Dividend = quotient × divisor + remainder.
The process of division of an algebraic expression by another algebraic expression is also
same as we use in number system. The process of division may be divided in three cases
in polynomials.
(i) Division of a monomial by another monomial.
(ii) Division of a polynomial by monomial.
(iii) Division of a polynomial by another polynomial.
We have two methods for division of a polynomial by another polynomial.
(a) Factor method : Factor method is generally used when remainder is zero.
(b) Long division : This method generally used when remainder is not zero. This method
can also be used when remainder is zero. We shall discuss these three cases one by one.
Case1. Division of a monomial by another monomial
Illustration 8.6
Divide : (i) 15a5 by 5a3 (ii) 36a3b5 by –12a2b (iii) 2x3 by 2x
15a5  15   a5 
Sol. (i) Quotient = =   3  = 3a2
5a3  5  a 

36a3b5  36   a3   b5 
(ii) Quotient = 2
=   2    = –3ab4
12a b  12  a   b 
2x3  2   x3 
(iii) Quotient = =    = 2 x2
2x  2  x 

Case 2. Division of a polynomial by a monomial.

Divide each term of the polynomial by the monomial and then write the resulting quotients
with their proper signs.
Illustration 8.7
Divide : – 4x3 – 6x2 + 8x by 2x.
Sol. Dividing each term of the dividend by the divisor, we get
4x3  6x 2  8x 4x3 6x 2 8x
Quotient = = – + = – 2x2 – 3x + 4
2x 2x 2x 2x
Case 3. Division of a polynomial by another polynomial.
It is advisable in this case to rearrange the dividend and the divisor in descending order of
powers of variable.
Illustration 8.8
Divide x2 + 5x + 6 by x + 3.
Sol.
x+3 x2 + 5x + 6 x+2
x2 + 3x

2x + 6
2x + 6
0

Quotient = x + 2
Remainder = 0
 EXPLANATION :
(i) Divide the first term (x2) of the dividend by the first term (x) of the divisor.
The result x2  x = x is the first term of the quotient.

(ii) Multiply the divisor x + 3 by x, the first term of the quotient.

(iii) Subtract the product (x + 3) x = x2 + 3x from the dividend

x2 + 5x + 6. i.e. (x2 + 5x + 6) –(x2 + 3x) = 2x + 6

(iv) Proceed with this remainder 2x + 6 as with the original dividend i.e., divide 2x by x,
The result 2x  x = 2 is the second term of the quotient.

(v) Multiply the divisor (x + 3) by 2, the second term of the quotient.

Now subtract 2(x + 3) from 2x + 6 i.e., 2x + 6 – 2 (x + 3) = 2x + 6 – 2x – 6 = 0. The
remainder is 0.
Hence the required quotient = x + 2.

Illustration 8.9
Divide 2x3 + x2 – 3x – 3 by 2x – 1 and verify your answer.
Sol.
2x – 1 2x3 + x2 - 3x -3 x2 + x – 1
2x3 – x2
2
2x – 3x
2x2 – x

– 2x – 3
– 2x + 1

–4
Quotient = x + x – 1, Remainder = – 4
2

 VERIFICATION :
Dividend = Divisor × Quotient + Remainder
= (2x – 1) (x2 + x –1) + (–4)
= 2x3 + x2– 3x + 1 + (–4)
= 2x3 + x2 – 3x + 1 + (–4)
= 2x3 + x2 – 3x – 3.
Hence, the answer is correct.

 REMARK :

When the dividend and the divisor are polynomials of one variable, the degree of the
polynomial in the remainder is always less than the degree of the polynomial of the divisor.
Illustration 8.10
Divide 3x4 + 5x3 – x2 + 13x + 9 by 3x + 2 and verify that :
Dividend = Divisor Quotient + Remainder
Sol. First we divide 3x4 + 5x3 – x2 + 13x + 9 by 3x + 2.
3 2
3x + 2 3x4 + 5x3 – x2 + 13x + 9 x + x – x + 5
3x4 + 2x3

3x3 – x2
3x3 + 2x2

– 3x2 + 13x
– 3x2 – 2x

15x + 9
15x + 10

–1
Quotient = x3 + x2 – x + 5, Remainder = –1
Now, divisor Quotient + Remainder
= (3x + 2) (x2 + x2 – x + 5) – 1
= 3x (x3 + x2 – x + 5) + 2 (x3 + x2– x + 5) – 1
= 3x4 + 3x3 – 3x2 + 15x + 2x3 + 2x2 – 2x + 10 – 1
= 3x4 + 5x3 – x2 + 13x + 9
= Dividend

NOTE :
When the remainder is zero, the divisor is called a factor of the dividend.

Illustration 8.11
Find the value of a if 2x – 3 is a factor of 2x4 – x3 – 3x2 – 2x + a.
Sol. First we divide 2x4 – x3 – 3x2 – 2x + a by 2x – 3.
2x – 3 2x4 – x3 – 3x2 – 2x + a x3 + x2 – 1
2x4 – 3x3

2x3 – 3x2
3 2
2x – 3x

– 2x + a
– 2x + 3

a–3

2x – 3 is a factor of 2x4 – x3– 3x2 – 2x + a if, a – 3 = 0. Hence, a = 3.

Ask yourself

1. Add the following :

(i) 3x2y2 – 4xy + 4, 6 + 8xy – 4x2y2
(ii) ab – bc, bc – ca, ca – ab
(iii) 6x2 – 5y2 + 7y – 4, 8x2 – 5xy + 9y2 + 6x – 4y
(iv) 2xy + 5yz – 8zx, 4xy – yz – xz + 9xyz
2. Find the product of the following :
5 2 1 
(i) – 3x, 8yz (ii) p qr  ( 3pqr 2 )   pq2r 
3  5 
3. Carry out of the following divisions
(i) 16x6y6  (– 8x4y2) (ii) (–x5y9)  (–xy4)
4. Divide the given polynomials by the given monomials a2 + 2ab + ac by a
5. Divide as directed : (m2 – 14 m – 32)  (m + 2)
6. What should be added to 15 x + 13 xy + 5y2 to obtain – 7x + 12 xy – 6y2 ?
7. Multiply (9x2 – 2xy) and (5xy2 + 3y)?
Answers
1. (i) –x2y2 + 4xy + 10 (ii) 0 (iii) 14x2 + 4y2 + 6x + 3y – 5xy – 4
(iv) 6xy + 4yz – 9zx + 9xyz
2. (i) – 24xyz (ii) –p4q4r4 3. (i) – 2x2y4 (ii) x4y5
4. a + 2b + c 5. (m – 16) 6. – 22 x – xy – 11y2

7. 45x3 y2 + 27x2y – 10x2y3 – 6xy2

Add your knowledge

1. Let ‘p(x)’ be any polynomial of degree greater than or equal to one and a be any real
number and if p(x) is divided by (x – a), then the remainder is equal to p(a).

Concept Map

Terms
Constant 1, 3 , –5 x2, 3x , – 5y

Variable x, y Co-efficient
ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSION of x is 3
x2+3x–5y
Mathematical
Operations +, – , × , 

Operation on
Types of Algebraic Expressions Degree
Algebraic Expressions

Monomial

Addition Subtraction Division Multiplication

Binomial

Trinomial

Summary

1. A term is a constant, a variable or a combination of constants and variables.

2. An algebraic expression is a single term or a combination of two or more terms, connected

by symbols (+) or (–).

3. Algebraic expressions in which the variables involved have only non-negative integral
exponents are called polynomials.

4. The highest exponent of the variable in various terms of a polynomial in one variable is
called its degree.

5. The standard form of a polynomial in one variable is that in which the terms of the
polynomials are written in the decreasing order of the exponents of the variable.

6. If on dividing a polynomial (dividend) by a polynomial (divisor), a zero remainder is

obtained, then the divisor is a factor of the dividend. In such cases, quotient is also a factor
of the dividend. Further.
Dividend = Divisor × Quotient.

7. In general, Dividend = Divisor × Quotient + Remainder

8. The degree of the remainder is always less than the degree of the divisor.

9. Before performing long division, the divisor and the dividend must be written in the
standard form.

10. While performing long division, like terms are written one below the other, leaving gaps
whenever necessary.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Find the coefficient of z3 in –7xy2z3.

(A) xy2 (B) – 7xy2 (C) 7xy2 (D) – 7

2. In the following, which pair contains like terms ?

(A) 2xy, – 3xy (B) 2x2y, 2xy2 (C) 6, 6x (D) 2xy, 3xyz

3. Which of the following is a trinomial.

(A) x2 + 2x + x (B) 3x3 + 2x2 – x2 (C) xyz (D) x2 + x + 1

x 2  8x3  2x  6x 4
4. The degree of the polynomial is :
2x
(A) 3 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) Does not exists

5. Which of the following polynomial is in the standard form.

(A) x3 – 2x4 + x – 1 (B) x8 – x5 + 1 (C) – ax3 + bx + cx2 (D) 7x–2 + x–1 + 3

6. Simplify the following : 2x2 + 3y2 – 5xy + 5x2 – y2 + 6xy – 3x2.

(A) 7x2 + 4y2 – 11xy (B) 7x2 + 2y2 – 30xy (C) 4x2 + 2y2 – 11xy (D) 4x2 + xy + 2y2

7. The product of 3xy and –7x2yz3 is :

(A) 21xyz (B) – 21xyz (C) 21x3y2z3 (D) – 21x3y2z3

8. By how much is a4 + 4a2b2 + b4 more than a4 – 8a2b2 + b4.

(A) 12a2b2 (B) –12a2b2 (C) 2a4 + 2b4 (D) None of these

9. If we divide x5 + x3 + 2x + 1 by x3 + x + 1, then degree of remainder will be :

(A) 3 (B) Greater than 3 (C) Less than 3 (D) None of these

10. The remainder obtained when t6 + 3t2 + 10 is divided by t3 + 1 is :

(A) t2 – 11 (B) 3t2 + 11 (C) t3 – 1 (D) 1 – t3

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. ___________ = quotient  divisor + remainder.

2. When the dividend and the divisor are polynomials of one variable, the degree of the
polynomial in the remainder is always ________ than the degree of the polynomial of the
divisor.

3. When the remainder is zero, the divisor is called a ________ of the dividend.
8x 4  3x2  5x3  x
4. The degree of the polynomial is.
2x

5. The coefficient of xy2 in -5x2y3 is ________

TRUE / FALSE

1. 5x2 – x3 + x2 is a trinomial

2. x + x–1 is a polynomial

3. Coefficient of ab in –12a2b is – 12a

8x 2  3x
4. Degree of is one
2x

5. Degree of a polynomial cannot be negative

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Column–I Column–II

(A) (–4x5y3z2)  (8x2yz) (p) 2x3y2z

 1  1 3 2
(B) (4x3y)  zy  (q) xyz
 2  2
(C) 8x y z – 6x y z
3 2 3 2
(r) –2x3y2z
1 3 2
(D) HCF of 5x3y3z3 and 8x4y2z (s) xyz
2
1 3 2 1 3 2
(E) xyz+ xyz (t) x3 y2 z
3 6

2. Column–I Column–II
8
(A) A binomial of degre 3 is (p)
2x
(B) A monomial of degree zero is (q) x4 – x2 + 3

(C) A trinomial of degree 4 is (r) 25

(D) An algebraic expression (s) 2x3 + 9
which is not a polynomial is

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Write the polynomial x6 – 3x4 + 2 x + 5x2 + 7x5 + 4 in standard form.

2. Write the polynomial m7 + 8m5 + 4m6 + 6m – 3m2 – 11 in standard form.

3. Add 8ab, – 5ab, 3ab, – ab

4. Add 5x – 8y + 2z, 3x – 2y – 7z, x + 5y + 3z

5. Subtract 7p2 – 3q + 8r from 12p2 – 5q + 7r.

6. Subtract 8x3 + 3x – 7 from 3x – 9.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

7. The perimeter of triangle is 12a +13b – 7c and two of its side are 3a + 7c and 4a – 3b + 5c.
Find the third side.

8. Multiply :
(i) 3x3 (5x5 – 7x + 8) (ii) (5x – 7)(3x + 2)
1 1
(iii) (x – 1)(x2 + x + 1) (iv) (x  )(x  )
x x

9. Divide 9x – 6x2 + x3 – 2 by (x – 2) and hence verify the division algorithm.

10. Show that (x – 1) is the factor of (x3 – 1).

11. If (x + 5) is a a factor of x3 + 2x2 – 14x + k, then find the value of k.

LONG ANSWER TYPE

12. Divide the polynomial 3y4 – y3 + 12y2 + 2 by 3y2 – 1 and hence find the quotient &
remainder.

13. Find the remainder when f(x) = x3 – 6x2 + 2x – 4 is divided by g(x) = 1 – 2x.

14. Find the value of K so that (x – 3) is a factor of 3x2 – 11x + K.

15. Show that (x – 2) is a factor of 2x3 + x2 – 7x – 6

16. If x = – 2, y = 1 then find the value of (4y2 – 9x2) (16y4 + 36 x2y2 + 81x4).

17. Divide 12x3 – 8x2 – 6x + 10 by (3x – 2). Also, write the quotient and the remainder.

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. The value of 25x2 + 16y2 + 40 xy at x = 1 and y – 1 is
(A) 81 (B) – 49 (C) 1 (D) None of these
2. The coefficient of x2 in (3x2 – 5) (4 + 4x2) is
(A) 12 (B) 5 (C) – 8 (D) 8
3. Find the value of k if (x+2) is the factor of 2x3 + 3x2 – 5x + 2 + k
(A) 12 (B) 5 (C) – 8 (D) 8
4. Find the value of a if 2x + 3 is a factor of 6x3 + 19x2 + 13x + a
(A) 12 (B) 5 (C) – 3 (D) 8
5. If we divide 3y4 – y3 + 12y2 + 2 by 3y2 – 1 then remainder is :
y 19 1 19 1 19 1 19
(A)  (B)  y  (C)  y  (D) y
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

6. The area of a rectangle is given by A = 8x2 – 2x – 15. If the length be larger than the
breadth, it is:-
(A) 3x + 5 (B) 5x + 3 (C) 4x + 5 (D) 2x – 3

7. Evaluate : x2 + 4y2 + 9z2 – 4xy – 12yz + 6xz. If x = 8, y = –7, z = 6.

(A) 1200 (B) 500 (C) 1600 (D) 900
a b
 1  1
x   x – 
y  y
8. The value of  a b
is equal to :
 1  1
 y  y–
 x   x 
a b a b
x y xa
(A)   (B)   (C) (xy)a + b (D)
y x yb
3  x  3  x  1
9. If x + 2 = 0, then the value of is :
x 1
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 1

10. If P = a3 – 4b3 + 3a2b, Q = – 4a3 + 13a2b + 7b3, R =– 4a2b + 8b3 + 3a3 and
S = 12a2b – 5b3 + 9a3, then P – Q + R – S is equal to :
(A) – a3 + 2b3 – 26 a2b (B) a3 – 2b3 + 26 a2b
(C) a + 2b – 26 a b
3 3 2
(D) – a3 – 2b3 – 26 a2b

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. Find  and  if x + 1 and x + 2 are factors of p(x) = x3 + 3x2 – 2x + .
(A)  = – 1,  = 0 (B)  = 0,  = 0
(C)  = 1,  = 1 (D)  = 1,  = 0

12. The polynomial ax3 + 3x2 – 13 and 2x3 – 5x + a are divided by x + 2 if the remainder in each
case is same, find the value of a ?
(A) 0 (B) 5/9 (C) 4/9 (D) 1

13. If x51 + 51 is divided by (x + 1) the remainder is

(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 49 (D) 50

14. The remainder obtained when the polynomial p(x) is divided by (b – ax) is
 b  a b  a 
(A) p   (B) p   (C) p a (D) p  
 a  b    b 

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

1. Each of the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 is subsituted in some order for p, q, r and s. The
greatest possible value of pq + rs is [NSTSE - 2009]
(A) 14 (B) 19 (C) 66 (D) 83

2. When simplified and expressed with negative exponents, the expression (x + y)– 1 (x–1 + y–1)
is equal to [NSTSE - 2010]
(A) x + 2x y + y
–2 –1 –1 –2
(B) x + 2 x y + y
–2 –1 –1 –1 –2

(C) x–1 y–1 (D) x–2 + y–2

x
3. The product of x2y and is equal to the quotient obtained when x2 is divided by
y
[NSTSE - 2010]
1
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) x (D)
x

4. What is the value of 3(x2 - 4x) when x = 5? [IMO - 2010]

(A) 5 (B) 15 (C) 30 (D) 55

5. Find the product of (x2 + 3x + 5) and (x2 – 1) [NSTSE - 2012]

(A) x4 + 3x3 – 4x2 – 3x – 5 (B) x4 + 3x2 + 4x2 – 3x – 8
(C) x + 3x + 4x – 3x – 5
4 3 2
(D) x4 + 3x3 + 4x2 – 3x + 5

6. The cost of a notebook is Rs. 3a2 – 4ab – 6b2. How much does 5a2b2 notebooks cost ?
[NSTSE - 2014]
(A) Rs. 15a4b2 – 20a3b3 + 30 a2b4 (B) Rs. 15a4b2 – 20a3b3 + 30 a2b4
(C) Rs. 15 a4b2 – 20 a3b3 – 30 a2b4 (D) Rs. 15 a4b2 + 20 a3b3 – 30 a2b4

1 1 1 1
7. If – –  and pq + qr = pr, then find the value of r. [IOM - 2017]
p q r 36

(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) – 72 (D) – 36

4 2 – 3 2 3 4
8.

Find the Product of 3 x 2 y 3 z 4 
9
 
x  y z 3  and 

x y z y  z  3 x  . [IOM - 2019]
   2 

(A) – 2x6y5z10 – 2x6y4z11 – 6x7y4z10 – 2x4y6z10 – 2x4y5z10 + 6x5y5z12

(B) – 2x6y5z10 – 2x6y4z11 – 6x7y4z10 – 2x4y6z10 – 2x4y5z11 + 6x5y5z10
(C) – 2x6y5z12 – 2x6y4z10 – 6x7y4z10 – 2x4y6z10 – 2x4y5z11 + 6x5y5z10
(D) None of these

9. Find the quotient of polynomial if y3 – 6y2 + 9y – 2 is divided by y – 2. [IOM - 2019]

(A) y2 + 4y + 1 (B) y2 – 4y + 1 (C) y2 + 4y – 1 (D) y2 – 4y – 1

10. The remainder when (a – 3b)2 – 6a + 18b is divided by(a – 3b + 2) is. [IOM - 2019]
(A) 16 (B) 20 (C) 12 (D) 24

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. B A D A B D D A C B

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. Dividend 2. less 3. factor 4. three
5. –5xy
TRUE / FALSE
1. False 2. False 3. True 4. True
5. True
MATCH THE COLUMN
1. (A) – (s); (B) – (r); (C) – (p); (D) – (t); (E) – (q)
2. (A) – (s); (B) – (r); (C) – (q); (D) – (p)

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. x6 + 7x5 – 3x4 + 5x2 + 2 x + 4 2. m7 + 4m6 + 8m5 – 3m2 + 6m – 11

3. 5ab 4. 9x–5y–2z 5. 5p2–2q–r 6. – 8x3 – 2

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

7. 5a+16b–19c
8. (i) 15x8–21x4+24x3 (ii) 15x2–11x–14
1
(iii) x3–1 (iv) x2 
x2

9. q = x2–4x+1, r = 0 11. k =5
LONG ANSWER TYPE
y 13 35
12. remainder = –y/3 + 19/3., quotient = y2 – + 13. –
3 3 8

14. k=6 16. – 46592 17. quotient = 4x2 – 2 , remainder = 6

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Ans. C C C C B C C A D A A B D C

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. D C D B C C C B B A

09
CHAPTER

ALGEBRAIC IDENTITIES

TERMINOLOGIES
Identity, factorisation, factors, monomial, binomial, quadratic, trinomial, perfect
square.

INTRODUCTION
In the previous chapter, we have discussed about the multiplication of algebraic
expressions by various methods. In this unit, we will discuss various identities for
multiplication of algebraic expressions.

9.1 ALGEBRAIC IDENTITIES

An identity is an equality, which is true for all values of the variables. The following three
identities are very important.
Identity 1 : (a + b)2 = a2 + 2ab + b2
Proof : we have :
(a + b)2 = (a + b) (a + b)
= a (a + b) + b(a + b)
= a2 + ab + ba + b2
= a2 + 2ab + b2 [Since ba = ab]
 (a + b)2 = a2 + 2ab + b2.
Identity 2 : (a – b)2 = a2 – 2ab + b2.
Proof : we have
(a – b)2 = (a – b) (a – b)
= a(a – b) – b(a – b)
= a2 – ab – ba + b2
= a2 – ab – ab + b2 [Since ba = ab]
= a2 – 2ab + b2.
 (a – b)2 = (a2 – 2ab + b2)
Identity 3 : (a + b)(a – b) = a2 – b2
Proof We have :
(a + b) (a – b) = a (a – b) + b(a – b)
= a2 – ab + ba – b2
= a2 – b2 [Since ba = ab]
 (a + b)(a–b) = a – b2.
2

(a) Applications of the above identities

Illustration 9.1
Find each of the following products :
(i) (3x +2y) (3x +2y) (ii) (4x2 + 5) (4x2 + 5)
(iii) (2x – 5y)2 (iv) (3x2 +2y2) (3x2 – 2y2)
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -161
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
ALGEBRAIC IDENTITIES

Sol. (i) (3x +2y)(3x +2y) = (3x +2y)2 = (3x)2 + (2y)2 + 2 (3x) (2y)
[Using (a + b)2 = a2 + b2 + 2ab]
= 9x2 +4y2 + 12xy.
  (3x + 2y) (3x + 2y) = 9x + 4y2 + 12xy.
2

(ii) (4x2 + 5)(4x2 + 5) = (4x2 + 5)2 = (4x2)2 + 52 + 2 (4x2) 5 [Using (a + b)2 = a2 + b2 + 2ab]
= 16x4 +25 + 40x2.
(iii) (2x – 5y)2 = (2x)2 + (5y)2 – 2 (2x) (5y) [using (a – b)2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab]
= 4x2 + 25y2 – 20xy.
(iv) (3x2 + 2y2)(3x2 – 2y2) = (3x2)2 – (2y2)2 [ (a + b) (a – b) = (a2 – b2)]
= (9x4 – 4y4).
Illustration 9.2
Evaluate the following, using identities :
(i) (105)2 (ii) (47)2 (iii) (8.3  7.7)
Sol. We have:
(i) (105)2 = (100 + 5)2
= (100)2 +(5)2 + 2 x 100 x 5
= 10000 + 25 + 1000 = 11025.
(ii) (47)2 = (50 –3)2
= (50)2 + (3)2 – 2 (50) (3)
= 2500 + 9 – 300 = 2209.
(iii) (8.3 x 7.7) = (8 + 0.3) (8 – 0.3)
= (8)2 – (0.3)2
= 64 – 0.09 = 63.91.
Illustration 9.3
Find the value of the expression 25x2 + 9y2 + 30xy. When x = 8 and y = 10.
Sol. 25x2 + 9y2 + 30xy = (5x)2 + (3y)2 + 2 (5x) (3y)
= (5x + 3y)2 = (5  8 +3 10)2 [when x = 8 and y = 10]
= (40 + 30)2 = (70)2 = 4900.
Illustration 9.4
2 3
Find the value of the expression (81x 2 + 16y2 – 72xy), when x = and y = .
3 4

Sol. (81x2 + 16y2 – 72xy) = (9x)2 + (4y)2 – 2  9x  4y = (9x – 4y)2

2
 2 3 2 3
= 9  4  [when x = and y = ]
3 4  3 4
= (6 – 3) = (3) = 9.
2 2

Illustration 9.5
1
If x + = 5, find the values of :
x
1 1
(i) x +
2
2
(ii) x4 +
x x4
2
1  1
Sol. (i) x+ = 5   x   = (5)2 [on squaring both sides]
x  x

1 1 1
  x2 + 2
+ 2 x ) × = 25  x2 + + 2 = 25
x x x2
1 1
 x2 + = (25 – 2)  x2 + = 23
x2 x2
1
(ii) x2 + = 23 
x2
2
 2 1 
 x  2  = (23) [on squaring both sides]
2
  
 x 
1 1
  x4 + + 2 (x2) × = 529
x 4
x2
1 1
  x4 + 4
+ 2 = 529  x4 + = (529 – 2)
x x4
1
  x4 + = 527
x4

Ask yourself

1. Expand the following :

2
 y
(i) (10x – 3)2 (ii)  6x  
 3

2. What least value should be added to the following algebraic expressions to make them
perfect squares ?
36x2 – 65xy + 25y2
3. Find the square of
(i) 12 x2 – 13y2 (ii) 9x2 + 15y
2 2
3.72   1.96 
4. Simplify & using identities :
 3.72  1.96 
1
5. If x   5 , find the value of
x
1 1
(i) x2  2 (ii) x4 
x x4

6. Show that
(i) (4x + 5y)2 – (4x – 5y)2 = 80xy
(ii) (a – b) (a + b) + (b – c) (b + c) + (c – a) (c + a) = 0
Answers
y2
1. (i) 100x2 – 60x + 9 (ii) 36x2 + + 4xy 2. 5xy
9
3. (i) 144x4 + 169y4 – 312x2y2 (ii) 81x4 + 225y2 + 270x2y
4. 1.76 5. (i) 27 (ii) 727

9.2 FACTORISATION
Factors : When an algebraic expression can be written as the product of two or more
expressions, then each of these expressions is called a factor of the given expression.
Factorisation : The process of finding two or more expressions whose product is the
given expression is called factorisation.

NOTE :
Factorisation is the reverse process of multiplication.
Example :
Look at the examples given below :

Product Factorisation
(i) 3x(4x – 5y) = 12x2 – 15xy 12x2–15xy = 3x(4x–5y)
(ii) (x+3)(x–2) = x2+ x–6 x2 + x – 6 = (x + 3) (x – 2)
(iii) (2a + 3b) (2a – 3b) = 4a2– 4a2– 9b2 = (2a + 3b) (2a –
9b2 3b)

(a) Factorisation when a common monomial factor occurs in each term

METHOD :
Step 1. Find the HCF of all the terms of the given expression.
Step 2. Divide each term of the given expression by this HCF.
Step 3. Write the given expression as the product of this HCF and the quotient obtained in
step 2.

Illustration 9.6
Factorise each of the following :
(i) 3x2y – 6xy2 (ii) 6ab – 9bc (iii) 25x2 + 35x3y – 20xy3
Sol. (i) 3x2y – 6xy2 = 3xy (x – 2y)
(ii) 6ab – 9bc = 3b (2a –3c)
(iii) 25x3 + 35x2y – 20xy3 = 5x (5x2 + 7xy – 4y3)

(b) Factorisation when a binomial is common

METHOD :
Step 1. Find the common binomial.
Step 2. Write the given expression as the product of this binomial and the quotient
obtained on dividing the given expression by this binomial.
Illustration 9.7
Factorise : 5a(2x – 3y) + 2b(2x – 3y).
Sol. 5a (2x – 3y) + 2b (2x – 3y) = (2x – 3y) (5a + 2b).

(c) Factorisation by grouping

Sometimes the terms of the given expression need to be arranged in suitable groups in
such a way that all the groups have a common factor. After this arrangement factorisation
becomes easy.
METHOD
Step 1. Arrange the terms of the given expression in groups in such a way that all the
groups have a common factor.
Step 2. Factorise each group.
Step 3. Take out the factor which is common to each group.
Illustration 9.8
Factorise :
(i) px + qy + py + qx (ii) 1 + a + ac + a2c
Sol. (i) px + qy + py + qx = px + py + qx + qy
= p (x + y) + q (x + y)
= (x + y) (p + q).
(ii) 1 + a + ac + a2c = 1(1 + a) + ac (1 + a)
= (1 + a) (1 + ac).
(d) Factorisation when a binomial is the difference of two square.
In this case, we use the formula :
(a2 – b2) = (a + b) (a – b)
Illustration 9.9
Factorise :
(i) 49x2 – 16y2 (ii) 64 – x2 (iii) 48a2 – 243b2 (iv) 3x3 – 48x
Sol. (i) 49x2 – 16y2 = (7x)2 – (4y)2 = (7x + 4y) (7x – 4y).
(ii) 64 – x2 = (8)2 – x2 = (8 + x) (8 – x).
(iii) 48a2 – 243b2 = 3 (16a2 – 81b2) = 3{(4a)2 – (9b)2} = 3(4a + 9b) (4a – 9b).
(iv) 3x3 – 48x = 3x (x2 – 16) = 3x (x + 4) (x –4).

Illustration 9.10
Factorise : 25(x + y)2 – 36 (x – 2y)2.
Sol. 25(x + y)2 – 36(x – 2y)2
= {5(x + y)}2 – {6(x – 2y)}2
= {5(x + y) + 6(x – 2y)} {5(x + y) – 6(x – 2y)}
= (11x – 7y) (17y – x).

Illustration 9.11
Factorise : 4x2 – y2 + 6y – 9.
Sol. 4x2 – y2 + 6y – 9
= 4x2 – (y2 – 6y + 9)
= (2x)2 – (y – 3)2
= (2x + y – 3) {2x – (y – 3)}
= (2x + y – 3) (2x – y + 3).

Illustration 9.12
Evaluate :
(i) (502)2 – (498)2 (ii) (8.6)2 – (1.4)2
Sol. (i) (502)2 – (498)2 = (502 + 498) (502 – 498)
= (1000  4) = 4000
(ii) (8.6)2 – (1.4)2 = (8.6 + 1.4) (8.6 – 1.4) = (10  7.2) = 72.

(e) Factorisation when the given expression is a perfect square

We know that (i) a2 + b2 + 2ab = (a + b)2

(ii) a2 + b2 – 2ab = (a – b)2.
Illustration 9.13
Factorise :
(i) x2 + 10x + 25 (ii) x2 – 20x + 100
(iii) 4x2 + 9y2 + 12xy (iv) x4 + 25y4 – 10x2y2
Sol. (i) x2 + 10x + 25 = x2 + (5)2 + 2 (x) (5) = (x + 5)2
(ii) x2 – 20x + 100 = x2 + (10)2 – 2 (x) (10) = (x – 10)2
(iii) 4x2 + 9y2 + 12xy = (2x)2 + (3y)2 + 2 (2x) (3y) = (2x + 3y)2
(iv) x4 + 25y4 – 10x2y2 = (x2)2 + (5y2)2 – 2 (x2) (5y2) = (x2 – 5y2)2

(f) Factorisation of quadratic trinomials

First Form : x2 + px + q.
Suppose we are given a quadratic trinomial x2 + px + q
Then, we use the identity :
x2 + (a + b)x + ab = (x + a) (x + b)
In order to factorise x2 + px + q, we find two numbers ‘a’ and ‘b’ such that (a + b) = p and
ab = q.
Then, x2 + px + q = x2 + (a + b)x + ab = (x + a) (x + b).

Illustration 9.14
Factorise :
(i) x2 + 8x + 15 (ii) x2 + 15x + 56 (iii) x2 + x – 56
Sol. (i) The given expression is x2 + 8x + 15
Find two number whose sum = 8 and product = 15
Clearly, the number are 5 and 3.
  x2 + 8x + 15 = x2 + 5x + 3x + 15
= x (x + 5) + 3 (x + 5)
= (x + 5) (x + 3).
(ii) The given expression is x2 + 15x + 56.
Find two numbers whose sum = 15 and product = 56
Clearly, such numbers are 8 and 7.
  x2 + 15x + 56 = x2 + 8x + 7x + 56
= x (x + 8) + 7 (x + 8)
= (x + 8) (x + 7).

(iii) The given expression is x2 + x – 56.

Find two numbers whose sum = 1 and product = – 56
Clearly, such numbers are 8 and – 7
  x2 + x – 56 = x2 + 8x – 7x – 56 = x (x + 8) – 7 (x + 8) = (x + 8) (x – 7).
Second Form : ax2 + bx + c.
In this case, split it into two parts whose sum = b and product = ac. Now proceed as in the
first case.
Illustration 9.15
Factorise:
(i) 2x2 + 9x + 10 (ii) 6x2 + 7x – 3 (iii) 15x2 – 26x + 8
(iv) 3x2 – 4x – 4
Sol. (i) The given expression is 2x2 + 9x + 10.
Find two numbers whose sum = 9 and product = (2 × 10) = 20.
Clearly, such numbers are 5 and 4.
  2x2 + 9x + 10 = 2x2 + 5x + 4x + 10 = x (2x + 5) + 2 (2x + 5) = (2x + 5) (x + 2).

(ii) The given expression is 6x2 + 7x – 3.

Find two numbers whose sum = 7 and product = 6 x (–3) = – 18.
Clearly, such numbers are 9 and – 2.
  6x2 + 7x –3 = 6x2 +9x – 2x – 3 = 3x (2x + 3) – (2x + 3) = (2x + 3)(3x – 1).
(iii) The given expression is 15x2 – 26x + 8.
Find two numbers whose sum = –26 and product = (15 × 8) = 120.
Clearly. Such numbers are – 20 and – 6.
  15x2 – 26x + 8 = 15x2 – 20x – 6x + 8 = 5x (3x – 4) – 2(3x – 4) = (3x – 4)(5x – 2).
(iv) The given expression is 3x2 – 4x – 4.
Find two numbers whose sum = –4 and product = 3 × (–4) = – 12.
Clearly, such numbers are – 6 and 2.
  3x2 – 4x – 4 = 3x2 – 6x +2x – 4 = 3x (x –2) +2 (x –2) = (x – 2) (3x + 2).

Ask yourself

Factorise the following :

(i) 2x2 + 6xy (ii) 24x2y2 – 36x2y
(iii) 5y3 (x2 – 5) – 2y2 (x2 – 5) + 3y (x2 – 5) (iv) x2y (x – z) + y2x (z – x)
(v) 10xy + 5x – 14y – 7 (vi) 15x2 – 10xy + 12x – 8y
(vii) 63xy – 72y – 48 + 42x (viii) x2 – 16
(ix) 49x4 – 121y2 (x) 16x4 – 1
(xi) x2 + 8xy + 16y2 (xii) 4x2 – 24xy + 36y2
(xiii) 121 – 66y2x + 9y4x2 (xiv) x2 – 5x + 6
(xv) x2 – 8x + 15

Answers

1. (i) 2x(x + 3y) (ii) 12x2y(2y – 3)

(iii) y(x2 – 5)(5y2 – 2y + 3) (iv) xy(x – z) (x – y)

(v) (5x – 7) (2y + 1) (vi) (5x + 4) (3x – 24)

(vii) (9y + 6) (7x – 8) (viii) (x – 4) (x + 4)

(ix) (7x2 – 11y) (7x + 11y) (x) (2x – 1) (2x + 1) (4x2 + 1)

(xi) (x + 4y)2 (xii) 4[x – 3y]2

(xiii) (11 – 3y2x)2 (xiv) (x – 3) (x – 2)

(xv) (x – 5) (x – 3)

Add your knowledge

1. Some more identities :-

(i) (a + b + c)2 = a2 + b2 + c2 + 2ab + 2bc + 2ac
(ii) (a + b)3 = a3 + b3 + 3ab (a + b) or (a – b)3 = a3 – b3 – 3ab (a – b)
(iii) If a2 + b2 = 0, then a = 0 and b = 0 simultaneously.

Concept Map

ALGEBRAIC IDENTITIES

Algebraic Identities Factorization

(a + b)2 = a2 + b2 + 2ab By taking out the common factor

(a – b)2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab By grouping

(a + b) (a – b) = a2 – b2 Difference of Two Squares

Of Quadratic Trinomial

Summary

Some standard identities :

1. (a + b)2 = a2 + 2ab + b2

2. (a – b)2 = a2 – 2ab + b2

3. (a + b) (a – b) = a2 – b2

4. (x + a) (x + b) = x2 + ax + bx + ab
OR
(x + a) (x + b) = x2 + (a + b)x + ab

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. (5x +7) (5x +7) is :
(A) 25x2 + 70x + 49 (B) 25x2 – 70x + 49 (C) 5x2 + 70x + 7 (D) 5x2 – 70x + 7

2. Square of 3x2 – 6y2 is :

(A) 9x4 – 36y4 (B) 9x4 + 36y4 – 36x2y2
(C) 9x4 – 36y4 + 36x2y2 (D) 9x4 – 36y4 – 36x2y2

3. (4x2 + 3y2) (4x2 – 3y2) is :

(A) 16x4 + 9y4 – 24x2y2 (B) 16x4 + 9y4 + 24x2y2
(C) 16x4 + 9y4 (D) 16x4 – 9y4

1 1
4. If x   7 , the the value of x 2  2 is :
x x
(A) 49 (B) 51 (C) 47 (D) 7

97x97  87x87
5. The value of is :
10
(A) 10 (B) 97 (C) 87 (D) 184

6. The value of is (47)2 + (43)2 – 2 (47) (43) :

(A) 4 (B) 8 (C) 16 (D) 32

7. The factors of 2x2 – 32 are :

(A) 2(x+4)(x–4) (B) 2(x+4)(x+4) (C) 2(x–4)(x–4) (D) none of these

8. The factors of x2 + 18x + 81 are :

(A) (x – 9)2 (B) (x + 9)2 (C) (x – 9) (x + 9) (D) (x + 81)2

9. The factors of x2 – 10x + 25 are :

(A) (x – 5)2 (B) (x + 5)2 (C) (x – 5) (x + 5) (D) (x + 25)2

10. The factors of 16x2 – 24xy + 9y2 are :

(A) (4x + 3y)2 (B)(4x – 3y)2 (C) (4x + 3y) (4x–3y) (D) none of these

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. _________ is the reverse process of multiplication.

2. (ax+by)(cx+dy) = acx2 + ( _________ )xy + bdy2

3. __________ must be added to (49x2 – 42x) to make it a perfect square.

4. A rectangular parking lot has area (5x2 + 17x + 6), then sides of the lot are ________ and
_________ .

1 1
5. If x2 + 2
= 27, then the positive value of x – is ___________.
x x

TRUE / FALSE

1. An identity is an equality, which is true for all values of the variables.

1 2 1
2. (x + ) = x2 + 2
x x

3. If a + b = p and ab = q, then x2 + px + q = (x + a) (x + b)

4. (a + b)2 – (a – b)2 = 4ab

5. (m + n) (m + n) (m – n) (m – n) = (m4 – n4)

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Column–I Column–II

(A) (a + b) 2 (p) a2 – b2
(B) (a – b)2 (q) a2 + b2 + 2ab
(C) (a + b)(a – b) (r) a2 – 2ab + b2 -c2
(D) (x + a)(x + b) (s) a2 + b2 – 2ab
(E) (a – b – c) (a – b + c) (t) x2 + (a + b)x + ab
2. Column–I Column–II
(A) (a + 3)2 - (a-3)2 (p) 2

(B) (a+2b-5c)2 –(a – 2b + 5c)2 (q) 12a

2
 1   2 1 
(C)  2x     4x  2  (r) 8ab – 20ac
 2x   4x 
(D) (1 + x) (1 + x2) (1 – x) (s) a2 + b2 + c2 – 2ab + 2bc – 2ca

(E) (a – b – c)2 (t) 1 – x4

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. Find the following products:
5 2  5 2 
(i) (2x + 5y) (2x + 5y) (ii)  6 a  2  6 a  2
   
1 2  1 2 
(iii) (3x – 7y) (3x – 7y) (iv)  3 x  9  3 x  9
   
 4x 5y   4x 5y 
(v) (x + 3) (x – 3) (vi)  5  3   5  3 
   
2. Without multiplication find the values of :
(i) 1072 (ii) 962
5.6  5.6  3.6  3.6
(iii) 57 x 57 – 47 x 47 (iv)
9.2
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -171
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
ALGEBRAIC IDENTITIES

3. Simplify :
2 2
1 3  1 3 
(i) (2p – 3q)2 – (2p + 3q)2 (ii)  a2  b3    a2  b3 
2 5  2 5 

4. Find the value of the expression (9x2 + 24x + 16), when x = 12.

5. Simplify : 0.645 × 0.645 + 2 × 0.645 × 0.355 + (0.355)2

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

 1
6. If  x   = 4, find the value of :
 x 
 2 1   4 1 
(i) x  2  (ii) x  4 
 x   x 

7. If x + y = 10 and xy = 9, find the value of (x2 + y2).

8. If x – y = 5 and xy = 14, find the value of (x2 + y2).

9. If a + b = 5 and a2 + b2 = 13, find the value of (a – b).

10. Without actual multiplication find the square of :

(i) 1003 (ii) 99.99

LONG ANSWER TYPE

11. Find the continued product :

(i) (x +2) (x – 2) (x2 + 4) (ii) (2p + 3) (2p – 3) (4p2 + 9)

12. Prove that: (a+b+c)2 = a2 +b2 +c2 + 2ab + 2bc + 2ac.

13. If (ax3 + 2)2 = a2 x6 + x3 + 4, then find a.

14. Factorize:
(i) 15ab2 –20a2b (ii) 14x3 + 21x4y – 28x2y2 (iii) 5x (x – 4) – 7(x – 4)
(iv) 2a + 6b – 3(a + 3b)2 (v) 6ab – b2 + 12ac – 2bc (vi) 16x2 – 25y2
1
(vii) 16x2 – (viii) (2a + 3b)2 – 16c2
144

15. Factorize:
(i) 4x2 – 20xy + 25y2 (ii) 49x2–14x + 1 (iii) a2 – 2ab + b2 – c2
(iv) x2 + 8x + 16 (v) 16x2 – 24x + 9 (vi) a2b2 – 6abc + 9c2
(vii) x2 – 10x + 21 (viii) 5x2 – 13x + 6

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. If 9x2 + 25y2 = 30xy, then the value of x : y is :

(A) 5 : 3 (B) 3 : 5 (C) 9 : 25 (D) 25 : 9

2. If a2 + b2 = 7 and (a – b)2 = 3, what is the value of ab?

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D) 3

3. If a2 + b2 + c2 = 20 and a + b + c = 0, then the value of ab + bc + ca is :

(A) 0 (B) – 5 (C) – 10 (D) None of these

 a2 – 5ab a2 – b2 
4. The value of  2 2
 
 a – 6ab  5b a2  ab 
a 1
(A) – 1 (B) (C) (D) 1
b a

5. The value of (x + 2y + 2z)2 + (x – 2y – 2z)2 is :

(A) 2x2 + 8y2 + 8z2 (B) 2x2 + 8y2 + 8z2 + 8xyz
(C) 2x + 8y + 8z – 8yz
2 2 2
(D) 2x2 + 8y2 + 8z2 + 16yz

1 x4  1
6. If x + = 5, the value of is
x x2
(A) 21 (B) 23 (C) 25 (D) 30

7. What must be added to 9x2 – 24x + 10 to make a perfect square ?

(A) 16 (B) 26 (C) 6 (D) –26

8. Factors of (x2 – 13x + 42) are :

(A) (x – 7)(x – 6) (B) (x + 7)(x – 6) (C) (x + 7)(6 – x) (D) (x + 7)(x + 6)

 x 1
9. Factors of  x2  –  are :
 6 6
1 1
(A) (2x + 1) (3x + 1) (B) (2x + 1)(3x – 1)
6 6
1 1
(C) (2x – 1)(3x – 1) (D) (2x – 1)(3x + 1)
6 6

10. If (a – 5)2 + (b – 6)2 = 0, then find the value of (a + b – 3) ?

(A) 8 (B) – 8 (C) 10 (D) –10

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. Factorise : 8x3 + 27y3 + 36x2y + 54xy2.
(A) (2x + 3y)3 (B) (2x – 3y)3 (C) (3x + 2y)3 (D) (3x – 2y)3

12. Evaluate (1001)3 by using suitable identity.

(A) 1003003001 (B) 1004004001 (C) 1002003001 (D) 1002002001

13. Simplify (x + 4y)3 – (x – 4y)3.

(A) 16 xy (B) –16xy (C) 128y3 – 24yx2 (D) 128y3 + 24yx2

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

1 x
1. If x + = 3, then 2 is [Aryabhatta - 2002]
x x 1
1 1
(A) 9 (B) (C) 13 (D)
3 13
1 1
2. If x – y = 2, xy = 24, then  is equal to [Aryabhatta - 2008]
x y
5 5
(A) (B) 12 (C) (D) 3
2 12

3.764  3.764  (1.236)2

3. =? [Aryabhatta - 2009]
3.764  1.236
(A) 2.5 (B) 5 (C) 1.4 (D) 3

4. If x + y = 17 and x2 + y2 = 167, then what is the value of xy = ? [NSTSE - 2009]

(A) 17 + 4 114 (B) 61 (C) 48 + 167 (D) 122

1 1
5. If 2x – = 3, then the value 16x4 + is [NSTSE - 2009]
2x 16x 4
(A) 11 (B) 117 (C) 119 (D) 121

1 1
6. If xy = b and 2
 = a, then (x + y)2 equals [NSTSE - 2010]
x y2
1
(A) (a + 2b)2 (B) a2 + b2 (C) b(ab + 2) (D) + 2b
a

7. If ab = 6 and a + b = 5, then find the value of a2 + b2 ? [NSTSE - 2012]

(A) 11 (B) 12 (C) 13 (D) 16

(67.542)2  (32.458)2
8. What is the value of [NSTSE - 2013]
75.458  40.374
(A) 1 (B) 10 (C) 100 (D) 1000

9. What must be added to the following algebraic expression to make it a perfect square ?
5x 2 3x 40 22
–  [IOM - 2017]
64 20 25

28 51
(A) (B) 1 (C) 2 (D)
25 25

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. A B D C D C A B A B

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. Factorisation 2. bc + ad 3. 9 4. (5x + 2), (x + 3)
5. 5
TRUE / FALSE
1. True 2. False 3. True 4. True
5. False
MATCH THE COLUMN
1. (A) – (q), (B) – (s), (C) – (p), (D) – (t), (E) – (r)
2. (A) – (q), (B) – (r), (C) – (p), (D) – (t), (E) – (s)

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

25 4 10
1. (i) 4x2 + 25y2 + 20xy. (ii) a + 4 + a2 (iii) 9x2 + 49y2 – 42xy
36 3
1 4 16x 2 25y2
(iv) x + 81 – 6x2. (v) x2 – 9. (vi) –
9 25 9
2. (i) 11449 (ii) 9216 (iii) 1040
(iv) 2
 6b3  6 2 3
3. (i) (4p) (– 6q) = – 24pq. (ii) (a2)   = a b .
 5  5
4. 1600 5. 1
SHORT ANSWER TYPE
6. (i) 14 (ii) 194 7. 82 8. 53.
9. + 1 or –1 10. (i) 1006009 (ii) 9998.0001

LONG ANSWER TYPE

1
11. (i) (x4 – 16) (ii) (16p4 – 81) 13.
4

14. (i) 5ab (3b–4a) (ii) 7x2 (2x + 3x2y – 4y2) (iii) (x – 4) (5x – 7)

(iv) (a + 3b) (2 – 3a – 9b) (v) (6a – b) (b + 2c) (vi) (4x + 5y) (4x – 5y)

 1   1 
(vii)  4x  12   4x  12  (viii) (2a + 3b + 4c) (2a + 3b – 4c)
   
15. (i) (2x – 5y)2 (ii) (7x – 1)2 (iii) (a – b + c) (a – b – c)

(iv) (x + 4)2 (v) (4x – 3)2 (vi) (ab – 3c)2

(vii) (x – 3) (x – 7) (viii) (5x – 3) (x – 2)

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Ans. A C C D D B C A B A A A D

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Ans. B C B B C C C C C

10
CHAPTER

EXPONENTS AND POWERS

TERMINOLOGIES
Exponential form, base, power, index, exponent, positive integral exponent,
negative integral exponent, laws.

INTRODUCTION

In the previous class, we have learnt the laws of exponents and powers as whole numbers.
Here, in this chapter, we will study about the laws of exponents and powers as rational
number.

10.1 EXPONENTS AND POWERS

If a number is multiplied by itself a number of times, then it can be written in the
exponential form.
For example :
3
5  5  52 ,  8    8    8    8 
If ‘a’ be any rational number and n be any positive integer then we define :
a × a × a × a × ........a (n times) = an.
We read an as ‘a’ raised to the power ‘n’. In an, the number ‘a’ is called the base and n is
called the exponent, power or index.
In 52 and (– 8)3, the numbers 5 and – 8 are the bases and 2 and 3 are the exponents
respectively.
(a) Positive Integral Exponents of a rational number
a
Let be any rational number and n be a positive integer, Then,
b
n
a a a a a a  a  a  a.......n times (a)n
  =     ......... up to n times = = n
b b b b b b  b  b  b  .......n times (b)
n
a (a)n
Thus   = n for every positive integer n.
 b  (b)

(b) Negative Integral exponents of a rational number

n n
a a b
Let be any rational number and n be a positive integer, then,   = 
b b a
Illustration 10.1
2 3
3  4 
Evaluate : (i)   (ii)   .
7  9 
2 2 3 3
3 7 49  4   9  729
Sol. (i)   =  = . (ii)   =  = .
7 3 9  9   4  64

Illustration 10.2
Expand the following numbers using exponents :
(i) 789.35 (ii) 2005.007
1 1
Sol. (i) 789.35 = 7 ×100 + 8 ×10 + 9 ×1 +3 × +5×
10 100
= 7 × 102 + 8 × 101 + 9 × 100 + 3 ×10–1 + 5 ×10–2
1
(ii) 2005.007 = 2 × 1000 + 5 × 1 + 7 × = 2 × 103 + 5 × 100 + 7 × 10–3
1000
Illustration 10.3
Evaluate :
4 3
2  5 
(i)   (ii)  
3  6 
4 3
 2  (2)4 16  5  ( 5)3 125
Sol. (i)   = 4 = . (ii)   = = .
 3  (3) 81  6  (6)3 216

(c) Laws of Exponents

a
Let be any rational number, and m and n be any integers, then, we have :
b
m n m n m n m n
a a a a a a
(i)   x      (ii)        
b b
  b b b
  b
n n
 a m  a
mxn
a c a c
n n
 (a / b) 
n
(a / b)n
(iii)       (iv)  x     x   and   
b
   b b d b d  (c / d)  (c / d)n
n n 0
a b a
(v)     (vi)    1
b a b

Illustration 10.4
Find the value of :
2
1  3 
(i) 5–2 (ii) (iii) 70 (iv)  
72  4 
1 1 1
Sol. (i) 5–2 = 2
= (ii) = 72 = 7×7 = 49
5 25 72
2 2
 3   4  ( 4)2 16
(iii) 70 = 1. (iv)   =  = = .
 4   3  (3)2 9
Illustration 10.5
Simplify :
6
 2 2
 3  3 4  3 3  3 3
   5  5  8   27 
(i) 2
(ii)      (iii)    (iv)   x  
 2  2  2  2    81   4 
 3 
 
6
 2
 3  6 2 4
Sol. (i)     2   2
   =
16
.
2  3
 2    3 81
 3 
 

3 4 3 4 1
 5   5   5   5  2
(ii)         = .
 2   2   2   2  5
2
 3 3  3
3x( 2)
3
6
2
6
64
(iii)    =  =  =  =
2 2
  2 3 729
  
3 3 3 3
 8   27   8 27   2  8
(iv)     = x  =  = .
81
   4   81 4 3
   27

Illustration 10.6
Express 125–7 as a base of 5.
Sol. We have, 125 = 5 × 5 × 5 = 53
Therefore, 125–7= (53)–7 = 53 x(–7) = 5–21.
Illustration 10.7
Simplify :
1
2
(i) (2–1  5–1)–1  4–1 (ii) (4–1 + 8–1)   
3
Sol. (i) We have :
1 1
1 1 4
(2–1  5–1)–1 ÷ 4–1 =    ÷  
2 5  1
1
 1   1   10   1   1
=  ÷   =   ÷   =  10   = (10  4) = 40
10
  4 1
       4 4 
1
2 1 1 3 (2  1) 3  3 3   3 2  1
(ii) (4–1 + 8–1) ÷   =    ÷   = ÷ =   =   =
3 4 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 3 4
Illustration 10.8
2 2 2
 1  1  1
Simplify :   +   +  .
2 3 4
Sol. We have :
2 2 2 2 2 2
 1  1  1 2 3 4
  +  +   =  +  + 
2 3
  4  1  1  1
= (2 + 32 + 42) = (4 + 9 + 16) = 29.
2

Illustration 10.9
Evaluate :
1
 1  1  1 1  35  105  125
(a)       (b)
 3   4   5 7  6 5
1
 1  1  1 1  1
Sol. (a)       = (3 – 4)–1 = (–1)–1 = =–1
 3   4   (1)1

35  105  125 35  (5  2)5  53 35  5 5  25  53

(b) = =
5 7  6 5 57  (3  2)5 5 7  3 5  2 5
= 2–5+5  3–5+5  5–5+3+7 = 20  30  55 = 1  1  55 = 3125.

Illustration 10.10
2
3
By what number should   be divided so that the quotient becomes 25 ?
5
Sol. Let the number be x.
2 2
3 3 1
    ÷ x = 25     = 25
5 5 x
2
5 1 25 1
    = 25     = 25
3
  x 9 x
25  1
 = 25     9  x  25 = 25
9 x
25 1
 x= = .
9  25 9

Illustration 10.11
If 5 x + 3 = (25)3x – 4, then find the value of x.
Sol. 5 x + 3 = (25)3x – 4 = 52(3x – 4) = 56x – 8
5 x + 3 = 56x – 8
On both the sides power have the same base, so their exponents must be equal
11
 x + 3 = 6x – 8  x= .
5
Illustration 10.12
If x and y are prime integers such that xy = 128, then find the value of (x + y)2.
Sol. xy = 128, since 128 is an even number.
So, x is also an even number.
Since x is prime number and xy is even therefore x = 2.
2y = 128
2y = 27
On both the sides power have the same base, so their exponents must be equal.
So, y =7
therefore (x + y)2 = (2 + 7)2 = 81.

(d) Standard form of small and large numbers

We can represent very large and very small number in standard form with the help of
exponents.
For example :
Number Standard form
325000000 3.25x108
0.000005086 5.086x10–6
NOTE :
(i) The power of 10 is positive integer equal to the number of places the decimal
point has been moved left, when the number is more than 1.

(ii) The power of 10 is negative integer equal to the number of places the decimal
point has been moved right, when the given number is less than 1

(i) Comparing very large and very small numbers

The diameter of the Sun is 1.4x109 m and the diameter of the Earth is 1.2756x107m.
If we want to compare the diameter of earth, with the diameter of the Sun.
Diameter of Sun = 1.4 ×109m
Diameter of Earth=1.2756 ×107 m
Diameter of Sun 1.4  109 1.4  109 7 1.4  100
Therefore, = = =
Diameter of Earth 1.2756  107 1.2756 1.2756
Which is approximately 100.
So, the diameter of the Sun is about 100 times the diameter of the earth
Mass of Earth is 5.97x1024kg and mass of moon is 7.35 ×1022kg. What is the total mass ?
Total mass = 5.97 ×1024kg + 7.35 × 1022 kg
= 5.97×100 ×1022kg + 7.35×1022 kg
= 597×1022kg + 7.35 × 1022 kg
= (597 + 7.35) ×1022 kg
= 604.35 × 1022 kg.

Ask yourself

1. Evaluate :
3
 1 
(i) 6–2 (ii)  
 3 

2. Simplify and express the result in power notation with positive exponent :
4
 3  32
(i) (– 3)4  (– 3)6 (ii)   ×
 2  27
3. Simplify
3 6 2 2
5 5  1 3
       
7 7 3 5

4. Find the value of m for which

4 9 8 15 2m  3
 1  1 m + 1 (ii) 4 4 4
(i)     = 6     = 
6 6 9 9 9 

5. Express the following numbers in standard form :

(i) 57400 (ii) 0.00000000005678
6. Express the following numbers is standard form :
(i) 73200000 (ii) 0·000629561 (iii) 151236000

Answers
2
1 1  1  343
1. (i) (ii)  2. (i)   (ii) 6 3.
36 27  3  5
4. (i) m = – 14 (ii) m = 5 5. (i) 5.74 × 104 (ii) 5.678 × 10–11

6. (i) 7.32 × 107 (ii) 6.29561 × 10–4 (iii) 1.51236 × 108

Add your knowledge

1. If ‘a’ is negative real number and ‘n’ is an even positive integer, then the principal nth root
of a is not defined, because an even power of a real number is always positive. Therefore
(–9)1/2 is a meaningless quantity, if we confine ourselves to the set of real number, only.

2. Laws of Rational Exponents

The following laws hold the rational exponents
(i) am × an = am+n (ii) am an = am–n
1
(iii) (am)n = amn (iv) a–n =
an
m
(v) am/n = (am)1/n = (a1/n)m i.e. am/n = n am =  a
n
(vi) (ab)m = ambm
m
a am
(vii)   = m (viii) abn = ab + b + b.....n times
b b
where a, b are positive real numbers and m, n are rational numbers.

Concept Map

EXPONENTS & POWERS

LAW’S OF EXPONENT

Exponential Form am × an = am+n

Scientific Notation or
axax….. upto n times = an Standard Form
am  an = am–n
base is a , exponent or power is n. 325000000 = 3.25 × 108
(am)n = am×n
1
a–m = am
a° = 1 Comparison of Very
a1 = a Large & Very Small
Numbers
am × bm = (a × b)m
m
am  a
 
bm  b 

Summary

1
1. If m is a positive integer and x and y are rational numbers such that xm = y, then y m  x .

1
2. y m is called the mth root of y and is written as m y .

3. If x is a positive rational number and m and n are any rational exponents, then
(i) xm × xn = xm + n (ii) xm  xn = xm – n
(iii) (xm)n = xm × n

4. If x and y are positive rational numbers and m is any rational exponent,

then xm × ym = (x × y)m.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1
 2
2 
1.    1    =?
  2   
   

1 1
(A) (B) 16 (C) (D) – 16
16 16
( 3)
2. The value of ( 2)( 2)  is :
(A) 64 (B) 32
(C) Can’t determined (D) None of these
3 4 7
 1  1  1
3. Simplify :   ×      .
3 3 3
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

4. Which of the following statement is correct?

(A) a0 = 0 (B) a3 + a2 = a5 (C) (a7)3 = a21 (D) a1 = 1

3
3
5. By what number   should be divided so that quotient becomes 128 ?
4
1 1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
54 72 90 108

6. If 2a = 32 and 3b = 27, then the value of (a + b)2 is :

(A) 16 (B) 32 (C) 64 (D) 128
x1 x3
a b
7. If   =  , then x is equal to :
b a  
1 7
(A) 1 (B) (C) (D) 2
2 2

1
8. The solution of 33x–5 = is :
9x
(A) 5/2 (B) 5 (C) 1 (D) 7/3
5 11 8x
5 5 5
9. If   ×   =  , then x = ?
3 3 3
 
1 3
(A) (B) – 2 (C) 2 (D)
2 4

9n  35  (27)3
10. If = 27, then n equals :
3  (81)4
(A) 0 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. By multiplying (10)5 by (10)–10 we get_____
1
2. If 36 = 6 × 6 = 62, then expressed as a power with the base 6 is.
36
4
5
3. By multiplying   by ________. we get 54.
3

4. By solving (6º – 7º) × (6º + 7º) we get.

5. The value of 12  22  32  x 62 is

TRUE / FALSE
ab
1. (a–1 + b–1)–1 =
ab

2. xy = 121, where y is even, then x  y is 3.

3. The standard form of 0.00000356 is 3.56 10–7

m
 1
4.    2
2
n
 
= 2m–n

5. x5 + x 2 = x 7
MATCH THE COLUMN
1. Column-I Column-II

(A) (10150 10146 ) (p) 104

3
(B) 36 × 36 × 36 × 36 × 36 (q) –
5
x 1 x 3
a b
(C)   =  , then x is (r) 2
b a
 
1
 5
(D)   (s) 610
 3
35
(E) (3-1 + 4-1) 5-1 (t)
12
2. Column-I Column-II

(A)
3 2n  4
5 3  2(n1)
 (p) 1
n 1
9

(B)
2n 4  2 2n   2 3
(q) 324
n3
2 2

(0.6)0  (0.1)1
(C) 1 3 1
(r) 27
 3   3  1
 3  . 2     3 
2     
93  35  (27)3 3
(D) 4
(s) 
3  (81) 2

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
5 3
 1  1
1. Obtain the value of 2 ×   3
×2 ×  
–6

2 2
3 2
 3 9
2. By what number should    be divided so that the quotient is   .
2   4

3. Find the value of x, if (25)x + 2 = 125.

4. Compare the following number.

(i) 3.5 × 1010 and 0.478 × 1012 (ii) 23 and 32
5. Write the following number in the standard form :
(i) 0.0034378 (ii) 340008923
SHORT ANSWER TYPE
6. The value of (27– 2/3)1/2 × (641/3)2 × (81 –3/2)1/6
5 x 18
 125   125  5
7. If   ×  =  . Then find the value of x.
 8   8  2  

8. Find the value of 'a' in the following equation :

3 6 2a–1 0
9 2 2 9
2 ×  =  2
  9
  9
   

9. If 9x + 2 = 240 + 9x, then find the value of x.

10. If 2x – 2x – 1 = 4 then xx is equal to

LONG ANSWER TYPE

c a b
 xa   xb   xc 
11. Find the value of  b  ×  c  ×  a 
x
  x  x 

12. Assuming that x is a positive real number and a, b, c are rational numbers, prove that :
a2  ab  b2 b2  bc  c 2 c2  ca a2
 xa   xb   xc 
 b  .  c  .  a  =1
x  x  x 
3 n  31n 1
13. Prove that n 2n
=
3 3 2
2 n

14. If

9n  32  3n / 2    27 
=
1
, then prove that m – n = 1.
3m 3 27
3 2
p q
 1  1
a  b   a – b 
x
a
15. If   
p q
=   , then what is x ?
 1  1 b
 b   b–
 a   a 

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1
–
 1  2
1.  27 3  is equal to
 
 
1 27 2 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
9 54 3 3
x 3
2. If 25  5  5 = 5 5 then the value of x is
(A) – 4 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5
3
3. 3n  2 = 9 then 2n – 1
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 16 (D) 8
1

 51  72  3
4.  2 4
 = ..........
 5 7 
49 5 7 5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 49 25 7

5. If 3– n + 1 = 4 813 then 2n – 1 = .............

1 1
(A) 4 (B) (C) – (D) 7
4 4
1

 0
2  2

6.   4    equal to
  9   
   

4 4 9
(A) (C) – (C) (D) 1
9 9 4

7. The sixth power of the fifth root of 0.00032 is

(A) 0.000064 (B) (0.00032)6 (C) 0.2 (D) 0.02

8. xp/q is the qth root of

(A) x (C) xp (C) x1/q (D) xp/q

5 1  3 1
9. is equal to
5 1  3 1
1 1
(A) – 4 (B) 4 (C) – (D)
4 4

10. Simplify :
 25 3 / 2   243 3 / 5
16 5 / 4   8 4 / 3
3375
(A) (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) –2
512

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

16  2n 1  4  2n
11. Simplify:
16  2n 2  2  2n 2
1 1
(A) – 2 (B) 2 (C) – (D)
2 2
3 / 4  25  3 / 2  5 3 
 81 
12. Simplify .        
 16   9   2  
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C)3 (D) 4

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)
1. Solve: 2x + 1 = 8x [NSTSE - 2009]
2 1
(A) 1 (B) 3 (C) (D)
3 2
1 3
2. If 4x + 4x + 4x + 4x + 4x + 4x + 4x + 4 x = , then what is value of ? [NSTSE - 2009]
512 x
(A) 0.50 (B) 0.75 (C) – 0.75 (D) – 4.25

3. Fill in the blank [Aryabhatta - 2009]

2p 2q 2r
x x x
qr
 pr
 = ..............
x x x p q
1 1 1
 xa  ab  xb  bc  xc  ac
4. Find the value of  b   c   a  ? [Aryabhatta - 2009]
x
  x  x 

5. Which of the following is not equal to y6 ? [NSTSE - 2010]

2
(A) [y2/3]9 (B)  y 6  (C) 3
y18 (D) [y1/3]12
 
2  6x 12
6. If 3 x = 27, then x = [Aryabhatta - 2010]
(A) 3 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) None of these

1 1 1
7. The value of 2
 3
 1
is ____________ [IMO - 2010]
 216  3  256  4  32  5

(A) 102 (B) 104 (C) 103 (D) 105

120m2n3
8. Write in simplest form using only positive exponents. Assume that m  0 and
60 m5n2
n  0. [IMO - 2010]
2n 2 2m3 1
(A) 3
(B) 3
(C) (D)
m m n n 2m3n

9. Manish saw the given figure while he was reading a book on astronomy. How is the
distance from Venus to the sun written in scientific notation? [IMO - 2010]

(A) 67.23 × 106 miles (B) 0.6723 × 108 miles

(C) 6.723 × 104 miles (D) 6.723 × 107 miles
5c
10. If 5a × 5b = what is ‘d’ in terms of a, b and c ? [Aryabhatta - 2011]
5d
c
(A) (B) c – a – b (C) a + b – c (D) c – ab
ab
11. If am × an = amn, then find m(n – 2) + n(m – 2) ? [Aryabhatta - 2011]
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) m + n (D) None of these
12. If 2n –1 + 2n+1 = 320, then n is equal to_________. [IMO - 2011]
(A) 6 (B) 8 (C) 5 (D) 7
x
x2
3
 32 
13. If x   x  then the value of x is _________. [IMO - 2011]
 
3 9 16 8
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 4 25 27
14. It 3x-1 + 3x+1 = 90, then x ¡s equal to ____. [IMO - 2012]
(A) 1 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 0
15. What is the value of the given expression? [IMO - 2012]
 16 2   64
 
 
3
512  3 64
(A) 4 (B) 8 (C) 16 (D) 6
16. The population of a country is 3.2 × 10 . There are 8 × 10 children. Find the number of
6 5

adults. [IMO - 2012]

(A) 3 × 104 (B) 8 × 103 (C) 2.4 ×106 (D) 3.4 ×106
17. Given that 9n + 9n + 9n = 32013, what is the value of n ? [NSTSE - 2013]
(A) 1005 (B) 1006 (C) 2011 (D) 6019
18. Choose the greatest number among the following :
2
  5  5 2  ,  5  5  5  2 ,  5  5  5  3 ,  55  5 5  ,  55  5 5  5 5  5 5 
          [IOM - 2017]


(A) 5  5 2 
2
(B) 5  5  52 (C) 5  5  53 (D) 55  55 

19. Identify the statement which is true: [IOM - 2019]

11 12 9 18 18 18
(A) (343) + (225) = (275) (B) (1024) + (343) (1367)
2
(C) 17013 × 17025 + 36 = (1 7019) (D) 243 × 285 – 441 = (264)2

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. A A A C A C D C D C

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 10-5 2. 6-2 3. 34 4. 0 5. 49

TRUE / FALSE

1. True 2. True 3. False 4. False 5. False

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. (A) – (p), (B) – (s), (C) – (r), (D) – (q), (E) – (t)

2. (A) – (q), (B) – (p), (C) – (s), (D) – (r)

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1  3
1. 2.   3. x = – 1/2
32  2

4. (i) 3.5 × 1010 < 0.478 × 1012 (ii) 23 < 32

5. (i) 3.4378 × 10–3 (ii) 3.40008923×108

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

16 1
6. 7. 1 8. (–1) 9. 10. 27
9 2

LONG ANSWER TYPE

11. 1 15. p+q

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. D A B B D D A B A A D A

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ans. D A 1 1 D A A B D B A D B B D C B B C

CHAPTER
PERCENTAGE AND ITS APPLICATIONS

TERMINOLOGIES
Percent, cost price, selling price, gain, loss, overhead, discount, marked price, list
price. sales tax, value added tax, original value.

INTRODUCTION
In this chapter, we learn about the concept of percentages and its wider applications in day
to day life situation. In order to solve problems ralated to profit and loss, compound interest
etc. It is essential to have a through understanding of this chapter.

11.1 PERCENTAGE
Percent means per hundred or for every hundred. By a certain percent, we mean that
many hundredths. The symbol “%” is used to express the word percent.

(a) Percent as a fraction

A fraction with its denominator as 100 is called a percent and is equal to that percent as is
75 1
the numerator. i.e. = 75 × = 75 hundredths
100 100
= 75 per hundred
= 75%.

(b) Percent as a ratio

A ratio with its second term 100 is also called a percent.

8
For ex. 8 : 100 = = 8%.
100

(c) Conversion of a percent into a fraction

To convert a percent into a fraction, we drop percent sign (%) and divide the number by
100.
x
 Drop the percent sign (i.e. %) and divide the number by 100. Thus, x% = .
100
36 9
i.e. 36% = = .
100 25

(d) Conversion of a fraction into a percent & vice versa

To convert a fraction into a percent we multiply the fraction by 100.
Multiply the fraction by 100 and put the percent sign % to obtain the required percent.
a a 
Thus, =   100  %
b b 

4 4 
For example : (i) =   100  = 80 %.
5 5 
6 6 
(ii) 6:5= =   100  % = 120 %.
5 5 
 To convert a percent into a decimal, we drop percent sign (%) and shift the decimal point
two places to the left.
Illustration 11.1
Express each of the following as a decimal.
(i) 65% (ii) 0.1%
Sol. (i) We have,
65
65% = = 0.65.
100
0.1 1
(ii) 0.1% = = = 0.001.
100 1000

(e) Conversion of a decimal into a fraction

To convert a decimal into a percent, we shift the decimal point two places to the right.
Illustration 11.2
Express each of the following as percent
(i) 0.037 (ii) 0.275
37  37 
Sol. (i) 0.037 = =  100  % = 3.7%
1000  1000 
275  275 
(ii) 0.275 = =  100  % = 27.5%
1000  1000 
Illustration 11.3
Express 75 paise as a percent of Rs 5.
Sol. We have, Rs. 5 = 500 paise
Let x% of Rs. 5 be 75 paise.
Then, x% of Rs. 5 = 75 paise
 x% of 500 paise = 75 paise
x
 × 500 = 75 
100
75  100
  x= 
500
  x = 15.
Hence, 15% of Rs 5 is 75 paise.

 Percent Increase and Decrease

The percent increase of a quantity is :
 Increase 
  100  %
 Original value 
The percent decrease of a quantity is :
 Decrease 
  100  %
 Original value 

Illustration 11.4
A fruit seller has 2000 fruits. 20% of these are mangoes, 25% are banana’s and rest are
oranges. Find the number of fruit of each kind.
Sol. Mangoes are 20% of 2000
20
Number of mangoes = × 2000 = 400
100
Banana’s are 25% of 2000
25
Number of Banana’s = × 2000 = 500
100
Oranges are (100–20–25) % of 2000
Oranges are 55 % of Rs. 2000
55
Number of Oranges = × 2000 = 1100.
100
Illustration 11.5
Ram’s salary is 20% more than Shyam’s. How much percent is Shyam’s income less than
Ram’s?
Sol. Suppose Shyam’s income = Rs. 100
Ram’s income = Rs.(100 + 20) = Rs. 120
If Ram’s income is Rs. 120, then Shyam’s income = Rs.100
100
If Ram’s income is Re. 1, then Shyam’s income = Rs.
120
100 1
If Ram’s income is Rs. 100, then Shyam’s income = Rs. × 100=Rs. 83
120 3
 1 2
Shyam’s income is  100  83  % or 16 % less than Ram’s income.
 3 3
Illustration 11.6
The prices of pulses increased by 30%. By how much percent should Nalini reduce her
consumption of pulses so that her expenditure on pulses does not increase ?
Sol. Suppose original consumption of pulses = 100 kg
Suppose price of 100 kg pulses = Rs 100
Increased price of 100 kg pulses = Rs 130
But Nalini does not want to spend more than Rs 100
 For Rs 130, Nalini gets 100 kg pulses
100
For Rs 1, Nalini gets kg pulses
130
100  100 1000
For Rs 100, Nalini gets or kg pulses 
130 13
 1000  300 1
  Reduction in consumption =  100 – % = or 23 % .
 13  13 13
Illustration 11.7
A students scores 40 marks in an examination and fails by 26 marks. If the passing
percentage is 33, then find maximum marks in the examination.
Sol. Let, the maximum marks in the examination is 100
Then he needs 33 marks to pass.
But, passing marks required are 40 + 26 = 66 marks
33 marks are required to pass if maximum marks are 100.
100  66
Here, 66 marks are required to pass, then maximum marks are = 200 marks.
33

Ask yourself

1. What percentage of 240 is 90 ?

2. 800 Kg of mortar consists of 55% sand, 33 % cement and rest lime. What is the mass of
lime in mortar?
3. Chalk contains 10 % calcium, 3% carbon and 12 % oxygen. Find the amount of carbon and
1
calcium (in gms) in 2 kg of chalk.
2

4. In an examination, Mohit secured 60% of the maximum marks which is 45 marks more
than
the pass marks. If the pass mark is 45% then find the maximum marks in the examination.

3
5. If 2a = 3b, b = c , and c = 0.8d, then find by what percent is ‘a’ less/more than ‘d’.
4
Answers
1. 37.5% 2. 96 kg 3. Carbon = 75g, Calcium = 250g 4. 300.
5. 10% less

11.2 PROFIT, LOSS AND DISCOUNT

(a) Definitions
(i) Cost price (CP) : The amount for which an article is bought is called its cost price,
abbreviated to CP.

(ii) Selling price (SP) : The amount for which an article is sold is called its selling
price, abbreviated to SP.

(iii) Gain : When (SP) > (CP) then there is a gain. Gain = (SP) – (CP)

(iv) Loss : When (SP) < (CP) then there is a loss. Loss = (CP) – (SP)
An important fact : The gain or loss is always reckoned on the cost price.

(b) Formulae
(i) Gain = (SP) – (CP)

(ii) Loss = (CP) – (SP)

 gain 
(iii) Gain% =   100  %
 CP 
 loss 
(iv) Loss% =   100  %
 CP 
(v) To find SP when CP and gain % or loss % are given.
(100  gain%) (100  loss%)
(a) SP = × CP (b) SP =  CP
100 100

(vi) To find CP when SP and gain % or loss % are given

100 100
(a) CP =  SP (b) CP =  SP
100  gain% 100  loss%

(c) Overhead
Sometimes, after purchasing an article, we have to pay some more money for things like
transportation, labour charges, repairing charges, local taxes, etc. These extra expenses
are called overhead. For calculating the total cost price, we add overhead to the purchase
price.
Illustration 11.8
Mohit bought a CD for Rs 750 and sold it for Rs 875. Find his gain percent.
Sol. CP = Rs 750 and SP = Rs 875
Since (SP) > (CP), Mohit makes a gain.
The gain = Rs (875 – 750) = Rs 125.
 gain   125  2
gain% =   100  % =   100  % = 16 % .
 CP   750  3
Illustration 11.9
Rahul purchased a table for Rs 1260 and due to some scratches on its top, he had to sell it
for Rs 1197. Find his loss percent.
Sol. CP = Rs 1260 and SP = Rs 1197
Since (SP) < (CP), Rahul makes a loss.
The loss = Rs (1260 – 1197) = Rs 63.
 loss   63 
The loss% =   100  % =   100  % = 5%.
 CP   1260 
Illustration 11.10
A grocer buys 20 kg of sugar at a cost of Rs 18 per kg and 30 kg of an inferior sugar at a
cost of Rs 15 per kg. He mixes the two kinds of sugar and sells the mixture at a cost of
Rs 16.50 per kg. Find his profit or loss percent.
Sol. CP of 20 kg of sugar = Rs 18 × 20 = Rs 360
CP of 30 kg of sugar = Rs 15 × 30 = Rs 450
 Total C.P. = Rs 360 + Rs 450 = Rs 810
S.P. of (20 + 30) kg = 50 kg of sugar = Rs 16.50 × 50 = Rs 825
 Profit = SP – CP = Rs 825 – Rs 810 = Rs 15
15 50 23
 Profit percent =  100 = =1 .
810 27 27
23
Hence, the required profit = 1 % .
27
Illustration 11.11
If the selling price of 20 articles is the same as the cost price of 23 articles, find the profit or
loss percent in the transaction.
Sol Let the CP of an article be Rs x.
Then CP of 23 articles = Rs 23 x
and CP of 20 articles = Rs 20 x
SP of 20 articles = CP of 23 articles = Rs 23 x
Since SP of 20 articles > CP of 20 articles, hence there is a profit in the transaction,
Hence, profit on 20 articles = SP – CP = Rs (23x – 20 x) = Rs 3x.

3x
Profit percent =  100 = 15
20x
Required profit = 15%.
Illustration 11.12
A man bought 2 boxes for Rs 1300. He sold one box at a profit of 20% and other box at a
loss of 12%. If the selling price of both the boxes is the same, find the cost price of each
box.
Sol. Let the CP of the first box which was sold at a profit of 20% be Rs x. Then the CP of the
second box which was sold at a loss of 12% will be Rs (1300 – x)
120
Since the first box was sold a profit of 20%, its SP = Rs . x
100
88 1300  x 
Hence, its SP = Rs
100
Since the SPs of both the boxes are the same,
we have
120x 88 1300  x 
=    15 x = 11 (1300 – x) 
100 100
11  1300
 15 x + 11x = 11 × 1300    x= = 550
26
Hence, CP of the first box = Rs 550 and that of the second box
= Rs (1300 – 550) = Rs 750.
Illustration 11.13
A man buys an article and sells it at a profit of 20%. If he would buy it at 20% less and sell
it for Rs 75 less, he would have gained 25%. What is the cost price of the article?
Sol Let the CP of the article be Rs x
He makes a profit of 20%. Hence,
120x 6x
SP = Rs = Rs.
100 5
If he would buy it at 20% less, then
 20   1 4x
The new CP = Rs x  1   = Rs x  1   = Rs
 100   5 5
 6x 
If he would sell it for Rs 75 less, then the new SP = Rs   75 
 5 
125 4x
If he gains 25%, then the new SP = Rs  = Rs. x
100 5
6x 6x x
Hence,  75 = x   x = 75  = 75
5 5 5
 Hence, the required CP = Rs 375.
llustration 11.14
3 th
A person purchases his goods for Rs 1600. He sells of his goods at a profit of 10%. At
4
what profit percent should he sell his remaining goods so as to make a gain of 16% on the
whole transaction?
Sol. Let the man purchase y kg of goods at Rs 1600.
Then his total CP = Rs 1600.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -197
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
PERCENTAGE AND ITS APPLICATIONS

3y
He sells kg of his goods at a profit of 10%.
4
3y 3
Now, CP of kg of his goods = Rs = 1600  Rs 1200.
4 4
3y 110
SP of kg of his goods = Rs =  1200 Rs 1320.
4 100
y 1
Now, CP of the remaining kg of his goods = Rs 1600  = Rs 400.
4 4
y
Let the man sell the remaining kg of his goods at a profit of x %.
4
y 100  x
Then SP of kg of his good = Rs  400 = Rs (400 + 4x)
4 100
Total SP of y kg of goods = Rs (1320 + 400 + 4x) = Rs (4x + 1720)
If the man makes a gain of 16% on the whole transaction,
116
then SP of y kg of goods = Rs  1600 = Rs 1856
100
136
4x + 1720 = 1856  4x = 1856 – 1720 = 136  x= = 34
4
Hence, the required profit = 34%.
Illustration 11.15
Oranges are bought at 11 for Rs 10 and an equal number more at 12 for Rs 10. If these
are sold at 1 for Re 1, find the loss or gain percent.
Sol. Let x oranges be bought at 11 for Rs 10 and an equal number x be bought at 12 for Rs 10.
Then the total CP of (x + x) = 2x oranges
 10x 10x   1 1   23  115x
= Rs   = Rs 10x    = Rs 10x   = Rs. 66
 11 12   11 12   132 
Total SP of 2x oranges = Rs 2x
 115x   132x  115x  17x
 Profit = SP – CP = Rs.  2x  = Rs   = Rs 66
 66   66 
17x 66 340 18
 Profit percent =   100 = = 14
66 115x 23 23
18
Hence, his profit = 14 % .
23
Illustration 11.16
A vendor bought oranges at 20 for Rs 56 and sold them at Rs 35 per dozen. Find his gain
or loss percent.
Sol. Let the number of oranges bought = LCM of 20 and 12 = 60
CP of 20 oranges = Rs 56.
56
CP of 1 orange = Rs.
20
 56 
Hence, the CP of 60 oranges = Rs   60  = Rs 168
 20 
SP of 12 oranges = 35.
35
SP of 1 orange = Rs.
12

 35 
Hence, the SP of 60 oranges = Rs   60  = Rs 175
 12 
Thus, CP = Rs 168 and SP = Rs 175.
Since (SP) > (CP), the vendor has made a gain.
Gain = Rs (175 – 168) = Rs 7
 gain   7  1
Gain% =   100  % =  168  100  % = 4 6 % .
 CP   
Illustration 11.17
By selling a T-shirt for Rs 216, a shopkeeper loses 4%. For how much should he sell it to
gain 12% ?
Sol. SP = Rs 216 and loss percent = 4%
100  100   100 
CP =  SP = Rs   216  = Rs   216  = Rs 225.
(100  loss%)  (100  4)   96 

Now the CP = Rs 225 and the desired gain% = 12%

(100  gain%)  (100  12)   112 
 SP = = CP = Rs   225  = Rs   225  = Rs 252.
100  100   100 
Hence, the shopkeeper should sell the T-shirt for Rs 252.
(d) Discount
(i) Definitions
Marked price : In big shops and department stores, every article is tagged with a card and
its price is written on it. This is called the marked price of that article, abbreviated to MP.
For books, the printed price is the marked price.
List price : Items which are manufactured in a factory are marked with a price according to
the list supplied by the factory, at which the retailer is supposed to sell them. This price is
known as the list price of the article.

Discount : In order to increase the sale or clear the old stock, sometimes the shopkeepers
offer a certain percentage of rebate on the marked price. This rebate is known as
discount.

An important fact :

The discount is always reckoned on the marked price.

Clearly, selling price = (marked price) – (discount).
 M.P.  S.P. 
  Discount % =   x100
 M.P. 
 100  Discount% 
  S.P. = M.P. ×  
 100 
100  S.P.
  M.P. =
100  Discount %
 If D1 %, D2 %, D3%,.., Dn% are n successive discounts then
 100  D1   100  D2   100  Dn 
S.P.=  x  x...x   xM.P.
 100   100   100 

Illustration 11.18
A motor cycle is sold at Rs 23750 after allowing certain discount. If the list price of the
motor cycle is Rs 25000, find the discount in percent.
Sol. We have
Discount = List Price – SP = Rs. 25000 – Rs 23750 = Rs. 1250
This discount is on the list price of Rs 25000
1250
Discount percent =  100 = 5
25000
The required discount = 5%.
Illustration 11.19
The marked price of a woolen coat is Rs 2000. It is sold at a discount of 15%. The
shopkeeper has allowed a further discount of 5% due to off season. Find the selling price
of the coat.
Sol. The marked price = Rs 2000
15
1st discount = 15% of Rs 2000 = Rs  2000 = Rs 300
100
The reduced marked price after the 1st discount = Rs 2000 – Rs 300 = Rs 1700
5
2nd discount due to off-season = 5% of Rs 1700 = Rs.  1700 = Rs 85.
100
Hence, the final reduced price after the 2nd discount = Rs. 1700 – Rs 85 = Rs 1615 = SP
Hence, the required SP of the coat is Rs 1615.
Illustration 11.20
Find a single discount equivalent to the discount series 25%, 10% and 5%.
Sol. Let the marked price of the article be Rs 100
 100  25   100  10   100  5   75   90   95  513
SP=  x x  x100 =  100  x  100  x  100  x100 = 8 = 64.125
 100   100   100       
So net discount = MP – SP = 100 – 64.125 = 35.875
Hence, the given discount series is equivalent to a single discount of 35.875%.
Illustration 11.21
A dealer buys a table listed at Rs 1000 and gets successive discounts of 10% and 20%. He
spends 10% of his cost price on transport, etc. At what price should he sell the table to
earn a profit of 15%?
10
Sol. First discount = 10% of Rs 1000 = Rs  1000 = Rs 100
100
First reduced price of the table after the first discount = Rs (1000 – 100) = Rs 900
20
Second discount = 20% of Rs 900 = Rs  900 = Rs 180.
100
 Second reduced price of the table after the second discount = Rs (900 – 180) = Rs 720.
This is the dealer’s CP.
10
The dealer spends 10% of Rs 720 i.e., Rs  720 = Rs. 72.
100
Hence, dealer’s actual cost price = Rs (720 + 72) = Rs 792
If the dealer wants to make a profit of 15% by selling it, then his
 115 
SP = Rs   792  = Rs 910.80
 100 
Hence, the required selling price of the dealer is Rs 910.80.

Illustration 11.22
A person marks his goods 10% above his cost price. He then sells it by allowing a discount
of 10%. What is his profit or loss percent?
Sol. Let his cost price be Rs.x
 10x  11 x
Then his marked price =  x  Rs = Rs
 100  10
He then sells it at a discount of 10% on this marked price.
11 x 10 11 x 11 x
Discount = 10% of Rs = Rs  = Rs
10 100 10 100
 11 x 11 x  110 x  11 x 99x
 His SP = Rs   = Rs = Rs
 10 100  100 100
Since his CP > SP, hence there will be a loss
 99x  x
and loss = CP – SP = Rs  x  = Rs
 100  100
x 1
 Loss percent =   100 = 1
100 x
Hence, the loss = 1%.

(e) Sales tax/value added tax

(i) Sales tax (ST) is a tax which is paid by us when we buy items.

NOTE :
ST is charged by the government on the sale of an item. Shopkeeper takes it from the
customer and gives to the government. So ST is always calculated on selling price of an
item and is added to the price of items we purchased. So, the customer pays the price of
the items and ST on it in the bill.
Now a days value added tax (VAT) has been includes as a tax.

Illustration 11.23.
The cost of a chair at a shop was Rs 220. The sales tax charged was 5%. Calculate the bill
amount.
Sol. If the cost was Rs 100, the ST paid was Rs 5
5
On Rs 220, the tax paid would be = Rs × 220 = Rs. 11
100
Bill amount = Cost of item + ST = Rs 220 + Rs 11 = Rs 231.
Illustration 11.24
Ram paid Rs 8400 for a refrigerator including a tax (VAT) of 12.5%. Find the price of
refrigerator before VAT was added.
Sol. If the price without VAT is Rs. 100 then price including VAT is 112.5
When price including VAT is Rs 112.5, original price is Rs 100.
100
Now, the price including VAT is Rs 8400, the original price = Rs × 8400 Rs. 7466.
112.5

Ask yourself

1. A shopkeeper purchased 100 blankets at Rs. 2000 each. He found that 10 blankets were
defective and he sold these at Rs. 1200 each. At what rate should he sell the remaining
blankets so as to gain 14% on the whole ?

2. Sarita and Salma purchased one buffalo each for the same price. Sarita sold it for Rs.
14880 and lost 7%. At what price should Salma sell her buffalo so as to earn a profit of
5% ?

3. William sells a quintal of wheat for Rs. 924 and earns a profit of 12%. By selling a quintal of
rice for the same amount he loses 12%. Find
(i) C.P. of wheat. (ii) C.P. of rice.

4. Find the S.P. when

(i) M.P. = Rs. 320 and discount = 12.5%.
(ii) M.P. = Rs. 990 and discount = 10%

5. A discount of 3% is offered on the marked price of sewing machines. What cash amount
will a customer pay for a sewing machine, the price of which is marked at Rs. 1300 ?

6. List price of a scooter is Rs. 35000. It is a available at a discount of 8%. Find the selling
price of the scooter.

Answers
1. Rs. 2400 each 2. Rs. 16800 3. (i) Rs. 825 (ii) Rs. 1050

4. (i) Rs. 280 (ii) Rs. 891 5. Rs. 1261 6. Rs. 32200

Add your knowledge

Important concepts associated with percentage

1. Conversion of Fractions into Percentages :
Knowing conversion of common fractions into percentages helps your convert many
1
fractions into percentage immediately, For example, knowing that = 12.5% will help you
8
3 5
convert fractions like or into percentages immediately.
8 8
 Given below are the fractions converted into percentage.
Fraction Percentage Fraction Percentage Fraction Percentage
1 1 1
2
50% 10
10% 18
5.55%

1 1 1
33.33% 11
9.09% 5.26%
3 19

1 1 1
25% 12
8.33% 5%
4 20

1 1 1
20% 7.69% 21
4.76%
5 13

1 1 1
16.66% 14
7.14% 22
4.54%
6

1 1 1
14.28% 6.66% 4.34%
7 15 23

1 1 1
12.50% 6.25% 24
4.16%
8 16

1 1 1
11.11% 17
5.88% 4%
9 25

1. The salary of Sachin Tendulkar is 20% more than that of Ricky Ponting. By what
percentage is Ricky’s salary less than that of Sachin’s ?
2. If SP of x articles is same as CP of y articles then
xy yx
(i) if x > y  loss % =  100 (ii) if x < y  profit % =  100
x x

Concept Map

PERCENTAGE & ITS APPLICATIONS

Sales Tax/VAT
Percentage Profit , Loss & Discount SP with Tax =
 100  Tax% 
  SP
 100 

Profit Loss Discount

Gain if S.P. > C.P. Loss if C.P. > S.P. Discount = MP – SP
Gain = S.P. – C.P. Loss = C.P. – S.P. Discount
Discount%= MP  100
Gain Loss
Gain % =  100
Loss % =  100  100 – Discount% 
  MP
C.P.
C.P. SP = 
 100 
 100 Gain%  100 – Loss% 
S. P. =    C.P. S. P. = 100
  C.P.
 100  

Summary

1. In case of profit,
 100  Profit % 
S.P. = C.P. ×  
 100 
100  S.P.
C.P. =
100  Profit %

2. In case of loss,
 100  Loss% 
S.P. = C.P. ×  
 100 
100 S.P.
C.P. =
100  Loss%

3. Discount is usually expressed as a certain percent of the M.P.

4. Discount = M.P. – S.P.
Discount
5. Rate of Discount = Discount % = × 100.
M.P.
 100  Discount% 
6. S.P. = M.P. ×  .
 100 
100  S.P.
7. M.P. = .
100  Discount%

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. Passing percentage marks in an exam is 40. A obtained 72 out of 200. By what percent did
he fail ?
(A) 8 % (B) 5 % (C) 4 % (D) 16 %
1 2 1
2. If x% of = 16 % of , then what percent of y is x :
y 3 150
1 1
(A) 11 % (B) 9 % (C) 10% (D) 9%
9 11
3. If all the sides of a cuboid increase by 20%, then by what percentage does its volume
increase
(A) 20% (B) 44% (C) 60% (D) 72.8
4. As income is 60% of Bs income. If As expenditure is Rs. 260 less than Bs and their
savings are 10% and 20% of their incomes, find their incomes respectively.
(A) Rs. 600 and Rs. 1000 (B) Rs. 540 and Rs. 900
(C) Rs. 1200 and Rs. 2000 (D) None of these
5. If the price of a commodity increases first by 10%, then by 20% and subsequently
decreases by 20%, what is the net percentage increase/decrease in the price.
(A) 10% increase (B) 20% decrease (C) 5.6% decrease (D) None of these
6. A vendor sells 30% of his fruit and throws away 40% of the remainder. Next day he sells
50% of the remainder and throws away the rest. What % of the fruit does the vendor
throw ?
(A) 51% (B) 49% (C) 63% (D) 72%
7. The correct formula is :
C.P.  100 Loss  100
(A) Profit% = (B) Profit% =
Loss C.P.
Profit  100
(C) Profit% = (D) None of these
C.P.
8. When S.P. is greater than C.P., then there is always :
(A) a loss (B) a gain (C) No loss no gain (D) None of these
9. Profit or loss percent are always calculated on :
(A) C.P. (B) S.P. (C) M.P. (D) None of these
10. The correct relationship is :
(A) M.P. = S.P. – discount (B) S.P. = M.P. – discount
(C) M.P. + S.P. = discount (D) None of these
11. Single discount equivalent to two successive discounts of 50%, and 50 % is :
(A) 100% (B) 80% (C) 75% (D) 85%

12. If C.P. of 4 articles is equal to the S.P. of 5 articles, then in this transaction there is :
(A) a loss (B) a gain (C) No loss no gain (D) None of these
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -206
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
PERCENTAGE AND ITS APPLICATIONS

13. A’s salary is reduced by 10%. In order to bring his salary back to original position, it must
be raised by :
1
(A) 10% (B) 12.5% (C) 20% (D) 11 %
9
14. A student has to secure 35% marks to pass the examination. If he gets 120 marks and fails
by 20 marks, find the maximum marks set for the examination :
(A) 1000 (B) 400 (C) 350 (D) 700
15. In selling an article for Rs. 76, there is a gain of 52%. the gain by selling that for Rs. 74 is :
(A) 50% (B) 48% (C) 46% (D) 44%
16. A shop keeper after allowing a discount of 20%, he have 20% profit. How much % he has
written above cost price ?
(A) 52% (B) 55% (C) 50% (D) 48%

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 6.25% as a decimal is _________

2. What percent of 50 is 5 ? _______

1
3. 7 % of Rs. 1200 = ________
2

4. 240 mL is __________ % of 3L

5. If x% of 35 is 42, then x = _________

12
6. = ________ %
5

7. 120 = ________% of 80

8. If SP is more than CP then a person will have ______.

9. MP of a table is Rs. 2000 and discount is 30% then SP is _____

TRUE / FALSE
1. To convert a fraction into a percent multiply by 100.

2. 40% of 60 is greater than 25% of 90.

3. If C.P. = Rs. 400 and loss = 15%, then SP = Rs. 400 – 15% of 400.
4. 6% of 8 is 48
5. 6 : 5 = 30%
3
6. = 60%
5
7. 6 hours = 25% of a day
8. Profit and loss is always calculated on SP
9. Discount is always calculated on MP.

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Column–I Column–II
1
(A) Percentage form of 3 : 4 (p) 8
3
(B) Percentage decrease if price (q) 25%
reduces from Rs. 60 to 55
(C) Percentage increase in price if price (r) 75%
increases from Rs. 55 to 60
1
(D) Profit percent when SP = 100, CP = 75 (s) 9 %
11
1
(E) Loss percent when SP = 75, CP = 100 (t) 33 %
3

2. Column–I Column–II
(A) Discount percent when (p) 20%
SP = 80, MP = 100
(B) Tax rate when basic (q) 100 %
price = 160, price after tax = 180
(C) Gain percent when CP = Rs. 200, (r) 40 %
Gain Rs. 200
1
(D) Single discount equivalent to two (s) 12 %
2
successive discounts of 15% and 20%

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Subtracting 40% of a number from the number, we get the result as 30. Then find the
number.
2. The price of an article is cut 20%.To restore it to its former value, by what percentage the
new price must be increased ?
3. Rakesh bought a CD for Rs 750 and sold it for Rs 875. Find his gain percent.
4. A motor cycle is sold at Rs 23750 after allowing certain discount. If the list price of the
motor cycle is Rs 25000, find the discount in percent.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

5. A students scores 80 marks in an examination and fails by 52 marks. If his passing
percentage is 33, then what will be the maximum marks in the examination ?
6. The salaries of A, B, C are in the ratio 2 : 3 : 5. If the increments of 15%, 10% and 20% are
allowed respectively in their salaries, then what will be the new ratio of their salaries ?
7. A shopkeeper marks his goods at such a price that after allowing a discount of 30% he
makes a profit of 40%. Find the M.P. of an article where C.P. is Rs. 150.

8. Rahim lost the SP of 6 hens by selling 144 hens. Find his loss per cent. Had he purchased
them for Rs 7200, what would have been the SP of one hen?
9. Hari bought 20 kg of rice at Rs 18 per kg and 25 kg of rice at Rs 16 per kg. He mixed the
two varieties and sold the mixture at Rs 19 per kg. Find his gain per cent in the whole
transaction.
10. If 140 mangoes are sold at the cost price of 175 mangoes, what will be the profit percent?

LONG ANSWER TYPE

11. The ratio of the number of boys and girls in a school is 3 : 2. If 20% of the boys and 25% of
the girls are scholarship holders, what percentage of the students does not get the
scholarship ?
12. A bag contains 600 coins of 25 p denomination and 1200 coins of 50 p denomination. If
12% of 25 p coins and 24% of 50 p coins are removed, find the percentage of money
removed from the bag.
13. A man bought certain apples at the rate of Rs 15 for 4 and sold them at the rate of Rs 16
for 5. What will be his profit or loss percent?
14. A man sold each of two cows at Rs 1955. As a result, he made a profit of 15% in one cow
and a loss of 15% in the other. What was his total profit or loss?
15. A tradesman marks his goods at 25% above their CP and allows for purchasers a discount
of 12.5% for cash. What profit % does he make ?

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. What % of 200 is 360 ?
(A) 80% (B) 36 % (C) 180 % (D) 90 %

2. A shopkeeper weighs 10% more while purchasing and weighs 10% less while selling. His
gain by this dishonesty is
2
(A) 10% (B) 11% (C) 20 % (D) 22 %
9
3. A person gains 8% by selling a taperecorder for 972. If he would have sold it for Rs. 872,
his loss would have been
(A) Rs. 7 (B) Rs. 14 (C) Rs. 21 (D) Rs. 28
4. If a number is increased by 10% and then decreased by 10% the number
(A) remains same (B) decreases by 1%
(C) increases by 1% (D) increases by 0.1%

5. 20% of 15% of 10% of 500 is

(A) 225 (B) 150 (C) 120 (D) 1.50
6. In how much time will a sum triple itself at 20% p.a.?
(A) 5 years (B) 10 years (C) 15 years (D) 20 years

7. A shopkeeper marks his goods 40% above the cost price and allows 5% discount, his profit
percent is
(A) 25% (B) 15% (C) 20% (D) 33%
8. A man purchased a horse and a cow for Rs. 35500 and Rs. 8500 respectively. On the
horse, he lost 10% and on the cow, he gained 10%. Find his total gain or loss percent.
132 135
(A) % (B) % (C) 22% (D) 50%
22 22
9. The S.P. of 4 dozen oranges is the same as the C.P. of 5 dozen oranges. Find the gain
percent.
(A) 25% (B) 75% (C) 10% (D) 90%
10. By selling an oven for Rs. 3800, a lady loses 5%. What percent will shee gain or lose if she
sells it for Rs. 4500 ?
25 25
(A) % loss (B) % gain (C) 25% gain (D) 25% loss
2 2

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. In CP of 5 oranges is same as SP of 4 oranges find the profit or loss percentage.
(A) 25% profit (B) 25% loss (C) 10% profit (D) 10% loss
12. Income of A is 20% more than income of B then. How much percent income of B is less
than income of A.
(A) 20% (B) 16.66 % (C) 25% (D) 33.33%

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)
1. Anil owns a plot worth Rs. 10000. He sells it to Mukesh at a profit of 10%. After sometimes,
Mukesh sells it back to Anil at a loss of 10%, then Anil [NSTSE - 2010]
(A) losses Rs. 100 (B) losses Rs. 900 (C) gains Rs. 100 (D) gain Rs. 1100
2. The difference between a discount of 40% and two successive discounts of 36% and 4%
for Rs. 10000 is [NSTSE - 2010]
(A) Rs. 0 (B) Rs. 144 C) Rs. 256 (D) Rs. 400
3. Last year Mr. Nitin earned Rs.5800 from the corn he grew on his farm. This year he
expects a 7% increase in the income from corn. How much does he expect to earn from
corn this years? [IMO - 2010]
(A) Rs.406 (B) Rs.6,206 (C) Rs.8,600 (D) Rs.9,600
4. Sushmita used 200 square tiles to tile her kitchen floor. Of these, 66 tiles were green. What
percent of the tiles were green? [IMO - 2010]
(A) 134% (B) 66% (C) 33% (D) 3.03%
5. Shreya bought an article and sold it for 125% per cent of its cost price. What was the cost
price of the article, it Shreya sold it for Rs.30,750 ? [IMO - 2011]
(A) Rs. 24,600 (B) Rs.25,640 (C) Rs.24,250 (D) Rs.23,200
6. If 35% of a number is 12 less than 50% of that number, then the number is _______.
[IMO - 2011]
(A) 40 (B) 50 (C) 60 (D) 80

7. Soha purchased an item for Rs.9,600 and sold it for loss of 5 per cent. From that money
she purchased another item and sold it for gain of 5 per cent. What is her overall gain/loss?
[IMO - 2011]
(A) Loss of Rs.36 (B) Profit of Rs.24 (C) Loss of Rs. 24 (D) None of these

8. Out of a number of electronic items, Rohit purchases 60% coloured T.Vs. 5% of these are
found to be defective. The percentage of defective T.Vs in all is______. [IMO - 2011]
(A) 3% (B) 6% (C) 12% (D) Can't be determined

9. Harry goes to a shop to buy a watch costing Rs.1404 including sales tax of 8%. He asks
the shopkeeper to reduce the price of the watch so that he can save an amount equal to
the sales tax. The reduction in the price of the watch is _______. [IMO - 2011]
(A) Rs.108 (B) Rs.104 (C) Rs.112.32 (D) None of these

10. A person wants to reduce the trade tax so he calculates his profit on the sale price instead
of on the cost price. In this way by selling an article for Rs. 280 he calculates his profit as
2
14 %. What is the actual profit percentage? [IMO - 2011]
7
(A) 20 % (B) 16.66 % (C) 25 % (D) None of these

11. The population of a town increased at the rate of 10% p.a. If in the year 2009 it was
3.2 × 107, then what will it be in the year 2012 ? [NSTSE - 2012]
(A) 4.2592 × 107 (B) 4259200 (C) 3.963 × 108 (D) 39860000

12. Rajesh bought an arm chair for Rs. 2200 and sold it for Rs 2420. Find his profit
percentage ? [NSTSE - 2012]
(A) 5% (B) 10% (C) 12% (D) 15%
13. A merchant marks his goods at Rs.300 and allows a discount of 25 %. If he still gains 12.5
%, then the cost price of article is ________. [IMO - 2012]
(A) Rs. 220 (B) Rs.200 (C) Rs.240 (D) Rs.260

14. Latika owns a mobile worth 10000. She sells it to Priya at a profit of 10% based on the
worth of the mobile. Priya sells the mobile back to Latika at a loss of 10%. In this
transaction Latika gets____. [IMO - 2012]
(A) No profit No loss (B) Profit of 1000 (C) Profit of 1100 (D) Loss of 1100

15. A trader lists his articles 20% above C.P. and allows a discount of 10% on cash payment.
His gain percent is [IMO - 2012]
(A) 10% (B) 8% (C) 6% (D) 5%

16. If 5% more is gained by selling an article for Rs. 350 than by selling it for Rs 340. What is
the cost of the article [NSTSE - 2013]
(A) Rs. 50 (B) Rs. 160 (C) Rs. 200 (D) Rs. 225

17. Two students appeared in an examination. One of them secured 9 marks more than the
other and his marks were 56% of the sum of their marks. The lesser marks obtained are
[Aryabhatta -2013]
(A) 30 (B) 34 (C) 32 (D) 33

18. A’s salary is half that of B. If A got a 50% rise in his salary and B got a 25% rise in his
salary, then the percentage increase in combined salaries of both is [Aryabhatta - 2013]
1
(A) 25 (B) 33 (C) 75 (D) None of these
3

19. A candidate get 20% marks fails by 10 marks but another candidate who gets 42% marks
gets 12 more than the passing marks. Find the maximum marks. [Aryabhatta -2013]
(A) 150 (B) 100 (C) 200 (D) 250

20. A student has to secure 40% marks to pass a test. He got 30 marks and failed by 50
marks. What is the maximum marks of the test ? [NSTSE - 2014]
(A) 160 (B) 180 (C) 200 (D) 320

21. A man bought goods worth Rs. 6000 and sold half of them at a gain of 10%. At what gain
percent must be sell the remainder to get a gain of 25% on the whole ? [NSTSE - 2014]
(A) 40% (B) 25% (C) 35% (D) 20%

22. The excise duty on a certain item has been reduced to Rs. 800 from Rs. 1024. Find the
percentage reduction in the excise duty. [IOM - 2017]
7 3
(A) 28% (B) 26% (C) 21 % (D) 24 %
8 8

23. lf p : q = 3 : 4 , q : r = 6 : 5 and r : s = 7 : 2, then on dividing Rs. 12324 among p, q, r and s,

find the amount of r. [IOM - 2017]
(A) Rs.3640 (B) Rs. 4268 (C) Rs. 3320 (D) Rs.4638

24. The shopkeeper marks the price of a shirt 50% more than the cost price and allows a
discount of 40% on the mark price of the shirt. Find the gain or the loss percent the
shopkeeper has made on whole transaction. [IOM - 2017]
(A) 10% loss (B) 10% gain (C) 20% loss (D) 20% gain

25. On a payment order of Rs. 10000 John has choice between three successive discounts of
10%, 10% and 30% and three successive discounts of 40%, 5% and 5%. By choosing the
better one, John can save Rs. _______ . [IOM - 2017]
(A) 433 (B) 400 (C) 255 (D) 200
w
26. Four numbers are such that x = 8% of y, y = 4% of z, z is 25% of w. Find the value of .
x
[IOM - 2019]
(A) 25000 (B) 2500 (C) 12500 (D) 1250

27. A shopkeeper allows a discount of 20% to his customers and still gains 25%. Find the
marked price of an article which costs Rs. 800 to the shopkeeper. [IOM - 2019]
(A) Rs. 1250 (B) Rs. 1000 (C) Rs. 1200 (D) Rs. 1500

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ans. C A D A D B C B A B C A D B B C

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 0.0625 2. 10 3. 90 4. 8
5. 120 6. 240 7. 150 8. profit
9. Rs. 1400
TRUE / FALSE
1. True 2. True 3. True 4. False
5. False 6. True 7. True 8. False
9. True

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. (A) – r, (B) – p, (C) – s, (D) – t, (E) – q 2. (A) – p, (B) – s, (C) – q, (D) – r

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
2
1. 50 2. 25% 3. 16 % 4. 5%.
3

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

5. 400 6. 23 : 33 : 60 7. Rs. 300 8. 4% or Rs. 48
9. 12.5 % 10. 25 %
LONG ANSWER TYPE
2
11. 78% 12. 21.6% 13. 14 % loss 14. Rs. 90 loss
3

15. 9.4 %

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. C D D B D B D B A B A B

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. D B B C A D C A B B A B B C B C D B B C
Ques. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Ans. A C A D C D A

12
CHAPTER

COMPOUND INTEREST
TERMINOLOGIES
Interest, principal, amount, compound interest, simple interest, rate of interest,
growth, depreciation, half yearly, quarterly, per annum, time period, compounded
annually, compounded semi-annually.

INTRODUCTION
In previous classes, we have learnt about simple interest in dealings of day to day life the
interest that is paid is rarely the simple interest. The interest which the banks post offices,
insurance corporation and other finance companies charge is not the simple interest.
In this chapter, we shall discuss the concept of compound interest and methods of
calculating compound interest.

12.1 COMPOUND INTEREST

When we borrow money from a lender (like bank), we have to pay some additional money
according to specified term along with the borrowed money. This additional money which
we have to pay to the lender is called the interest and money which is borrowed is called
the principal. The principal together with the interest is called the amount.
If P is the principal and I is the interest, then the amount A is, therefore, given by A = P + .
We recall that if principal remains constant for the entire loan period, then the interest
obtained is simple interest. If the interest is added with the principal after a specified period
of time to form a new principal and the interest for the subsequent period is calculated on
the new principal then the interest obtained is called compound interest. In this case, the
principal does not remain the same.
Illustration 12.1
Find the compound interest on Rs. 5000 at 10% per annum for 3 years.
Sol. Principal = Rs. 5000
Rate = 10% per annum
5000x10x1
Interest for the 1st year= Rs. = Rs.500
100
Amount at the end of 1st year = Rs. (5000 + 500) = Rs. 5500
Principal for the second year = Rs. 5500
5500x10x1
Interest for the 2nd year = Rs. =Rs. 550
100
Amount at the end of second year = Rs. (5500 + 550) = Rs. 6050
Principal for the third year = Rs.6050
6050x10x1
Interest for the third year = Rs . = Rs.605
100
Amount at the end of 3rd year = Rs. (6050 + 605) = Rs. 6655
Compound Interest (C.I.) = Rs. (6655 – 5000) = Rs. 1655

Deducing a Formula for Compound interest

Suppose is the sum on which interest is compounded annually at a rate of R% per annum.
P1  R  1
Interest for the first year =
100
P1R  R 
Amount at the end of first year= P1  SI1 = P1  = P1 1   = P2
100  100 
P2  R  1  R  R P1R  R 
Interest for the second year= = P1 1    100 = 100  1  100 
100  100   
 R  P1R  R 
Amount at the end of second year = P2  SI2 = P1 1  + 1
 100  100  100 
2
 R  R   R 
= P1 1  1 = P1 1   = P3
 100  100 
  100  
n
 R 
Proceeding in this way the amount at the end of n years will be : A n = P1 1   .
100  
Difference between simple interest and compound interest
Let us look at the difference between simple interest and compound interest. We start with
Rs 100. Try completing the chart.

Under Simple Interest Under Compound Interest

Principal Rs. 100.00 Rs. 100.00

interest at 10% Rs. 10.00 Rs. 10.00
First year
___________ ___________
Year end amount Rs. 110.00 Rs. 110.00
Principal Rs. 100.00 Rs. 110.00
interest at 10% Rs. 10.00 Rs. 11.00
Second year
___________ ___________
Year end amount Rs. (110 + 10) = 120 Rs. 121.00
Principal Rs. 100.00 Rs. 121.00
interest at 10% Rs. 10.00 Rs. 12.10
Third year
___________ ___________
Year end amount Rs. (120 + 10) = 130 Rs. 133.10

Note that in 3 year,

Interest earned by simple interest = Rs (130 – 100) = Rs 30
Interest earned by compound interest = Rs (133.10 – 100) = Rs. 33.10
Note also that the principal remains the same under simple interest, while it changes year
after every year under compound interest.

(a) Formulae for Simple and Compound Interest

If P is the principal, R is the rate of interest per annum and T is the time in years, then
simple interest given by
PRT
S.I. =
100

In case of the compound interest the amount A is given by the formula

n
 R 
A = P 1 
 100 
Where P = Principal, R = Rate of interest, n = Time
Compound interest (C.I.) = A – P
 n 
R 
Hence, C.I. = P  1   1
 100  
NOTE :

(i) When the interest is compounded half yearly, we have

R
Rate =   % half yearly and Time = 2n half years
2
(ii) When the interest is compounded quarterly, we have
R
Rate = % per quarterly and time = 4n quarters.
4
3
(iii) When the interest is compounded annually but time in a fraction (Let 3 years)
7
 3 
3 R 
 R   7
then, A = P  1     1  100 
 100   

 
(iv) If the rate of interest are different for different years, let r1, r2, r3 … for first, second,
third … years respectively then amount is given by
 r   r   r 
A = P 1  1  1  2  1  3  …
 100 100
  100   

Illustration 12.2
Find the amount of Rs 8000 for 3 years, compounded annually at 5% per annum. Also, find
the compound interest.
Sol. Here, P = Rs 8000, R = 5% per annum and n = 3 years.
n
 R 
Using the formula A = P  1   , we get
 100 
 3
 5    21 21 21 
Amount after 3 years = Rs. 8000   1    = Rs.  8000  20  20  20  = Rs. 9261
  100    
Amount after 3 years = Rs. 9261.
And, compound interest = Rs. (9261 – 8000) = Rs. 1261

Illustration 12.3
1
Find the compound interest on Rs 6400 for 2 years, compounded annually at 7 % per
2
annum.
15
Sol. Here, P = Rs 6400, R = % p.a and n = 2 years
2
n
 R 
Using the formula A = P  1   , we get
 100 
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -217
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
COMPOUND INTEREST

 2
 15    43 43 
Amount after 2 years = Rs. 6400  1   = Rs.  6400   = Rs. 7396
  2  100    40 40 
Compound interest = Rs. (7396 – 6400) = Rs. 996.
Illustration 12.4
Find the amount of Rs. 12000 after 2 years compounded annually, the rate of interest
being 5% p.a. during the first year and 6% p.a. during the second year, also find the
compound interest.
Sol. Here, P = Rs. 12000, r1 = 5% p.a. and r2 = 6% p.a.
 r1   r2 
Using the formula A = P  1   1   ,
 100   100 
 5   6 
We have A = 12000  1   1  100 
 100   
 21 53 
Amount after 2 years = Rs.  12000    = Rs. 13356.
20 50  
Thus, amount after 2 years = Rs. 13356.
And, compound interest = Rs. (13356 – 12000) = Rs. 1356

Illustration 12.5
3
Find the compound interest on Rs. 31250 at 8% per annum for 2 years.
4
  3 
2  8   2
3   8     27   53  
Sol. Amount after 2 years = 31250   1    1  4   Rs. = Rs. 31250     
4   100   100     25   50  
   
 27 27 53 
= Rs.  31250     = Rs. 38637.
25 25 50
 
Amount = Rs. 38637
Hence, compound interest = Rs. (38637 – 31250) = Rs. 7387

Illustration 12.6
The difference between the compound interest and the simple interest on a certain sum for
2 years at 6% per annum is Rs. 18. Find the sum.
Sol. Let the sum be Rs. P.
 6  3P
Then, SI = Rs.  P   2  = Rs.
 100  25
 2 
 6   53 53    2809   309P 
CI = Rs. P   1   P  = Rs.  P    P = Rs.  P  P  = Rs. 
100   50 50   2500 

 2500 
   
 309P 3P   9P 
(CI) – (SI) = Rs.    = Rs.  2500  .
 2500 25   
9P 2500  18
 = 18  P =
2500 9
Hence, the required sum is Rs. 5000.

ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
 100  6  2 
Let the sum be Rs 100. Then SI = Rs.   = Rs. 12
 100 
 2 
 6   53 53    2809  309
CI = Rs. 100  1    100 = Rs  100     100  = Rs   100  = Rs.
 100   50 50    25  25
 
 309  9
(CI) – (SI) = Rs.   12  = Rs.
 25  25
9
If the difference between the CI and SI is Rs. , then the sum = Rs. 100.
25
If the difference between the CI and SI is Rs. 18 then the sum
 25 
= Rs.  100   18  = Rs. 5000. Hence, the required sum is Rs. 5000.
 9 
Illustration 12.7
A certain sum amounts to Rs. 72900 in 2 years at 8% per annum compound interest. Find
the sum.
Sol. Let the sum be Rs. P. Then,
 2
 8    27 27   729P 
Amount = Rs. P   1   = Rs. P    = Rs.  .
  100    25 25   625 
729P  72900  625 
= 72900   P=    P = 62500.
625  729 
Hence, the required sum is Rs. 62500.
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
Let the sum be Rs 100. Then,
 2
 8    27 27   2916 
Amount = Rs 100   1    = Rs  100    = Rs  
  100    25 25   25 
2916
If the amount is Rs. , then the sum = Rs 100.
25
 25 
If the amount is Rs. 72900, then the sum = Rs.  100   72900  = Rs. 62500
 2916 
Hence, the required sum is Rs. 62500.
Illustration 12.8
At what rate percent per annum will a sum of Rs. 2000 amount to Rs. 2205 in 2 years,
compounded annually ?
Sol. Let the required rate be R% per annum.
Here, A = Rs. 2205, P = Rs. 2000 and n = 2 years.
n
 R 
Using the formula A = P  1   , we get
 100 
2 2 2
 R   R  2205 441  21 
 2205 = 2000 ×  1    1   = = =  
 100   100  2000 400  20 
 R  21 R  21  1  1 
  1  100  = 20 Þ 100 =  20  1 = 20  R =  100 
20 
=5
    
Hence, the required rate of interest is 5% per annum.

Illustration 12.9
In what time will Rs. 1000 amount to Rs. 1331 at 10% per annum, compounded annually ?
Sol. Let the required time be n years. Then,
 n  n
 10    11  
Amount = Rs. 1000   1   = Rs. 1000    
 100   10  
  
n
 11 
1000 x   = 1331 [  amount = Rs 1331 (given)]
 10 
n 3 n 3
 11  1331 11 11 11  11   11   11 
   = = =      =    n = 3.
 10  1000 10  10  10  10   10   10 
Thus, n = 3. Hence, the required time is 3 years.
Illustration 12.10
1
What sum will become Rs. 9826 in 18 months if the rate of interest is 2 % per annum and
2
the interest is compounded half-yearly ?
Sol. Let the required sum i.e. the principal be Rs. P.
We have, Principal = P, Amount = Rs. 9826,
1 18 3
R = 2 % per annum and n = 18 months = = years.
2 12 2
3
2
 5  2
2n
 R   
 A = P 1    9826 = P  1  2 
 200   200 

 
3 3 3
 1   81   80 
9826 = P  1    9826 = P    P = 9826 ×   = 9466.54
80   80   81 
Hence, required sum = Rs. 9466.54
ALTERNATIVE METHOD :
3
Let the required sum be Rs. 100. Then, the amount after 18 months i.e., years at the
2
1
rate of 2 % compounded half-yearly, is given by :
2
 3
2 
  5  2
 3
  2    81   531441
Amount = Rs.  100   1    = Rs. 100     = Rs.
  200     80   5120
   
 
531441
If amount is Rs. , then principal = Rs 100
5120
 100  5120 
If the amount is Re 1, then principal = Rs.  
 531441 
 100  5120 
If the amount is Rs. 9826, then principal = Rs.   9826  = Rs. 9466.54
 531441 
Hence, required sum = Rs. 9466.54

Illustration 12.11
In what time will Rs. 64000 amount to Rs 68921 at 5% per annum, interest being
compounded half-yearly?
Sol. Here, Principal, P = Rs 64000, Amount A = Rs 68921, rate R = 5% per annum.
Since the interest is compounded half-yearly. Therefore,
2n
 R 
A = P 1   , where n is the number of years.
 200 
2n 2n
 5  68921  41 
 68921 = 64000  1    = 
 200  64000  40 
3 2n
 41   41  3 1
   =   2n = 3   n= years = 1 years.
 40   40  2 2

Illustration 12.12
Reena borrowed from Kamla certain sum for two years at simple interest. Reena lent this
to Hamid at the same rate for two years compound interest. At the end of two years she
received Rs 110 as compound interest but paid Rs 100 as simple interest. Find the sum
and rate of interest.
Sol. Let the principal be Rs P and the rate of interest be R% per annum.
We have,
C.I. = Rs 110, S.I. = Rs 100 and Time = 2 years
2
 R  PR 2
 110 = P  1   – P and 100 = 
 100  100
 2   2 
R  PR R 
  110 = P  1    1 and 100 = 50 110 = P  1  100   1 and PR = 5000
 100     

 2R R2 
 110 = P 1    1 and PR = 5000
 100 10000 

2PR PR2 PR PR
 110 =  and PR = 5000  110 =  R and PR = 5000
100 10000 50 10000
5000 5000
 110 =  R [Putting PR = 5000]
50 10000
R R
 110 = 100    10 =  R = 20
2 2
Putting R = 20 in PR = 5000, we get
20 P = 5000  P = 250
Hence, principal = Rs 250 and rate = 20% per annum.

(b) Growth and depreciation

We have seen that money grow when it is invested for some time and we can calculate the
increased amount by using the formula. The same formula can also be used in calculating
the growth in population, increase in the height of a tree and so on. We can therefore, use
the formula :
n
 R 
A = P 1 
 100 

Where, A = Increased value, P = Original value, R = Rate of growth, n = Time

Some times the value of certain things may decrease for example, a value of machine or a
car. In that case, we can calculate the depreciated value of the item by using the same
formula with the difference that R is replaced by – R.
n
 R 
Decreased value, A = P 1  .
 100 

Illustration 12.13
The present population of a town is 25000. It grows at the rate of 4%, 5% and 8% during
the first year, second year and third year respectively. Find its population after 3 years.
Sol. Population after 3 years.
 4   5   8 
= 25000 1  1  100  1  100 
 100     
26 21 27
= 25000 × × × = 29484.
25 20 25
Hence, the population after 3 years = 29484

Illustration 12.14
The value of refrigerator which was purchased 2 years ago depreciates at 12% p.a. If its
present value is Rs. 9680, for how much was it purchased ?
Sol. Let the cost price of the refrigerator be Rs x.
2
 12 
Then, its present value = x 1 
 100 
2 2
 12   22 
9680 = 1  x  9680 = x  
 100   25 
25 25
 x = 9680 × ×  x = Rs. 12500
22 22
Hence, the cost price of the refrigerator = Rs 12500.

Ask yourself

1. In the following questions, calculate the amount and the compound interest by using the
formulae for compound interest.
(i) Principal = Rs. 4000, Rate = 5 % per annum, Time = 2 years
(ii) Principal = Rs. 6000, Rate = 10 % per annum, Time = 2 years
2. I borrow Rs. 12000 from Jamshed at 6% per annum simple interest for 2 years. Had I
borrowed this sum at 6% per annum compound interest, what excess amount would I have
to pay to him ?
3. Compute the compound interest on :
(i) Rs. 1500 for 2 years at 6% per annum.
(ii) Rs. 2860 for 2 years at 5% per annum.
(iii) Rs. 3000 for 2 years at 5% per annum.
(iv) Rs. 5000 for 2 years at 10% per annum.
(v) Rs. 8500 for 2 years at 8% per annum.

4. Vasudevan invested Rs. 8000 at an interest rate of 9% per annum. Find the total amount
he will get after 3 years, if the interest is compounded annually.

5. Find the amount and compound interest on a sum of Rs. 15625 at 4% per annum for 3
years compounded annually.

Answers

1. (i) Rs. 4410, Rs. 410 (ii) Rs. 7260, Rs. 1260 2. Rs. 43.2

3. (i) Rs. 185.4 (ii) Rs. 293.15 (iii) Rs. 307.5 (iv) Rs. 1050 (v) Rs. 1414.4

4. Rs. 10418.08 5. Rs. 17576, Rs. 1951

Add your knowledge

1. A sum of money at simple interest becomes its n times in A years then at the same rate of
interest it will be its m times in.
 m  1
Sol. =  × A years.
 n 1 
2. A sum of money at compound interest becomes its n times in A years then at same rate of
interest it will be its nx times in.
Sol. A × x years

Concept Map

Summary
1. If the principal remains the same throughout the loan period, then the interest calculated on
this principal is called the simple interest.

2. The time period after which interest is added each time to form a new principal is called the
conversion period and the interest so obtained is called the compound interest.

3. If the conversion period is one year, the interest is said to be compounded annually.

4. The main difference between the simple interest and the compound interest on a certain
sum is that in the case of simple interest, the principal remains constant throughout
whereas in the case of compound interest, it goes on changing periodically.
n
 r 
5. A = P 1  
 100 
 n 
r 
Compound interest = A – P = P  1    1 .
 100  
where A is the amount, P the principal, r the rate percent per conversion period and n is the
number of conversion periods.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. Compound interest is :
(A) Always greater than the simple interest
(B) Always less then the simple interest
(C) Always equal to the simple interest
(D) Always greater or equal to the simple interest

2. The formula for calculating the compound interest is:

time time
 rate   rate 
(A) Principal = Amount  1   (B) Amount = Principal  1  
 100   100 
rate
 time 
(C) Amount = Principal  1   (D) None of these
 100 

3. In case of compound interest :

(A) The amount for the first year becomes interest for the second year
(B) The amount for the first year becomes principal for the second year
(C) Principal for the second year becomes interest for the third year
(D) None of these

4. The compound interest on Rs. 5000 at 4 % per annum for 2 years compounded annually is
(A) Rs 804 (B) Rs 708 (C) Rs 408 (D) Rs 5408

5. In case of compound interest the principal :

(A) Increases every year
(B) Decreases every year
(C) Remains constant throughout the loan period
(D) Increases for first year and then decreases

6. A sum becomes Rs. 3136 after 2 years at 12 % per annum compounded annually. The
sum is
(A) Rs. 2000 (B) Rs. 2500 (C) Rs. 3000 (D) Rs. 3500

7. The compound interest on Rs. 3000 for 3 years at 5% per annum compounded annually is
(A) Rs. 472 (B) Rs. 472.88 (C) Rs. 472.25 (D) Rs. 472.5

8. The correct relationship is :

(A) Amount + C.I. = P (B) C.I. = Amount – P
(C) C.I. – P = Amount (D) None of these

9. The difference between the compound interest compounded annually and the simple
interest on Rs. 625 at 10% per annum for 1 year is :
(A) Rs. 10 (B) Rs. 100 (C) Rs. 15 (D) Rs. 0

10. David borrowed Rs. 1500 at 8 % simple interest for 2 years and he lend it to Tahir for 2
years at 10 % per annum compound interest compounded annually. David’s profit is :
(A) Rs. 240 (B) Rs. 315 (C) Rs. 75 (D) None of these

11. A sum of money at compound interest yields Rs. 200 and Rs. 220 at the end of first and
second year respectively. The rate % is :
(A) 20 (B) 15 (C) 10 (D) 6
12. A sum of money at CI amounts to thrice itself in 3 years. In how many years will it be 9
times itself.
(A) 18 (B) 12 (C) 9 (D) 6
13. The CI on a certain sum for 2 years is Rs 41 and SI is Rs 40. Then the rate percent per
annum is :
(A) 4% (B) 5% (C) 6% (D) 8%
14. The difference in SI and CI on a certain sum of money in 2 years at 15% p.a. is Rs 144.
The sum is :
(A) Rs 6000 (B) Rs 6200 (C) Rs 6300 (D) Rs 6400
15. In what time will a sum of Rs 800 at 5 % p.a. CI amounts to Rs 882 ?
(A) 1 year (B) 5 year (C) 4 year (D) 2 year

FILL IN THE BLANKS

__
 R 
1. CI = P  1  – {P}
 100 

2. The difference between CI and SI on Rs. 500 at 10% p.a. for 2 years is ___________.
3. The sum of money that would amount to Rs. 363 in 2 years at 10% p.a. CI is __________.
x
4. If the SI on Rs. x for 2 years is Rs. , then the SI for 3 years is __________
10

5. The SI and CI on a certain sum of money for 1 year will be ___________

TRUE / FALSE

1. If the interst is compounded half-yearly, then the rate of interest R% per year changes to
2R% per half year.

2. When the interest is compounded quarterly, there are four conversion periods in a year.

3. If CI and SI are the compound interest and simple interest resepctively on a sum P for n
years at the rate of R% p.a., then CI is always greater than SI.

4. The interest when compounded half yearly is less than the interest compounded yearly on
the same amount for the same period at the same rate.

5. The interest when compounded quarterly, we change the rate of interest from R% per
R
annum to % per quarter.
4

6. Compounded interest is the interest calculated on the previous year’s amount.

7. Three and a half years have 7 conversion period when the interest is compounded half
yearly.
8. The SI and CI on a certain sum of money for 2 years will be same.

9. Compound interest and simple interest is equal for one year at the same rate of interest.

10. For 10,000 Rs. SI is greater than the CI at the rate of 3.45% per annum for 2 years.

11. An interest of 10% compounded semi-annually means that 10% interest is added every six
months.

12. The difference between SI and CI on Rs. 15000 for 2 years at 4% is Rs. 24.

MATCH THE COLUMN

Column –I Column –II
(A) Interest compounded yearly when P = Rs. 1000, (p) Rs. 160
R = 8% and T = 2 years

(B) Interest compounded half yearly when (q) Rs. 1000

P = Rs. 1000, R = 8%, p.a. and T = 2 years
2
 27 
(C) Interest compounded quarterly when (r) Rs.1000  
 25 
P = 1000, R = 8% p.a. and T = 2 years
 26  4 
(D) Simple interest when P = 1000, (s) Rs. 1000    1
 25  
R = 8%, p.a. and T = 2 years
 51 8 
(E) Principal when CI = Rs. 1000, (t) Rs. 1000    1
50 
 
R = 8%, p.a. and T = 2 years
1
 27 2 
(F) Amount received on P = Rs. 1000, (u) 1000    1
 25  
after 2 years at 8%, p.a

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. Find the amount and the compound interest on Rs. 2000 for 3 years at the rate of 5 % per
annum.

2. A sum of money amount to Rs. 88200 in 2 years at 5 % per annum compounded annually.
Find the sum.

3. At what percent rate of compound interest will a sum of money becomes 8 times itself in 3
years ?

4. Find the compound interest on Rs. 10,000 for 3 years if the rate of interest is 4 % for the
first year, 5 % for the second year & 10 % for the third year each interest being
compounded annually.

5. The population of a city is increasing at the rate of 4 % per annum, then find the population
of the city after 2 years if the present population is 160000 ?
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -227
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
COMPOUND INTEREST

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. Find the compound interest on Rs. 15625 for 9 months, at 16 % per annum, compounded
quarterly.

7. The difference between the compound interest and simple interest on a certain sum for 2
years at 5 % p.a. is Rs. 40. Find the sum.

1
8. Find the amount of Rs. 4096 for 18 months at 12 % per annum, the interest being
2
compounded semiannually.

9. Ishita invested a sum of Rs. 12000 at 5 % per annum compound interest. She received an
amount of Rs. 13230 after n years. Find the value of n.

LONG ANSWER TYPE

10. If the difference between the C.l. and S.I. at the end of 2 years is Rs. 100, what is the
principal? Rate is 5% per annum in both the cases. Assume same principal for both the
cases.

11. A sum of Rs. 12000 deposited at compound interest become double after 5 years. After
20 years it will become

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1 1
1. Find the compound interest for Rs. 8192 for 1 years at 12 % per annum the interest
2 2
being compounded half yearly.
(A) Rs 9826 (B) Rs 1634 (C) Rs 1500 (D) Rs 4913

2. Find the amount of Rs. 15625 for 9 months at 16% per annum compounded quarterly.
(A) Rs 17576 (B) Rs 17675 (C) Rs 16575 (D) Rs 16755

3. The population of a state 3 years ago was 40000000 and increased by 2%, 3% and 2.5%
in previous years respectively. Find present population of that state.
(A) 43074600 (B) 43074400 (C) 43075600 (D) 43084600

4. The amount for a sum of money in 5 years is Rs. 15625 and in 3 years. at the same rate of
interest is Rs. 10000. Find the rate of interest.
(A) 10% (B) 12% (C) 25% (D) 20%

5. Mrs.Anita Sehgal borrowed some money from a bank at 20% p.a. simple interest for 2
years. She invested that money at 20% per annum for 2 years, interest being compounded
half yearly and she gained Rs. 1282. Find the money she borrowed from the bank.
(A) Rs 20000 (B) Rs 13000 (C) Rs 16000 (D) Rs 18000

6. Find the compound interest on Rs. 8000 at 15% per annum for 2 years and 4 months,
interest being compounded annually.
(A) Rs 3309 (B) Rs 3109 (C) Rs 3209 (D) Rs 3190

7. A sum of money was lent for 2 years at 20% compounded annually. If the interest is
payable half yearly, then, Rs. 482 more is paid as interest. Find the sum.
(A) Rs. 16000 (B) Rs. 20000 (C) Rs. 22000 (D) Rs. 18000

8. The difference between the compound interest and simple interest on a certain sum of
money at 10% per annum for 3 years is Rs. 372. Find the sum, if interest is compounded
annually.
(A) Rs. 12000 (B) Rs. 14000 (C) Rs. 16000 (D) Rs. 15000

9. Mr. Ram Singh purchased a car for Rs. 1,90,000. After two years he sold it out. If its value
depreciated at 20% and 15% respectively, what did he get for the car ?
(A) Rs. 1,29,300 (B) Rs. 1,49,200 (C) Rs. 1,29,200 (D) Rs. 1,39,200

10. At what rate percent per annum, compounded half yearly will Rs. 10000 amount to Rs
13310 in 18 months ?
(A) 20% (B) 15% (C) 18% (D) 12%

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. A sum of money becomes its twice in 4 years at simple interest at same interest rate in
how much time it will be 5 times ?
(A) 10 years (B) 12 years (C) 16 years (D) 20 years

12. A sum of money at compound interest becomes its 2 times in 5 years then at same rate of
interest it will become in 8 times in
(A) 10 years (B) 15 years (C) 20 years (D) 25 years

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

1. The difference in simple and compound interest on a certain sum of money in 2 years at
15% per annum is Rs. 144. What is the sum ? [Aryabhatta - 2003]
(A) Rs. 6500 (B) Rs. 6000 (C) Rs. 6250 (D) Rs.6400

2. A certain sum invested at compound interest becomes Rs. 6,500 after a period of 6 years
and Rs. 7,800 after a further period of 2 more years. Find the amount due after the further
period of 2 more years. [Aryabhatta - 2009]
(A) Rs. 9560 (B) Rs. 9500 (C) Rs. 9360 (D) Rs.9000

3. What will be the difference between simple and compound interest at the rate of 10% per
annum on a sum of Rs. 1000 after 4 years ? [NSTSE - 2009]
(A) Rs. 64.10 (B) Rs. 40.40 (C) Rs. 32.10 (D) Rs. 31
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -229
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
COMPOUND INTEREST

4. If the difference between the compound interest, compounded every six months, and the
simple interest on a certain sum of money at the rate of 12% per annum for one year is
Rs. 36, the sum is [NSTSE - 2010]
(A) Rs. 10000 (B) Rs. 12000 (C) Rs. 15000 (D) Rs. 18000

5. The compound interest on a certain sum of money for 2 years at 5% per annum is Rs.
102.50. Find the compound interest on the same for the same period at 4% per annum
[Aryabhatta - 2011]
(A) Rs. 81.60 (B) Rs. 85.70 (C) Rs. 82.50 (D) Rs. 79.60
6. A sum of money invested at compound interest amounts to Rs. 800 in 3 years and to
Rs.840 in 4 years. The rate of interest per annum is________. [IMO - 2011]
1 2
(A) 2 % (B) 4% (C) 5% (D) 6 %
2 3

7. The difference between compound interest and simple interest for 3 years @ 20% p.a. is
Rs.152. What is the principal lent in each case? [IMO - 2011]
(A) Rs.1200 (B) Rs.1155 (C) Rs.1187.50 (D) None of these
8. The compound interest on a certain sum for 2 years at 10% per annum is Rs. 525. Find the
simple interest on the same sum for double the time at half the rate percent per annum.
[Aryabhatta - 2012]
(A) Rs. 600 (B) Rs. 500 (C) Rs. 1500 (D) Rs.2000
9. Consider the following statements. [IMO - 2012]
If a money is loaned at simple interest then the :
(i) money gets doubled in 5 years if the rate of interest is 16%.
(ii) money gets doubled in 5 years if the rate of interest is 20 %.
(iii) money becomes four times in 10 years if it gets doubled in 5 years.
Of these statements :
(A) (i) and (ii) are correct (B) (iii) alone is correct
(C) (ii) alone is correct (D) None of these
th
 1
10. A tree increases annually by   of its height. By how much will it increase after 2 years, if
8
it stands today 64 cm high? [IMO - 2012]
(A) 72 cm (B) 74 cm (C) 75 cm (D) 81 cm
11. The value of a machine depreciates every year at the rate of 10% on its value at the
beginning of that year. If the present value of the machine is Rs.729, its worth 3 years ago
was _____.
[IMO - 2012]
(A) 947.10 (B) 800 (C) Rs.1000 (D) Rs.750.87

12. What is the present worth of Rs. 169 due in 2 years at 4% per annum compound interest ?
[NSTSE - 2013]
(A) Rs. 150.50 (B) Rs. 154.75 (C) Rs. 156.25 (D) Rs. 158

13. A man borrowed Rs. 3125 for C.. Which amounted to Rs. 4500 in 2 years. What was the
rate of interest per annum ? [NSTSE - 2014]
(A) 30% (B) 25% (C) 20% (D) 15%

14. A sum amounts to Rs.32000 in 4 years and Rs. 38000 in 6 years at a certain rate of simple
interest. Find the sum. [IOM - 2017]
(A) Rs.18000 (B) Rs.20000 (C) Rs.24000 (D) Rs.25000

15. Find the rate of simple interest per annum at which a sum becomes double in 4 years.
[IOM - 2019]
1
(A) 20% (B) 25% (C) 33 % (D) None of these
3
16. The population of a town increases at a rate of 8% every year. If the present population of
the village is 15000, find the population after 2 years. [IOM - 2019]
(A) 18420 (B) 18240 (C) 17496 (D) 17624

17. What will be the compound interest (in Rs.) on a sum 24000 after 3 years at a rate of 10%
per annum ? [IOM - 2019]
(A) 3783 (B) 7944 (C) 6732 (D) 4843

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. D B B C A B B B D C C D B D D

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. Time 2. 5 3. 300 4.
5. Same
TRUE / FALSE
1. False 2. True 3. True 4. False

5. True 6. True 7. True 8. False

9. True 10. False 11. True 12. True

MATCH THE COLUMN

1 (A) – q , (B) – s, (C) – t , (D) – p, (E) – r ,(F) – u

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Rs. 2315.25, Rs. 315.25 2. 80,000 3. 100%

4. Rs. 2012 5. 173056

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. Rs. 1951 7. Rs 16000 8. Rs. 4913 9. 2 years

LONG ANSWER TYPE

10. 40,000 11. 16 times

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. B A A C A B B A C A C B

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans D C A A A C C B C D C C C A B
Ques. 16 17
Ans C B

13
CHAPTER

DIRECT AND INVERSE VARIATION

TERMINOLOGIES
Direct variation, inverse variation, inlet, outlet, average speed, directly, inversely,
work done, efficient, pipes & cisterns , time , distance & speed.

INTRODUCTION
In previous classes, we have learnt about ratio and proportion ‘Ratio’ is a concept of
comparision by division of two numbers.
If two ratios are equal, then they are in proportion.
In this chapter, we will study about variation. There are 2 types of variation.
(1) Direct (2) Inverse.

13.1 DIRECT VARIATION & INVERSE VARIATION

(a) Direct variation
Two quantities are said to vary directly if the increase (or decrease) in one quantity cause
the increase (or decrease) in the other quantity.
Some Examples :
(i) The cost of articles varies directly as the number of articles (More articles, More cost).
(ii) The distance covered by a moving object varies directly as its speed (More speed,
more distance covered in the same time).
(iii) The work done varies directly as the number of men at work (More men at work, more
is the work done in the same time).
(iv) The work done varies directly as the working time (More is the working time, more is
the work done).
Illustration 13.1
If a car covers 75 km in 3 hours, how much it travel in 5 hours.
Sol. In 3 hr, car cover a distance of 75 km.
75
In 1 hr, car cover a distance of km. [Less time, Less distance]
3
75
In 5 hr, car cover a distance of  5 km = 125 km. [More time, More distance]
3
Illustration 13.2
If the wages of 15 workers for 6 days are Rs. 9450, find the wages of 19 workers for 5
days.
Sol. Wages of 15 workers for 6 days = Rs. 9450
9450
Wages of 1 workers for 6 days = Rs. [Less workers, Less wages]
15

9450
Wages of 1 workers for 1 day = Rs. [Less days, Less wages]
6  15
9450
Wages of 19 workers for 1 day = Rs.  19 [More workers, More wages]
15  6
9450
Wages of 19 workers for 5 days = Rs.  19  5 = Rs. 9975 [More days, More wages]
15  6

(b) Inverse variation

Two quantities are said to vary inversely if the increase (or decrease) in one quantity cause
the decrease (or increase) in the other quantity.
Examples
(i) The time taken to finish a piece of work varies inversely as the number of men at
work (More men at work, less is the time to finish it).
(ii) The speed varies inversely as the time taken to cover a distance (More is the
speed, less is the time taken to cover a distance).
Illustration 13.3
A fort had provision for food for 300 men for 90 days. After 20 days, 50 men left the fort.
How long would the food last at the same rate ?
Sol. Remaining number of men = (300 – 50) = 250.
Remaining number of days = (90 – 20) days = 70 days.
300 men had provision for 70 days.
1 men had provision for 300 × 70 days. [Less men, More days]
300  70
250 men had provision for days. [More men, Less days]
250
= 84 days
Hence, the remaining food will last for 84 days.
Illustration 13.4
6 oxen or 8 cows can graze the field in 28 days. How would 9 oxen and 2 cows take to
graze the same field?
8 8 
Sol. 6 oxen  8 cows 1 ox  cows 9 oxen    9  cows = 12 cows.
6 6  
(9 oxen + 2 cows) (12 cows + 2 cows) = 14 cows
Now, 8 cows can graze the field in 28 days.
1 cow can graze the field in 28 × 8 days.
28  8
14 cows can graze the field in days = 16 days.
14
Hence, 9 oxen and 2 cows can graze the field in 16 days.
(c) Applications
(i) Time and work :
(A) Suppose A can finish a work in n days.
1
Then, work done by A in 1 day is .
n
1
(B) Suppose that the work done by A in 1 day is .
n
Then, time taken by A to finish the whole work = n days.

Illustration 13.5
If a man can complete a piece of work in 10 days. Then, calculate the amount of work done
by him in 7 days.
1
Sol. Amount of work done by him in 1 day = part of work
10
7
 In 7 days the part of work completed = part of work.
10
Illustration 13.6
Ram alone can do a piece of work in 5 days and Shyam alone can do it in 7 days. How
long it would take for Ram and Shyam to finish the work, when they work together ?
Sol. Ram alone can do the work in 5 days.
1
Ram’s one day work =
5
Shyam alone can do the work in 7 days.
1
Shyam’s one day work =
7
1 1 75 12
If they both will work together, their work in one day = + = =
5 7 35 35
1 1 35 11
No. of days to finish the work = = = =2 days.
Oneday ' s work 12 / 35 12 12
Illustration 13.7
A and B can do a piece of work in 10 days, B alone can do it in 15 days. In how many days
‘A’ alone can complete the same work ?
Sol. Let A complete the work in x days.
1
So, work done by A in 1 day = .
x
B alone can do the work in 15 days.
1
B’s one day work =
15
1 1
If A and B both will work together, their work in one day = +
x 15
But, it is given that A and B complete the work in 10 days.
1
So, in one day they can do part of work
10
1 1 1
 = –
x 10 15
1 32
=  x = 30
x 30
So, A complete the work in 30 days.
Illustration 13.8
A and B can complete a work in 15 days and 10 days respectively. They started doing the
work together but after 2 days B had to leave and A alone completed the remaining work.
In how many days will A finish the remaining work?
Sol. A alone can do the work in 15 days.
1
A’s 1 day work =
15
B alone can do the work in 10 days.

1
B’s 1 day work =
10
 1 1  1
(A + B)’s 1 day work =    
 15 10  6
1 1
(A + B)’s 2 days work = 2 × = .
6 3
1 2
So, remaining work = 1 – = part.
3 3
2/3
 Remaining work will be finished by A in = 10 days.
1/15
Ilustration 13.9
A and B can do a piece of work in 30 days, while B and C can do the same work in 24 days
and C and A in 20 days. In how many days will A, B, C finish it, working together ? In how
many days will each one of them finish it, working alone?
Sol. Time taken by (A + B) to finish the work = 30 days
Time taken by (B + C) to finish the work = 24 days
Time taken by (C + A) to finish the work = 20 days
1
(A + B)’s 1 day work =
30
1
(B + C)’s 1 day work =
24
1
(A + C)’s 1 day work =
20
Adding we get :
 1 1 1  456 15 1
2 (A + B + C)’ s 1 day work =    = = =
 30 24 20  120 120 8
1 1 1
So, (A + B + C)’s 1 day work =  =
2 8 16
A, B, C together can finish the work in 16 days.
Now, A’s one day work = (A + B + C)’s one day work – (B + C)’s one day work
1 1 32 1
=  = = .
16 24 48 48
Hence, A alone can finish the work in 48 days.
Now, B’s one day work = (A + B + C)’s one day work – (A + C)’s one day work
1 1 54 1
=  = =
16 20 80 80
Hence, B alone can finish the work in 80 days.
Now, C’s one day work = (A + B + C)’s one day work – (A + B)’s one day work
1 1 15  8 7
=  = =
16 30 240 240
240 2
Hence, C alone can finish the work in days = 34 days.
7 7
(ii) Problem of pipes and cistern
A cistern or a water tank is connected with two types of pipes.
(A) Inlet : The pipe which fills the tank is called an inlet.
(B) Outlet : The pipe which empties the tank is called outlet.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -237
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
DIRECT AND INVERSE VARIATION

Rule.1 Suppose a pipe fill tank in n hours.

1
Then, part of tank filled in 1 hour = .
n
1
i.e Work done by the inlet in 1 hour = .
n
Rule.2 Suppose an outlet empties a full tank in m hours.
1  1
Then, part of tank emptied in 1 hour = . i.e. Work done by the outlet in 1 hour =  m .
m  
Illustration 13.10
A tank is filled by 2 pipes and emptied by a third. If the first two can fill the tank in 2 hrs.
and 3 hrs. respectively and third can empty it in 4 hours. How much time will it take to fill
the empty tank when all three are open.
Sol. Time taken by first pipe to fill the tank= 2 hours
Time taken by second pipe to fill the tank= 3 hours
Time taken by third pipe to empty the tank= 4 hours
1
First pipe 1 hour’s work =
2
1
Second pipe 1 hour’s work =
3
1
Third pipe 1 hour’s work = ( )
4
Let x hrs the time to fill the tank completely.
1 1 1  1 1 7 12
   –    x= hrs.
x 2 3  4  x 12 7
12 5
Complete tank will be filled in hrs = 1 hrs.
7 7
Illustration 13.11
Two pipes M & N can fill a cistern in 12 hrs. & 16 hrs. respectively. If both the pipes are
opened together, then after how many minutes N should be closed so that the tank is full in
9 hrs.
Sol. Let N be closed after x hrs. Then it means M and N work together for x hrs. and for (9 – x)
hrs, M work alone.
 1 1  1 43 9 x
x    + (9 – x) =1  x  + 12 – 12 =1
 12 16  12  48 
 7  x 3 7x  4x 1
 x  – 12 = 1– 4  =
 48  48 4
3x 1 1 48
 =  x= × =4 x = 4 hrs.
48 4 4 3

(iii) Time, Speed and Distance

Dis tance
 (A) Speed =
time
Distance
 (B) time =
speed

 (C) Distance = Speed × Time

 (D) If a certain distance (from A to B) is covered at u km/hr and the same distance
(from B to A) is covered at v km/hr. then the average speed during the whole
2uv
journey is = km/hr.
uv
(E) If a body travels d1, d2, d3,....., dn distances with speeds S1,S2,...,Sn,..... respectively,
then the average speed of the body through the total distance is given by:
Totaldistance covered d  d  d  ..........  dn
Average speed = = 1 2 3
Total time taken t1  t 2  t3  .......  tn
d1 d
Where, t1 = , t2 = 2 ...
s1 s2
Illustration 13.12
An athlete ran 100 metres in 10 seconds. Then find his speed in Km/hr.
dis tance 100 18
Sol. Speed = = m/sec = 10 m/sec = 10 × km/hr = 36 km/hr
time 10 5

Illustration 13.13
A car travels 120 km from A to B at 30 km per hour but returns the same distance at 40 km
per hour. Find the average speed for the round trip.
2  30  40 240 2
Sol. Average speed = km/hr = km/hr = 34 km/hr
30  40 7 7

Illustration 13.14
A man travels Ist 50 km at 25 km/hr, next 40 km with 20 km/hr. and then 90 km at 15 km/hr.
Then find his average speed for the whole journey (in km/hr).
50  40  90
Sol. Avg. Speed = = 18 km/hr.
50 40 90
 
25 20 15
(iv) Problem on Trains
(a) Time taken by a train of length ‘a’ metres to pass a pole or a standing man or a
signal post is equal to the time taken by the train to cover ‘a’ metres.

(b) Time taken by a train of length ‘a’ metres to pass a stationary object of length ‘b’
metres is the time taken by the train to cover (a + b) metres.

(c) Suppose two trains or two bodies are moving in the same direction at u m/s and
v m/s, where u > v, then their relatives speed = (u – v) m/s.

(d) Suppose two trains or two bodies are moving in opposite direction at u m/s and v
m/s, where u > v, then their relative speed = (u + v) m/s.

(e) If two trains of length ‘a’ metres and ‘b’ metres are moving in opposite directions at
ab
u m/s and v m/s, then time taken by the trains to cross each other =   sec.
uv

(f) It two trains of length ‘a’ metres and ‘b’ metres are moving in the same direction at
u m/s and v m/s then the time taken by the faster train to cross the slower
ab
train =   sec.
uv

Illustration 13.15
A 400 m long train is running at the speed of 60 km per hour. Find the time taken by train to
crosses a bridge of length 800 m.
Sol. When a train has to cross a stationary object which has some length, it has to cover the
sum of its own length and the length of the stationary object.
In this case the distance covered = (400 + 800) m = 1200 m
5 50
Speed of train = 60 kmph = 60 × m/s = m/s
18 3
dis tance 1200 1200  3
Time taken = = = = 72 sec. = 1 min 12 sec
speed 50 / 3 50
Illustration 13.16
Two trains running in the same direction at 40 km/hr and 22 km/hr completely pass one
another in 1 minute. If the length of the Ist train is 125 m., then what will be the length of IInd
train.
Sol. Here the speed will be taken as the difference of their speeds and the distance covered will
be the sum of the lengths of the train. Now in this case
Speed per hour = 40 – 22 = 18 km/hr.
 18 km/hr. = 5 m/sec.
Let the length of second train = L m.
Distance covered = (125 + L) m
dis tance L  125
Time taken to cross each other =  60 =
speed 5
60 × 5 = L + 125  300 = L + 125  L = 300 – 125  L = 175 m.

Ask yourself

1. The cost of 45 metres of cloth is Rs. 877.50. What length of this cloth can be purchased for
Rs. 12285 ?

2. A worker gets Rs. 400 for 10 days’ work. If he works for 18 days, how much will he get ?

3. 20 pumps can empty a reservoir in 12 hours. In how many hours can 45 such pumps do
the same work?

4. A, B and C together can finish a piece of work in 4 days. A alone can do it in 9 days and B
alone in 18 days. How many days will be taken by C to do it alone.

5. A, B and C can do a piece of work 6, 8 and 12 days respectively. B and C work together for
2 days, then A takes C’s place. How long will it take to finish the work.

6. A tank is emptied by 2 pipes and filled by a third. If the 1st two can empty the tank in 2 and
3 hrs. respectively and third can fill it in 4 hours. How much time will it take to empty the full
tank, when all three are open.
Answers
16
1. 630 m 2. Rs. 720 3. hrs. 4. 12 days
3
12
5. 2 days 6. hrs.
7

Add your knowledge

MIXTURE AND ALLIGATION

Alligation : It is the rule that enables us to find the ratio in which two or more ingredients at
the given price must be mixed to produce a mixture of a desired price.

Mean Price : The cost price of a unit quantity of mixture is called the mean price.

Rule of Alligation : If two ingredients are mixed, then,

Quantity of cheaper

 C.P. of dearer  – Mean price
Quantity of dearer Mean price – C.P. of cheaper 
We can also represent this thing as under

C.P. of a unit quantity of cheaper C.P. of a unit quantity of dearer

(d – m) (m – c)

1. The cost of Type 1 rice is Rs.15 per kg and Type 2 rice is Rs.20 per kg. If both type-1 and
type-2 are mixed in ratio of 2 : 3 , then find the price per kg of the mixed variety of rice.
Sol. Let the price of the mixed variety be Rs. x per kg.
By the rule of alligation, we have :
Cost of 1 kg of Type 1 rice Cost of 1 kg of Type 2 rice
Rs. 15 Rs. 20
Mean price

(20 – x) (x – 15)
(20 – x) 2
 = 
(x – 15) 3
  60 – 3x = 2x – 30 
  5x = 90 
  x = 18.
So, price of the mixture is Rs.18 per kg.

Concept Map

DIRECT AND INVERSE VARIATION

Application
Direct Variation
Inverse Variations
ab 1
a1 b1 a
 b
a2 b2 a1 b 2

a 2 b1
Time & Work Pipe & Speed, Distance
Cistern & Time

Summary

PROBLEM OF PIPES AND CISTERN

A cistern or a water tank is connected with two types of pipes.

(i) Inlet : The pipe which fills the tank is called an inlet.

(ii) Outlet : The pipe which empties the tank is called outlet.

Rule.1 Suppose a pipe fill tank in n hours.

1 1
Then, part of tank filled in 1 hour = . i.e Work done by the inlet in 1 hour = .
n n

Rule.2 Suppose an outlet empties a full tank m hours.

1  1
Then, part of tank emptied in 1 hour = . i.e. Work done by the outlet in 1 hour =    .
m  m
PROBLEM ON TRAINS
(i) Time taken by a train of length ‘a’ metres to pass a pole or a standing man or a signal post
is equal to the time taken by the train to cover ‘a’ metres.

(ii) Time taken by a train of length ‘a’ metres to pass a stationary object of length ‘b’ metres is
the time taken by the train to cover (a + b) metres.

(iii) Suppose two trains or two bodies are moving in the same direction at u m/s and v m/s,
where u > v, then their relatives speed = (u – v) m/s.

(iv) Suppose two trains or two bodies are moving in opposite direction at u m/s and v m/s,
where
u > v, then their relative speed = (u + v) m/s.

DIRECT VARIATION :
Two quantities are said to vary directly if an increase or decrease in one quantity leads to
corresponding increase or decrease in the other quantity and vice-versa.
INVERSE VARIATION :
Two quantities are said to vary inversely if an increase or decrease in one quantity leads to
corresponding decrease or increase in the other quantity and vice-versa.
TIME AND WORK :
(i) If a person completes the work in x days, then he will do 1/xth part of the work in one day.

(ii) If a person does 1/xth part of the work in one day, then he will complete the work in x days.
SPEED :
Distance
(i) Speed = (ii) Distance = Speed × Time
Time
Distance
(iii) Time = .
Speed

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. If 36 men can do a piece of work in 25 days, in how many days will 15 men do it ?
(A) 50 days (B) 56 days (C) 60 days (D) 72 days

2. 120 men had food provisions for 200 days. After 5 days, 30 men died due to epidemic. The
remaining food will last for :
1 1
(A) 146 days (B) 150 days (C) 225 days (D) 260 days
4 2

3. 39 persons can repair a road in 12 days working 5 hours a day. In how many day will 30
persons, working 6 hours a day, complete the work ?
(A) 10 days (B) 13 days (C) 14 days (D) 15 days

4. If 5 men or 9 women can do a piece of work in 19 days then in how many days will 3 men
and 6 women do the same work ?
(A) 12 days (B) 15 days (C) 18 days (D) 21 days

5. A alone can do a piece of work in 10 days and B can do it in 15 days. In how many days
will A and B together do the same work ?
(A) 5 days (B) 6 days (C) 8 days (D) 9 days

6. A can do a work in 15 days and B in 20 days. If they work on it together for 4 days then the
fraction of the work that is left is :
1 7 1 8
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 15 10 15
1 2
7. A can do of a work in 5 days and B can do of the work in 10 days. In how many days
3 5
can both A and B together do the work?
3 4 3
(A) 7 days (B) 8 days (C) 9 days (D) 10 days
4 5 8

8. A man can do a piece of work in 5 days, but with the help of his son, he can do it 3 days. In
what time can the son do it alone ?
1 1
(A) 6 days (B) 7 days (C) 7 days (D) 8 days
2 2

9. A tap can fill a tank in 6 hours. After half of the tank is filled, two more similar taps are
opened. What is the total time taken to fill the tank completely ?
(A) 3 hrs 15 min (B) 3 hrs 45 min (C) 4 hrs (D) 4 hrs 15 min

10. A train traveling at 90 km/hr is able to pass a telegraph post in 10 seconds. The length of
the train is :
(A) 250 metres (B) 240 metres (C) 242 metres (D) 245 metres
11. A train passes a station platform in 36 seconds and a man standing on the platform in 20
seconds. If the speed of the train is 54 km/hr, what is the length of the platform ?
(A) 120 m (B) 240 m (C) 300 m (D) None of these

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. If speed is constant, then less time required for ________ distance.

2. More men at work, _________ is the time to finish it.

3. A can finish a work in n days, then A can finish twice work in __________

4. Pipe which fills the tank is called ___________

5. Pipe which empties the tank is called _________

6. Suppose two trains or two bodies are moving in opposite direction at u m/s and v m/s,
where u > v, then relative speed is ___________

7. Suppose two trains or two bodies are moving in the same direction at u m/s and v m/s,
where u > v, then relative speed is __________.

8. If two quantities are very inversely then decrease in one quantity cause _________ in other
quantity.

9. An athlete ran 100 m in 10 seconds. Then, his speed in km/hr ___________

TRUE / FALSE

1. Work done varies directly as the working time.

2. As the no. of workers reduces, working time decreases

3. Speed is inversely varies with time.

1
4. If total time taken by man to complete certain work is D, then his 1 day work is .
D

5. More is the working time, less is work done.

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Column – I Column – II
(A) In a specified time, speed of a car varies (p) inversely with the
number of pens

(B) If the amount of money to be spent is fixed, (q) directly with the number
the cost per pen varies
(C) The money spent to pens varies (r) directly with the
distance covered by it.
(D) Amount of work done by workers varies (s) directly with the
number of workers
(E) Time taken by the (t) inversely with the
workers to complete a number of workers
certain work varies

2. Column–I Column–II
(A) Cost of articles varies with number of articles (p) Half
1
(B) Time taken to finish a piece of work varies with (q)
n
number of men

(C) 1 day work of ‘A’ if he finish work in n days (r) directly

(D) If ‘A’ take twice time to complete a work as (s) inversely

compared to ‘B’ then ‘A’ efficiency as
compared to B is

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. If 32 men can reap a field in 15 days, in how many days can 20 men reap the same field ?

2. 70 patients in a hospital consume 1350 litres of milk in 30 days. At the same rate, how
many patients will consume 1710 litres in 28 days ?

3. If 20 men can build a 112 m long wall in 6 days, what will be the length of a similar wall that
can be built by 25 men in 3 days ?

4. 6 men, working 8 hours a day earn Rs 8400 per week. What will be the earning per week
of 9 men who work for 6 hours a day ?

5. 500 soldiers in a fort had enough food for 30 days. After 6 days, some soldiers were sent to
another fort and thus the food lasted for next 32 days. How many soldiers left the fort ?

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. If 270 kg of corn would feed 42 horses for 21 days, for how many days would 360 kg of it
feed 21 horses?

7. Ravi can do a piece of work in 15 hours while Raman can do it in 12 hours. How long will
both take to do it, working together ?

8. A, B and C can do a piece of work in 15, 12 and 20 days respectively. They started the
work together, but C left after 2 days. In how many days will the remaining work be
completed by A and B ?

9. Three taps A, B and C can fill an overhead tank in 6 hours, 8 hours and 12 hours
respectively. How long would the three taps take to fill the empty tank, if all of them are
opened together ?

10. A pipe can fill a cistern in 9 hours. Due to a leak in its bottom, the cistern fills in 10 hours.
If the cistern is full, in how much time will it be emptied by the leak ?

LONG ANSWER TYPE

11. A can do a piece of work in 4 hours; B and C together can do it in 3 hours, while A and C
together can do it in 2 hours. How long will B alone take to do it

12. Pipe A can fill a cistern in 6 hours and pipe B can fill it in 8 hours. Both the pipes are
opened and after two hours, pipe A is closed. How much time will B take to fill the
remaining part of the cistern ?

13. Three pipes A, B & C can fill a cistern in 8 hours. After working at it together for 2 hours, A
is closed and B and C can fill it in 9 hours. The number of hours taken by A alone to fill the
cistern ?

14. A train 100 m long traveling with speed of 60 km/hr passes of another train 150 m long
moving in the opposite direction in 9 sec. What was the speed of second train ?

15. Two goods train each 500 m long, are running in opposite directions on parallel tracks.
Their speeds are 45 km/hr and 30 km/hr respectively. Find the time taken by the train to
cross each other.

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. The cost of 25 metres of cloth is Rs. 637.50. The cost of 15 metres of cloth is
(A) Rs. 395.50 (B) Rs. 382.50 (C) Rs. 287.50 (D) Rs. 526

2. A fort has enough food for 400 soldiers for 12 days. If 80 more soldiers join them, the food
will last for
(A) 8 days (B) 10 days (C) 9 days (D) 11 days

3. A man can complete a piece of work in 20 days. The amount of work done in 8 days will be
2 2 3 1
(A) rd (B) th (C) th (D) nd
3 5 5 2

4. Amit drives his car at 60 kmph. The time taken to cover 150 km is
1 1
(A) 3 hrs (B) 2 hrs (C) 2 hrs (D) 3 hrs.
2 2

5. Ram and Mohan can do a piece of work in 6 days and 4 days respectively. Ram starts the
work and works for 2 days alone. Then Mohan joins him. How long will it take them to finish
the remaining work ?
(A) 8/5 day (B) 2 days (C) 12/5 days (D) 14/3 days

6. A, B and C can do a work in 6, 8 and 12 days respectively, each working alone. B and C
work together for 2 days and then A replaces C. In how much time will the total work
finish ?
(A) 4 day (B) 3 days (C) 5 days (D) 6 days

7. Two pipes A and B can fill an empty tank in 12 and 16 hours respectively. Pipe C can
empty the full tank in 8 hours. If all the three pipes are opened together together, how long
will the tank to get filled up ?
(A) 45 hrs. (B) 48 hrs. (C) 50 hrs. (D) 52 hrs.

8. 20 boys earn Rs. 1680 in 7 days, how much will 15 boys earn in 5 days?
(A) Rs. 750 (B) Rs. 800 (C) Rs. 850 (D) Rs. 900

9. A pipe can fill a tank in 6 hours. Due to leak in the bottom it is filled in 7 hours. When the
tank is full, in how much time will it be emptied ?
(A) 42 hrs. (B) 63 hrs. (C) 54 hrs. (D) 62 hrs.

10. 10 men and 15 women together can complete a work in 6 days. It takes 100 days for one
man alone to complete the same work. How many days will be required for one woman
alone to complete the same work?
(A) 90 (B) 125 (C) 145 (D) none of these

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. Tea worth Rs.126 per kg and Rs.135 per kg are mixed with a third variety in the ratio
1 : 1 : 2. If the mixture is worth Rs. 153 per kg, then find the price of the third variety per kg.
(A) 175.5 kg (B) 172 kg (C) 171 kg (D) 177.5 kg

12. A jar full of whisky contains 40% alcohol. A part of this whisky is replaced by another
whisky containing 19% alcohol and now the percentage of alcohol was found to be 26%.
Find the quantity of whisky replaced.
(A) 1/3 (B) 2/3 (C) 5/4 (D) 4/3

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)
1. A train 150 m long is moving at a speed of 30 km/hr. It will cross a cyclist coming at a
speed of 10 km/hr in the opposite direction in [Aryabhatta - 2009]
(A) 11.5 seconds (B) 13.5 seconds (C) 14.25 seconds (D) 15.75 seconds.

2. P alone can complete a work in 12 days, while P and Q together can complete the same
work in 8 days. The number of days that Q will take to complete the work alone is
[NSTSE - 2010]
(A) 10 (B) 24 (C) 20 (D) 9

3. Pipes A and B can fill a tank in 10 hours & 15 hours respectively. Find the time in which
both together can fill it [Aryabhatta - 2010]
(A) 6 hours (B) 5 hours (C) 8 hours (D) 12 hours

4. A train 150 m long is moving at a speed of 30 km/hr. It will cross a cyclist coming at a
speed of 20 km/hr in the opposite direction in
(A) 11.5 seconds (B) 13.5 seconds (C) 14.25 seconds (D) 10.80 seconds

5. A 2 cm long grasshopper can jump 160 cm. If 1 metre tall animal had the same height an
jump ratio, how far could be jump? [IMO - 2010]
(A) 48 m (B) 480 m (C) 80 m (D) 8000 m

6. Dhruv plans on leaving his home in Delhi at 8 : 00 A.M. He will drive at an average speed
of 40 km per hour and plans to arrive at his destination at 11:00 A.M. If the makes no stops
along the way, which of the four places is his destination? [IMO - 2010]

(A) W (B) X (C) Y (D) Z

7. A machine takes 12 minutes to fill 200 bottles of soda. At this rate, how many minutes will it
take the machine to fill 500 bottles of soda? [IMO - 2010]
(A) 25 minutes (B) 28 minutes (C) 30 minutes (D) 40 minutes

8. Jiah is building birdhouses. It takes her 3 hours to build 4 birdhouses. Which of the
following is an equivalent rate ? [IMO - 2010]
(A) 14 hours to build 18 birdhouses (B) 28 hours to build 35 birdhouses
(C) 7 hours to build 8 birdhouses (D) 21 hours to build 28 birdhouses

9. 9 men visited a hotel, 8 of them spent Rs. 4 each over their meal and the 9th spent Rs. 2
more than the average of all the nine. The total money spent by them on the meal is
[Aryabhatta - 2011]
(A) 28.25 (B) 18.30 (C) 38.25 (D) 8.28

10. A can do a piece of work in 10 days, B can do it in 15 days. If they both work together they
can finish the work in. ______. [IMO - 2011]
(A) 9 days (B) 8 days (C) 10 days (D) 6 days

11. Mr. Gupta drives at a speed of 60 km/hr for 6 hours from Chandigarh to Delhi. Mr. Verma
drives his car at an average speed of 45 km/hr for the same journey. How much time does
Mr. Verma take to complete the journey? [IMO - 2011]
(A) 7 hrs (B) 8 hrs (C) 9 hrs (D) 11 hrs

12. A train 108 m long moving at a speed of 50 km/hr crosses a train 112 m long coming from
opposite direction in 6 seconds. Find the speed of the second train.[Aryabhatta - 2012]
(A) 22 km/hr (B) 52 km/hr (C) 102 km/hr (D) 82 km/hr

13. lf x : y = 2 : 3 and 2 :x = 1 :2, then the value of y is . [IMO - 2012]

1 3
(A) 4 (B) 6 (C) (D)
3 2
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -249
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
DIRECT AND INVERSE VARIATION

14. A boat goes downstream and covers the distance between two ports in 4 hours, while it
covers the same distance upstream in 5 hours. If the speed of the stream is 2 km/hr, find
the speed of boat in still water. [IMO - 2012]
(A) 16 km/hr (B) 18 km/hr (C) 20 km/hr (D) 15 km/hr

15. There are 12 pipes that are connected to a tank. Some of them are fill pipes and the others
are drain pipes. Each of the fill pipes can fill the tank in 8 hours and each of the drain pipes
can drain the tank completely in 6 hours. If all the fill pipes and the drain pipes are kept
open, an empty tank gets filled in 24 hours. How many from the 12 pipes are fill pipes ?
[Aryabhatta - 2013]
(A) 8 (B) 7 (C) 10 (D) 9

16. A takes 3 min 45 seconds to complete a kilometer. B takes 4 minutes to complete the
same 1 km track. If A and B were to participate in a race of 2 kms. How much start can A
give B in terms of distance ? [Aryabhatta - 2013]
(A) 125 m (B) 250 m (C) 500 m (D) 625 m

17. 120 persons can dig a well in 60 days. After they have worked for 15 days, how many more
persons should be employed so as to complete the work in another 30 days?
[IOM - 2019]
(A) 60 (B) 90 (C) 180 (D) 210

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Ans. C D B B B D C C C A B

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. Less 2. Less 3. 2n 4. inlet pipe
5. outlet pipe 6. U+V 7. U–V 8. increase
9. 36
TRUE / FALSE
1. True 2. False 3. True 4. True
5. False
MATCH THE COLUMNS
1. (A) – r, (B) – p, (C) – q, (D) – s, (E) – t 2. (A) – r, (B) – s, (C) – q, (D) – p
SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)
SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. 24 Days 2. 95 patients 3. 70 meters 4. Rs. 9450
5. 125 soldiers
SHORT ANSWER TYPE
2 2
6. 56 7. 6 Hrs. 8. 4 days 9. 2 Hrs. 10. 90 Hrs.
3 3
LONG ANSWER TYPE
1
11. 12 Hrs. 12. 3 hrs. 13. 24 hrs. 14. 40 km/hr 15. 48 sec.
3

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. B B B C A A B D A D A B

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Ans. B B A D C B C D C D B D B B B A A

14
CHAPTER

VISUALISING SOLID SHAPES

TERMINOLOGIES
Plane figure, 2-dimensional figure, solid figures, 3-dimensional figures. pyramid,
prism, polyhedron, convexpolyhedron, regular polyhedron, vertex, faces, euler
'sbformula, cylinder, cone, sphere, net pattern, triangular prism, rectangular
prism, square prism, cube, pentagonal prism, triangular pyramid (tetrahedron),
regular octahedron, pentagonal pyramid, edges, square pyramid.

INTRODUCTION
In previous classes, we have learnt about 2-dimensional and 3-dimensional geometric
figures. In 2-D figures and 2 dimensions are known i.e. length and breadth for example
triangle, square, rectangle etc. Where as 3-D figures have 3-dimensions ie., length,
breadth and height for example cuboid, cube, prism etc. As we live in 3-d world, so in this
chapter we will discuss more about 3-dimensional shapes.

14.1 VISUALISING SOLID SHAPES

The figures such as triangles, rectangles, squares, circles etc., which have only two
dimensions, namely length and breadth are called plane figure or 2- dimensional figure.

Plane figure (2-dimensional figure)

The figures such as cube, cuboid, cylinder, pyramid etc., which have three dimensions,
namely length, breadth and height are called solid figures or 3-dimensional figures.

Solid figure (3-dimensional figure)

(a) Types of solid
(i) Polyhedron : A solid which is made up of polygonal regions (called faces) is called a
polyhedron. Two adjoining faces of polyhedron meets at an edge, which is a line segment.
Two adjoining edges of polyhedron meet at a vertex which is a point

NOTE :
Cylinder, Cone, Sphere etc. are not polyhedron as their faces are not polygons.

(A) Convex Polyhedrons : The idea of convex polyhedrons comes from convex polygon.
A convex polyhedron is one whose all faces are convex polygons.

(B) Regular Polyhedron : A polyhedron is regular if all its faces are regular polygons and
same number of faces meet at each vertex.

D
C

A
B
(i) (ii)
In fig. (i) all faces are regular and at all vertex same number of faces meet (i.e 3 faces), so
it is a regular polyhedron
In fig. (ii) at vertex B, 3 adjoining faces meet where as at vertex E, 4 adjoining faces meet,
(i.e. unequal no. of faces meet at vertex) so it is not a regular polyhedron.
(C) Special Types of Polyhedron :
(i) Prism
(1) Triangular prism : A prism which has a uniform triangular cross section is called a
triangular prism.
In figure triangular prism has 6 vertices (A, B, C, D, E and F); 9 edges (AB, BC, AC, AD,
BE, CF, DE, EF, and DF) and 5 faces (ABC, DEF, ABED, BCFE and ACFD).
D

Face
Vertex
E
A
F

B C Edge

(2) Rectangular prism (cuboid) : A prism which has a uniform rectangular cross section is
called a rectangle prism. A rectangular prism has 8 vertices, 12 edges and 6 faces.
Match boxes. Loaf of a bread, geometry box are examples of cuboid.
Vertex
G
F

Face
D
Edge E
H

A B

(3) Square prism : A prism which has a uniform squared cross section is called a square
prism, like rectangular prism, square prism also has 8 vertices, 12 edges and 6 faces.

(4) Cube : A square prism whose all faces are squares is called a cube.
A sugar lump, die etc., are examples of a cube.

(5) Pentagonal Prism : A prism which has uniform pentagonal cross section is called
pentagonal prism. A pentagonal prism has 10 vertices, 7 faces and 15 edges.

(ii) Pyramid
(1) Triangular Pyramid : A pyramid whose base is triangle is called a triangular pyramid.
In figure triangular pyramid has 4 vertices (A, B, C and D); 4 faces (ABC, ABD, ACD, BCD)
and 6 edges (AB, AD, AC, BC, BD and CD).
A
Vertex

Edge

Face
C D
NOTE :
A triangular pyramid is also called a tetrahedron. (tetra = four and hedron = face)

(2) Rectangular Pyramid : A pyramid whose base is rectangle is called Rectangular

Pyramid. A rectangular pyramid has 5 vertices, 8 edges and 5 faces.

(3) Square Pyramid : A pyramid whose base is a square called square pyramid. A square
pyramid has 5 vertices, 5 faces and 8 edges.

(4) Pentagonal Pyramid : A pyramid whose base is a pentagon is called a pentagonal

pyramid. A pentagonal pyramid has 6 vertices, 6 faces and 10 edges.

(5) Regular octahedron : It is a combination of two square pyramids whose faces are
equilateral triangle: A regular octahedron has 6 vertices, 12 edges and 8 faces.

NOTE :
(i) All the side faces of a pyramid (triangular, rectangular, squares, pentagonal etc.)
are triangular.
(ii) A pyramid is named according to the shape of its non-triangular face. If all the faces
are triangular, then it is called a triangular pyramid or tetrahedron.

(iv) Euler’s Formula :

The number of faces, edges and vertices of prism and pyramids are connected by
the formula V + F – E = 2, where V, F and E stand for number of vertex , face and
edge. This formula is known as Euler’s formula.

Illustration 14.1
A polyhedron has 30 edges and 20 vertices. How many faces does the polyhedron have?
Sol. Here, E = 30, V = 20
 V+F–E=2
 20 + F – 30 = 2
 F= 2 – 20 + 30 = 12
Hence, the polyhedron has 12 faces.

(b) Some other solid’s

Cylinder : A cylinder has 3 faces, 1 curved face and 2 flat faces. It has 2 curved edges.
It has no vertex. A tube light, tin containers are examples of a cylinder.
Curved edge

Flat face Flat face

Curved face

Cone : A cone has 1 vertex, 1 curved edge and 2 faces 1 curved and 1 flat face.
Icecream cones, joker’s cap are examples of a cone.
Vertex

Curved face

Curved edge

Flat face

Sphere : A sphere has 1 curved face. It has no vertex and no edge.

A football, marbles, an orange are examples of a sphere.

The following table gives the summary of all the above observations :

(c) Nets
In order to understand dimensional objects more closely, we try to form these objects from
their nets. A net for a three dimensional shape is nothing but a sort of skeleton-outline in 2-
dimension which, when folded, results in three dimensional shape.
Following are net patterns for different three dimensional shapes :
(i) Net pattern for a cuboid

(ii) Net pattern for cube

(iii) Net pattern for a cylinder

(iv) Net pattern for a cone

(v) Net pattern for a triangular prism

(vi) Net pattern for a square pyramid

(vii) Net pattern for a hexagonal prism.

(d) View of 3D-Shapes

As we know that a 3-dimensional object can look differently from different positions so they
can be drawn from different perspectives. For example, a given hut can have the following
views.

Object

Front view Side view Top view

(from right)
We can also get different views of figures made by joining cubes. For example an object
made of three cubes.
Top

Side
Front

Object Front view Side view Top view

(from right)

Ask yourself

1. Can a polyhedron have 10 faces, 20 edges and 15 vertices ?

2. For the following figures verify the Euler’s formula :
(i) Cube
(ii) Triangular Prism
(iii) Hexagonal Pyramid.
3. Draw the net of open cylinder.
4. Draw the net of cone.

Add your knowledge

1. The 9 plane symmetries of the cube.

2 Planes of reflection of a regular tetrahedron.

Concept Map

SYMMETRY & VISUALIZING SOLID SHAPES

Visualizing
Visualizing Solid Shapes 3D Shapes
Symmetry

Euler’s Formula Net

Line of Symmetry Rotational Types of Solids
Symmetry V+F–E=2

Cuboid Cone Cylinder Sphere Cylinder

Net

Square Order of Rotational

No. of line symmetry 3
symmetry 4

Summary

1. A solid which is made up of polygonal regions is called polyhedron.

2. Cylinder, cone, sphere etc are not polyhedrons as their faces are not polygons.

3. There are 2 types of polyhedrons convex polyhedron and regular polyhedron.

4. A triangular pyramid is also called a tetrahedron.

5. All the side faces of a pyramid are triangular.

6. Pyramid is named according to the shape of its bottom face.

7. Euler’s formula,
V+F–E=2
where V = number of vertex
F = number of faces
E = number of edges.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. A line where two faces of a solid meet is called :

(A) Edge (B) Vertex (C) Surface (D) Curved face

2. The corner where three faces of a solid meet is called :

(A) Edge (B) Vertex (C) Surface (D) Curved face

3. A rectangular prism is also called :

(A) Square (B) Cube (C) Cuboid (D) Rectangle

4. A tetrahedron is also called :

(A) Triangular pyramid (B) Triangular prism
(C) Square pyramid (D) Rectangular pyramid

5. A triangular pyramid has :

(A) 3 faces (B) 4 faces (C) 5 faces (D) 6 faces

6. A cube has :
(A) 12 edges, 8 vertices (B) 10 edges, 8 vertices
(C) 12 edges, 6 vertices (D) 10 edges, 6 vertices

7. A square pyramid has :

(A) 4 triangular faces (B) 3 triangular faces (C) 5 triangular faces (D) 1 triangular faces

8. A rectangular pyramid has :

(A) 8 edges, 5 vertices (B) 10 edges, 5 vertices
(C) 12 edges, 6 vertices (D) 8 edges, 4 vertices

9. A cylinder has :
(A) 2 curved faces (B) 3 curved faces (C) 5 curved faces (D) 1 curved face

10. A sphere has :

(A) 2 curved faces (B) 3 curved faces (C) 5 curved faces (D) 1 curved face

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. Solid whose base is polygon and side faces are triangles, is _____________

2. Triangular prism has _________ vertices.

3. Cone has ___________ faces.

4. V + F – E = 2 is known as _________

5. Cube has ________ edges.

6. Square pyramid has base as _________

7. Cylinder has __________ faces.

8. All the side faces of a pyramid are ________

9. Cuboid has ____________ edges.

TRUE / FALSE

1. In prism, base and top are different polygon.

2. In pyramid, side faces are triangles.

3. Sphere has 1 curved face, no vertex, no edge.

4. Pyramid is named according to the shape of its non-trianglular face.

5. In Sphere there is no edges.

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Column – I Column – II
(A) Vertices of cone (p) V+F–E=2

(B) No. of edges of trianglular pyramid (q) 9

(C) Faces of cylinder (r) 1

(D) edges of triangular prism (s) 3

(E) Euler’s formula (t) 6

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Which of the following are plane figures and which are solid figures ?
Rhombus, hexagon, cylinder, trapezium, circle, sphere, squares prism, pyramid, octagon.

2. Base of a pyramid is Hexagonal and all other faces are triangular. Name the pyramid.

3. Name the following solid shapes :

4. Give two real life examples of each of the following shapes :

(i) cube (ii) cuboid (iii) cylinder
(iv) cone (v) sphere (vi) triangular prism

5. How many cubes are there in the figure :

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. A polyhedron has 8 faces and 12 vertices. How many edges does this polyhedron have?
7. Is a square prism same as a cube ? Explain.
8. Can a polyhedron have for its faces.
(i) 3 triangles? (ii) 4 triangles?
9. Draw the front, side and top view for the given object.

(i) 5 kg (ii)

LONG ANSWER TYPE

10. Write down the number of vertices in each of the following solids:
(i) Cube (ii) Cone (iii) Tetrahedron (iv) Triangular prism
(v) Rectangular pyramid

11. Give the geometrical name for each of the following :

(i) book (ii) die (iii) fridge (iv) football
(v) unsharpened pencil

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. Identify P, Q and R.

(A) Rectangular prism Square prism Triangular pyramid

(B) Rectangular pyramid Square Prism Triangular prism
(C) Rectangular pyramid Square Prism Cuboid
(D) Square prism Rectangular Prism Triangular pyramid

2. The given figure has

(i) Faces : _____________

(ii) Edges : _____________
(iii) Corners : _____________
(A) 8, 12, 7 (B) 6, 11, 6 (C) 7, 12, 7 (D) 5, 11, 7

3. The figure shows a solid. Which of the following options is NOT a net of the solid ?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

4. Which of the following figures satisfy the given conditions ?

Figure :(i) Faces : 4 Figure (ii) Faces : 5
Edges : 6 Edges : 9
Vertices : 4 Vertices : 6

(A) (i) (ii)

(B) (i) (ii)

(C) (i) (ii)

(D) (i) (ii)

5. In a solid F=V=5, then determined the which type of solid it is

(A) square pyramid (B) triangular pyramid
(C) triangular prism (D) cuboid

6. Which of the following canot be true for a polyhedron?

(A) V = 6, F = 4, E = 8 (B) V = 4, F = 4, E = 6
(C) V = 4, F = 4, E = 4 (D) V = 8, F = 6, E = 12

7. In a blueprint of a room, an architect has shown the height of the room as 33 cm. if the
actual height of the room is 330 cm, then the scale used by her is
(A) 1:11 (B) 1:10 (C) 1:100 (D) 1:318

8. Which of the following is a regular polyhedron?

(A) cuboid (B) triangular prism (C)cube (D) square prism

Direction:(For Q.no. 9 and 10)

9. The diagram given shows a three-dimensional object made of 11 identical cubes.

Which of the following best represents the top view of this three-dimensional object?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

10. Find the no of the cubes

(A) 8 (B) 9 (C)10 (D) 11

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. How many plane symmetry does a regular hexagonal prism ?
(A) 6 (B) 9 (C) 12 (D) 18

12. How many plane symmetry does a regular tetrahedron have ?

(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 9

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)
1. The shapes formed by rotating a right triangle about its height is [NSTSE - 2009]
(A) Cuboid (B) Cone (C) Cylinder (D) Sphere

2. Which of the following does not have a vertex ? [NSTSE - 2010]

(A) Cube (B) Pyramid (C) Cylinder (D) Cone

3. Which two quadrilaterals have exactly one line of symmetry? [IMO - 2010]

(A) (1) and (5) (B) (2) and (3) (C) (1) and (4) (D) (2) and (5)

4. A polyhedron has 11 faces and 18 vertices. Find the number of edges ? [NSTSE - 2012]
(A) 15 (B) 27 (C) 33 (D) 21

5. The adjoining Figure shows 3 different views of a three-dimensional figure constructed

from cubes. Which could be the correct option? [IMO - 2012]

(A) (B) (C) (D)

6. Which of the following pictures appears to have rotational symmetry? [IMO - 2012]

(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these

7. The number of edges of the given figure is [IMO - 2012]

(A) 18 (B) 12 (C) 14 (D) 16

8. Which of the following solids can be formed from the net in the given figure ?
[NSTSE - 2013]

(A) (B) (C) (D)

9. How many faces does the solid in the given figure have ? [NSTSE - 2013]

(A) 5 (B) 7 (C) 8 (D) 9

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. A B C A B A A A D D

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. Pyramid 2. 6 3. 2 4. Euler’s Formula
5. 12 6. A square 7. 3 8. Triangle
9. 12
TRUE / FALSE
1. False 2. True 3. True 4. True
5. True
MATCH THE COLUMN
1. (A) – r, (B) – t, (C) – s, (D) – q, (E) – p
SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)
SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. Plane figures  Rhombus, Hexagon, Trapezium, Circle, Octagon
Solid figures  Cylinder, Sphere, Square Prism, Pyramid, Cube.
2. Hexagonal pyramid
3. (i) Cuboid (ii) Triangular pyramid
(iii) Hexagonal prism (iv) Pentagonal pyramid.
4. (i) Dice, Rubik’ Cube (ii) Bricks, Book (iii) Pipe, Cell
(iv) B’day cap, Softy ice cream (v) Ball, Lunch Box
(vi) Toblerone Chocolate rapper, Trekking tents
5. 12
SHORT ANSWER TYPE
6. 18 7. No, it can be cuboid also.
8. (i) yes, triangular pyramid (ii) yes, square pyramid
5 kg
9. (i)
Top view Front view Side view

(ii)
Front view Side view
Top view

LONG ANSWER TYPE

10. (i) 8 (ii) 1 (iii) 4 (iv) 6
(v) 5

11. (i) cuboid (ii) cube (iii) cuboid (iv) sphere

(v) cylinder

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. B C C C A C B C D D C C

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Ans. B C D B A C A A D

15
CHAPTER

MENSURATION
TERMINOLOGIES
Area, perimeter, total surface area, volume/capacity, solid figures, cuboid, cube,
cylinder, base, height, lateral surface area, curved surface area, slant height,
rhombus, triangle, cone, sphere, polygon, hemisphere, trapezium.

INTRODUCTION
In previous classes, we have already studied the methods to find the perimeter, area of
different plane figures such as rectangle, square triangle etc. In this chapter we will learn to
find the areas of trapezium, rhombus and other quadrilaterals. We will also learn to find the
surface areas and volumes of solid figures such as cube, cylinder.

15.1 PLANE FIGURES

(a) Triangle
Let us review the formulas of area learned so far :
(i) Area of a rectangle = length × breadth
(ii) Area of a square = side × side or (side)2
1
(iii) Area of a triangle = × base × height
2
We have some other formulae for areas of some particular triangles.
3
Area of an equilateral triangle = (side)2
4
1 1
Area of an isosceles triangle = base (equal side)2  (base)2
2 4
1
Area of right angle triangle = × (product of two side other than hypotenuse)
2
(iv) Area of parallelogram = side × corresponding altitude
(v) Area of a circle = r2, where r is the radius of the circle
Illustration 15.1
The length and breadth of a rectangular field are in the ratio 3 : 2. If the area of the field is
3456 m2, find the cost of fencing the field at Rs 3.50 per metre.
Sol. Let the length and breadth of the rectangular field be 3x and 2x metres respectively. Then,
Area of the rectangular field = (3x × 2x) m2 = 6x2 m2.
Also, area of the rectangular field = 3456 m2
3456
6x2 = 3456  x2 =  x2 = 576  x= 576 = 24
6
Length = (3 × 24) m = 72 m, breadth = (2 × 24) m = 48 m
Perimeter of the field = 2 (length + breadth) = [2(72 + 48)]m = 240 m
Rate of fencing = Rs 3.50 per metre
Cost of fencing = Rs (240 × 3.50) = Rs 840.

Illustration 15.2
In figure, ABCD is a parallelogram, CM  AB and BL  AD. If AB = 16 cm, AD = 12 cm and
CM = 10cm, find BL.
D C

A B M
Sol. We have, base AB = 16 cm and altitude CM = 10 cm.
Area of parallelogram ABCD = Base × Altitude
= (16 × 10) cm2 = 160 cm2 ...(i)
Now, taking AD as the base, we have
Area of parallelogram ABCD = Base × Altitude
= (12 × BL) cm2 ...(ii)
From (i) and (ii), we have
12 × BL = 160
160
BL = = 13.33 cm
12
Illustration 15.3
The area of a triangle is equal to that of a square whose each side measures 60 metres.
Find the side of triangle whose corresponding altitude is 90 metres.
Sol. We have,
Area of the square = (60 × 60) m2 = 3600 m2
Area of the square = 3600 m2
Altitude of the triangle = 90 m
2  Area of square  2  3600 
Side of triangle = =   m = 80 m.
Corresponding altitude  90 
Illustration 15.4
The base of an isosceles triangle is 12 cm and its perimeter is 32 cm. Find its area.
Sol. We have, base = 12 cm and perimeter = 32 cm.
Let the length of each of the two equal sides be b cm. Then,
Perimeter = 32 cm
 2b + 12 = 32
 2b = 32 – 12
 2b = 20
 b = 10
Thus, we have
Base = 12 cm and equal side = 10 cm.
Area of the given triangle
1 1
= × Base × (Equal side)2   (Base)2
2 4
1 1
= × 12 (10)2   (12)2 cm2
2 4
= 6 × 100  36 cm2
=6× 64 = 6 × 8 cm2 = 48 cm2

(b) Rhombus

We know that rhombus is also a parallelogram having all sides equal therefore formula of
area of a || gm can also be used for area of a rhombus. i.e
Area of a rhombus = base × corresponding altitude.
Also we know that in rhombus both diagonals bisect each other at right angle, therefore we
can determine another formula for area of rhombus in terms of its diagonals.
If both diagonals of a rhombus are d1 and d2, then according to figure.

d1
d2

AC = d1
BD = d2
d1
Then OA =
2
d2
OB =
2
Area of rhombus
= 4 × Area of OAB
1  d1   d2 
=4×   
2  2 2 
1
=4× dd
8 1 2
1
= dd
2 1 2
1
Area of rhombus = d1d2
2
If length of side of a rhombus ABCD is ‘a’ then in OAB by pythagoras theorem we have :
2 2
 d1   d2 
a=    
 2  2 

Illustration 15.5
The area of a rhombus is 72 cm2. If its perimeter is 32cm, find its altitude.
Sol. We have, perimeter of the rhombus = 32 cm
4 (side) = 32 cm [ Perimeter = 4 (side)]
32
 Side = cm = 8 cm
4
Now, area of the rhombus = 72 cm2
 (Side × Altitude) = 72
 8 × Altitude = 72
72
 Altitude = cm = 9 cm.
8

Illustration 15.6
Find the area of a rhombus having each side equal to 13 cm and one of whose diagonals is
24 cm.
Sol. Let ABCD be the given rhombus whose diagonal intersects at O. Then,
AB = 13 cm and AC = 24 cm
Since, the diagonal of a rhombus bisect each other at right angles. Therefore AOB is right
1
triangle, right angled at O such that OA = AC = 12 cm and AB = 13 cm.
2
 By pythagoras theorem, we have
AB2 = OA2 + OB2
132 =122 + OB2
OB2 = 132 – 122
OB2 = 169 – 144 = 25
OB2 = 52
OB = 5 cm.
BD = 2 × OB = 2 × 5 cm = 10 cm.
1  1 
Hence, area of rhombus ABCD =   AC  BD  =   24  10  cm2 = 120 cm2
2  2 
Illustration 15.7
If the area of a rhombus be 48 cm2 and one of its diagonal is 12 cm, find its altitude.
Sol. Let ABCD be a rhombus of area 48 cm2 and diagonal BD = 12 cm.
Now, Area = 48 cm2
1
 × AC × BD = 48
2
1
 × AC × 12 = 48
2
 6 × AC = 48
48
 AC = cm = 8 cm
6
Since, the diagonal of a rhombus bisect each other at right angles.
1 1
OA = AC = 4 cm, OB = BD = 6 cm.
2 2
Also, AB2 = OA2 + OB2 [Using pythagoras theorem]
 AB2 = 42 + 62
 AB2 = 16 + 36  AB = 52
Since a rhombus is a parallelogram also,
Therefore, Area of rhombus = AB Altitude
48
 48 = 52 Altitude  Altitude = cm.
52
(c) Trapezium
A trapezium is a quadrilateral whose two opposite sides are parallel. In trapezium each of
two parallel sides is called a base of the trapezium and the distance between the two
parallel sides is called the height or altitude of the trapezium.
Let h be the height of the trapezium ABCD then DE = h and join AC, then, clearly AC
divides the trapezium into two triangles ABC & ACD.
Then area of trapezium ABCD = area of ABC + area of ACD
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -272
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
MENSURATION

1 1 1
= × AB × h + × DC × h = (AB + CD) × h
2 2 2
1
= (sum of parallel sides) height
2
1
= (sum of parallel sides) (distance between parallel sides)
2
Illustration 15.8
The area of a trapezium is 34 cm2 and the length of one of the parallel sides is 10 cm and
its height is 4 cm. Find the length of the other parallel side.
Sol. Let the length of side be a cm.
1
 (a + 10) × 4 = 34  2a + 20 = 34
2
2a = 34 – 20  2a = 14
 a = 7 cm.
Hence, length of the other parallel side is 7 cm.

Illustration 15.9
In figure ABCD is a quadrilateral in which AB || DC, DC = 7cm, AB = 13 cm, CB = 10 cm
and DA  AB. Find the area of the quadrilateral.
D 7 cm C
10
cm

B
A M
Sol. Let CM  AB
 MB = AB – AM = AB – DC = 13 – 7 or 6 cm
Now in right CMB
CM2 = CB2 – MB2 = 102 – 62 = 100 – 36 = 64
 CM = 64 or 8 cm
Since, AB || DC
 ABCD is a trapezium.
1 1
Area of ABCD = (AB + DC) × CM = (13 + 7) × 8 cm2 = 80 cm2
2 2
Illustration 15.10
A field ABCD is in the form of a trapezium in which AB II CD, AB = 83 m and CD = 40 m. A
triangular flower bed EBC is cut in such a way that the shape of the remaining field
becomes a parallelogram. If the area of the entire field 2337 m2, find the area of (a) flower
bed (b) remaining field.
Sol. From C draw CE II AD and CF  AB.
Now AECD is a parallelogram :
EB = AB – AE = 83 – 40 = 43 m.
Area of trapazium ABCD = 2337 m2
1
 (83 + 40) x CF = 2337
2
2337  2
CF = m = 38 m
123

1 1
(a) Area of EBC = × EB × CF = × 43 x 38 m2 = 817 m2.
2 2
 Area of flower bed = 817 m2
(b) Area of remaining field = 2337 m2 – 817 m2 = 1520 m2.

(d) Quadrilateral

We make use of the formula for the area of a triangle to find area of a quadrilateral. In the
given figure, AC is the diagonal of the quadrilateral ABCD, DEAC and BFAC. DE and BF
are called the offsets of the quadrilateral.
By joining A to C, the quadrilateral is divided into two triangles ABC and ACD.
D

C
F

E
B
1 1
 Area of quadrilatral ABCD = area of ABC + area of ACD = AC x BF + AC x DE
2 2
1
= AC × (BF + DE)
2
Hence, Area of a quadrilateral
1
=  diagonal  sum of the offsets
2
Illustration 15.11
Find the area of the quadrilateral PQRS, whose diagonal QS = 19.5 cm and the offsets on
it are 5.4 cm and 10.6 cm.
Sol.
R

Q
U

T
S P
Diagonal QS = 19.5 cm
Offsets = 5.4 cm and 10.6 cm
1
 Area of quadrilateral PQRS = (sum of offsets)  diagonal
2
1 1
= (5.4 + 10.6)  19.5 sq cm =  16  19.5 sq cm = 156 sq cm.
2 2

(e) Polygon
We split a quadrilateral into triangles and find its area. Similar method can be used to find
the area of a polygon. Observe the following for a pentagon :
By constructing two diagonal AC and AD the pentagon is divided into three parts. So, area
of ABCDE = area of ABC + area of ACD + area of AED.

A G D
F

E
By constructing one diagonal AD and two perpendicular BF and CG on it, pentagon
ABCDE is divided into four parts. So, area of ABCDE = area of AFB + area of trapezium
BFGC + area of right angled CGD + areaAED.
C
B

G D
F h

E
Illustration 15.12
In the given figure, the dimensions are given in meters. Find the area of this field.
D
56
R 52 C
40
60 Q
E 15
P 20
B
25

A
1
Sol. Area of APB = AP x PB
2
1
= × 25 x 20 m2
2
= 250 m2 ... (i)
1
Area of AQE = AQ x EQ
2
1
= × 40 × 60 m2 = 1200 m2 .... (ii)
2
1
Area of EQD = QD × EQ
2
1
= x 96 x 60 m2
2
= 2880 m2 ... (iii)
1
Area of trapezium PBCR = (PB + RC) x PR
2
1
= (20 + 52) x 55 m2
2
= 1980 m2 ... (iv)
1
Area of RCD = RD x RC
2
1
= × 56 × 52 m2
2
= 1456 m2 . ... (v)
Adding (i) to (v), we get
Area of polygon ABCDE = (250 + 1200 + 2880 + 1980 + 1456) m2 = 7766 m2.

Ask yourself

1. Find the number of 20 cm × 15 cm bricks required to have a 45 m × 20 m lane. Find the

cost of the bricks at the rate of Rs. 900 per thousand.
2. A square lawn, each side measuring 24 m has a 2 m wide path around and outside three
sides only. Find the area of the path.
3. The area of a trapezium is 800 cm2. If one of its parallel sides is 30 cm and height is 20 cm,
then find the other parallel side.
4. The diagonals of a rhombus are 9 cm and 14 cm. Find its area.
Answers

1. Rs. 27000 2. 152 m2 3. 50 cm 4. 63 cm2

15.2 SOLID FIGURES

You already know that the geometrical figures which have only two dimensions are called
the plane figures. A figure which have three dimensions as length, breadth and height is
not a plane figure and we can not draw such figures on black board exactly. These three
dimensional figures are called solids. For example Cube, cuboid, cylinder, cone, sphere
etc. are some three dimensional figures. In this section we will learn how we determine the
surface area of such solids.
(a) Definitions
(i) Cuboid : A solid bounded by six rectangular plane regions is called a cuboid. [Figure
below]
Q

N P

O A

C M
A cuboid has six faces OAQB, CMPN, OAMC , BQPN, PQAM and OCNB, eight vertices O,
P, Q, M, N, A, B and C, twelve edges : OA, BQ, NP, CM, PM, CN, OB, AQ, BN, PQ, MA
and OC and four diagonals OP, CQ, BM and AN.
(ii) Cube : A cuboid whose length, breadth and height are all equal is called a cube.
[Figure below].
Q B

N
P

M C

(iii) Right circular cylinder : A solid generated by the revolution of a rectangle about one
of its side is called a right circular cylinder. [Figure]
B D’

C C’
A
Let ABDC is a rectangle, keeping AB fixed we rotate CD around AB then we get a right
circular cylinder. Here AB is called axis of cylinder and CD is called generator of cylinder,
length of CD is called height and AC = AC’ is called radius of base of a cylinder.
(b) Surface area of cube, cuboid and cylinder
(i) Surface area of a cuboid : In earlier section, we have learned about a cuboid and a
cube. As we have seen that the surface of a cuboid consists of six rectangular faces. So,
the surface area of a cuboid is equal to the sum of the areas of its six rectangular faces. In
this section, we shall derive the formula for the surface area of a cuboid.
Consider a cuboid whose length is  cm, breadth b cm and height h cm as shown in
Figure.
C

A B
h
l
H G
b

E F
Area of face ABCD = Area of face EFGH = (×b) cm2
Area of face AEHD = Area of face BFGC = (b × h) cm2
Area of face ABFE = Area of faceDHGC = (× h)cm2
Total surface area of the cuboid
= Sum of the areas of all its six faces
= 2 (× b) + 2 (b × h) + 2(× h) cm2
= 2 (× b + b × h + × h) cm2
= 2 (b + bh + h) cm2
= 2 (length × breadth + breadth × height + length × height) cm2
For the calculation of surface area of a cuboid, the length, breadth and height must be
expressed in the same units.
(ii) Surface area of a cube : Since all the faces of a cube are squares of the same size i.e.
for a cube we have l = b = h. Thus, if  cm is the length of the edge of a cube, then
Surface area of the cube = 2 (×  + ×  + × )
2 × 32 = 62 = 6 (Edge)2
(iii) Lateral surface area of a cuboid and a cube : If out of the six faces of a cuboid, we
only find the sum of the areas of four faces leaving the bottom and top faces. This sum is
called the lateral surface area of the cuboid.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -277
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
MENSURATION

Consider a cuboid of length , breadth b and height h as shown in figure.

A B
h
l
H G
b

E F
Lateral surface of the cuboid,
= Area of face AEHD + Area of face BFGC
+ Area of face ABFE + Area of face DHGC
= 2 (b × h) + 2 (× h)
= 2 ( + b) × h
= 2 (Length + breadth) × Height
= perimeter of the base × Height
Lateral surface area of the cube
= 2 (×  + × )
= 2 (2 + 2) = 42 = 4 (Edge)2
(iv) Surface area of a right circular cylinder : Consider a right circular cylinder of radius r
and height h as shown in figure .

P’
P¢

h h

P P

r
O
P A

Each of the bases is a circle of radius r. Therefore, length of each circular edge is 2r.
Now, take a rectangular strip of paper of width h. Mark points P and P’ on the two circular
bases such that PP’ is parallel to the axis OO’. Place the edge of the strip of paper along
PP’ and hold it fast. Now, wrap the strip around the cylinder, till you reach PP’ again. Now,
cut off the strip along PP’. Remove the piece of the strip so cut off and spread it on a plane
surface. You will find that the strip is a rectangle of length 2r (equal to the length of the
circular edge) and breadth h.
 Area of the lateral surface of the cylinder
= Area of the rectangular strip of paper
= Area of a rectangular strip of length 2r and breadth h
= 2r × h square units
= 2rh square units.
Thus, for a cylinder of radius r and height h, we have,
Lateral (curved) surface area = 2rh sq. units
Each base surface area = r2 sq. units
Total surface area = (2rh + 2r2) sq. units = 2r (h + r) sq. units
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -278
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
MENSURATION

Illustration 15.13
Find the side of a cube whose surface area is 600 cm2.
Sol. Suface area of a cube = 6 (side)2
 6 (side)2 = 600
600
(Side)2 = = 100 = (10)2 Side = 10 cm
6
Hence, side of the cube = 10 cm.
Illustration 15.14
A suitcase which measures 80 cm x 48 cm x 24 cm is to be covered with tarpaulin cloth.
How many metres of tarpaulin of width 96 cm is required to cover 100 such suitcases.
Sol. Length of the suitcase = 80 cm
Breadth of the suitcase = 48 cm
Height of the suitcase = 24 cm
Surface area of the suitcase = 2(lb + lh + bh)
= 2(80 × 48 + 80 × 24 + 48 × 24) cm2
= 2(3840 + 1920 + 1152) cm2
= 13824 cm2
 Area of the cloth required = 13824 cm2
Breadth of the cloth = 96 cm
Length of the cloth = (13824 ÷ 96) = 144 cm.
 Cloth required to cover 100 suitcases = (144 x 100) cm = 144 m.
Illustration 15.15
Daniel is painting the walls and ceiling of a cuboidal hall with length, breadth and height 15
m, 10 m and 7 m respectively. From each can of paint 100 m2 of area is painted. How
many cans of paint will be required to paint the room ? Find the cost of paint if each can
costs Rs 238.
Sol. Length of the room = 15 m
Breadth of the room = 10 m
Height of the room = 7m
Area of 4 walls
= 2 (length + breadth) x height
= 2 (15 + 10) x 7 m2 = 350 m2
Area of ceiling = length x breadth = 15 x 10 = 150 m2
Total area to be painted = (350 + 150) m2 = 500 m2
500
No. of cans required = =5
100
Cost of 1 can = Rs 238
Cost of 5 cans = Rs 238 x 5 = Rs 1190.
Illustration 15.16
Hameed has built a cubical water tank with lid for his house, with each outer edge 1.5 m
long. He gets the outer surface of the tank excluding the base, covered with square tiles of
side 25 cm. Find how much he would spend for the tiles, if the cost of the tiles is Rs. 360
per dozen.
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -279
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
MENSURATION

Sol. Since hameed is getting the five outer faces of the tank covered with tiles, he would need
to know the surface area of the tank, to decide the number of tiles required.
Edge of the cubical tank = 1.5 m = 150 cm (= a)
So, Surface area of the tank = 5 × 150 × 150 cm2
Area of each square tile = side × side = 25 × 25 cm2
surface area of the tank 5  150  150
So, the number of tiles required = = = 180
area of each tile 25  25
Cost of 1 dozen tiles, i.e., cost of 12 tiles = Rs. 360
360
Therefore, cost of one tile = Rs. = Rs. 30
12
So, the cost of 180 tiles = 180 × Rs. 30 = Rs. 5400
Illustration 15.17
The diameter of a garden roller is 1.4m and it is 2 m long. How much area will it cover in 5
revolutions ?
(Use  = 22/7)
Sol. Clearly, Area covered = Curved surface × No. of rev.
1.4
Here, r = m = 0.7 m and h = 2 m.
2
Curved surface = 2rh m2 [as per the question Garden roller is in shape of a cylinder]
22
=2× × 0.7 × 2 = 8.8 m2
7
Hence, area covered = Curved surface × No. of revolutions = (8.8 × 5) m2 = 44 m2.

Illustration 15.18
It is required to make a closed cylindrical tank of height 1m and base diameter 140 cm from
a metal sheet. How many square metres of the metal sheet are required for the same ?
Sol. Here, diameter = 140 cm
140 70 7
Radius r = cm = 70 cm = m= m.
2 100 10
Height h = 1 m
22 7 17
Total surface area of the tank = 2 r (h + r) = 2 × × × = 7.48 m2
7 10 10
(c) Volumes of solid figures
Now you are familiar with solid figures and their surface areas. These figure lie in space,
i.e., in three dimensions. These figures can not lie entirely on a two dimensional plane. As
these figures lie in space so they cover a part of space, that part of space is called volume
of that solid figure. The volume of a solid is the amount of space enclosed by its bounding
surfaces. The unit of volume is cubic centimeter or cubic metre. The basic formula for
volume is area of base × height. In this section we will study how we determine the
volume of some solid figures like cube, cuboid, cylinder, cone, sphere etc.
(i) Volume of cuboid : Let there be a cuboid of length , breadth b and height h as in fig..
The area of the rectangular base ABCD of the cuboid is ( × b).

F G

A D
b

B C
If we take rectangular sheets congruent to the base ABCD of the cuboid and the sheets are
put one over the other as shown in fig.. Then, the height to which the sheets are stacked to
form the cuboid is h.
 Measure of the space occupied by the cuboid
= Area of a rectangular sheet × h = (l × b) h = lb h
Hence, Volume of the cuboid = l b h = Length × Breadth × Height
Also, Volume of the cuboid = Area of the base × Height

NOTE :
(i) While finding the volume of a cuboid, its length, breadth and height must be
expressed in the same units.
(ii) From the above formula, we obtain
Volume V
Length = i.e l =
Breadth  Height bh
Volume V
Breadth = i.e b =
Length  Height l h
Volume V
Height = i.e h = .
Length  Breadth l b

(ii) Volume of a cube : We know that a cube is special type of a cuboid whose length, breadth
and height are all equal.
So, the volume V of cube of edge l is given by
V = l×l×l=l3 = (Edge)3
(iii) Volume of a cylinder : Let us take circular sheets of radius r and stack them up vertically
as shown in figure .To form a right circular cylinder of height h. Then,
Volume of the cylinder
= Measure of the space occupied by the cylinder
= The area of each circular sheet × height = r2 h
Thus, Volume of right circular cylinder
= Area of the base × Height = r2 h

Illustration 15.19
Find the number of bricks, each measuring 25 cm × 12.5 cm × 7.5 cm required to construct
a wall 6 m long, 5m high and 0.5 m thick, while the cement and sand mixture occupies 1/20
of the volume of the wall.
Sol. We have
3 3
Volume of the wall = (6 × 5 × 0.5)m = 15 m
Volume occupied by the mixture
1  1  3 3
= × Volume of the wall =   15  m = 0.75 m
20  20 
3 3
Volume occupied by the bricks = (15 – 0.75) m = 14.25 m
 25 12.5 7.5  3  3  3
Volume of each brick =     m =  1280  m
 100 100 100   
So, required number of bricks
Volume occupied by the bricks 14.25 1280 1425 1280
= = =14.25 × = × = 6080 bricks.
Volume of each brick 3 /1280 3 100 3
Illustration 15.20
A cube of 9 cm edge is immersed completely in a rectangular vessel containing water. If
the dimensions of the base are 15 cm and 12 cm. Find the rise in water level in the vessel.
Sol. We have
Edge of the given cube = 9 cm.
3 3 3
 Volume of the cube = (9) cm = 729 cm
If the cube is immersed in the vessel, then the water level rises. Let the rise in water level
be x cm.
Clearly,
Volume of the cube = Volume of the water replaced by it.
Volume of the cube = Volume of a cuboid of dimension15cm × 12 cm × x cm
729 81
729 = 15 × 12 × x  x= cm  x= cm = 4.05 cm.
15  12 20
Illustration 15.21
A metallic sheet is of the rectangular shape with dimension 48 cm × 36 cm. From each one
of the corners, a square of 8 cm is cut off. An open box is made of the remaining sheet.
Find the volume of the box.
Sol. In order to make an open box, a square of side 8 cm is cut off from each of the four corners
and the flaps are folded up.

48cm
Thus, the box will have the following dimensions :
Length = (48 – 8 – 8) cm = 32 cm,
Breadth = (36 – 8 – 8) cm = 20 cm,
Height = 8 cm
3 3
 Volume of the box formed = (32 × 20 × 8) cm = 5120 cm
Illustration 15.22
A rectangular tank is 225 m by 162 m at the base. With what speed must water flow into it
through an aperture 60 cm by 45 cm that the level may be raised 20 cm in 5 hours ?
Sol. Since the level of water raised by 20 cm in 5 hours. Therefore,
 20  2
Volume of the water flowed in the tank in 5 hours =  225  162  m
 100 
 Volume of the water flowed in the tank in one hour
1  20  3 3
= 225  162  m = 1458 m ...(i)
5  100 
Area of the cross section of aperture
 60 45  2 27 3
=   m = 100 m
 100 100 
Let the speed of the water be x metres per hour. Then,
Volume of the water flowed in the tank in one hour
= (Area of cross section of aperture) × (Speed in metre per hour)
 27 
=  x ...(ii)
 100 
From (i) and (ii), we have,
27 1458  100
× x = 1458  x= m /hr  x = 5400 m/hr.
100 27
Illustration 15.23
A well is dug 16 m deep. Its radius is 1.75 m. The earth dug out is spread evenly on a
rectangular platform which is 11 m x 4 m. Find the height of the platform raised.
7
Sol. Radius of the well = 1.75 m = m
4
Depth of the well = 16 m
22 7 7
Volume of earth dug out =    16m3 = 154 m3
7 4 4
Now area of the base of the platform = 11m x 4 m = 44 m2
154 7 1
 Height of the platform raised = m= or 3 m.
44 2 2

Illustration 15.24
The rainfall recorded on 21 July was 10 cm. The rain water that fell on a roof 70 m long and
44 m wide was collected in a cylindrical tank of radius 14 m. Find :
(a) volume of rain water fell on the roof
(b) rise of water level in the tank due to rain water.
10
Sol. (a) Volume of rain water fell on the roof = 70 × 44 × m3 = 308 m3
100
(b) Volume of rain water collected in tank = 308 m3
Radius of the base of the tank = 14 m
Volume 308  7 1
Height of water raised = = m = m = 0.5 m
r 2 22  14  14 2
Illustration 15.25
The capacity of a closed cylindrical pipe of height 1 metre is 15.4 litres. How many square
metres of metal sheet would be needed to make it ?
Sol. Volume of the cylinder = Capacity of the cylinder = 15.4 litres = 15400 cm3
Height of the cylinder = 1 metre = 100 cm
22
r2h = 15400  × r2 x 100 = 15400
7
15400  7
r2 = = 49  r= 49 = 7   Radius = 7 cm
22  100

Total surface area of the cylinder

22
= 2rh + 2r2 = 2r (h + r) = 2 ×
× 7 (100 + 7) cm2
7
22 4708 2
=2× × 7 × 107 = 4708 cm2 = m = 0.4708 m2
7 10000

Ask yourself

1. A hall is 20 m long, 12 m wide and 7 m high. Its ceiling and four walls are to be plastered.
Find the area to be plastered.
2. Find the curved surface area and total surface area of a right circular cylinder whose height
 22 
is 20 cm and radius of base is 3.5 cm.    .
 7 

3. Find the height of a cylinder whose radius is 14 m and total surface area is 1932 m2.
4. Two cubes each of side 10 cm are placed together. Find the volume of the cuboid so
obtained.
5. The volume of a room is 300 m3. If the length is 10 m and the breadth is 5 m, what is its
height?
6. The radius of a right circular cylinder is 28 cm, its height is 50 cm. Find the volume of the
cylinder.
Answers
1. 688 m2 2. 440 cm2 , 517 cm2 3. 7.95 m 4. 2000 cm3
3
5. 6m 6. 123200 cm

Add your knowledge

(1) Cone :

(i) C.S.A. =  rl
(ii) T.S.A. = C.S.A. + base area =  rl + r2 = r (l + r)
1
(iii) Volume =  r2h Where, h = height
3
r = radius of base
  l = slant height
(2) Sphere :

4
T.S.A. = S.A. = 4  r2 Volume =  r3
3
(3) Hemisphere :

C.S.A. = 2 r2
T.S.A. = C.S.A. + base area
= 2r2 + r2
= 3r2
2
Volume =  r3
3

Concept Map

Summary
1. Area of a parallelogram = Base × Altitude (height) or A = b × h.

1 1
2. Area of a triangle = Base × Altitude (height) or A = b × h.
2 2

1 1
3. Area of a trapezium = (Sum of bases) × Altitude (height) or A = (b1 + b1) × h.
2 2

4. Circumference of a circle = 2 × (radius) or c = 2r.

5. Circumference of a circle =  × (diamter) or c = d.

6. Area of a circle =  × (radius)2 or A = r2.

7. Lateral or curved surface area of a right circular cylinder = 2 rh.

8. Total surface area of a right circular cylinder = 2 rh + 2r2 = 2r (h + r).

9. 1 l = 103 cm3, 1 ml = 1 cm3.

10. Volume of a right circular cylinder :

V = (Area of the base) × (Height) =  r2 h.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. Find the area is sq. cm of an isosceles triangle whose base is 16 cm and each equal side
is 9 cm :
(A) 800 17 (B) 24 3 (C) 81 16 (D) 8 17

2. The area of a rhombus is 119 cm2 and its perimeter is 56 cm. Find its altitude.
(A) 8 cm (B) 8.5 cm (C) 9 cm (D) 9.5 cm
3. The area of a rhombus is 24 cm2 and one of its diagonals is 8 cm. Its perimeter is :
(A) 20 cm (B) 24 cm (C) 40 cm (D) 4 cm
4. A field in the shape of a rhombus has the distances between pairs of opposite vertices as
14 m and 48 m. What is the cost of fencing the field at Rs. 20 per metre :
(A) Rs. 1800 (B) Rs. 1900 (C) Rs. 2000 (D) None of these

5. In figure, ABCD is a parallelogram, DL  AB and DM  BC. If AB = 18 cm, BC = 12 cm

and DM = 9.3 cm, find DL.
D C

A L B
(A) 6.2 m (B) 6.4 m (C) 6.6 m (D) 6.8 m
6. The adjacent sides of a parallelogram are 10 m and 8 m. If the distance between the longer
sides is 4 m, find the distance between the shorter sides.
(A) 2 m (B) 3 m (C) 4 m (D) 5m
7. The area of a trapezium is 440 sq cm. The lengths of the parallel sides are respectively 30
cm and 14 cm. Find the distance between them.
(A) 20 cm (B) 5 cm (C)14 cm (D) 10 cm
8. The area of a trapezium is 28 cm2 and one of its parallel sides is 6 cm. If the distance
between the parallel sides is 4 cm, then the other parallel side is :
(A) 4 cm (B) 7 cm (C) 8 cm (D) 6 cm
9. An orchard (trapezium) has the parallel sides of lengths 33 m and 12 m. The distance
between them is 24 m. How many fruit trees can be in the orchard, if each tree occupies 30
sq.m. of area :
(A) 17 (B) 18 (C) 19 (D) 20
10. The perimeters of two squares are 748 cm and 336 cm. Find the perimeter of a square
whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of these two squares :
(A) 810 cm (B) 815 cm (C) 820 cm (D) 825 cm
11. The edge of cube is 20 cm. How many small cubes of 5 cm edge can be formed from this
cube ?
(A) 4 (B) 32 (C) 64 (D) 100
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -287
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
MENSURATION

12. How many cubes of side 15 cm can be fitted into a box which measure 1.5m × 90cm ×
75cm?
(A) 120 (B) 300 (C) 140 (D) 100
13. The dimensions of a hall are 40 m, 25 m and 20m. If each person requires 200 cubic
metres. Then the number of persons who can be accommodated in the hall are :
(A) 120 (B) 150 (C) 140 (D) 100
3
14. The percentage increase in the surface area of a cube, when each side is increased to
2
times the original length is :
(A) 225 (B) 200 (C) 175 (D) 125
15. The radius of the cylinder whose lateral surface area is 704 cm2 and height 8 cm is :
(A) 6 cm (B) 4 cm (C) 8 cm (D) 14 cm
16. Vertical and horizontal cross sections of a right circular cylinder are always respectively.
(A) rectangle, square (B) rectangle, circle (C) square, circle (D) rectangle, ellipse
17. The volume of a cylinder is 3850 cubic cm. Find the height if the radius is 7 cm.
(A) 25 cm (B) 27 cm (C) 30 cm (D) 32 cm
18. Two cylinders of same volume have their heights in the ratio 1 : 3, find the ratio of their
radii.
(A) 3 : 1 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 5 : 2 (D) 2 : 5

19. If V and C stand respectively for volume and curved surface area of a cylinder with base
radius r, then :
(A) VC = (B) 2V = Cr (C) 2C = Vr (D) 2r = VC
20. The radius of a cylinder is doubled but its lateral surface area is unchanged. Then its height
must be :
(A) Doubled (B) Halved (C) Tripled (D) Constant

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 2.5 hectare = ____________ m2
2. 1 Sq. m = ____________ cm2
3. Perimeter of an isosceles right triangle of equal sides a cm each is _____________
4. Area of an equilateral triangle with perimeter 6a is __________

5. Perimeter of an equilateral triangle whose area is 4 3 cm2 is ___________

2  area
6. Base of triangle =

7. Diagonal of a square of side 2a is __________.

8. The perimeter of a square is 144 2 cm then Its area is _________.

9. Diagonal of a square of perimeter (4a + 20) cm is __________.

10. Diagonal of a rhombus are (x + y) and (x – y) the area of the rhombus is __________.

TRUE / FALSE
1. Area of a rectangle = Product of Adjacent sides
3 2
2. The area of an equilateral triangle with side 2a cm is a cm2
2
1
3. The area of a sector with sector angle 60° is th of the area of circle.
5
1
4. Area of an isosceles right triangle with hypotenuse 2 a is a2.
2
2  Area
5. Base of a triangle =
height

MATCH THE COLUMN

Column – I Column – II
(A) l and b remaining the same, h of a cuboid (p) volume become one-eighth
is doubled
(B) l, b and h of a cuboid is tripled (q) volume become 16 times
(C) edge ‘a’ of a cube halved (r) volume become two times
(D) edge ‘a’ of a cube one-fourth (s) surface area become 9 times
(E) r and h of a cylinder becomes one third (t) surface area becomes one-
ninth
1
(F) r remaining the same, h of a cylinder (u) surface area becomes
16
sixteen times
SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)
SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. Find the area of a rhombus, the lengths of whose diagonals are 16 cm and 24 cm
respectively.
2. (i) Calculate the area of quadrilateral. ABCD, given in fig. (i)
(ii) Calculate the area of trapezium. PQRS, given in fig. (ii).
S 6 cm R
D 17 cm C
17
m

cm
12 c

B
P 12 cm T 8 cm Q

(i) (ii)
3. In figure, ABCD is a trapezium in which AB || DC; AB = 7 cm; AD = BC = 5 cm and the
distance between AB and DC is 4 cm.
D L M C
5
m

cm 4 cm 4 cm
5c

7 cm B
Find the length of DC and hence, find the area of trapezium ABCD.

4. Calculate the area of the quadrilateral ABCD as shown in figure, given that BD = 42 cm,
AC = 28 cm, OD = 12 cm and ACBD.
D

C
O

5. Find the area of the shaded figure, where BAP = 90º & CDP = 90º.
R 25cm Q

10cm
A 25cm D
20cm

B 50cm C

6. The area of a triangle, whose base and the corresponding altitude are 15 cm and 7 cm, is
equal to a right triangle whose one of the sides containing the right angle is 10.5 cm. Find
the other side of this triangle.
7. The area of a trapezium is 384 cm2. Its parallel sides are in the ratio 3 : 5 and the
perpendicular distance between them is 12 cm. Find the length of each of the parallel
sides.

8. A rectangular sheet of paper 44 cm × 18 cm is rolled along its length and cylinder is

formed. Find the radius of the cylinder.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

9. The area of a trapezium is 720 cm2. The ratio of the parallel sides is 2 : 1. If the distance
between the parallel sides is 20 cm, find their lengths.

10. The parallel sides of a trapezium are 65 cm and 49 cm and each of the non-parallel sides
is 10 cm. Find the area of the trapezium.

11. The area of an isosceles trapezium is 168 sq metres. If the lengths of the parallel sides are
36 m and 20 m respectively, find the lengths of the non-parallel sides.

12. Find the area of the field ABCDEF shown in figure AP, BQ, DR and ES are perpendiculars
to FC.
D
E

P Q C
F S R
A
B

FC = 100 m, FP = 20 m, FS = 35 m, FQ = 55 m, FR = 80 m, AP = 30 m, BQ = 54 m, DR =
35 m and ES = 15 m.
13. A closed tank 12 m long, 9 m wide and 4 m deep is to be made. Determine the cost of iron
sheet used at the rate of Rs 5 per metre, sheet being 2 m wide.

14. A cylindrical pillar is 50 cm in diameter and 3.5 m in height. Find the cost of white washing
the curved surface of the pillar at the rate of Rs 12.50 per m2.

15. Find the volume of a cylinder, if radius of its base and height are 7 cm and 15 cm
respectively.

16. The circumference of the base of a cylinder is 132 cm and its height 25 cm, find the
volume.

17. A cylindrical vessel open at the top has a base diameter 21 cm and height 14 cm. Find the
cost of tin plating its inner part at the rate of Rs. 5 per 100 cm2.

18. The dimensions of a room are 9 × 8 × 6.5 metres. It has three windows of 1.5 m × 1 m and
one door of 2 m × 1.5 m. What will be the cost of white washing the walls and painting the
windows and doors, if the rate of white washing is Rs 5 per m2 and the rate of painting is
Rs. 12 per m2?

LONG ANSWER TYPE

19. Water flows into a tank at the rate of 2.5 litres per second. Calculate the time would take to
fill a tank with a rectangular base 75 cm by 100 cm to a height of 64 cm.

20. Water flows from a tank with a rectangular base measuring 80 cm by 70 cm into a tank with
a square base of side 60 cm. If the water in the first tank is 45 cm deep, how deep will it be
in the second tank ?

21. A pit 3 m x 2.4 m x 90 cm is dug. The earth dug out was evenly spread 12 m high on a 4 m
wide platform. Find the length of the platform.

22. An open box is made of a thin cardboard (negligible thickness of cardboard). It is 8 cm

long, 6 cm wide and 5 cm high. It is without a lid. Find the total surface area of the box.

23. Three cubes, each having an edge 4 cm, are joined together. Find the surface area of the
cuboid thus formed. Is this surface area equal to the sum of the surface areas of the three
separate cubes ?

24. The paint in a certain container is sufficient to paint 8.5 m2 surface. How many containers
of paint will be required to paint the walls of a hall room which is 12 m long, 5 m wide and
4.25 m high? Find the cost of paint if each container costs Rs 350.

25. The area of 4 walls of a room is 57.4 m2. If the room is 5 m long and 3.2 m wide, find the
height of the room.

1
26. A cube of metal whose each edge is 4 cm is melted to form a cylindrical wire of radius
11
cm. Find how many centimetre of wire will be obtained.

27. The radius of a roller is 49 cm and its length is 125 cm. How much area of a playground will
be levelled in 400 revolutions moving once over the ground?

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. The area of a rhombus is 72 cm2. If one of the diagonals is 18 cm long, find the length of
the other diagonal.
(A) 15 (B) 12 (C) 8 (D) 16

2. The area of the trapezium is 105 cm2 and its height is 7 cm. If one of the parallel sides is
longer than the other by 6 cm, find the two parallel sides.
(A) 12, 18 (B) 12, 16 (C) 14, 18 (D) 14, 16

3. The base of a solid cylinder of height 10 cm has radius 7 cm. Its total surface area is :
(A) 176 cm2 (B) 514 cm2 (C) 154 cm2 (D) 748 cm2

4. It is required to make a closed cylindrical tank of height 1 m and base diameter 140 cm
from a metal sheet. How many square metres of the metal sheet are required for the
same ?
(A) 7.6 m2 (B) 5.4 m2 (C) 6.8 m2 (D) 7.48 m2

5. Find the number of bricks, each measuring 25 cm × 12.5 cm × 7.5 cm required to construct
a wall 6 m long, 5m high and 0.5 m thick, while the cement and sand mixture occupies 1/20
of the volume of the wall.
(A) 6000 (B) 6080 (C) 6180 (D) 6200

6. A carpenter builds a hollow wooden box using wood that is 1 cm thick. How much wood
does he use in building a box whose shape is a cube with exterior dimensions of 5 cm on
each side ?
(A) 61 cm3 (B) 64 cm3 (C) 98 cm3 (D) 125 cm3

7. The cost of white washing the four walls of a room is Rs. 25. The cost of white-washing a
room twice in length, breadth and height will be :
(A) Rs. 50 (B) Rs. 75 (C) Rs. 100 (D) Rs. 200

8. The ratio of the height of a circular cylinder is to the diameter of its base is 1 : 2. Then the
ratio of the areas of its surface to the sum of the areas of its two ends is :
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 3

9. Savitri had to make a model of a cylindrical kaleidoscope for her science project. She
wanted to use chart paper to make the curved surface of the kaleidoscope. What would be
the area of chart paper required by her, if she wanted to make a kaleidoscope of length 25
22
cm with a 3.5 cm radius ? You may take  =
7
(A) 540 cm2 (B) 520 cm2 (C) 550 cm2 (D) 560 cm2

10. If the area of three adjacent faces of a cuboid is a, b and c. Then find its volume.
(A) abc (B) abc (C) a2 b2 c2 (D) a + b + c

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. The radius and height of a cone are in the ratio 4 : 3. The area of the base is 154 cm2. Find
the area of the curved surface.
(A) 192.5 cm2 (B) 195 cm2 (C) 190.5 cm2 (D) 185.5 cm2

12. A hemispherical dome of a building needs to be painted. If circumference of the base of the
dome is 44 m, find the cost of painting it, given the cost of painting is Rs 2 per 100 cm2.
(A) Rs 62600 (B) Rs 63000 (C) Rs 61000 (D) Rs 61600

13. The surface area of a sphere of radius 5 cm is five times the area of the curved surface of
a cone of radius 4 cm. Find the height of the cone.
(A) 3 cm (B) 2 cm (C) 4 cm (D) 5 cm

14. Three cubes with sides in the ratio 3 : 4 : 5 are melted to form a single cube whose
diagonal is 12 3 cm. The sides of the cubes are :
(A) 3 cm, 4 cm, 5 cm (B) 6 cm, 8 cm, 10 cm
(C) 9 cm, 12 cm, 15 cm (D) None of these

15. A right circular cone has for its base a circle having the same radius as a given sphere.
The volume of the cone is one-half that of the sphere. The ratio of the altitude of the cone
to the radius of its base is :
1 1 2 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
1 2 1 3

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

1. The area of a circle that is inscribed in a right triangle with sides of length 8 m, 15 m and
17 m is [NSTSE - 2009]
1
(A) 9 m2 (B) 11 m2 (C) 14 m2 (D) 10 m2
9

2. The figure shows a cuboid with a volume of 180 cm3, find p [NSTSE - 2009]

9cm
(p+3)cm
(A) 2 (B) 18 (C) 36 (D) 72

3. The radius of the cylinder whose lateral surface area is 704 cm2 and height 8 cm is
_______ [IMO - 2010]
(A) 6 cm (B) 4 cm (C) 8 cm (D) 14 cm
4. Which of the following expressions represents the distance around the triangle?
[IMO - 2010]

(A) 5x + 39 (B) 4x – 37 (C) 4x + 39 (D) 6x + 47

5. What are the lengths of the sides of a triangle that has a perimeter of 24 centimeters?
[IMO - 2010]
(A) 6cm, 6cm, 12cm (B) 7cm, 7cm, 10 cm
(C) 3cm, 8cm, 13cm (D) 4cm, 5cm, 15cm

6. Two flower beds in a park are similar rectangles of same width. The longest side of the
large flower bed is 24 cm long, and the longest side of the small flower bed is 8 cm. If L is
the area of the large flower bed and S is the area of the small flower bed, which equation is
true? [IMO - 2010]
1 1
(A) S = L - 16 (B) S = L + 18 (C) S  L (D) S  L
9 3
7. What would be the cost of laying carpet on a floor which has length and breadth in the
respective ratio of 32 : 21 and perimeter 212 feet, if the cost per square foot of laying
carpet is Rs.2.5? [IMO - 2011]
(A) Rs.6,720 (B) Rs.5,420 (C) Rs.7,390 (D) None of these

8. The total area of a circle and a rectangle is equal to 1166 sq. cm. The diameter of the circle
is 28 cm. What is the sum of the circumference of the circle and the perimeter of the
rectangle if the length of the rectangle is 25 cm? [IMO - 2011]
(A) 186 cm (B) 182 cm (C) 184 cm (D) 132 cm

9. A path of uniform width runs all around the inside of a rectangular field 116 metres by 68
metres and occupies 720 square metres. Find the width of the path. [IMO - 2011]
(A) 1 metre (B) 1.5 metres (C) 2 metres (D) 4 metres

10. The curved surface area of a cylindrical pillar is 264 m2 and its volume is 924 m3. The ratio
of its diameter to its height is [Aryabhatta - 2012]
(A) 3 : 7 (B) 7 : 3 (C) 6 : 7 (D) 7 : 6

11. Diagonal of a cube is 6 cm. Then its lateral surface area is [Aryabhatta - 2012]
(A) 6 6 cm2 (B) 36 cm2 (C) 12 cm2 (D) 8 cm2

12. If the height of a cone is halved and its radius is doubled, then its volume is increased by :
(A) 100% (B) 200% (C) 300% (D) 400%

13. Find the area of the field ABCDEFGA in which AL = 30 m, AM = 70 m, AN = 90 m, AO =

110 m, AE = 135 m, AB = 36 m, LG = 40 m, NF = 42 m, MC = 54 m, and OD = 46 m.
[IMO - 2012]

(A) 9010 m2 (B) 8000 m2 (C) 8670 m2 (D) 9730 m2

14. A rectangular picture 16 cm long and 10 cm wide. It has a 2 cm border around it as shown
in the figure. Calculate the area of the border, giving your answer in square millimetres.
[IMO - 2012]

(A) 1200 mm2 (B) 120 mm2 (C) 12000 mm2 (D) 120000 mm2
15. The length of longest pole that can be placed on the floor of a room is 10 m and the length
of the longest pole that can be placed in the room is 10 2 m. The height of the room is.
[IMO - 2012]
(A) 6 m (B) 7.5 m (C) 8 m (D) 10 m
16. The volume of a wall, 5 times as high as it is broad and 8 times as long as it is high, is
12.8 m3. The breadth of the wall is [IMO - 2012]
(A) 30 cm (B) 40 cm (C) 22.5 cm, (D) 25 cm
17. A swimming pool is 25 m long, 15 m broad and 5 m deep. Find the cost of cementing its
floor and the walls at the rate of Rs.10 per sq. metre. [IMO - 2012]
(A) Rs.3840 (B) Rs.7750 (C) Rs.6960 (D) None of these
18. A rectangular tank 25 cm long and 20 cm wide contains water to a depth of 5 cm. A metal
cube of side 10 cm is placed in the tank so that one face of the cube rests on the bottom of
the tank. Find how many litres of water must be poured into the tank so as to just cover the
cube? [IMO - 2012]
(A) 1 L (B) 1.5 L (C) .5 L (D) 2.5 L
19. A square sheet of paper is converted into a cylinder by rolling it along its length. The ratio
of the base radius to the side of the square is [Aryabhatta - 2013]
(A) 1 :  (B) 1 : 2 (C) 2 : 1 (D)  : 1
20. A rectangular tank has a capacity of 24 litre. If its length is twice its breadth and its height is
th
3
  its length, find its length. [NSTSE - 2013]
4
(A) 25 cm (B) 30 cm (C) 40 cm (D) 45 cm
21. A wooden cuboid is 24 cm by 30 cm by 36 cm. Cubes of equal sides are cut from all its
corners. The volume of the remaining block is 20088 cm3. What is the length of the edge of
each cube cut off from the cuboid ? [NSTSE - 2014]
(A) 6 cm (B) 9 cm (C) 1 cm (D) 7 cm
22. Each edge of a cube is increased by 50%. The percent of increase in the surface area of
the cube is
(A) 50 (B) 125 (C) 150 (D) 300
23. If the perimeter of the figure given is 57 cm, find the perimeter of the triangle in the figure
[NSTSE - 2014]

7p cm
5p cm

3p cm
(A) 30 cm (B) 45 cm (C) 39 cm (D) 3 cm

24. A room is in the form of a cuboid of measures 60 m × 40 m × 30 m. How many cuboidal

boxes can be stored in it if the volume of one box is 0.8 m3 ? [IOM - 2017]
(A) 75000 (B) 65000 (C) 60000 (D) 90000

25. The wheels of a car are 80 cm in diameter. How many complete revolutions does each
 22 
wheel will make in 8 minutes if car is travelling at a speed of 33 km/h? Take  
 7 

[IOM - 2017]
(A) 1600 (B) 1800 (C) 1750 (D) 1850

26. The rectangular hall of length ‘l’, width ‘b’ and height ‘h’ contains sufficient amount of air for
the number of people in the hall. If the volume of air contained in the hall is 260 cm3. Also l
+ b + h = 22 and if each side of the hall is 3 cm or more in length such that each length is in
whole number, then the largest possible area of a face of the hall is [IOM - 2017]

(A) 65 cm2 (B) 40 cm2 (C) 20 cm2 (D) 50 cm2

27. A thread goes 140 times around a wheel of radius 14 cm. If the radius of the wheel is
increased to 20 cm, then find the number of rounds the same thread will make around the
 22 
wheel. Take   [IOM - 2019]
 7 

(A) 94 (B) 96 (C) 98 (D) 57

28. A cuboid whose length is twice the breadth and whose breadth is half of its height. If the
length of the cuboid is 12 cm, then find the volume of the cuboid [IOM - 2019]
(A) 864 cm3 (B) 824 cm3 (C) 796 cm3 (D) 756 cm3

29. The curved surface area of a right circular cylinder of height 14 cm is 88cm2. The diameter
 22 
of its base is _______. Take   [IOM - 2019]
 7 

(A) 2.0 cm (B) 1.0 cm (C) 2.5 cm (D) 1.5 cm

30. Two cylinders of same volume have their radii in the ratio 3 : 4 . What will be the ratio of

their heights? [IOM - 2019]

(A) 16 : 3 (B) 3 : 4 (C) 9 : 16 (D) None of these

31. Consider the figure shown below :

Here PQRS is a kite and PO = OQ = OS and RO = 3 PO. If perimeter of the kite PQRS is
32 units then find the area of PQS [in unit2l [IOM - 2019]

(A) 32 – 16 5 (B) 48 – 16 5 (C) 32 – 8 5 (D) 48 – 8 5

32. The sum of the all sides of a rhombus is 32 3 cm. If one of the interior angles of the
rhombus is 120°, then find the area of the rhombus. [IOM - 2019]

(A) 48 3 cm2 (B) 96 3 cm2

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. D B A C A D A C B C C B D D D B A A B B

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 25000 2. 104 cm2 3. 2a + 2a 4. 3 a2

5. 12 cm 6. altitude 7. 2 2a 8. 2592 cm2

x2  y 2
9. (a + 5) 2 cm 10.
2
TRUE / FALSE
1. True 2. False 3. False 4. True
5. True

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. (A) – r, (B) – s, (C) – p, (D) – u , (E) – t, (F) – q

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. 192 cm2 2. (i) 114 cm2 (ii) 195 cm2
3. DC = 13 cm, Area = 40 cm2 4. 588 cm2 5. 625 m2
6. 10 cm 7. 24cm, 40 cm 8. 7 cm

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

9. 48 cm, 24cm 10. 342cm2 11. 10 cm each
12. 4722.5 m2 13. Rs 960 14. Rs. 68.75
15. 2310 cm3 16. 34650 cm3 17. Rs. 63.53
18. Rs. 1157.5
LONG ANSWER TYPE
19. 3 min.12 sec. 20. 70 cm 21. 13.5 cm
22. 188 cm2 23. 224 cm2,No 24. 17, Rs. 5950
25. 3.5 m 26. 2464 cm 27. 1540 m2

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. C A D D B C C A C B A D A B C

EXERCISE 03
SECTION -A (PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Ans. A A D C B D A B C B D A D C D B B
Ques. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Ans. C B C B B B D C A C A A A B B

16
CHAPTER

INTRODUCTION TO GRAPH

TERMINOLOGIES

Rectangular coordinates, origin, x-axis, y-axis, abscissa, ordinate, rectangular

axis, quadrants, linear graphs, x-coordinate, y-coordinate, ordered pair.

INTRODUCTION
In our daily routine, we all use, newspapers, TV channels and ratio etc. in order to get
information in the form of data and these datas can be represented graphically, i.e., on the
bar graph, pie chart, histograms etc. But before proceeding, we will discuss, how one can
locate the positions of a point and the plotting of point in the plane.

16.1 INTRODUCTION TO GRAPHS

(a) Co-ordinate System

In Cartesian co-ordinate system we represent any point by ordered pair (x,y), where x and
y are called X and Y co-ordinate of that point respectively.

Take two perpendicular lines X’OX and Y’OY intersecting at the point O. X’OX and Y’OY
are called the co-ordinate axes. X’OX is called the X-axis, Y’OY is called the Y-axis and O
is called the origin. Lines X’OX and Y’OY are sometimes also called rectangular axes.
Y

X' X
O

(b) Co-ordinates of a point

Let P be any point as shown in figure. Draw PL and PM perpendiculars on Y- axis and
X- axis, respectively. The length LP (or OM) is called the x - coordinate or the abscissa
of point P and MP is called the y-coordinate or the ordinate of point P. A point whose
abscissa is x and ordinate is y named as the point (x, y) or P (x, y).
Y

L
ordinate (= y)
X' X
O M
abscissa (= x)

The two lines X’OX and Y’OY divide the plane into four parts called quadrants. XOY,
YOX’, X’OY’ and Y’OX are, respectively, called the first, second, third and fourth
quadrants. The following table shows the signs of the coordinates of points situated in
different quadrants :

Quadrant X - coordinate Y - coordinate Point

First quadrant + + (+, +)

Second
– + (–, +)
quadrant
Third quadrant – – (–, –)

Fourth quadrant + – (+, –)

NOTE :
(i) Abscissa is the perpendicular distance of a point from y-axis.
(i.e., positive to the right of y-axis or negative to the left of y-axis)
(ii) Ordinate is positive above x-axis or negative below x-axis.
(iii) Abscissa of any point on y-axis is zero.
(iv) Ordinate of any point on x-axis is zero.
(v) Co-ordinates of the origin are (0,0).

(c) Points on Axis

If point P lies on X-axis then clearly its distance from X-axis will be zero, therefore we can
say that its Y-coordinate will be zero. Similarly if any point Q lies on Y-axis, then its
distance from Y-axis will be zero therefore we can say its X-coordinate will be zero.
Y

Q(0, y)

X' X
O P(x, 0)

(d) Plotting the Points

In order to plot the points in a plane, we may use the following algorithm.
Step I : Draw two mutually perpendicular lines on the graph paper, one horizontal and
other vertical.
Step II : Mark their intersection point as O (origin).
Step III : Choose a suitable scale on X-axis and Y-axis and mark the points on both the
axis.

Step IV : Obtain the coordinates of the point which is to be plotted. Let the point be P (a,b).
To plot this point start from the origin and units move along OX, OX’ according as ‘a’ is
positive or negative respectively. Suppose we arrive at point M. From point M move
vertically upward or downwardthrough units according as ‘b’ is positive or negative. The
point where we arrive finally is the required point P (a, b).
Illustration 16.1
Plot the point (3, 4) on a graph paper.
Sol. Let X’OX and Y’OY be the coordinate axis. Here given point is P (3,4), first we move 3
units along OX as 3 is positive then we arrive a point M. Now from M we move vertically
upward as 4 is positive. Then we arrive at P (3, 4).
Y

4 P(3, 4)
3

4 unit
2
1
3 unit
X' X
O
1 2 3 4
M

Illustration 16.2
Write the quadrants for the following points :
(i) A (3, 4) (ii) B (– 2, 3) (iii) C (– 5,– 2)
(iv) D (4, – 3) (v) E (– 5,– 5)
Sol. (i) Here both coordinates are positive therefore point A lies in st quadrant.
(ii) Here x is negative and y is positive therefore point B lies in IInd quadrant.
(iii) Here both coordinates are negative therefore point C lies in IIIrd quadrant.
(iv) Here x is positive and y is negative therefore point D lies in IVth quadrant.
(v) Here both coordinates are negative therefore point E lies in IIIrd quadrant.

(e) Plotting of Graphs

(i) Perimeter vs. side of a square

Let us find the perimeter of squares having sides 1 cm, 2 cm, 3 cm, 4 cm, 5 cm, 6 cm and
tabulate the result.

Side of square Perimeter of the square

(Side, perimeter)
(cm) (4xside) cm
1 4 (1,4)
2 8 (2,8)
3 12 (3,12)
4 16 (4,16)
5 20 (5,20)
6 24 (6,24)

Draw coordinate axes, Take side of the square along x-axis and perimeter of square along
y-axis. Then plot the point and joint them successively to obtain the required graph given
below.
20
16

perimeter
12
8
4

1 2 3 4 5 6
side of square

(ii) Area vs. side of a square : Let us find the area of squares having sides 1 cm, 2
cm, 3 cm, 4 cm, 5 cm, 6 cm and tabulate the result.
Side of square Area of square
(Side, area)
(cm) (side  side) cm2
1 1 (1, 1)
2 4 (2, 4)
3 9 (3, 9)
4 16 (4, 16)
5 25 (5, 25)
6 36 (6, 36)
Draw coordinate axis, Take side of the square along x-axis and perimeter of square along
y-axis. Then plot the point and joint them successively to obtain the required graph given
below.

(f) Reading of graphs

So far we have been plotting the points. We have also seen that when these points are
joined sometimes we get a line and sometimes we do not get a line. If the points when
joined together lie on a straight line, we get a graph called linear graph.
In this section, we shall learn in general the reading of linear graphs and then reading of
distance vs. time graphs.

(i) Let us plot the following points for the multiples of 4 and join them.

X 1 2 3 4
Y 4 8 12 16

We plot the points (1, 4), (2, 8), (3, 12), (4, 16) and then join them.
Now from the graph we can find 4  5 .
For that we locate number 5 on the x-axis and from there draw a perpendicular (go parallel
to y- axis) which touches the graph at P. From P we draw a line parallel to x-axis which
meets y-axis at the point marked 20.
Thus, 4  5 = 20.
Y
20 P
18

16 D(4,16)

13
C(3,12)
12

8 B(2,8)

4 A(1,4)

O 2 4 6 8 10 X

Now we solve a few examples on drawing and reading of linear graphs.

Illustration 16.3

The following table gives the body temperature in °F corresponding to °C. Draw graph
using this table and answer questions that follow :

Temperature (°C) 0 10 20
Temperature (°F) 32 50 68

(a) What will be the temperature in °F when it is 15° C ?

(b) What will be the temperature in °C when it is 86° F?
(c) How many °F is equivalent to 5° C ?
Sol. Draw coordinate axis. Let 2 small divisions on x-axis represent 1° C and 1 small division on
y-axis represent 1°F.
Plot the point (0, 32) (10, 50) and (20, 68) and join them. Produce the line.

100

70
(20,68)
60

Temperature (°F)
50
(10,50)
40
(0,32)
30

5 10 20 25 30 35 X
15
Temperature (°C)

(a) When temperature is 15°C, the corresponding temperature is 59°F.

(b) Temperature corresponding to 86°F is 30°C.
(c) 5°C = 41°F.
Illustration 16.4
The given graph describes the distances of a car from a city P at different times when it is
travelling from City P to City Q, which are 350 km apart. Study the graph and answer the
following :
(i) What information is given on the two axis ?
(ii) From where and when did the car begin its journey ?
(iii) How far did the car go in the first hour ?
(iv) How far did the car go during :
(a) 2nd hour ? (b) the 3rd hour ?
(v) Was the speed same during the first three hours ? How do you know it ?
(vi) Did the car stop for some duration at any place ? Justify your answer.
(vii) When did the car reach City Q ?

300
Distance from P(in km)

250

200

150

100

0
8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
a.m. a.m. a.m. a.m. noon. p.m. p.m. p.m.
Time
S = x is the first term of the quotient.

Sol. (i) The horizontal (x) axis shows the time. The vertical (y) axis shows the distance of the
car from City P.
(ii) The car started from City P at 8 a.m.
(iii) The car travelled 50 km during the first hour.
(iv) The distance covered by the car during
(a) The 2nd hour (i.e. from 9 am to 10 am) is 100 km (150 – 50)
(b) The 3rd hour (i.e. from 10 am to 11 am) is 50 km (200 – 150)
(v) From the answer to questions (iii) and (iv), we find that the speed of the car was not the
same all the time. (In fact the graph illustrate how the speed varied)
(vi) We find that car was 200 km away from city P when the time was 11 a.m. and also at
12 noon. This shows that the car did not travel during the interval 11 am. to 12 noon. The
horizontal line segment representing “travel” during this period is illustrative of this fact.
(vii) The car reached City Q at 2.30 pm.

Ask yourself

1. In which quadrants will the following points lie ?

 1 
(i) D (– 10, – 10) (ii) E (– 10, 10) (iii)   4 , 5 
 4 
2. Plot the following points on a graph paper :
(i) N (3, – 6) (ii) P (5, 13) (iii) Q (– 11, 6)
(iv) R (– 7, – 9)
3. Obtain the co-ordinates of the points shown in the figure below.
Y
3 D
2 F C
1 B A
0 X
1 2 3 4
4. (i) Plot the points (1, 0), (0, 1), (1, 2) on a graph paper.
(ii) Join the points plotted in part (i) above and write the figure you get.
5. Draw a graph of the values of the following formula : C = 3 N
It is a linear graph ?

6. Draw a graph for the given table

Time taken (in sec.) 0 1 2 3 4 5
Distance travelled (in m) 0 6 12 18 24 30
(i) Is it a linear graph ?
(ii) From the graph above, find the distance covered by the shuttle in 6 seconds and 8
seconds.
(iii) Using the graph find the time taken by the shuttle in convering a distance of 9 m
and 54 m.

7. Look at the following time-distance graph and answer the questions that follow the graph :
Y
54
48
42
36
30 (5,30)
24 (4,24)
18 (3,18)
12 (2,12)
6 (1,6)
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(i) What is the constant speed of the motion being represented by the graph ?
(ii) What is the speed of motion during the period from 3 sec to 5 sec ?
(iii) What is the speed of motion when it covers a distance of 30 m ?

Answers

1 (i) III quadrant (ii) II quadrant (iii) II quadrant

3. A( (3,1) B(1,1) C(2,2) D(4,3) F(0,2)

Add your knowledge

1. The distance between any point ‘P’, whose coordinates are (x, y) and origin ‘O’ is
PO = x2  y 2 .

Concept Map
Co-ordinate System

(1) Rectangular Co-ordinates

(2) Coordinates of a point
(3) Points on axis
(4) Plotting of points

Introduction to Graphs

Plotting of Graphs Reading of Graphs

Ex.
(1) Perimeter v/s side of a square
(1) Reading of distance v/s time graph
(2) Area v/s side of a square
(2) Reading of temperature graph

Summary
1. To locate the position of an object or a point in a plane, we required two perpendicular
lines. One of them is horizontal, and the other is vertical.

2. The plane is called the Cartesian, or coordinate plane and the lines are called the
coordinate axes.

3. The horizontal line is called the x-axis, and the vertical line is called the y-axis.

4. The coordinate axes divided the plane into four parts called quadrants.

5. The point of intersection of the axes is called the origin.

6. The distance of a point from the y-axis is called its x-coordinate, or abscissa, and the
distance of the point from the x-axis is called its y-coordinate, or ordinate.

7. If the abscissa of a point is x and the ordinate is y, then (x, y) are called the coordinates of
the point.

8. The coordinates of a point on the x-axis are of the form (x, 0) and that of the point on the
y-axis are (0, y).

9. The coordinates of the origin are (0, 0).

10. The coordinates of a point are of the form (+, +) in the first quadrant, (–, +) in the second
quadrant, (–, –) in the third quadrant and (+, –) in the fourth quadrant, where + denotes a
positive real number and – denotes a negative real number.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. The point where the two axes intersect is called :
(A) x - coordinate (B) Origin (C) y - coordinate (D) Vertical point
2. The y - coordinate in (0, 2), (3, 0) are :
(A) (0, 0) (B) (2, 3) (C) (2, 0) (D) (0, 2)
3. In which quadrant the sign of x coordinate and y coordinate of a point is same :
(A) I (B) III (C) (A) and (B) both (D) None of these
4. At origin, the x - coordinate & y - coordinate respectively are :
(A) (1, 1) (B) (0, 0) (C) (1, 0) (D) (0, 1)
5. In which of the following quadrants does the point (–3, –2) lie ?
(A) I (B) II (C) III (D) IV
Instructions (6 to 10) :
The following graph shows the temperature forecast and the actual temperature for each
day of a week.
Forecast Actual

25
Temperature(°C)

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

Days
6. On which days was the forecast temperature the same as the actual temperature ?
(A) Tuesday (B) Friday (C) Sunday (D) All of these
7. What was the maximum forecast temperature during the week ?
(A) 30°C (B) 35°C (C) 40°C (D) 45°C
8. What was the minimum actual temperature during the week ?
(A) 10°C (B) 15°C (C) 20°C (D) 25°C

9. On which day did the actual temperature differ the most from the forecast temperature ?
(A) Monday (B) Wednesday (C) Thursday (D) Friday

10. What was the average actual temperature during the week.
(A) 20°C (B) 22.5°C (C) 25°C (D) 27.5°C

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. The horizontal axis is called ______ axis.

2. The coordinates of a point on ______ axis are (0, y).

3. The coordinate of the origin are ______.

4. The abscissa of the point (– 4, 1) is ______.

5. The ordinate of a point on the x axis is ______.

6. If both abscissa and ordinate of a point are negative, it lies in the ______ quadrant.

TRUE / FALSE

1. The abscissa of a point on x axis may be a negative integer .

2. Coordinate axes are also called rectangular axes.

3. The coordinates of origin are (0, 0).

4. There are 5 quadrants.

5. In 4th quadrant x and y both co-ordinates are negative.

MATCH THE COLUMN

Column– I Column– II
(A) (3, –2) (p) on x axis
(B) (–9, 8) (q) origin
(C) (0, 0) (r) in 2nd quadrant
(D) (–6, –8) (s) on y axis
(E) (0, 4) (t) in 3rd quadrant
(F) (–5, 0) (u) in 4th quadrant

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. In which quadrants will the following points lie ?
(i) A (3,–5) (ii) B (– 2, – 5)
2. Find the coordinates of A ?

3. Plot (100, 150) on a graph.

4. Plot the points on graph :

(i) (3, 4) (ii) (2, -7) (iii) (-5, 2) (iv) (-4, -4)

5. (i) Plot the point (1, 1), (1, 4), (4, 4), (4, 1) on a graph paper.
(ii) Join the points plotted in (a) and write the figure you get.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. Plot the graph between Simple interest Vs Number of Years by taking Principal = Rs. 5000
and rate of interest = 10% p.a.

7. Plot the graph of Perimeter Vs. Length of Rectangle by taking breadth= 5 cm.

8. The following table gives the sum of the angles of a polygon in right angles and the number
of sides of the polygon. Plot the points on the graph, answer the questions that follow :
Number of sides (n) 3 4 6 10
Sum of the angles in right angles (r) 2 4 8 16
(i) What is the sum of the angles of a polygon of 5 sides?
(ii) What is the sum of the angles of a polygon of 12 sides?
(iii) How many sides has a polygon whose angles add up to 12 right angles ?
(iv) How many sides has a polygon whose angles add up to 1260° ?

LONG ANSWER TYPE

9. Different packets are weighed by a spring balance. The length of spring changes
proportionally with the weight of the packet. The following table gives the length of the
spring corresponding to the weight.
Weight (in kg) 0 5 10 15
Length of spring (in mm) 30 35 40 45

Draw the graph for the above table and from the graph, answer the following questions :
(i) What will be the length of the spring when a weight of 20 kg is hung ?
(ii) What will be the length of the spring when a weight of 35 kg is hung ?
(iii) If the length of the spring is 62 mm, what weight is hung ?

10. A scooterist calculated his average cost of running his scooter, which is given in the
following table :
Distance travelled (in km) 10 20 30 50
Cost (in Rs) 15 25 35 55
Draw the graph (distance, cost) and from the graph answer the following questions :
(i) What will be the cost if he drives 40 km ?
(ii) What will be the cost if he drives 53 km ?
(iii) If he spends Rs 44, how far has he travelled ?

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. The distance of the point (3, 5) from X-axis is :

(A) 34 (B) 3 (C) 5 (D) None of these

2. Ordinate of a point is negative in :

(A) III and IV quadrant (B) III quadrant only
(C) II and III quadrant (D) IV quadrant only

3. If (2a–4, 3a–9) lie on Y axis then find the value of a

(A)1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

4. If (a–3, 5b–20) lie on origin then find the value of a+b

(A)3 (B) 4 (C) 7 (D) 10

5. If (a+b, 7a–2b–18) lie on origin then find the value of a

(A)2 (B) –2 (C) 3 (D) –3

Direction:(For Q.No. 6 to 8)
. The graph in figure respresents the path of a walker. From the graph answer the following
questions.
y

30
Distance (in km) ®

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X
Time (in hours)®

6. What was the average speed during the first part of the journey?
(A) 3 km/hr (B) 4km/hr (C) 5 km/hr (D) 6 km/hr
7. What was the speed oduring 3 hr to 4 hr?
(A) 0 km/hr (B) 1km/hr (C) 5 km/hr (D) 3 km/hr
8. Find the ratio of his average speed during 0 hr to 3 hr and 4 hr to 7 hr?
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 6 : 7 (C) 5 : 6 (D) 6 : 5

Direction:(For Q.No. 9 to 10)

The journey of a cyclist is shown in figure. Read this graph and answer the following
questions.
y

P
35

Distance home (in km) ®

9 a.m.10a.m.11a.m.12noon 1p.m. 2p.m. 3p.m. 4p.m. x

Time ®

9. During which hours the cyclist did take rest?

(A) 9 am to 11 am (B) 11 am to 12 noon
(C) 12 noon to 3 pm (D) 3 pm to 4 pm
10. What is his average speed on return journey?
1
(A) 17 km/hr (B) 15km/hr (C) 0 km/hr (D) 12 km/hr
2
SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)
11. The distance of a P(–3, 4) from origin is
(A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 5 (D) 6
12. There are 2 points P(3, 4) and Q(– 3, – 4). Find the distance between P and Q ?
(A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 10 (D) 11

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)
1. John made the given grid to show the location of some things in his garden.
Which ordered pair best represents the point on the grid labeled "Tree"? [IMO - 2010]

(A) (2,6) (B) (3,1) (C) (1,3) (D) None of these

Direction (Q.No. 2 - 3 )
Study the following Table carefully to answer the following questions. [IMO - 2011]
2. What are the average marks obtained by all the students in Math?

(A) 137 (B) 82 (C) 75 (D) 98

3. What is the respective ratio of marks obtained by Mansi in Science and English together to
the marks obtained by Rachna in the same subjects?
(A) 17:18 (B) 11:13 (C) 46 : 47 (D) 21: 23
4. How many cars were sold in the first quarter of the year? [IMO - 2012]

(A) 60 (B) 90 (C) 50 (D)100

5. The figure shows a triangle on a coordinate plane. Which of the following shows the
triangle translated 3 units to the right and 1 unit down? [IMO - 2012]

(A) (B) (C) (D)

6. Nita walks from her house 160 metres north and from there 630 metres west to visit her
friend. While coming back, she walked diagonally from her friend's house, back to her
home. What distance did she walk while returning? [IMO - 2012]
(A) 730 m (B) 800 m (C) 1250 m (D) 650 m

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. B C C B C D B B C B

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. x 2. y 3. (0, 0) 4. –4 5. 0
6. 3
TRUE / FALSE
1. True 2. True 3. True 4. False 5. False
MATCH THE COLUMN
1. (A) – u, (B) – r, (C) –q, (D) – t, (E) – s, (F) – p
SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)
SUBJECTIVE QUESTION
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1. (i) 4th (ii) 3rd 2. (5, 2)
SHORT ANSWER TYPE
8. (i) 6 right angles (ii) 20 right angles
(iii) 8 sides polygon (iv) 9 sides polygon
LONG ANSWER TYPE
9. (i) 50 mm (ii) 65 mm (iii) 32 Kg.
10. (i) Rs. 45 (ii) 58 km (iii) 39 km

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. C A B C A C A A B A C C

EXERCISE 03
SECTION -A (PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ans. C B C A B D

17
CHAPTER

DATA HANDLING

TERMINOLOGIES
Data, statistics, raw data, crude data, primary data, secondary data, frequency
distribution tally mark, range, upper limit, lower limit, class mark, class size, class
interval, bar graph, kink, pie chart, class width.

INTRODUCTION
In VII class, we have started the study of statistics with reading, interpretation and
construction of pictographs and bargraphs representing any given information or data. In
this chapter, we shall begin the study of statistics in a formal way we shall learn to
represent a given information or data into the form of an ungrouped or a grouped frequency
distribution table.
The present day society is essentially information oriented. In various fields, we need
information in the form of numerical figures, called data.
These data may related to the profit of company during last few years, the monthly wages
earned by workers in a factory, the expenditure in various sectors of a five year plan, the
marks obtained by the students of a class in a certain examination, etc.
Data : The word data means information or set of given facts in numerical figures.
Statistics: It is defined as the science of collection, presentation, analysis and
interpretation of numerical data.

17.1 TABULAR AND GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF DATA

On the basis of methods of collection, data can be divided into two categories.

(a) Primary data

Data which are collected for the first time by statistical investigator or with help of his
workers is called primary data. e.g. If an investigator wants to study the condition of the
students studying in a school then for this he collects some data like their monthly income,
expenditure, number of brothers, sisters, sources of income etc.
(b) Secondary data
These are the data already collected by a person or a society and these may be in
published or unpublished form.
Secondary data should be carefully used, since they are collected with a purpose different
from that of the investigator and may not be fully relevant to the investigation.
When the data is complied in the same form and order in which it is collected, it is known
as Raw Data. It is also called Crude data. For example, the marks obtained by 20
students of class VIII in Mathematics out of 10 marks are as follows:
7, 4, 9, 5, 8, 10,
6, 7, 9, 2, 0, 3,
7, 6, 2, 1, 9, 8,
3, 8,
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -316
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
DATA HANDLING

The raw data can be arranged in any one of the following ways :
(i) Social order or alphabetical order (ii) Descending order
The raw data when put in ascending or descending order of magnitude is called an array or
arranged data.
(c) Frequency Distribution
(i) Ungrouped Frequency Distribution : If the number of observations is large, then
arranging data in an array is a tedious job. So to make it easily understandable and clear,
we tabulate data in the form of a table which is called frequency distribution table.
Let the marks of 20 students in a test of mathematics out of 10 are given below and we
have to form a frequency distribution table :
6, 5, 9, 6, 6, 2, 5, 9, 9, 2, 5, 6, 5, 2, 9, 5, 5, 6, 2, 5
To form a frequency distribution table we use tally marks method.
To construct a frequency distribution table, first we prepare a table with the columns, first
for variable, 2nd for tally marks and third for frequency. We write all possible values of
variable in first column in ascending order. We take first observation in the raw data and
put a bar in the 2nd column opposite to it, then we take 2nd observation in the given raw
data and put a bar opposite to it. Continue this process till all the observation in given raw
data are exhausted. At last we count the number of bars in respect of each value of the
variable and place it in the third column.

Marks Obtained Tally Mark Frequency

2 IIII 4
5 7
6 5
9 IIII 4

Illustration 17.1
In a survey of 20 families, each family is found to have the following number of children :
1, 2, 2, 3, 2, 3, 3, 4, 1, 1, 4, 4, 2, 2, 3, 1, 5, 1, 1, 2
Make a frequency distribution table.
Sol. Arrange in ascending order.
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5.

Number of children Tally Marks No. of families

1 6

2 6

3 IIII 4

4 III 3

5 I 1
Total 20

Illustration 17.2
Construct frequency distribution table from the following scores :
15, 18, 16, 20, 25, 24, 25, 20, 16, 15, 18, 18, 16, 24, 15, 20, 28, 30, 27, 16, 24, 24, 20, 18,
28, 27, 25, 24, 25, 18, 18, 25, 20, 16, 15, 20, 27, 28, 29, 16.
Sol. Frequency distribution of scores

Scores Tally marks Frequency

15 |||| 4
16 |||| | 6
18 |||| | 6
20 |||| | 6
24 |||| 5
25 |||| 5
27 ||| 3
28 ||| 3
29 | 1
30 | 1

Total 40

(ii) Grouped Frequency Distribution Table :

Sometimes the given data is very large and the smallest and the greatest values differ
largely. In that case a lot of space is required and it is difficult to handle the data. To
overcome this difficulty we try to condense the data by forming groups of suitable size.
Such a distribution is called grouped frequency distribution and the data is called grouped
data.
There are no hard and fast rules to divide the data into groups by choosing suitable size.
The size and number of groups depend on the difference between the minimum and
maximum values, called range.

For example, the heights (correct to centimetres) of 40 children are given below:
58, 60, 63, 74, 82, 56, 72, 59, 67, 73, 80, 59, 67, 82, 76, 68, 71, 70, 69, 59, 66, 59, 64, 62,
73, 78, 76, 58, 60, 74 68, 67, 72, 77, 80, 69, 78, 62, 68, 73
The smallest height is 56 cm and the greatest height is 82 cm. The range is 26 cm. We can
have groups:
55 – 60, 60 – 65, 65 – 70, 70 – 75, 75 – 80 and 80 – 85. Here, 55 – 60 includes all children
whose heights are 55 cm and above but less than 60 cm. Where will we put the child who
is 60 cm tall ? Obviously, he will be put in 60 – 65 class. If someone is 59.5 cm tall, he will
be put in 55 - 60 class.
In class 55 – 60, 55 is called lower limit and 60 is called upper limit. The difference
between the upper limit and the lower limit of a class is called class size or width of the
class. The average of upper and lower limits is called class mark, e.g., the class mark of
55  60
55 – 60 is or 57.5.
2
Now we use the Tally Method and represent the data of Table, using classes 55 - 60, 60 -
65 etc. as below

Grouped Frequency Distributions of Heights

Class Interval Tally Marks Frequency

55 – 60 7

60 – 65 6

65 – 70 9

70 – 75 9

75 – 80 5

80 – 85 IIII 4
Total 40
Illustration 17.3
The marks obtained by 40 students of class VIII in an examination are given below :
18, 8, 12, 6, 8, 16, 12, 5, 23, 2, 16, 23, 2, 10, 12, 9, 7, 6, 5, 3, 5, 13, 21, 13, 15, 20, 24, 1, 7,
21, 16, 13, 18, 23, 7, 3, 18, 17, 16, 4.
Present the data in the form of a frequency distribution using the same class size, one such
class being 15 –20 (where 20 is not included).
Sol. The minimum and maximum marks in the given raw data are 1 and 24 respectively. It is
given that 15-20 is one of the class intervals and the class size is same. So, the classes of
equal size are 0–5, 5–10, 10–15, 15–20 and 20–25
Thus, the frequency distribution is as given below :
Frequency Distribution of Marks

11
7
9
7

Illustration 17.4
The weights in grams of 50 oranges picked at random from a consignment are as follows :
131, 113, 82, 75, 204, 81, 84, 118, 104, 110, 80, 107, 111, 141, 136, 123, 90, 78, 90, 115,
110, 98, 106, 99, 107, 84, 76, 186, 82, 100, 109, 128, 115, 107,115, 119, 93, 187, 139,
129, 130, 68, 195, 123, 125, 111, 92, 86, 70, 126
Present the data in the form of a frequency distribution using the same class size, one such
class being 60 –80 (where 80 is not included).
Sol. The lowest weight of orange = 68 gm
The highest weight of orange = 204 gm
One class interval = 60–80
Class size = 20
The classes can be 60–80, 80–100, 100–120, 120 – 140, 140 – 160, 160 – 180, 180 – 200,
200 – 220
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -319
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
DATA HANDLING

Frequency Distribution of Weights of Oranges

Tally marks Frequency

|||| 5
|||| |||| ||| 13
|||| |||| |||| || 17
|||| |||| 10
| 1
0
||| 3
| 1

Total 50

Illustration 17.5

Given below are the marks (out of 100) obtained by 20 students of a class in mathematics
in an annual examination :
23, 75, 56, 42, 70, 84, 92, 51, 40, 63, 87, 58, 35, 80, 14, 63, 49, 72, 66, 61
Arrange the above data in an ascending order and find
(i) The lowest marks obtained
(ii) The highest marks obtained
(iii) The range of the given data

Sol. Arranging the above data in an ascending order, we get

14, 23, 35, 40, 42, 49, 51, 56, 58, 61, 63, 63, 66, 70, 72, 75, 80, 84, 87, 92
From the above data, we make the following observations.
(i) Lowest marks obtained = 14
(ii) Highest marks obtained =92
(iii) Range of the given data = (92 – 14) = 78

(d) Graphical representation of data

In the previous section, we have studied how to arrange the given data in tabular form.
However, the tabular representation of data do not always prove to be very interesting to
the common man. One of the most appealing and convincing ways of presenting the data
is through pictures and graphs, because graphs or pictures, if drawn attractively, are eye
catching and make unwidely data easily intelligible. Moreover, graphs are good visual aids.
There are various methods of graphical representation of frequency distribution. A bar
graph is a pictorial representation of data in which bars of uniform width are drawn with
equal spacing between them on one axis (say, the x-axis), depicting the variable. The
values of variable are shown on the axis (say, the y-axis) and the heights of the bars
depend on the values of variable.

Illustration 17.6
In a particular section of Class VIII, 40 students were asked about the months of their birth
and the following graph was prepared for the data so obtained :

7
Number of Students 6
5
4
3
2

Fe b.

June
Mar.
Jan.

May.

Aug.

Sep.

Dec.
Apr.

Nov.
Oct.
July
Months of Birth
(i) How many students were born in the month of November ?
(ii) In which month were the maximum number of students born ?
(iii) In which month were the minimum number of students born ?
Sol. Note that the variable here is the ‘month of birth’, and the value of the variable is the
‘Number of students born’.
(i) 2 students were born in the month of November.
(ii) The maximum number of students were born in the month of September.
(iii) The minimum number of students were born in the month of June.
Illustration 17.7
A family with monthly income of Rs. 40,000 had planned the following expenditure per
month under various heads :
Heads Expenditure (in Rs. 1000)
Grocery 8
Rent 8
Education of children 12
Medicine 4
Fuel 4
Entertainment 2
Miscellaneous 2

Draw bar graph for the data above.

Sol.

(i) Bar graph for grouped data : We have already learnt how to draw bar graphs of
ungrouped data and have learnt to read such given bar graphs. In this section we will learn
to draw and interpret the bar graphs of grouped data. The bar graphs of grouped data are
graphs with no spacing between the bars. To draw bar graphs of grouped data we use the
following steps:
(a) Draw two perpendicular axes.
(b) Mark class boundaries on the horizontal axis.
(c) Mark frequencies on the vertical axis.
(d) Construct rectangles with the respective class intervals as the bases and the
corresponding frequencies as the heights. The areas of rectangles must be
proportional to the frequencies of their classes. Bar graphs of grouped data are also
called histogram.
NOTE :

(a) Choose a suitable scale on both the axes.

(b) Draw slanting line segments in each rectangle or colour each rectangle with a
distinct colour so that the bars look beautiful.

Illustration 17.8
The following bar graph shows the frequency distribution of daily earnings of 80 workers in
a factory:
Daily earnings of workers
30
25
Frequency

20
15
10
5

300 310 320 330 340 350 360

Earnings (in Rs)
Read the above bar graph and answer the following questions :
(a) How many workers are in the minimum earning group?
(b) In which earning group are the maximum workers?
(c) What is the size of the classes?
(d) How many workers get less than Rs 330?
(e) How many workers get Rs 340 or more?
Sol. From the above figure we see that :
(a) The minimum earning group is 350-360 rupees and the height of this class
corresponds to 5, i.e., 5 workers are in the maximum earning group.
(b) The highest rectangle corresponds to the maximum workers, i.e., 30 and they get
from 310 - 320 rupees.
(c) Size of the classes is 10.
(d) Workers who get less than Rs 330 = 25 + 30 + 20 = 75
(e) Workers who get Rs 340 or more = 15 + 5 = 20.

NOTE :
Note that there is a ' ' (Kink) before the first class interval 300 – 310 on the horizontal
axis. It means that the full distance 0 to 300 is not shown. In case the lower limit of the 1st
interval is 0, we start from origin.

Illustration 17.9
Draw a histogram of the following frequency distribution.

Class (Age in years) 0–5 5 – 10 10 –1 5 15 – 20

No. of students 72 103 50 25

Sol. Here frequency distribution is grouped and continuous and class intervals are also equal.
So mark the class intervals on the x-axis i.e., age in year (scale 1 cm = 5 year). Mark
frequency i.e., number of students (scale 1 cm = 25 students) on the y-axis.
Y
Frequ ency (No. of studen ts)

125 –
100 –
75 –
50 –

0 X
5 10 15 20
Class interval (Age in year)

(ii) Pie chart : So far we have read the interpretation and drawing of bar graphs. There is
another type of graph known as pie graph or pie chart which is drawn to represent a data.
A diagram used to represent statistical data by dividing a circle into sectors is known as pie
chart or pie graph.
Pie graphs are circular, so they are also called circle graphs. Each sector of a pie graph
shows a fraction of the total. It shows the relation of the part with the whole.
Constructing a pie chart
We follow the under mentioned steps to draw pie graphs (charts)
1. From the given data, we find the total of the frequencies.
2. For each variable, we calculate the angle of the sector (i.e. angle at the centre of
the circle). This angle is called central angle.
Frequency of the variable
Central angle for a variable =  360º
Totalof frequencies
3. We draw a circle of convenient radius.
4. We draw the sectors corresponding to the central angles calculated to step 2
above.
5. Write down the names of the variables and their corresponding central angles in the
sectors

Now we solve some examples below :

Illustration 17.10
The adjoining pie chart shows the pets kept by the people of a locality. Read the pie chart
and answer the following questions.

Fish Dog

Cat
Others

(a) Which pet is most popular?

(b) Which two pets are equally popular?
(c) 80 people were questioned? How many had a cat?
(d) What percentage of people like parrots?
Sol. (a) Since the sector for dogs is the largest, so dog is most popular.
(b) Parrots and fish.
(c) The sector for cats subtends an angle of 90° at the centre.
90º
  Number of people who keeps a cat =  80 = 20
360º
45º 1
(d) The sector for parrots subtends an angle of 45° at the centre so or of the
360º 8
total people like parrots.
 45º  1
  Requires percentage =   100  % = 12 %
 360º  2
Illustration 17.11
The following table shows the colours preferred by a group of people :

Colours Blue Green Red Yellow

No. of people 18 9 6 3

Represent the above data by a pie chart.

Frequency of the variable
Sol. We know that central angle for a variable =  360°
Total of frequencies
Total frequency = 18 + 9 + 6 + 3 = 36
18
Central angle for blue colour =  360° = 180°
36
9
Central angle for green colour =  360° = 90°
36
6
Central angle for red colour =  360° = 60°
36
3
Central angle for yellow colour =  360° = 30°
36
Now we draw a pie chart as shown in figure

Blue
180°

Yellow 60° 90°

Red Green

Ask yourself

1. The maximum daily temperature (in°C) of a city on 10 consecutive days are given below
32.4, 29.5, 26.3, 25.7, 23.4, 24.2, 22.4, 22.5, 22.8, 23.3
Find the range of the data.

2. The scores (out of 100) obtained by 33 students in a Mathematics test are :

69, 48, 84, 58, 84, 48, 73, 83, 48, 66, 58, 66, 64, 71, 64, 66, 69, 66, 83, 66, 83, 66, 69, 71,
81, 71, 73, 69, 66, 66, 64, 58, 64, 69, 69
Construct a frequency table using class intervals of equal width.

3. Pulse rate (per minute) of 30 persons were recorded as 61, 76, 72, 73, 71, 66, 78, 73, 68,
81, 78, 63, 72, 75, 80, 68, 75, 62, 71, 81, 73, 60, 79, 72, 73, 74, 71, 64, 76 and 71
Construct a frequency table using class intervals of equal width, one class interval being
60-65.

4. (i) What information is being given by the histogram ?

(ii) Which group contains maximum students ?
(iii) Which group have same marks ?
Y

30
30
25 25
25
Number of students

20
15 15
15
10
10
5 5

X
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Marks of Students

5. The following pie chart shows the monthly expenditure of a family on various items. If total
expenditure per month is Rs. 12000, answer the following questions :

Food
Rent
42° 129°

84°
Education 105°

Others

(i) How much amount is spent on rent ?

(ii) How much amount is spent on education ?
(iii) What is the ratio of expenses on food and education ?
Answers
1. 10
4. (ii) 60 – 70 (iii) 10 – 20 & 30 – 40 , 20 – 30 & 70 – 80 , 0 – 10 & 50 – 60
5. (i) Rs.1400 (ii) Rs. 2800 (iii) 43 : 28

Add your knowledge

1. Mean :
The mean of a number of observation is the sum of the values of all the observations
divided by the total number of observations. It is denoted by the symbol x , read as x bar.
Mean of raw data : If x1, x2, x3, ...... , xn are the n values (or observations) then, A.M.
(Arithmetic mean) is
n

_ x  x1  ....  xn
x i
x 1  i1
n n

2. Median :
Median of a distribution is the value of the variable which divides the distribution into two
equal parts.
Median of ungrouped data
(A) Arrange the data in ascending order.
(B) Count the no. of observations (Let there be ‘n’ observations)
th
 n  1
(C) If n is odd then median = value of   observation.
 2 
th th
n n 
(D) If n is even then median = value of mean of   observation and   1 observation.
2 2 
or
th th
N N 
 2  observation   2  1 observation
Median =    
2
3. Mode :
(i) Mode of ungrouped data (By inspection only) : Arrange the data in an array and then
count the frequencies of each variate. The variate having maximum frequency is the mode.

Concept Map

RAW DATA
DATA DATA

HANDLING ARRAY /
ARRANGED

REPRESENTATION OF DATA MEASURE OF CENTRAL TENDANCY

BAR
GRAPH
TABLE GRAPH

PIE MEAN MEDIAN MODE

CHART

FREQUENCY GROUP FREQUENCY

DISTRIBUTION DITRIBUTION TABLE
TABLE

Summary
1. Observations gathered initially are called raw data.

2. The difference between the highest and the lowest values of the observations in given data
is called the range.

3. In given data, the number of times a particular observation occurs is called its frequency.

4. A table showing the frequencies of various observations of data is called a frequency

distribution table or simply a frequency table.

5. When the number of observations is large, we make use of tally marks to count the
frequencies.

6. Tallies are usually marked in bunches of five for ease of counting.

7. When the list of observation is very large, we usually organise the data into groups called
classes or class intervals. The data so obtained is called grouped data or a grouped
frequency distribution.

8. The lower value of a class interval is called its lower class limit and the upper value of a
class interval is called its upper class limit.

9. The difference between the upper and lower values of a class interval is called its width or
size.

10. The mid-value of a class interval is called its class mark.

11. The frequency of a class interval is called its class frequency.

12. A histogram is a graphical representation of grouped data in which class intervals are taken
along the horizontal axis and frequencies along the vertical axis. For each class, a
rectangle is constructed with class interval as the base and its height is determined by the
corresponding frequency.

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. For the following table :

Marks Frequency

0-5 6
5-10 12
10-15 50
15-20 120
20-25 225

The upper limit of the class interval 15 – 20 is :

(A) 15 (B) 20 (C) 25 (D) 22

2. For the table given in question above, the lower limit of class interval 15–20 is :
(A) 16 (B) 20 (C) 15 (D) 17.5

Instructions (3 to 7)
The final marks in mathematics of 30 students are as follows :
53, 61, 48, 60, 78, 68, 55, 100, 67, 90 75, 88, 77, 37, 84, 58, 60, 48, 62, 56 44, 58, 52, 64,
98, 59, 70, 39, 50, 60
Now answer the following :

3. The highest score is :

(A) 98 (B) 95 (C) 99 (D) None of these

4. The lowest score is :

(A) 44 (B) 37 (C) 31 (D) 29

5. The range of data is :

(A) 61 (B) 62 (C) 63 (D) 64

6. If 40 is the pass marks how many have failed :

(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 5 (D) 7

7. How many students have scored 75 or more :

(A) 6 (B) 8 (C) 9 (D) 10

8. Following marks were obtained by 12 students in a mathematics test :

21, 20, 25, 5, 10, 15, 30, 12, 7, 16, 9, 22
The range of the marks is :
(A) 20 (B) 25 (C) 21 (D) 7

9. The tally marks given below show the distribution in the subjects preferred by a sample of
school children. What fraction of the sample preferred mathematics?
Mathematics
Physics
Chemistry
Biology
Sociology
4 1 25 8
(A) (B) (C) (D)
25 2 8 25

Directions (10 to 15) : The following bar graph shows the ages of teachers of a school:
14 Ages of teachers

10
No. of Teachers

8
6
4
2

25 31 37 43 49 55
Age (in years)

Read the above graph and select the correct answer from the gIven four alternative
answers (10 – 15).
10. The number of teachers who are 49 years and above is :
(A) 6 (B) 8 (C) 4 (D) 10
11. The number of teachers in the age group 37 – 43 is :
(A) 10 (B) 6 (C) 8 (D) 14
12. The number of teachers below 37 years is :
(A) 10 (B) 24 (C) 14 (D) 18
13. Total number of teachers in the school is :
(A) 42 (B) 32 (C) 40 (D) 38
14. What is the class size of the given graph.
(A) 25 (B) 55 (C) 30 (D) 6
15. In which class interval the number of teacher is maximum.
(A) 25–31 (B) 31–37 (C) 37–43 (D) 43–49
Directions (16 to 20) :
Graph given below shows the expenditure incurred in bringing out a book by a publisher.

Binding
charges 12% Cost of
paper 16%
Advertisement
Royalty 15%
c ha

charges 18%
rg e
M is 4 %
s
c.

16. What should be the central angle of the sector for the cost of the paper :
(A) 22.5º (B) 16º (C) 54.8º (D) 57.6º

17. If the cost of printing is Rs 17,500 the royalty is :

(A) Rs. 8,750 (B) Rs. 7, 500 (C) Rs. 3,150 (D) Rs. 6,300

18. If the miscellaneous charges are Rs 6,000 then, the advertisement charges are :
(A) Rs 90,000 (B) Rs 1,333.33 (C) Rs 27,000 (D) Rs 12,000

19. If 5500 copies are published miscellaneous expenditures amount to Rs. 1848 and
publisher’s profit is 25% then marked price of each copy is :
(A) Rs 8.40 (B) Rs 12.50 (C) Rs 10.50 (D) Rs 10

20. Royalty on the book is less than the advertisement charges by :

2
(A) 3% (B) 20% (C) 16 % (D) None of these
3

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. The class marks of the class interval 38-42 is _____

2. Range of data 120,118,103,115,101,131,128 is _____

3. The upper value of a class interval is ______

4. The information collected in unorganised form ____

5. Mean of 20, 40, 35, 42 and 45 is _____

TRUE / FALSE

1. The mean of the observations 7, 8, 9, 11 and 15 is 10.

2. If the range of a data is 9 and its highest value is 81, then its least value is 73.

3. The observation 20 is included in interval 20-30 and not in 10-20.

4. The upper limit of one class interval is always equal to the lower limit of next class interval.

5. The bars in bar graph are always drawn vertically.

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Match the cubes in column –I with their cube roots in column–II

Column–I Column–II
(A) Data (p) Upper value of class interval
(B) Frequency (q) Lower value of class interval
(C) Class size (r) Width of the class interval
(D) Class interval (s) Mid value of the class interval
(E) Class mark (t) Groups formed with equal width
(F) Upper limit (u) No. of times an entry occurs
(G) Lower limit (g) Information collected

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Given below are the heights (in cm) of 11 boys of a class :

146, 143, 148, 132, 128, 139, 140, 152, 154, 142, 149
Arrange the above data in an ascending order and find
(i) The height of the tallest boy
(ii) The height of the shortest boy
(iii) The range of the given data

2. Following are the marks obtained by 25 students of class VIII in a test (out of 25 marks) in
mathematics:
5, 18, 18, 2, 16, 13, 8, 17, 18, 17, 13, 18, 16, 8, 5, 13, 20, 8, 16, 8, 19, 13, 2, 18, 5
Find,
(i) The maximum marks obtained.
(ii) The minimum marks obtained.
(iii) The range.

3. The ages of 50 teachers working in a secondary school in a big city are as follows :

Age (in years) Number of teachers

25-30 4
30-35 5
35-40 10
40-45 15
45-50 8
50-55 5
55-60 1
Total Number of
50
teachers

(i) What is the class size ?

(ii) What is the lower limit of 40 – 45 ?
(iii) What is the upper limit of 55 – 60 ?
(iv) What is the class mark of the class 30 – 35 ?
(v) What is the frequency of class interval 35 – 40 ?

4. The following are the monthly rents (in rupees) of 40 shops.

45, 50, 60, 53, 55, 51, 32, 35, 40, 42, 80, 82, 65, 63, 62, 45, 50, 51, 32, 51, 82, 89, 35, 45,
80, 65, 63, 32, 55, 53, 45, 83, 80, 75, 74, 79, 71, 72, 75, 32.
Construct a grouped frequency table for the above data.

5. Represent the following data in the frequency distribution with class size 10 :
22, 11, 28, 15, 10, 7, 5, 21, 35, 42, 31, 29, 16, 24, 25, 12, 10, 18, 11, 14, 6, 3, 8, 11, 23, 25,
33, 45, 16, 49, 35, 14, 9, 22, 11, 15, 27, 30, 19, 8.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. The weights of new born babies (in kg) in a hospital on a particular day are as follows :
2.3, 2.2, 2.1, 2.7, 2.6, 3.0, 2.5, 2.9, 2.8, 3.1, 2.5, 2.8, 2.7, 2.9, 2.4
(i) Rearrange the weights in descending order.
(ii) Determine the highest weight.
(iii) Determine the lowest weight.
(iv) Determine the range.
(v) How many babies were born on that day ?
(vi) How many babies weight below 2.5 kg?
(vii) How many babies weight more than 2.8 kg
(viii) How many babies weight 2.8 kg ?

7. The following bar graph shows the number of runs scored by a cricket player in one-day
matches :
Runs scored in matches
12
10
No. of Matches

8
6
4
2

20 40 60 80 100
Runs scored
Read the above bar graph and answer the following questions:
(i) How many matches did he play ?
(ii) How many matches were played in the highest runs group ?
(iii) In how many matches did he score less than 40 runs ?
(iv) In how many matches did he score 60 - 80 runs ?

8. In one day, the sales (in rupees) of different items of a baker's shop are given below :

Item Sales (in rupees)

Ordinary breads 260
Cakes and Pastries 100
Biscuits 60
Fruit Breads 60

Draw a pie-chart representing the above data.

9. The main source of energy is used by each house in a street is listed below :

Source of Energy Electricity Solar Gas Oil

No. of houses 20 10 12 6

Represent the above data by a pie chart

LONG ANSWER TYPE

Directions (10 to 13) :

Ramesh spends Rs. 16,000 per month. His expenses on various items are represented by
the pie diagram along side. Read the pie diagram and answer the question given below it.

Misc.

-cation
Rent 81º

Edu-
36º
10. How much does Ramesh spend on Rent ?

11. What is the central angle for miscellaneous expenses ?

12. How much is spent on education ?

13. What is the ratio of expenses between food and rent ?
14. The following data gives the expenditure of a family on four main items :

Items Food Rent Clothing Education

Amount in (Rs.) 4500 1700 400 600

Represent the above data by a pie chart

15. Draw a histogram to represent the following data :

C.I. 40 - 60 60 - 80 80 - 100 100 - 120 120 - 140 140 - 160 160 - 180 180 - 200

Freq. 20 40 30 50 30 20 10 40

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Direction:(For Q no. 1 to 4)

B
90º
210º 60º
C

Rs. 900 is divided among A, B, C. Find

1. Amount received by A
(A) Rs.225 (B) Rs.250 (C) Rs.270 (D) Rs.290

2. How much % of total amount is received by C.

2 2 2 2
(A) 16 % (B) 12 % (C) 22 % (D) 19 %
3 3 3 3

3. How much percent more received by A then that of C

(A) 30% (B) 40% (C) 45% (D) 50%

4. Among the given ratio which ratio is maximum

(A) A : B (B) A : C (C) B : C (D) C : B

5. The students of a class who were passed in maths subject, when represented on a pie
diagram formed an angle which was 120º more then the sum of all the angles of a triangle,
then the number of passed students is -
2 4
(A) of the total students. (B) of the total students.
3 5
5 3
(C) of the total students. (D) of the total students.
6 4

Direction:(For Q no. 6 to 10)

Read the following graph carefully and answer the following questions :

6. Which state have rice to wheat ratio maximum.

(A) UP (B) MP (C) W.B (D) Haryana
7. Which state have rice to wheat ratio minimum.
(A) UP (B) Maharashtra (C) W.B (D) Haryana
8. What Percentage of rice produced by MP of total quantity of rice.
5 5 5 5
(A) 15 % (B) 12 % (C) 17 % (D) 19 %
33 33 33 33

9. What Percentage of wheat produced by UP of total quantity of wheat.

1 1 1 1
(A) 56 % (B) 52 % (C) 58 % (D) 50 %
4 4 4 4

10. By what percentage production of rice is more of Haryana as compared to Maharashtra

(A) 30% (B) 40% (C) 45% (D) 50%

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. If the arithmetic mean of 5, 7, 9, x is 9 then the value of x is :

(A) 11 (B) 15 (C) 18 (D) 16

12. The average of 15 numbers is 18. The average of first 8 is 19 and that last 8 is 17, then the
8th number is:
(A) 15 (B) 16 (C) 18 (D) 20

13. In an examination, 10 students scored the following marks in Mathematics 35, 19, 28, 32,
63, 02, 47, 31, 13, 98. Its range is :
(A) 96 (B) 02 (C) 98 (D) 50

14. Find the median of the following values : 37, 31, 42, 43, 46, 25, 39, 45, 32
(A) 31 (B) 37 (C) 39 (D) 45

15. The mode of the distribution 3, 5, 7, 4, 2, 1, 4, 3, 4 is :

(A) 4 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 5

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)

1. The mean of 9 observation is 13. The mean of the first 5 observations is 11 and the mean
of last 5 observations is 14, then 5th observation is [Aryabhatta-2005]
(A) 11 (B) 12 (C) 8 (D) 13

2. The data in increasing order is 40, 42, 45, 49, x, x + 2, 58, 62, 64, 68. [Aryabhatta-2008]
(i) Find the range of the data.
(ii) Find the value of x if the mean of the data is 53.
(iii) Find the value of x if the median of the data is 53.
3. Students at a local college were asked to many hours they slept last night. The adjoining
chart shows the data. A bar graph of this data will be made on a grid that is 20 units. What
scale would be most appropriate for the axis labelled "Number of Students"? [IMO - 2010]

(A) 1 unit = 1 students (B) 1 unit = 2 students

(C) 1 unit = 10 students (D) 1 unit = 28 students
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -336
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
DATA HANDLING

4. Of the three numbers, the first is twice the second and is half the third. If the average of
three numbers is 56, the three numbers in order are : [Aryabhatta-2011]
(A) 48, 24, 96 (B) 48, 36, 96 (C) 48, 12, 14 (D) 24, 12, 48

5. The class marks of a frequency distribution are given as follows : 15, 20, 25,.. The class
corresponding to the class mark 20 is [Aryabhatta-2012]
(A) 12.5 - 17.5 (B) 17.5 - 22.5 (C) 18.5 - 22.5 (D) 19.5 - 20.5
Direction (6 & 7) :
A bar diagram depicting the changes in the students strength of a college in four faculties
from 1990-91 to 1992-93 is shown. [IMO - 2012]

6. How many times was the total strength of the strength of Commerce students in 1991-92?
(A) 3 times (B) 4 times (C) 5 times (D) 6 times
7. How much percent was the increase in Science students in 1992-93 over 1990-91?
2
(A) 50% (B) 150% (C) 66 % (D) 75%
3

8. M being the mean of x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6, find the value of
(x1 – M) + (x2 – M) + (x3 – M) + (x4 – M) + (x5 – M) + (x6 – M) [Aryabhatta-2012]
(A) 1 (B) 0 (C) 6 M (D) M/6
Direction (Q.No. 9 & 10):
The Pie graph depicts the budget of a family 'X'. The total monthly income of the family is
Rs.3080, [IMO - 2012]

9. How many degrees should be there in the central angle of the sector for miscellaneous
expenses?
(A) 60 degrees (B) 55 degrees (C) 46 degrees (D) 36 degrees
10. How much total expenses are incurred on food, clothing and conveyance every month?
(A) Rs.1794 (B) Rs.1684 (C) Rs.1664 (D) Rs.1694

11. The pie-chart show the favourite sports of a group of students. [NSTSE-2013]

Lawn
Tennis
(18%)
Swimming
(5%)

Soccer
Table (32%)
Tennis
(28%)

If 34 students like hockey, calcualte the total number of students who like lawn tennis and
table tennis ?
(A) 92 (B) 70 (C) 40 (D) 100

12. The pie-chart shows the expenditure (in percentage) on various items and savings of a
family during a month.

House
rent
(10%)
Transport Food
(5%)

Others
(20%) Clothes
Savings
(10%)
(15%)

On which item was the expanditure the maximum ? [NSTSE-2014]

(A) Food (B) Clothes (C) Savings (D) Transport

13. The bar chart shows the number of cell phones sold by a shop on 5 days of a certain week.
The difference between the highest number and the lowest number of cell phones sold is 15.
24
21
18
15
12
9
6
3
Days
Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Find the number of cell phones sold on Thursday. [NSTSE-2015]

(A) 6 (B) 12 (C) 18 (D) 24

Direction for Q. 14-16 : Study the following pie-chart carefully to answer the questions that follow
Degree wise break-up of expenditure of a family in a month. [IOM - 2017]

14. If total amount spent in a month is Rs. 48600, then find the amount spent by the family on
Entertainment.
(A) Rs.4820 (B) Rs.6228 (C) Rs.5940 (D) Rs.5820
15. If the amount spent by the family on Groceries, Entertainment and Others together is Rs.
25920, then the amount spent on Investments is_______.
(A) Rs.5184 (B) Rs.6280 (C) Rs.5340 (D) Rs.6224
16. If the difference of the amount spent by the family on the Medicine and the amount spent
on others is Rs. 1500, then the amount spent on Medicine is______.
(A) Rs.8120 (B) Rs.9020 (C) Rs.9340 (D) Rs.9250

17. A batsman makes a score of 148 in his 29th innings and therefore his average increases
by 4. His average after 29 innings is_________. [IOM - 2017]
(A) 32 (B) 34 (C) 36 (D) 38
Direction for Q. No. 18 to 20: Study the following graph carefully and answer the questions given
below it : [IOM - 2019]
Number of students studying in various schools
from various subjects (Number in thousands)

18. What is the difference between the total number of students studying in school B and those
studying in school D ?
(A) 10400 (B) 10100 (C) 9860 (D) 9820

19. What is the respective ratio of the students from the subject Arts from school A and school
C together to the students from the same subject from school B and school D together ?
(A) 627 : 529 (B) 727 : 469 (C) 621 : 529 (D) None of these

20. The number of students from the subject science from school B are approximately what
percent of the total number of students studying in that school ?
(A) 24% (B) 28% (C) 32% (D) 36%

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B C D B C A B B D A C B A D B D B C C C

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. 40 2. 30 3. upper limit 4. raw data

5. 36.4

TRUE / FALSE

1. True 2. False 3. True 4. True

5. False

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. (A) – g, (B) – u, (C) – r, (D) – t, (E) – s, (F) – p, (G) – q

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. (i) 154 cm (ii) 128 cm. (iii) 26 cm

2. (i) 20 (ii) 2 (iii) 18

3. (i) 5 (ii) 40 (iii) 60 (iv) 32.5 (v) 10

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

6. (i) 3.1 , 3.0 , 2.9 , 2.9 , 2.8 , 2.8 , 2.7 , 2.7 , 2.6 , 2.5 , 2.5 , 2.4 , 2.3 , 2.2 , 2.1
(ii) 3.1 kg (iii) 2.1 kg (iv) 1 kg (v) 15 (vi) 4 (vii) 4
(viii) 2

7. (i) 23 (ii) 3 (iii) 8 (iv) 4

LONG ANSWER TYPE

10. Rs. 3600 11. 108º 12. Rs. 1600 13. 5:3

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. A A D C C C A A A D B C A C A

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS

1. (C) 2. (i) 28 (ii) 50 (iii) 52 3. (B)

4. (A) 5. (B) 6. (D) 7. (A) 8. (B)

9. (D) 10. (D) 11. (A) 12. (A) 13. (C)

14. (C) 15. (A) 16. (D) 17. (C) 18. (B)

19. (A) 20. (C)

18
CHAPTER

PROBABILITY

TERMINOLOGIES
Experiment, Deterministic, Random, Sample space, Event, Probability, Impossible
event, Sure event, Good chance, Poor chance, Outcomes, Impossible chance, Sure
changes, Probabilistic, Favourable, Coin, Die, Cards

INTRODUCTION
In everyday life, we come across statements such as
(1) It will probably rain today.
(2) Chances are high that the prices of diesel will go up.
(3) There is 50-50 chance of India winning a toss in today’s match.
The words ‘probably’, ‘chance’ etc. used in the above statements involve an elements of
uncertainty.
The uncertainty of “probably” can be measured numerically by means of “probability”in
many cases.
Though probability started with gambling, it has been used extensively in various fields
such as biological sciences, weather forecasting commerce etc.

18.1 PROBABILITY
(a) Definitions

The word experiment means an operation, which can produce well defined outcomes.
There are two types of experiment :
(i) Deterministic experiment (ii) Probabilistic or Random experiment
(i) Deterministic Experiment : Those experiment which when repeated under identical
conditions, produce the same results or outcome are known as deterministic experiment.
For example, Physics or Chemistry experiments performed under identical conditions.
(ii) Probabilistic or Random Experiment : In an experiment, when repeated under
identical conditions don’t produce the same outcomes every time. For example, in tossing
a coin, one is not sure that if a head or tail will be obtained. So it is a random experiment.
Sample space : The set of all possible out comes of a random experiment is called a
sample space associated with it and is generally denoted by S. For example, When a die
is rolled then S = { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 }.
Event : A subset of sample space associated with a random experiment is called an event.
For example, in rolling a die getting an even number is an event.
Favourable Event : Let S be a sample space associated with a random experiment and
A be an event associated with the random experiment. The elementary events belonging to
A are known as favourable events to the event A.

For example : In throwing a pair of dice, A is defined by “Getting 8 as the sum”. Then
following elementary events are favourable out comes : (2, 6), (3, 5), (4, 4), (5, 3), (6, 2).
So, there are 5 elementary events favourable to event A.
(b) Probability
If there are n elementary events associated with a random experiment and m of them are
favourable to an event A, then the probability of happening or occurrence of event A is
denoted by P(A).
Total number of favourableoutcomes m
Thus, P(A) = 
Total number of possible outcomes n
And 0  P(A)  1
If, P(A) = 0, then A is called impossible event
If, P(A) = 1, then A is called sure event
P(A) + P( A ) = 1
Where P(A) = probability of occurrence of A.
P( A ) = probability of non - occurrence of A.
The chances of happening of an event are classified as :
(i) Even chance : If the chances of happening and not happening of an event are same,
we say that the event has even chances of happening. For example, the chance of a
newly born baby to be a girl is even.
(ii) Sure (Certain) chance : If we throw a dice, there is a sure chance of getting one of the
numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. Such events are called sure events.
(iii) Impossible (No) chance : There is no chance that it will rain everyday in Delhi in one
year. Such events are called impossible events.
(iv) Good chance : If an event is more likely to happen than not to happen, it is said to
have good chance of happening.
(v) Poor chance : If an event is less likely to happen than not to happen, it is said to have
poor chance of happening.
Illustration 18.1
When a die is thrown, list the outcomes of getting :
(i) a prime number (ii) an even number
(iii) a number greater than 5 (iv) a number less than 3
Sol. Possible outcomes :1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
(i) Outcomes (a prime number) = 2, 3, 5
(ii) Outcomes (an even number) = 2, 4, 6
(iii) Outcomes (a number greater than 5) = 6
(iv) Outcomes (a number less than 3) = 1, 2
Illustration 18.2
A coin is tossed. What is the probability (chance) that head will come up ?
Sol. Possible outcome: Head, Tail
So, getting a head has 1 chance out of 2.
1
Probability of getting a head = .
2

Illustration 18.3
A die is thrown. What is the probability that the number 4 will appear on the upper face?
Sol. Possible outcomes:1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
But 4 has only one chance out of 6.
1
Probability of getting 4 = .
6
Illustration 18.4
A die is thrown. What is the probability that the number comes up is even ?
Sol. Possible outcomes : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Even numbers = 2, 4, 6
No.of evennumbers 3 1
Probability of getting even number = = = .
No.of possible outcomes 6 2

Illustration 18.5
A spinner as shown is spun 120 times. How many times do you expect the number 2 ?

4 1
3 2
Sol. When this spinner is spun one time, the possible outcomes are 1, 2, 3, 4.
1
Probability of 2 to come =
4
1
In 120 times, one can expect 4 to come = × 120 = 30 times.
4

Illustration 18.6
From a well shuffled pack of 52 cards, find the probability of getting :
(i) a king (ii) a red card (iii) a diamond (iv) face card
Sol. Number of possible outcomes 52.
(i) No. of King card = 4
4 1
Probability of getting king = = .
52 13
(ii) No. of red card = 26
26 1
Probability of getting red card = = .
52 2
(iii) No. of diamond card = 13
1 1
Probability of getting diamond card = = .
4 4
(iv) King, Queen and Jack are called face cards.
No. of face cards = 12
12 3
Probability of getting face cards = = .
52 13

A sk yourself

1. A coin is tossed 1000 times with the following frequencies :

Head : 455, Tail : 545
Compute the probability for each event.
2. The record of a weather station shows that out of the past 250 consecutive days, its
weather forecasts were correct 175 times.
(i) What is the probability that on a given day it was correct ?
(ii) What is the probability that it was not correct on a given day ?
3. In a cricket match, a batswoman hits a boundary 6 times out of 30 balls she plays. Find the
probability that she did not hit a boundary.
4. The letter of the word ‘HAPPY’ are written on similar cardboard. These cardboard are then
mixed and put upside down so that no one can see the letters. Ram takes one of the
cardboards. What is the probability that it has the letter ‘P’ on it.
5. Numbers 1 to 10 are written on 10 seperate slips (one number on one slip), kept in a box
and mixed up well. One slip is chosen from the box without looking into it. What is the
probability of :
(i) getting a number 7 (ii) not getting a number 6
(iii) getting a 1 digit number (iv) getting a square number
(v) getting a number at least 7 (vi) getting a number at most 3

Answers
91 109
1. P(head) = , P(tail) =
200 200
7
2. (i)
10
3
(ii)
10
4
3.
5

2
4.
5

1 9
5. (i) (ii)
10 10
9 3
(iii) (iv)
10 10
2 3
(v) (vi)
5 10

A dd t o Your K now ledge

1. When ‘n’ coins are tossed, then total number outcomes is equal to 2n.

2. When ‘n’ non-zero digits are given, then total number of n-digit numbers can be formed
(repetition is allowed) = nn.

3. When ‘n’ non-zero digits are given, then the total number of n-digit numbers can be formed
(repetition is not allowed).
= 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 ....... n.

Concept Map

Sample Space
PROBABILITY In Rolling a Dice
S = {1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 }

Probability of an event A = N o . of O u tco m es in fa v ou r o f A

EXPERIMENT T o ta lN o .o f po ssible ou tco m e

For Sure Event

Deterministic Random P(A) = 1
Experiment Experiment
0  P(A)  1

For Impossible Event

P(A) = 0

P(not A) 
= P A  1 – P A 

Summary

1. An event for an experiment is the collection of some outcomes of the experiment.

2. The empirical (or experimental) probability P(E) of an even E is given by

Number of trials in which E has happened
P(E) =
Total number of trials

3. The probability of an event lies between 0 and 1 (0 and 1 inclusive).

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. Which of the following is an experiment ?

(A) Tossing a coin (B) Rolling a single 6-sided die.
(C) Choosing a marble from a jar. (D) All of the above.

2. Which of the following is an outcome?

(A) Rolling a pair of dice. (B) Landing on red.
(C) Choosing 2 marbles from a jar. (D) None of the above

3. Which of the following experiments does not have equally likely outcomes ?
(A) Choose a number at random from 1 to 7
(B) Toss a coin
(C) Choose a letter at random from the word SCHOOL.
(D) None of the above

4. What is the probability of choosing a vowel from the alphabet ?

21 5 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of the above
26 26 21
5. A number from 1 to 11 is chosen at random. What is the probability of choosing an odd
number ?
1 5 6
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of the above
11 11 11

6. A number is selected from numbers 1 to 27. The probability that it is prime is :

2 1 1 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 6 3 9

7. In a cricket match, a bats woman hits a boundary 6 times out of 30 balls she plays. Find
the probability that she did not hit a boundary.
(A) 0.8 (B) 0.6 (C) 0.5 (D) 0.2

8. A bag contains three green marbles, four blue marbles, and two orange marbles.
If a marble is picked at random, then the probability that it is not an orange marble is :
1 1 4 7
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 3 9 9

9. If P(E) = 0.05, then P(not E) =

(A) – 0.05 (B) 0.5 (C) 0.9 (D) 0.95

10. A bulb is taken out at random from a box of 600 electric bulbs that contains 12 defective
bulbs. Then the probability of a non-defective bulb is :
(A) 0.02 (B) 0.98 (C) 0.50 (D) None

FILL IN THE BLANKS

1. The probability of getting two heads when two coins are tossed simultaneously is _____

2. The probability of drawing a red card from a well shuffled deck of 52 playng cards is ____

3. For an unbiased coin, probability of getting a tail is _____

4. If a die is rolled, the probability of getting an even prime numbers is ______

5. The maximum value of probablity of an event is ____

6. Probablity of getting a prime number when a die is rolled is ________

7. Probablity that a light will glow when its switch is turned on is _______

TRUE / FALSE

1. Probability of an event can never be negative.

1
2. The probability of getting an even number when a die is rolled is .
2

3. Drawing a card from a well shuffled deck of 52 cards is an event.

4. Probability is always greater than 1.

5
5. Probability of getting a natural number when a die is rolled is .
6

MATCH THE COLUMN

1. Column – I Column–II
1
(A) Getting a head when a coin is tossed (p)
3
1
(B) Getting a natural number when a die is thrown (q)
2

(C) Getting a king from a well shuffled deck of (r) 1

52 playing cards
1
(D) Getting a number greater than 6 when (s)
13
a die is thrown.
(E) Getting a composit number when a die is thrown (t) 0

2. When a pair of coins is tossed the probablity of getting:

Column – I Column – II
(A) different faces on the coins (p) 1/4
(B) at most 1 head (q) 1
(C) a head or a tail on at least one coin (r) 1/2
(D) no heads (s) 3/4

SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)

SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE

1. Find the probability of :

(i) Coming of january after december. (ii) Your birthday falling on tuesday.
(iii) 2017 to be a leap year. (iv) a red rose having red colour

2. If a fair coin is tossed, what is the probablity of getting a head ?

3. A die is thrown. Find the probability of

(i) prime number (ii) multiple of 2 or 3 (iii) a number greater than 3

SHORT ANSWER TYPE

4. A bag contains 5 black, 4 white, 7 red and 2 green balls. If a single ball is chosen at
random from the bag, what is the probability of choosing
(i) a black ball (ii) not a white ball (iii) a red or green ball

5. From a well shuffled pack of 52 cards, find the probability of getting :

(i) Queen of red colour (ii) Jack (iii) King or Queen (iv) Not king

6. A die is thrown. What is the probability that the number 6 will appear on the upper face ?

7. The probability that a vowel selected at random in english language is an ‘i’ is

8. Two coins are tossed simultaneously. Find the probability of getting

(i) two heads (ii) at least one head (iii) no head

LONG ANSWER TYPE

9. A spinner as shown is spun 60 times. How many times do you expect the number 3 ?

10. The letter of the word ‘MATHEMATICS’ are written on similar cardboard. These cardboard
are then mixed and put upside down so that no one can see the letters. Ram takes one of
the cardboards. What is the probability that it is a vowel.

11. A jar contains 72 marbles each of which is red, black or yellow. The probability of selecting
1 1
a yellow marble is and the probability of selecting a black marble is . How many red
6 2
marble does the jar contains. Also find the probability of selecting a red marble.

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. The probability of guessing the correct answer to a certain question is x/2. If the probability
of not guessing the correct answer to this question is 2/3, then x equals :
(A) 3 (B) 2/3 (C) 1/3 (D) 2

2. In a2 – b2 trials of a ramdom experiment, if an event A happens a + b times then the

probability of happening of event A is given by :
1 1
(A) a – b (B) (C) a + b (D)
ab ab

3. A card is drawn from a deck of 52 cards. The event E is that card is not an ace of hearts.
The number of outcomes favourable to E is :
(A) 4 (B) 13 (C) 48 (D) 51

4. Some one is asked to choose a number from 1 to 100. The probability of its being a prime
number is :
1 6 1 13
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 25 4 50

5. If a card is drawn from a pack of cards. The probability of getting black ace is :
1 1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
52 26 13 4

6. A letter of English alphabet is chosen at random. The probability that it is a letter of the
word ‘RANDOM’ is :
11 3 9 4
(A) (B) (C) (D)
26 13 26 13

7. The probability that a non-leap year has 53 sundays is

2 5 6 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
7 7 7 7

8. In a single throw of a dice, the probability of getting a multiple of 2.

1 1 1 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 6 3

9. A bag contains 50 coins and each coin is marked from 51 to 100. One coin is picked at
random. The probability that the number on the coin is not a prime number is
1 3 2 4
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 5 5 5
3
10. A coin is tossed 1000 times, if the probability of getting a tail is , how many times head
8
is obtained
(A) 525 (B) 375 (C) 625 (D) 725

SECTION -B (TECHIE STUFF)

11. 2 coins are tossed simultaneously. Find the probability of getting atleast 1 head ?
3 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) 1
4 4 2

12. Using ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’, ‘4’ four digit numbers are formed, find out the probability that the number
formed is even? (Repittion is not allowed)
1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these
4 2 8

13. Using digits ‘1’, ‘3’, ‘5’, 3 digit numbers are formed, find the probability that the number so
formed is divisible by 5 ? (Repittion is not allowed)
1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these
6 3 2

EXERCISE 03
(PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS)
1. In a simultaneous throw of two dice, what is the probability of getting a total of 7?
(IMO-2011)
1 1 2 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
6 4 3 4

2. A spinner consists of six equal regions as shown. If Mohit spins the spinner once, what is
the probability that the arrow will land on a region numbered less than or equal to 2?
(IMO-2012)

1 1 1 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 6 3

3. A bag contains 4 red, 3 pink and 8 white balls. One ball is drawn at random. Find the
probability that the ball drawn is not red. (IMO-2012)
1 8 11 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 11 15 11
Corp. / Reg. Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.)-324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : contact@resonance.ac.in
CLASS - VIII -351
Toll Free : 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PLC024029
PROBABILITY

4. Numbers 1 to 10 are each written on ten separate slips (one number on each slip), kept in
a box and mixed well. One slip is randomly chosen from the box. What is the probability of
the number chosen being less than 6? [NSTSE - 2013]
1 1 2 4
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 2 3 3

5. A bag contain a number of marbles of which 80 are red, 24 are white and the rest are blue.
1
If the probability of randomly selecting blue marble from this bag is , how many blue
5
marbles are there is the bag ? [NSTSE - 2009]
(A) 25 (B) 26 (C) 27 (D) 28

6. In a world cup final match against Srilanka, for six times Sachin Tendulkar hits a six out of
30 balls he plays. What is the probability that in a given throw, the ball does not hit a six ?
[NSTSE - 2012]
1 5 4 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 4 5 4

7. The value of  upto 35 decimal places is given

3·14159265358979323846264338327950288.
Find the probability of occuring 8 in it.
1 1 5 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 5 36 7

8. A number is chosen at random from 1 to 120. The probability of the number chosen being
a mutliple of 3 and 15 both is [IMO - 2014]
1 1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
15 16 17 19

Direction - (Q. 9 to Q. 11)

A dice is rolled once. What is the probability that

9. The number will be a factor of 36. [IMO - 2014]

5 1 2
(A) (B) (C) (D) 1
6 6 3

10. The number will be odd

1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these
4 2 3

11. The number will be less than 1

1 2
(A) (B) (C) 0 (D) None of these
6 3

12. A coin is tossed 12 times and outcomes are recorded as follows :

Head, Tail, Tail, Head, Head, Tail, Head, Tail, Tail, Tail, Head, Tail
The chance of occurrence of a Tail is . [IOM - 2019]
5 1 7 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
12 2 12 3

EXERCISE 01
SECTION -A (FIXED RESPONSE TYPE)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. D B C B C C A D D B
FILL IN THE BLANKS
1 1 1 1
1. 2. 3. 4.
4 2 2 6
1
5. 1 6. 7. 1
2
TRUE / FALSE
1. True 2. True 3. False 4. False
5. False
MATCH THE COLUMN
1. (A) – q, (B) – r, (C) – s, (D) – t, (E) –p 2. (A) – r, (B) – s, (C) – q, (D) – p
SECTION -B (FREE RESPONSE TYPE)
SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE
1
1. (i) 1 (ii) (iii) 0 (iv) 1
7
1 1 2 1
2. 3. (i) (ii) (iii)
2 2 3 2
SHORT ANSWER TYPE
5 7 1 1 1 2 12
4. (i) (ii) (iii) 5. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
18 9 2 26 13 13 13
1 1 1 3 1
6. 7. 8. (i) (ii) (iii)
6 5 4 4 4
LONG ANSWER TYPE
4 1
9. 12 times 10. 11. 24,
11 3

EXERCISE 02
SECTION -A (COMPETITIVE EXAMINATION QUESTION)
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Ans. B D D C B B D A D C A B B

EXERCISE 03
PREVIOUS YEAR EXAMINATION QUESTIONS
Ques. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans. A B C B B C C A A B C C

(IIT JEE IITJEE Maths Foundation) BMA Brain Mapping Academy Hyderabad Teachers - BMA Math Class 9 Part 2 from Permutation Combination Standard IX IIT JEE Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Mathematics f.pdf
83% (6)
(IIT JEE IITJEE Maths Foundation) BMA Brain Mapping Academy Hyderabad Teachers - BMA Math Class 9 Part 2 from Permutation Combination Standard IX IIT JEE Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Mathematics f.pdf
213 pages
Target NTSE Class 10 Solved Papers and Mock Tests
100% (1)
Target NTSE Class 10 Solved Papers and Mock Tests
675 pages
Basic Algebra
100% (1)
Basic Algebra
904 pages
Ijso Maths PDF
100% (1)
Ijso Maths PDF
376 pages
Proofs Without Words 2 - More Exercises in Visual Thinking (Roger B. Nelson) (Z-Lib - Org) (1) - Text
No ratings yet
Proofs Without Words 2 - More Exercises in Visual Thinking (Roger B. Nelson) (Z-Lib - Org) (1) - Text
143 pages
FIITJEE Paper For 9th Class
50% (2)
FIITJEE Paper For 9th Class
21 pages
Resonance Kota Class 9 Mathematics Book
86% (7)
Resonance Kota Class 9 Mathematics Book
320 pages
BMA Math Class 9 Part 1 Upto Plane Geometry Standard IX IIT JEE Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Mathematics From Brain Mapping Academy Hyderabad
No ratings yet
BMA Math Class 9 Part 1 Upto Plane Geometry Standard IX IIT JEE Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Mathematics From Brain Mapping Academy Hyderabad
286 pages
D. R. Kaprekar - Wikipedia
100% (1)
D. R. Kaprekar - Wikipedia
3 pages
Pdfcoffee.com Iit Jee Iitjee Maths Foundation Bma Brain Mapping Academy Hyderabad Teachers Bma Math Class 9 Part 2 From Permutation Combination Standard Ix Iit Jee Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Mathematics Fpdf PDF Free
100% (1)
Pdfcoffee.com Iit Jee Iitjee Maths Foundation Bma Brain Mapping Academy Hyderabad Teachers Bma Math Class 9 Part 2 From Permutation Combination Standard Ix Iit Jee Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Mathematics Fpdf PDF Free
213 pages
Class VII FOUNDATION & OLYMPIAD
85% (26)
Class VII FOUNDATION & OLYMPIAD
114 pages
201973174723
No ratings yet
201973174723
190 pages
(KVPY NSEJS Foundation) K K Anand Chennai - Biology Booklet 2 For 8 TH Foundation Class 8 Standard 8 KVP 0 PDF
100% (2)
(KVPY NSEJS Foundation) K K Anand Chennai - Biology Booklet 2 For 8 TH Foundation Class 8 Standard 8 KVP 0 PDF
96 pages
Physics DPP X
No ratings yet
Physics DPP X
15 pages
Eulers Sine Product Formula
No ratings yet
Eulers Sine Product Formula
12 pages
Very Detailed Analysis of Nsejs
0% (1)
Very Detailed Analysis of Nsejs
54 pages
Class 9th Maths
50% (2)
Class 9th Maths
324 pages
Chapter 02 Multiple Choice Questions With Answers (3 Files Merged)
67% (3)
Chapter 02 Multiple Choice Questions With Answers (3 Files Merged)
6 pages
(IIT JEE KVPY NSEJS Foundation Mathematics) K K Anand Chennai - Class 9 Part B For Standard 9-SmartEdu (2018)
100% (1)
(IIT JEE KVPY NSEJS Foundation Mathematics) K K Anand Chennai - Class 9 Part B For Standard 9-SmartEdu (2018)
122 pages
Physical Che Arihant
100% (4)
Physical Che Arihant
374 pages
(Lakshmi) BMA Physics Class 9 Standard IX IIT JEE PDF
100% (1)
(Lakshmi) BMA Physics Class 9 Standard IX IIT JEE PDF
283 pages
Iit Foundation: Class VIII
100% (1)
Iit Foundation: Class VIII
4 pages
Disha NTSE Stage 1 QB 3000+ Questions 5th Edition
No ratings yet
Disha NTSE Stage 1 QB 3000+ Questions 5th Edition
437 pages
Maths Year 11 Low-Res PDF
100% (1)
Maths Year 11 Low-Res PDF
204 pages
Class VI FOUNDATION & OLYMPIAD
95% (22)
Class VI FOUNDATION & OLYMPIAD
126 pages
Math8 q1 Mod16 Solving Systems of Linear Equations in Two Variables 08092020
No ratings yet
Math8 q1 Mod16 Solving Systems of Linear Equations in Two Variables 08092020
37 pages
Class-VIII-cube and Cube Roots
No ratings yet
Class-VIII-cube and Cube Roots
36 pages
8 - Class INTSO Work Sheet - 1 - Exponents and Powers
0% (1)
8 - Class INTSO Work Sheet - 1 - Exponents and Powers
2 pages
Class 10 Foundation NTSE
No ratings yet
Class 10 Foundation NTSE
290 pages
Solution of Class 9 Chemistry Standard IX IIT JEE Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Brain Mapping Academy Hyderabad Useful For CBSE ICSE All Boards PDF
100% (2)
Solution of Class 9 Chemistry Standard IX IIT JEE Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Brain Mapping Academy Hyderabad Useful For CBSE ICSE All Boards PDF
80 pages
X Study Material Final Modified
100% (1)
X Study Material Final Modified
317 pages
IGCSE Mathematics Extended Practice Book
55% (11)
IGCSE Mathematics Extended Practice Book
13 pages
Class VI I.I.T. Foundation, N.T.S.E.& Mathematics Olympiad Curriculum & Chapter Notes
No ratings yet
Class VI I.I.T. Foundation, N.T.S.E.& Mathematics Olympiad Curriculum & Chapter Notes
65 pages
KVPY 11 Years Solved Papers 2019-2009 Stream SB SX Arihant With 5 Practice Papers (Arihant Experts Teachers)
No ratings yet
KVPY 11 Years Solved Papers 2019-2009 Stream SB SX Arihant With 5 Practice Papers (Arihant Experts Teachers)
398 pages
2 NTS Quantitative Ability
No ratings yet
2 NTS Quantitative Ability
34 pages
Maths 10 Exam 2023 QN Bank
No ratings yet
Maths 10 Exam 2023 QN Bank
294 pages
NCERT Science 8
No ratings yet
NCERT Science 8
268 pages
6th Chemistry Book - Vol-2
100% (1)
6th Chemistry Book - Vol-2
118 pages
NTSE Stage 2 Resonance Sat and Mat
100% (3)
NTSE Stage 2 Resonance Sat and Mat
42 pages
Goyal Foundation Course Physics IIT
38% (8)
Goyal Foundation Course Physics IIT
28 pages
Engineering Mathematics-I (1st Sem) - 2nd Midterm
No ratings yet
Engineering Mathematics-I (1st Sem) - 2nd Midterm
1 page
BMA Physics Class 9 Standard IX IIT JEE Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Physics With Answers Brain Mapping Academy Hyderabad CBSE ICSE Lakshmi PDF
No ratings yet
BMA Physics Class 9 Standard IX IIT JEE Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Physics With Answers Brain Mapping Academy Hyderabad CBSE ICSE Lakshmi PDF
283 pages
Mathematics Standard: Reduced Syllabus
100% (2)
Mathematics Standard: Reduced Syllabus
5 pages
Maths GR 11 TB
No ratings yet
Maths GR 11 TB
237 pages
Mathe Paper 2021
100% (1)
Mathe Paper 2021
4 pages
(IIT JEE Foundation) K K Anand Chennai - Booklet 2 of 8 TH Foundation Chemistry Standard 8 IIT JEE Foun 0
100% (1)
(IIT JEE Foundation) K K Anand Chennai - Booklet 2 of 8 TH Foundation Chemistry Standard 8 IIT JEE Foun 0
78 pages
Square Numbers Worksheet
No ratings yet
Square Numbers Worksheet
2 pages
NTSE 5 Practice Sets For SAT MAT LCT For NTSE Stage 1 Disha PDF
100% (1)
NTSE 5 Practice Sets For SAT MAT LCT For NTSE Stage 1 Disha PDF
194 pages
Mathematic 113 Full Book PDF
100% (1)
Mathematic 113 Full Book PDF
391 pages
DPP Booklet (All Subject) PDF
No ratings yet
DPP Booklet (All Subject) PDF
65 pages
Goyals Physics Class 8 Iit Foundation
100% (3)
Goyals Physics Class 8 Iit Foundation
246 pages
CBSE-X Chapterwise (Previous Years) Qs - Maths - SOL
No ratings yet
CBSE-X Chapterwise (Previous Years) Qs - Maths - SOL
61 pages
SAS Maths Class 8
No ratings yet
SAS Maths Class 8
115 pages
CHSL Tier 1 Papers Quantitative Aptitude 02 July 2019 Morning Shift PDF
No ratings yet
CHSL Tier 1 Papers Quantitative Aptitude 02 July 2019 Morning Shift PDF
13 pages
KK Anand Maths Class 8 Book1t PDF Free
No ratings yet
KK Anand Maths Class 8 Book1t PDF Free
286 pages
May 2019 Paper 1
No ratings yet
May 2019 Paper 1
10 pages
Resonance Kota Class 7 Mathematics Book
100% (2)
Resonance Kota Class 7 Mathematics Book
368 pages
Documents - Math - k-6 - Math Content - GCF and LCM - Factors - Multiples
No ratings yet
Documents - Math - k-6 - Math Content - GCF and LCM - Factors - Multiples
24 pages
Class 10 Maths
100% (3)
Class 10 Maths
166 pages
Math 2011-Introduction To Multivariable Calculus (Edited by Dr. Hon-Ming HO) Practice Exercises 10: Gradient Vectors and Directional Derivatives
No ratings yet
Math 2011-Introduction To Multivariable Calculus (Edited by Dr. Hon-Ming HO) Practice Exercises 10: Gradient Vectors and Directional Derivatives
5 pages
Biology Booklet 1 For 8 TH Foundation Standard 8 Class 8 KVPY NSEJS Foundation (PDFDrive)
No ratings yet
Biology Booklet 1 For 8 TH Foundation Standard 8 Class 8 KVPY NSEJS Foundation (PDFDrive)
158 pages
Supplement Class IX
No ratings yet
Supplement Class IX
147 pages
Fiitjee NTSE Mamthematics Module
100% (4)
Fiitjee NTSE Mamthematics Module
212 pages
Class 10 Mathematics Betoppers Iit Foundation Series 2022nbsped Compress
100% (2)
Class 10 Mathematics Betoppers Iit Foundation Series 2022nbsped Compress
508 pages
Toaz - Info Bma Physics Class 9 Standard Ix Iit Jee Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Physics PR
No ratings yet
Toaz - Info Bma Physics Class 9 Standard Ix Iit Jee Foundation and Olympiad Explorer Physics PR
283 pages
Math205 Advanced Calculus: Topic Outline
No ratings yet
Math205 Advanced Calculus: Topic Outline
40 pages
Class - 8 - Success Plan-Plus
No ratings yet
Class - 8 - Success Plan-Plus
13 pages
1-GrandMaster Referral Notes Global MMWC 2024
No ratings yet
1-GrandMaster Referral Notes Global MMWC 2024
53 pages
Maths PW Competency Based Question Book
100% (2)
Maths PW Competency Based Question Book
90 pages
Grade 9 Multiple 3rd Grading
No ratings yet
Grade 9 Multiple 3rd Grading
4 pages
DRONACHARYA Diagnostic & Scholarship Exam
No ratings yet
DRONACHARYA Diagnostic & Scholarship Exam
6 pages
ARML2015
No ratings yet
ARML2015
40 pages
Mean, Median, and Mode: Lesson 7-1
No ratings yet
Mean, Median, and Mode: Lesson 7-1
8 pages
Uimo Success 06 A4
No ratings yet
Uimo Success 06 A4
13 pages
Class 10 Science Chapterwise Topicwise Notes CHAPTER-1 Chemical Reactions and Equations
100% (1)
Class 10 Science Chapterwise Topicwise Notes CHAPTER-1 Chemical Reactions and Equations
116 pages
Q4 Quarter Exam
No ratings yet
Q4 Quarter Exam
4 pages
Total Differential, Rates of Change and Small Changes
No ratings yet
Total Differential, Rates of Change and Small Changes
6 pages
Integral Calculus - Jee Main Important Questions - F
No ratings yet
Integral Calculus - Jee Main Important Questions - F
34 pages
Lesson 3
No ratings yet
Lesson 3
31 pages
Physics Study Material For Class Xi PDF
100% (1)
Physics Study Material For Class Xi PDF
208 pages
1920 PostMock02 Paper02
No ratings yet
1920 PostMock02 Paper02
15 pages
2015 BoS Trials Mathematics Extension 1 Solutions
No ratings yet
2015 BoS Trials Mathematics Extension 1 Solutions
22 pages
Real Number Sol MCQs
No ratings yet
Real Number Sol MCQs
10 pages
Modules 1, 2, & 3
No ratings yet
Modules 1, 2, & 3
35 pages
7th Mathematics DLP Study Package Final
No ratings yet
7th Mathematics DLP Study Package Final
173 pages
Cbse & Ntse: Mathematics
100% (3)
Cbse & Ntse: Mathematics
397 pages
Disha Rare Kota Physics DPP
100% (2)
Disha Rare Kota Physics DPP
404 pages
Hsslive - Xi - maths-QB - 03 TRIGONOMETRY
No ratings yet
Hsslive - Xi - maths-QB - 03 TRIGONOMETRY
5 pages
Class 10th Daywise Plan and Important Questions
No ratings yet
Class 10th Daywise Plan and Important Questions
11 pages
A Complete Guide to M.C.Q,Science (C.B.S.E & N.C.E.R.T),Class 9: CBSE MCQ Series, #2
From Everand
A Complete Guide to M.C.Q,Science (C.B.S.E & N.C.E.R.T),Class 9: CBSE MCQ Series, #2
Er. Sajal Kumar Ghosh
3.5/5 (2)

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.